diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55444-0.txt | 8478 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55444-0.zip | bin | 180625 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55444-h.zip | bin | 230346 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55444-h/55444-h.htm | 10545 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55444-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 46553 -> 0 bytes |
8 files changed, 17 insertions, 19023 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..331c286 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #55444 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/55444) diff --git a/old/55444-0.txt b/old/55444-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 90e6258..0000000 --- a/old/55444-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8478 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, No. 10, by -The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, No. 10 - -Author: The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -Editor: Theodore L. Flood - -Release Date: August 27, 2017 [EBook #55444] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1885 *** - - - - -Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - - - THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - - _A MONTHLY MAGAZINE DEVOTED TO THE PROMOTION OF TRUE CULTURE. - ORGAN OF THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE._ - - VOL. V. JULY, 1885. No. 10. - - - - -OFFICERS OF THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE. - - -_President_, Lewis Miller, Akron, Ohio. _Chancellor_, J. H. Vincent, -D.D., New Haven, Conn. _Counselors_, The Rev. Lyman Abbott, D.D.; -the Rev. J. M. Gibson, D.D.; Bishop H. W. Warren, D.D.; Prof. W. C. -Wilkinson, D.D.; Edward Everett Hale. _Office Secretary_, Miss Kate -F. Kimball, Plainfield, N. J. _General Secretary_, Albert M. Martin, -Pittsburgh, Pa. - - - - -Contents - -Transcriber’s Note: This table of contents of this periodical was created -for the HTML version to aid the reader. - - Some Damascene Pictures 559 - The Boston Museum of Fine Arts - Second Paper 562 - Sanitary Conditions of Summer Resorts 564 - Wayside Homes 567 - Sunday Readings - [_July 5_] 570 - [_July 12_] 570 - [_July 19_] 570 - [_July 26_] 571 - “We Salute Thee, and Live” 571 - A Group of Mummies 572 - A Trip to Mt. Shasta 573 - Reassurement 576 - Will It Pay? 577 - Geography of the Heavens for July 578 - How Air Has Been Liquefied 579 - American Decorative Art 582 - Some Modern Literary Men of Germany 585 - Historic Niagara 586 - Two Fashionable Poisons 589 - Our C. L. S. C. Column 591 - Glimpses of the Chautauqua Program 592 - Local Circles 593 - The C. L. S. C. Classes 600 - The Summer Assemblies 603 - Editor’s Outlook 606 - Editor’s Note-Book 609 - Talk About Books 611 - Chautauqua in Japan 612 - Program of Popular Exercises 613 - Special Notes 616 - - - - -SOME DAMASCENE PICTURES. - -BY BISHOP JOHN F. HURST, D.D. - - -One is forcibly struck with the Damascene bazars. They thread the old -city in all directions. Some of them are new, and some very old. The most -of them are covered ways, where either side is divided into small booths, -or shops. The bazar has its specialty—the brass bazar, the silversmith -bazar, the goldsmith bazar, the shoe bazar, the silk bazar, and all the -rest. Then there is another order of division, such as the Greek bazar -and the Frank bazar. There is sometimes, however, a breaking up of all -orders, for goods of very varied character you can sometimes get in the -same bazar. The oldest of these quaint marts date back many centuries, -and are mere holes, or rickety houses, where buying and selling have -been going on for many a generation. The venders love these old places. -I imagine their fathers, and even remote ancestors sat in the same spot, -and did business in much the same way, and chaffed about the prices in -quite as much hyperbole, four or five centuries ago, as their children -do to-day, when a Frank drops into the busy way, and halts, and asks a -question concerning the beautiful wares. - -The love is for the old. No Damascene wants to change to the new. The -smooth floor and familiar shelves of his booth he could not give up to -another for many a bright _bishlik_. - -Not long since the Pasha of Damascus, who had been long making vain -efforts to get the shop-keepers of a stretch of the bazar in the “street -that is called straight,” to pull down their booths and put up new ones, -had to give up the task as hopeless. Finally he ordered that, at a given -signal, one night, the bazar should be set fire to in a number of places. -His officers did their duty well. They knew what they were about. The -result was that long reaches of this one bazar were burned to the ground. -The wares went up in smoke with the tinder which enclosed them. - -“What could the people do?” I asked my informant. - -“Do? Why, nothing at all.” - -“Were they insured? Did they get any compensation back again for the -destruction of their property?” - -“Not in the least. The Pasha had the power. No questions were asked. The -consequence is, that, as you see, new bazars are building in various -places. Soon they will be occupied by gay, oriental wares, and things -will go on quite the same as before. Only there will be more light and -fresher air.” - -Among the specialties sold in the Damascene bazars we may mention silk -goods, first of all. They are combined with cotton, and woven into -various patterns for dress and furniture. They defy all competition the -world over. The patterns are exquisite. No wonder this artistic weaving -has given the city’s name, or damask, to such fabrics for all time. -Curtains and all manner of stuffs are woven, and are here displayed in -such combinations as to bewilder any but Orientals. I saw, during my -stay, the places where these fine silks are woven. There are no great -shops, no few places where they come from. They are produced in small -houses, in obscure and ill-odorous streets, and by thousands of hands, -young and old. It is the toil of the poor, the young, and the infirm, in -sunless cellars and obscure corners which brings out these sunny silks -and beautiful designs. Queens send here from afar to buy them. There, in -the hotel, I saw the Crown Prince of Austria and his fair-haired Belgian -bride. Before twenty-four hours will have passed they will be buying -these silks of Damascus, and in less than six months Stephanie will be -wearing them at a court dinner. When she becomes Empress she will be -having more of them, and her favorite rooms will likely be hung with the -rich stuffs sent direct from these busy bazars, but coming first from -dingy homes and little rickety looms. - -Yes, one learns an easy lesson here, in these oriental countries, of -the contrast between the hand that weaves and the body that wears the -stuffs that adorn the world’s gayest places. In Agra, behind the barred -gate, I saw the chained prisoners of the jail weaving most patiently one -rich India carpet for the ex-Empress Eugenie, and another, of different -figure, but even more rich, for Queen Victoria. It takes about six months -for the workers to finish their work. As they weave, one hears the clank -of the chains about their feet. But, in the later years, when those great -carpets will still delight the eye, few will ever think of the places -where the fine wool from Cashmere was woven into such pleasing shapes. - - -DAMASCENE TRADITIONS. - -There is nothing in the way of safe tradition in Damascus. They will show -you—yes, what will they not show you? I let them tell me everything, -and have given no interdict to our dragoman. He is to tell me all the -wildest traditions he pleases, and take me to every sacred spot, and I -am to listen. No wonder he has brought me to the house of Ananias, the -good friend of the blind Saul, before he became the far-seeing apostle to -the Gentiles. We had to leave our carriage and go through several narrow -and dirty streets, and got thoroughly wearied by the walk, and then had -to wait for a key, and be surrounded by begging children, and be pounded -between donkeys with heavily-burdened panniers, and be led down a damp -stairway into the darkness, to find the way to the house of Ananias. - -There is no harm in asking questions. So, to the question as to how they -know this is where he lived, the answer came: - -“Until lately, nobody knew where Ananias lived. But some years ago a -learned man from the west came here and told us this was the place, and -so it must be true.” - -Now, I take this comfort: Ananias lived somewhere in Damascus, and there -is as much probability that he lived here as anywhere else. That is -enough for me. Why should we disturb things of such little moment? - -But there is not much room for doubting the neighborhood of the place -where Paul entered the city. It was the gate nearest the southern side -of the city. The old Roman road northward terminated at the gate. It is -probable that no change has taken place in the road, and that it follows -just the general line, and even the curves, that it did in the remote -period. On this southern side of Damascus there has been but little -change in the wall from Paul’s day to ours. You can see at a glance that -all the lower part of the wall is of Roman work. The blocks are large, -clear cut, and brought into closest brotherhood without a grain of -mortar. The joining is still perfect. It was the wall of Paul’s time, and -only the upper part has been torn down and rebuilt. It is as easy to see -the difference between Roman and Turkish workmanship as to trace the line -between a Moslem mosque and the Theseum in Athens. - -They will show you, in Damascus, the very place where Paul was let down -from the wall in a basket. Let them enjoy their definite locality! But -I did get, very near the alleged spot, an idea which I had never had -before—that there was a mode of building which favored the letting down -of any one from the top of the wall. One can see, in several places on -this same southern side of Damascus, that people live in houses adjusted -on the top of the wall itself. I saw one of these diminutive houses which -projected over the wall so far that one might well wonder why it did not -fall down to the earth. What more natural thing than that Paul was let -down from just such a place. There was not a gate in the wall near by, -and nothing was more natural and easy than to aid his escape in this way. - -I lingered some time about the Roman gateway. It is an enchanting spot. -The great blocks of stone, the pillars, the archway, the smooth stones, -over which you walk to reach it, the general curve of the wall, tell -of the Roman times, and bring you face to face with the little church -in Damascus which was soon to set the whole eastern and western world -ablaze by its leading of Paul to the light. Along all the ways, out by -this Roman gate, the people were twisting silk, and getting it ready -for the loom. It was of hard fiber, yellow, rich, and glistening in the -afternoon shimmer of the sun, as it came back from the pink sides of -the Anti-Libanus mountains. There was no available spot which was not -utilized by long stretches of the silk cord. It was drawn off in all -directions, and we had to walk carefully to keep from stumbling against -the twister’s twist. - - -THE CAMELS. - -Not very far from the Roman gate was the great camel space. It was the -point of departure for caravans to Palmyra, Mecca, and the whole eastern -world. Here were hundreds of camels. They seemed to be waiting for the -finishing burdens. Some were already loaded, and were pausing for the -rest. I know not how long it requires for the completing of a caravan. -But it seems that when some camels are loaded they are taken to the -outside space, and are kept watch over until all of the others are ready. -It must be no small or brief matter to get a caravan ready. Then, when -the last camel is laden, and he takes his place in the caravan, and the -signal is given to move on, what a commotion it makes! Friends come down -to see their friends off. It is the moving off of many people, and of -vast treasures of merchandise. Merchants and travelers, and many others -who wish to go to the distant places across the desert, for any purpose -whatever, go with the caravan. It is the safest way, for the train is -guarded, and has, I imagine, the protection of the government. There is -something singularly poetical, as well as practical, in the moving of the -caravan. It is a thing which does not occur every day. Much commercial -gain depends upon its safe conduct and arrival. The camels must be of -just the right kind to endure the long journey and the great fatigue. -The gait is slow and dull. There is the dreariest monotony. Yet this is -the way these people have been traveling and doing business, and keeping -up the connections for all these long ages. As things now seem, it would -appear to be ages still before the railway, or even the wagon, will take -the place of the much-enduring camel, the ship of the desert. - - -BUCKLE’S GRAVE. - -Close beside the space allotted for the camels which make the long -caravans for Damascus, I came across the little English cemetery. It is -a quiet spot, surrounded by a high wall. The gate was locked, and there -was no way of getting within it. I could not tell where the key was to be -found; wherever it was, it was a long distance off, in the heart of the -city. So, by the aid of our dragoman, I succeeded in climbing to the top -of the wall, and seeing the one grave in which I was most interested—that -of Henry Thomas Buckle, the author of the “History of Civilization.” -Buckle had wearied himself out with literary work. His methods were not -the most wise nor expeditious. He was an indefatigable gleaner of facts, -and a patient gatherer of notes from all quarters, and he piled up his -note-books in great heterogeneous masses. He seems to have had but little -help, and not to have husbanded his strength. So, like many men who -begin to rest when it is all too late, he went off on distant travel. He -reached Damascus. His mind must have kindled afresh as he saw this city -of weavers and strange oriental combinations, and the thought of the long -and hoary history of the place. But he was too weary to think longer. He -lay down to die, and here he rests, under the shadow of the thick and -high walls of a little graveyard, where only seldom an Anglo-Saxon comes -to visit the sacred place. The accumulation of years is beginning to tell -upon the inscription. But it is still very legible, and gives the record -of his brief and toiling life. - -There is something singularly touching in this little graveyard. There -are only a few graves, yet among them, besides Buckle’s, are several -English noblemen and titled ladies. The inscriptions repeat the story of -love and tears, as everywhere else. None who come here expect to die. -But the difficulties of removal are great. There are great and long -settled superstitions against the transportation of the dead in all these -eastern countries. The best way is to let our friends lie where they -fall, and to care for the perpetual beauty of their resting place. The -little graveyards of the Anglo-Saxons in all the eastern cemeteries make -a strange appeal to the sympathies. I have seen many of them, and always -they teach a new lesson of the suddenness of death, of the pilgrimage -which we call life, and of the burning love of those who remain behind, -and who write their words of tenderest affection upon stone in far-off -lands. - - -THE GREAT MOSQUE. - -There are few mosques which have a more interesting history than the -great one of Damascus. Of all those in existence, save only that of -Mecca, the greatest interest probably clusters about this one. It is not -as splendid as that of St. Sophia, in Constantinople, and yet it has -some elements of touching story that not even that one possesses. It -stands upon the foundation of a Greek temple. In the early Christian ages -it required only an imperial order to convert a temple into a church. -So, when the Emperor Arcadius, toward the close of the fourth century, -wished to convert this temple into a church, all he needed to do was -to declare his will, and hurl out the pagan priesthood, and make a few -minor changes, and the deed was done. It became a splendid church, whose -fame went out into all lands. Thus it remained until the rise of the -Mohammedan faith. When Damascus was conquered, so arduous was the strife -that the leader of the Christians met the leader of the Moslems near the -spot where the church stood, and, by agreement, part of the church was -given up to the Mohammedans, and part still reserved by the Christians. -But Christian and Moslem had the same doorway. This state of things -could not last a great while. The Caliph Omar I. asked the Christians -to sell their right to a part of the church. They refused, and then he -took it from them. But he was fair enough to given them perpetual right -to other churches in the city and its environs. He then set to work to -beautify and make still more splendid this ancient building. He is said -to have brought from Constantinople 1,200 skilled artists, and to have -searched over all Syria for the most splendid pillars and architectural -adornments, with which to beautify and enlarge the building. Precious -stones were used for mosaic, vines of solid gold were made to run over -the archways, the wooden ceiling was overlaid with a plating of gold, and -from its glittering height there hung six hundred gold lamps. - -The wars and time have told strangely upon this rich, historical -building. The lamps are gone, no doubt to serve the purposes of warfare. -The plating on the ceiling has disappeared, probably for the same reason. -Much of the splendor has departed. But there are still the magnificent -columns, with mutilated capitals and defaced bases, which once belonged -to the Greek pagans of Syria, and in their long life, have witnessed the -worship of Baal, Jupiter, Mohammed, and the one true Savior. - -The present reminders of the time when this vast building of four hundred -and twenty-nine feet in length and one hundred and twenty-five feet wide, -was new, are numerous and very prominent. Everywhere, at every step you -take, you see the old peering out boldly through the new and the late. -Here is a patch of rich and deep-stoned mosaic, which has escaped a -thousand destructive forces, and still stands as a witness to the time of -remote Christianity, when Mohammed was not yet born. The stained windows, -with glass so somber and subdued that one can hardly see even this -blazing Syrian sun’s rays through it, are few in number, but they must -have been made by Christian hands, in the far gone and fading Byzantine -times. Even the Roman peers through the Christian, and one sees strong -evidences of the times when the star had not yet stood over the manger -at Bethlehem, and when the Greek paganism ruled from the Mediterranean -to the borders of India. Here is an archway with only one stone missing, -which is as perfect a bit of Greek architecture as Athens can furnish -to-day. - -One of the most singular features of this building is this—the respect -which the Mohammedan shows here for Christianity. I have seen nothing -equal to it elsewhere. There is here, belonging to the Greek mosque, the -Madinet ’Isa, or “Minaret of Jesus,” and the Mohammedans have a belief -that when the Christ comes he will appear on this minaret. Bloody as -has been the history of Damascus, and violent as has often been the -treatment of the Christians by the natives, the Mohammedans have been -compelled to respect the Christians, and to remember the relation of this -wonderful city to early Christianity. - -Let me give another illustration of how the old still looks through the -new. To the dragoman I said, when he seemed to have shown us everything: - -“Where is that Christian inscription?” - -“Oh,” he replied, “nobody goes there much now. It is dangerous to get to -it. You have to leap across a bazar, from one house-top to another. It is -very dangerous.” - -There were two ladies in our little party, and they were not at all -frightened by the outlook. It was simply a dragoman’s excuse to save -himself a little trouble. We all agreed that Franz must show us the -inscription. We went out of the mosque, down the street, then into the -silver bazar, then up a rickety stairway, and finally out over the flat -roofs of various buildings back to the outer wall of the mosque. We were -at the limit, and either had to leap over a deep span, the width of a -narrow street, or put a wide board across it. A couple of piasters soon -provided the board from a man who was just waiting to serve us, and in -one minute more we were reading, along the architrave of one side of the -old mosque, these words from David, in early Greek: - - “Thy kingdom [O, Christ] is an everlasting kingdom, and thy - dominion endureth throughout all generations.” - -This inscription has stood here through all the years since they were -put there first by the Christians of the fourth century, after they had -changed the temple into the church. The letters are as clear as the sun -in the heavens. - -It is, perhaps, the only illustration where Mohammedanism has permitted -a Christian inscription to stand. It is not likely to be removed in the -future, but will come into use when all the mosques are again made into -Christian temples. - -It is not an easy climb to the top of one of these lofty minarets. But -we resolved to do it. The picture never fades from the mind. Toward -the west we could see, as though within arm’s length, Ubel Sheikh, or -Mount Hermon, with its great folds of snow, that make his perpetual -turban of spotless white. Out from the sides of the Anti-Libanus burst -the Abana and Pharpar, which go singing down to the desert, and produce -the damascenes of all the countries. Yonder is the Christian quarter, -there the Jewish, and in another direction the Mohammedan. Far off to -the northeast lies Palmyra. But we can not see it. It is a four days’ -camel journey distant. The illimitable desert stretches east and south -and north, and these two “better rivers” of Damascus lose themselves -in those two little lakes, whose silver surface just glistens a little -in this perfect sun. Fruit trees are everywhere in bloom. The almond, -the plum—the damson takes its name from Damascus—and the apricot, are -everywhere in full blaze, and make the city one vast nosegay. The murmur -of fountains rises from a thousand courts, while the streets are alive -with the streams which have been vexed and teased away by many a device -from these living rivers. You get weary with the view. - -We now descend. How shall we see the way down the dingy steps? By the -same lamp which had guided us up. Yes, it is a veritable coal-oil -lantern. Think of it—the mixing up of the centuries! My Anglo-Saxon -feet have been guided to the topmost point of one of the world’s oldest -buildings here in grand and hoary Damascus, by the aid of a kerosene -lantern, every drop of whose petroleum has come from Oil City or its -neighborhood. - -DAMASCUS, March 8, 1885. - - * * * * * - -I do not pretend that books are everything.… Some day I may say some very -hard things about people who keep their books so close before their eyes -that they can not see God’s world, nor their fellow men and women. But -books rightly used are society.—_E. E. Hale, in “How to Do It.”_ - - - - -THE BOSTON MUSEUM OF FINE ARTS. - -BY CLARENCE COOK. - - -SECOND PAPER. - -Before proceeding to describe the contents of the second floor of the -Museum, I must say a few words about the School of Drawing and Painting -which, for the present, has its home in the building. - -Although it is generally thought by those who hear of this school, and -always in connection with the Museum, that it is a department of the -institution, yet in fact it is only partially under the control of the -trustees. - -It will be remembered that the Museum was not made all at once, and out -of whole cloth, so to speak, but was formed by bringing together certain -collections already existing—the Athenæum casts and pictures, and the -Gray collection of engravings, for instance, and by offering hospitality -to certain projects connected with the study of the arts, which were in -the air, but which could not take shape without some such help as an -institution could give. - -As my readers know, the Museum became a fact in 1876, but two years -earlier, in 1874, there had been earnest talk about a school of drawing -and painting, and though nothing was actually done, yet the ground was -prepared by much discussion for establishing such a school on right -principles of theory and practice when the time should come for doing -something. The Museum once established, the trustees conferred with those -of their fellow-citizens who had been urging the foundation of a school; -the trustees offered rooms in the new building, the others raised the -necessary funds to equip the school, and on Tuesday, January 2, 1877, the -school was opened. - -The school is under the control of a permanent committee, consisting -of four painters, three architects, the three principal officers of -the Museum, and two other gentlemen. The rooms occupied by the school -are in the basement of the building; they are well lighted, warmed, -and ventilated, and are furnished with all the necessary means and -appliances for instruction, while the pupils have, in addition to the -excellent teaching provided for them in the school itself, the advantage -of free access to the permanent collections of the Museum, as well as -to the special exhibitions that, from time to time, take place in the -building. The school holds a high rank among similar institutions in the -country; it is under the able and high minded management of Mr. Frederic -Crowninshield, and it is sincerely to be hoped that before long it may -find itself in quarters more ample, and better suited to the dignity -of so important a factor in the culture of the community. At the same -time the hope may be expressed, that the school and the Museum may never -part company, but that their relations, on the contrary, may grow closer -and stronger, and that in time the school may become an active part of -the foundation, and be put under the complete control of the trustees. -There could not be a better place for students than an institution like -this, where daily seeing the finest forms of antique art, and constantly -increasing opportunities for acquaintance with good modern work, -illustrate and strengthen the lessons learned in the school itself. - -Immediately in front of the visitor as he enters the Museum rises the -ample staircase that leads to the upper rooms. The stairs mount in a -broad flight in the middle of the hall, to the first landing, where they -divide, and returning on themselves finish the ascent in two flights, one -at the right hand and the other at the left. On this first landing was -at one time placed a handsome original example of the carved settles -or benches of the Italian Renaissance, but this has now been replaced -by a cast of the reclining female figure called Cleopatra, but to which -the name of Ariadne is now more commonly given. The original marble is -in the Vatican. This cast is one of those purchased with the bequest of -the late Charles Sumner. On the walls of the staircase and of the upper -hall several pictures are hung, among them a few that have, at least for -Americans, a historic interest. Here are the “Belshazzar’s Feast” of -Washington Allston, a picture at one time much talked and written about, -and which played an important part in the artist’s life; the “St. Peter -delivered from Prison,” by the same painter; the “King Lear” of Benjamin -West, and the “Sortie from Gibraltar” of Jonathan Trumbull. Of course -these pictures are only placed here for a time, until the Museum building -shall be enlarged, for when all deductions have been made on the score of -artistic merit that sound criticism can demand, they will still remain as -monuments in our development, and as such deserve to be hung where they -can be better seen. - -Lack of room crowds into the hall of this second story a number of small -works, such as the collection of water-color copies from the pictures -of Dutch and Italian masters made for the late Mr. Douse, and by him -bequeathed to the Athenæum. They are of little value except as memoranda, -and might as well be removed from their frames, mounted, and consigned to -the custody of portfolios in the print-room. - -Of far more value are the drawings in chalk, in pencil, and in pastel -by the late J. F. Millet, belonging to Mr. Martin Brimmer; they were -among the first things loaned to the Museum, and they still remain among -the most valuable for delight and for instruction. At the same end of -the hall, and so placed that the light from the large window is most -advantageous to it, is placed a cast of the second of the Gates, made by -Lorenzo Ghiberti for the Baptistery in Florence. - -At the left hand, as we leave the stairs, is the entrance to the -extensive loan-collections which fill all but one of the rooms on this -side of the building. Although they are directly over the rooms on the -first floor, the space they occupy is not so subdivided; we have only -four rooms above the five below. The apartment we first enter is a large -one, fifty-five feet long by thirty-two wide, and was formerly given up -to the pictures which have since been transferred to the answering room -on the opposite side of the building. The room opening out of this, at -the western end, and of nearly the same size, is devoted to the same -object, but it would be impossible within our narrow limits to give an -adequate notion of their contents, particularly since, owing to want of -space, no scientific arrangement is possible, and the dazed spectator -moves about among objects of great value and interest, brought from every -clime and belonging to every age, but deprived of much of their value -because the key which order gives, is wanting. - -The department of textiles, embroideries and laces is full, and of great -value, and includes some Italian stuffs and embroideries purchased by the -Museum under the direction of the late Alessandro Castellani. There are -some fine Flemish tapestries which came from the Château de Neuilly, and -a few other pieces of value, but the Museum is richest in that part of -the loan collection which belongs to Japan. Dr. W. S. Bigelow has loaned -to the Museum his magnificent collection of objects from that country, -and it may be said of it that in the field of embroideries, lacquers, -swords, sword-mounts, bronzes, ivories, and ceramics, it exhausts the -subject. It is now greatly to be desired that some one should undertake -the collection of the works of the Japanese artists in painting—a field -of great importance, and strangely neglected. - -The Museum is rich in specimens of pottery and porcelain of Oriental -and European manufacture. In the latter field it is richer than the -Metropolitan Museum of New York, but the Avery collection of Chinese -and Japanese porcelain in the New York Museum is finer in quality and -more complete in its representative character than anything the Boston -Museum has. It is also far more attractively displayed. The collection -of Captain Brinckley, of Japan, of eight hundred and forty-two pieces of -Chinese and Japanese porcelain, loaned to the Boston Museum since 1884 -is, however, an acquisition of great value and artistic interest, and -although not particularly well displayed is instructively arranged and -classified. - -In the large western room there is a considerable number of small objects -of the period of the Italian Renaissance, some bronzes belonging to the -Athenæum, and some medals loaned by Mr. Charles C. Perkins; there is -also a considerable number of reproductions of Italian medals, made by -Elkington, of London, which serve a useful purpose in the absence of -original specimens. There are also, in this room, several good pieces of -Italian majolica; two specimens of the Della Robbia ware—one attributed -to Luca, the other to Andrea, both loaned by Mr. Perkins. The collection -is not rich in glass, either antique or modern. There are a few pieces -of old Venetian glass, but they are neither very interesting nor very -valuable. - -On the south side of this division of the Museum are two rooms, one of -which is occupied with a miscellaneous collection of objects in carved -wood and ivory, Italian marriage chests, cabinets, tables, etc., etc., -with some Japanese objects, chiefly swords, while the other is fitted -up with carved oak of the sixteenth century, the lining of a room in -some English house, with additions from other quarters. This is an -extremely interesting apartment, and, besides the wood-carving, contains -six portraits painted on panel, and forming a part of the original -decoration of the room; among them heads of Henry VIII., Edward VI., and -Queen Elizabeth. There are several pieces of antique furniture in this -room, and in the center a glass case containing some good illuminated -manuscripts. The mantelpiece, in the style of the period, is a modern -reproduction. - -Returning to the stair-case hall, and crossing to the eastern side of -the building, we find ourselves in the picture-galleries. The shape and -disposition of these rooms are similar to those in the opposite wing, -but owing to the greater height of the sculpture-gallery on the ground -floor at the eastern end, the space above it, divided into two rooms, is -several feet higher than the rest of the wing. The great height of the -upper story permits this division be to made without injury to the effect. - -The pictures belonging to the Museum are not without interest, although -their value is not very great, if reckoned in money. The early American -pictures include portraits by Copley, Stuart, Allston, and West, but -with the exception of the well-known portraits of Washington and Mrs. -Washington, by Stuart, there is nothing here of particular interest, -although there are often pictures loaned to the Museum by old residents -of Boston, which are historically valuable. It is much to be desired that -the collection of portraits by Copley in the Museum of Harvard College -could be deposited in the Museum. There ought to be in this institution -as complete a representation of the early art of the country as can -be procured, and it would be comparatively easy to accomplish this at -the present time. It must not be inferred that the authorities of the -Museum have neglected this portion of their mission. On the contrary, -they have rendered important service in this direction, and the special -exhibitions have been of interest, and of great importance. Beside -miscellaneous loan collections, there have been exhibitions of the works -of Allston, of William M. Hunt, and of George Fuller, and every year the -visitor finds representative pictures by artists of repute at home and -abroad, which excite interest, discussion, criticism, and keep the flame -of art and the love of art burning, even if—and this by no fault of the -institution—comparatively few avail themselves of the light. The French -school of painters which had its seat near the Forest of Fontainebleau, -and which is associated with the names of Millet, Corot, Rousseau, and -Diaz, is better represented here than any other of the modern schools, -although Courbet and Couture are both seen in good examples, Courbet -especially, of whom there is a fine picture, “La Curée”—the huntsman -winding his horn to call the chase together to cut up the stag. The -Couture is the Heads of Two Soldiers seen in profile, and though of no -importance as subject, is a good example of his method. - -The school of Fontainebleau, or more properly speaking, of Barbizon, -is represented by the large “Dante and Virgil,” a companion in size to -the “Orpheus” of the Cottier collection in New York, but by no means so -fine a work. There is no important work by Millet at present, although -there have been here some good examples from time to time, and especially -his “Sower,” the fine _replica_ of that picture belonging to Mr. Quincy -A. Shaw, with other smaller subjects, particularly a Sheep-shearing, a -picture in which all that is best in Millet was to be seen. - -The picture gallery at the Museum is such a movable feast that it -would be useless to attempt a catalogue of its contents. Just now the -“Automedon taming the Horses of Achilles,” by Baptiste Regnault, the -“Joan of Arc,” by Bastien Lepage, and “The Walk by the River Side,” by -Henri Lerolle, are among the most noticeable of the contents of the -large room, although there are a number of smaller pictures that are -well worth looking at. There is an effort making to purchase the picture -by Regnault, and the Lerolle was presented to the Museum in 1884 by Mr. -Francis C. Foster. - -The remaining rooms in this portion of the building are a small one -in which some fine old Dutch paintings are exhibited, and those which -contain the Gray collection of engravings. The Dutch pictures, it is -hoped, will one day belong to the Museum; they will form a valuable -addition to its collection. - -The Gray collection fills the room which runs along the southern side of -this wing answering to the large picture gallery which is parallel with -it on the north. This collection, formed for the late Francis C. Gray -by M. Thies, a German connoisseur, is one of the two or three important -collections of prints that are owned in America, and in some departments -is excelled by none, while the fact that there is a fund derived from -moneys left by Mr. Gray, which is devoted to the maintenance and increase -of the collection, gives it the advantage over all others here, and -ensures its one day becoming of national importance. It is already very -rich in Rembrandts and Dürers, but the aim of those who have it in charge -is to make it representative in its character, not of any one school in -particular but of all the schools and styles of engraving which have -existed. The collection is under the intelligent care of Mr. Edward -H. Greenleaf, who makes the contents of the portfolios useful to the -public by a series of exhibitions of the finest specimens of the various -schools, accompanied with titles, notes, and instructive memoranda, so -that in default of proper space for doing full justice to the collection -in any permanent way, the course of the year brings before the eyes of -students and visitors a considerable number of the prints, and thus makes -no slight contribution to general enlightenment on the subject. - -The next paper in this series will take up the Metropolitan Museum of New -York. - - - - -SANITARY CONDITION OF SUMMER RESORTS. - -BY THE HON. B. G. NORTHROP, LL.D. - - -The progress of modern civilization is marked by increasing attention to -the sanitary condition of cities, towns and homes. Barbaric races are -comparatively puny and short lived. Very old men are seldom found among -savages, and the rate of mortality bears some proportion to the degree of -barbarism, while early deaths everywhere diminish as the art and science -of sanitation advance. The increase of knowledge and the influence of -Christianity have greatly lengthened human life. Science is constantly -showing how many diseases and deaths are preventable. These facts are -abundantly established by statistics in all the most educated nations, -and, more recently, by the careful investigations of life insurance -companies and public boards of health. There has been a far greater -advance in sanitary science during the last fifty years than in any -previous century. But the popular appreciation of this science, though -steadily advancing, has not kept pace with its discoveries. The pressing -demand now is the diffusion of the art of sanitation—the practical -application of its methods by the people at large. The public press, the -daily, weekly and monthly journals are doing much in this direction. -Some of the most widely circulated religious journals have a column -regularly devoted to this subject. Our schools are helping on this good -work, and here the art of promoting health and prolonging life should be -learned and then applied in the family. Such principles, though they seem -truisms to the scientist, should be taught to our youth, who should early -memorize mottoes like the following: “Health is the prime essential to -success.” “The first wealth is health.” “The health of the people is the -foundation upon which all their happiness and all their power depend.” -“The material precedes and conditions the intellectual.” The school -may do more to popularize sanitary science than any other one agency. -When this work is once done here, it will not long be true that a large -proportion of our people are still living in ignorance and violation of -so many of the essential laws of health. The _popular_ neglect of such -laws should not be overlooked in our gratification at their discovery. - -Our wisest sanitarians affirm that more than one fourth of the diseases -which still afflict modern life are preventable. Great prominence has -recently been given to this subject in England and other European -countries. Dr. Simon, chief medical officer of the English Privy Council, -says that “the deaths which we in each year register in this country -(now about five hundred thousand) are fully a hundred and twenty-five -thousand more numerous than they would be, _if existing knowledge_ of -the chief causes of disease, as affecting masses of population, were -reasonably well applied throughout England.” With our larger population, -probably a still larger number of lives in America might be prolonged by -the more general observance of the laws of health. If 125,000 needless -deaths occur annually, that implies 3,500,000 needless sicknesses, there -being on an average twenty-eight cases of sickness to every death. Saying -nothing of the hopes thus blasted and the hearts and homes desolated, the -mere money value of the lives thus prematurely ended every year would -amount to many millions of dollars, often involving the abandonment of -lucrative enterprises, and inducing poverty if not pauperism. In this -lowest view, it costs to be sick and it costs to die. - -Modern civilization relates specially to the homes and social life of the -people, to their health, comfort and thrift, their intellectual and moral -advancement. In earlier times and other lands men were counted in the -aggregate and valued as they helped to swell the revenues or retinues -of kings and nobles. The government was the unit, and each individual -only added one to the roll of serfs or soldiers. With us the individual -is the unit, and the government is _for_ the people, as well as by the -people. This interest in the people has been manifested in new laws for -protecting their health, and by the general organization of State and -local Boards of Health. - -Their investigations have embraced not only the needs of cities, towns -and individual homes, but have revealed startling facts as to the -unsanitary condition, and consequently the peril, of certain summer -resorts. Cases of loss of life from the burning of hotels have led to -the enactment of laws requiring fire escapes. On account of disasters -by the explosion of steam boilers, all steamboats are required to get a -“bill of safety” from an official expert examiner. But the violations of -sanitary laws in boarding houses, hotels and summer resorts have produced -annually far more sickness and death than have such fires and explosions. -The circumstantial horrors connected with these sudden and terrible -disasters produce a deep and lasting impression, and prompt to stringent, -preventive laws, while the deaths from bad sanitary conditions, though -more numerous, are so isolated as to attract little notice. The patronage -of summer resorts is already so large, and is so rapidly increasing from -year to year, as to multiply their number and increase their attractions. -This summer migration from city to country is more than a fashion, and -is favored by such substantial reasons as to insure its permanence and -growth. Even city clerks have their fortnight’s vacation for rest and -refreshment by the seaside or among the hills and mountains. There is a -greater exodus of teachers and members of all professions during their -longer vacations—still more, families, and especially those having -young children, seek this escape from the heat, dust, and miasmatic -exhalations of the crowded city. Though their children may have attended -the kindergarten in the city, they find the best sort of kindergarten -in the open fields and varied objects of the country, with its wider -range for rambles and those freer sports that are so attractive to every -wide-awake boy, such as boating, fishing, hunting, watching turtles, -gathering bugs and butterflies, roaming in the woods, taking long -excursions on the lakes or rivers, climbing steep hills and rocky cliffs, -loving flowers, observing the properties of plants and trees, and the -names, habits, retreats and voices of the birds. Living much in the open -air, nature becomes the great educator, and for the summer at least, the -country proffers superior advantages for the physical, mental and moral -training of youth. The boy, for example, who observes the birds so as to -distinguish them by their beak, claws, form, plumage, song or flight has -gained an invaluable habit of accurate observation never acquired while -cooped up in a city. - -The apprehension of cholera during the present summer is likely to -increase the patronage of rural resorts. The condition of some dense -centers of population invites this pest. Its most terrible ravages last -summer in Naples, Marseilles and Toulouse occurred in the squalid dens -so long the reproach of those cities. Our summer retreats should all -be health resorts in fact as well as in name. Yet many of them—little -villages in winter, with a population of a few scores or hundreds—are too -often ill-prepared to be suddenly expanded into cities with a population -of many thousands, during the hottest and most trying months of the year. -Several State Boards of Health, within a few years, have examined many -watering-places and have been reluctantly compelled to make startling -statements as to their unsanitary conditions. - -In some cases these unwholesome and unwelcome discoveries, though a -surprise and regret to the owners, were accepted as facts, and the -needful remedies promptly applied. In other instances, such disagreeable -revelations awakened resentment and were treated as absurd alarms or -slanderous attacks, and ignorance and prejudice held their ground -undisturbed. - -In regard to one famous resort the State Board of Health of Massachusetts -said six years ago: “The unsanitary grounds invite a pestilence. They -violate the plainest teachings of hygienic common sense. There is no -adequate provision for the removal of refuse, and the wells and privies -are everywhere in close proximity, and some of the latter are immense -and offensive affairs, emptied only once a year, in the absence of the -summer boarders. At a large boarding house the sink drain empties on the -ground within three feet of the well, and at another, the well is within -a foot of an open trough sink drain, so filled and obstructed that the -water sets back, and a filthy puddle surrounds the well.” These were -mostly driven wells, reaching water from eight to twenty feet below the -surface. The theory was, that the foulest water would be fully filtered -by the soil above and around a driven well. The peddlers of this patent, -with their boastful advertisements, are in a measure responsible for -this mischievous error, which I have met in many states. I found a large -hotel beyond the Missouri River, where, instead of even a cess-pool, -the kitchen drainage gathered in a surface pool close to the well. At -a bakery in another resort the sink drain and cess-pool are but twelve -feet from the well. Twenty-four privies and thirteen cess-pools are -within a radius of 140 feet of a well used by many families. When the -water from forty wells was analyzed, the chemical examination proved that -sixteen of them were bad and unsafe. The official State report for 1879 -contains many pages of similar details. In fifteen days after the State -Board of Health called attention to the results of this investigation, -the citizens held a town meeting, at which it was _unanimously_ voted -that the Board of Health of this town should adopt all proper methods -to perfect and enforce stringent sanitary regulations, and promising -them their most cordial support in all reasonable efforts they may -make in the furtherance of this end. The Board of Health of another -well-known resort, after a careful examination of the sanitary condition -of Oak Bluffs and Martha’s Vineyard Camp-grounds, frankly said that -“unless proper remedial measures were carried out, the abandonment of -the place, as a residence for health, is but a question of time.” The -State Board subsequently commended this local board for adopting wise -sanitary regulations and carrying them out with such energy that the high -reputation of the place as a health resort might be preserved. - -The same report says: “It must not be taken for granted that this -condition of things is confined to one place. Visits to various seaside -resorts of a similar character on both north and south shores show little -change for the better. Many individual cases are worse.” - -The official inspection of many such summer resorts revealed sickening -details connected with the large hotels and boarding houses. One hundred -and fifty summer houses examined were, almost without exception, -objectionable, on the score of danger to health, due in part to foul air, -but more to contaminated well water. There is always a risk in the use -of such water, and the only safe rule is to make privies and cess-pools -absolutely tight, and frequently empty and disinfect them, so that they -_can not_ poison the water supply. Nearly every State health report -abounds in instances of the outbreak of typhoid fever due to bad well -water, and one affirms that the majority of wells in the rural districts -of that state are tainted. - -As is my custom, in order to adapt my lectures on “Village Improvements” -to local needs, I made a cursory inspection of the streets and private -grounds in the town of ⸺, which revealed a prolific source of peril to -its citizens. Though I had heard nothing of the actual experience of the -place, I spoke in strong terms of the danger of an early outbreak of -typhoid fever and diphtheria, from the proximity of vaults and wells. -After the lecture I was informed that such a dire visitation had already -desolated many homes, but it was regarded as “a mysterious visitation -of Providence,” and nothing was done to abate the obvious cause of the -pestilence. I find it exceedingly difficult to convince men of any danger -from their water supply. They are apt to resent a disparagement of their -wells as they would of their children, and yet I seldom inspect a town -where there is not found urgent need of the warning, “LOOK CAREFULLY -TO YOUR WELLS.” Gross sanitary defects are often found even around the -homes of isolated farmers, with every natural advantage for drainage and -healthfulness. Hence I advise that securing “better sanitary conditions -in our homes and surroundings” be made prominent among the various -objects of the “Village Improvement Associations” organized in many -states, and now numbering nearly three hundred. - -The unsanitary condition of Memphis invited the terrible scourge of -yellow fever in 1878. The occurrence of four thousand deaths in one -season compelled attention to the cause and remedy. If Memphis was then -the filthiest and sickliest city of the South, it now claims to be the -healthiest. The case demanded and received “heroic treatment.” Over -forty-two miles of sewers have been built, on the most approved plan, -with one hundred and ninety automatic flushing tanks, each discharging -one hundred and twelve gallons of water twice a day. While collecting -facts for a lecture there on “The Needs of Memphis,” I inspected the -city, and especially the “man-holes,” in company with the city engineer, -who had supervised their construction, and found in none of them any -offensive odor. These improvements were costly, but the recent rapid -growth of this city in population and wealth proves that these liberal -expenditures were wise investments. The “death-pool” of 1878 now justly -aspires to be a health resort. An excellent sewer system, with automatic -flushing tanks, is now in use in Denver, Colorado. I made a similar -examination of the man-holes there last October, with similar results, -and received the testimony of a prominent physician, to the marked -diminution of zymotic diseases since the completion of the new sewers. - -Cumulative evidence on the danger of using tainted water might be given -to an indefinite extent, like the following: Thirty-one out of one -hundred inmates of a convent in Munich, affected with typhoid fever; the -outbreak of typhoid fever in Princeton, New Jersey, two years ago; the -fearful epidemic at Waupun, Wisconsin, in April last, and the terrible -pestilence now desolating Plymouth, Pa. are all attributed to infected -water. In Plymouth nearly one hundred persons have already died, and -over one thousand have been prostrated—in the opinion of the physicians, -poisoned by water pollution. Such facts should everywhere prompt to -sanitary precautions, and enforce the motto, “Eternal vigilance is the -price of public health.” - -In a popular summer resort of Massachusetts there occurred eighty cases -of typhoid fever during 1881, out of a population of only 1,500. The -citizens were alarmed, and prompt and thorough investigation discovered -and removed the cause. The mischief had been done mainly by tainted -water. The remedies suggested by the board of health—clearing of -premises, securing of better drainage and plumbing, removing of all -decomposing matter, abolishing all cess-pools and leaching vaults, -draining marshes and pumping out and cleansing all wells and cisterns -that afforded chemical evidence of being tainted—were energetically -applied. The owners of these beautiful cottages and villas spared no -effort or expense to restore this attractive resort to its former -salubrity. If any community of its size was ever more earnest, prompt and -united in such a work of restoration, I should be glad to learn its name. -In the face of peculiar difficulties on this rocky peninsula, nearly -five miles of sewers were constructed. Hundreds of chemical analyses of -the drinking water were made. Of the wells and cisterns so examined, -nearly sixty per cent. contained water unfit for drinking or cooking. As -a result of this renovation, the local board of health is quoted in the -Massachusetts report for 1883 as saying: “These vigorous correctionary -measures completely checked the epidemic, and not a single case of the -fever has since appeared here that could not be traced to some other -locality for its origin.” - -Another seaside city, much resorted to in summer, with a regular -population of over 3,000, after suffering severely from zymotic -diseases, especially typhoid fever, requested the State Board of Health -to investigate the cause of this excessive mortality. Nine tenths of -the population here are crowded in one village of small area, having -many narrow streets, with small house lots, necessitating a dangerous -proximity of cess-pools, privy vaults and wells. This danger is increased -by the nature of the soil, mostly sand or gravel, that facilitates -rapid percolation. The climate itself is pronounced more equable and -salubrious than that of any other part of the State, and therefore -specially attractive to the health-seeker. The mean winter temperature is -seven degrees warmer than that of Cambridge. The insular position of the -town, and the sensible proximity of the Gulf Stream lend their combined -influence to modify the extremes of temperature, such as exist in the -inland parts of the State. The summer temperature of the water upon its -shores renders sea-bathing recreative, invigorating and pleasurable, even -to the delicate invalid. With such rare natural advantages for salubrity, -the high death rate is traced to preventable causes. The water of eleven -wells showed, on chemical analysis, a great degree of pollution. The -remedial plans, prepared at the suggestion of the State Board of Health, -were submitted to the action of the town meeting held February, 1884, -and were favorably received. But at a subsequent meeting, this favorable -action was reconsidered, and since that time no action has been taken. - -The last two reports of the State Board of Health of New Jersey contain -valuable accounts of the sanitary investigations of the health resorts -of that state. The following statements are abbreviated from these -volumes. Within thirty miles of New York City is to be found half the -population of the state of New Jersey. Of this number, according to the -judgment of engineers, chemists, physicians, and boards of health, not -one half are supplied with water fit to drink. As our risks from impure -water are even more than those from ordinary impure air, it behooves -all to guard against any contamination of potable water. If there is -a neglect of sanitary care, and especially of a good water supply, it -is too late to adopt the policy of concealment, or to point to a death -rate of from twenty-six to thirty as a justification, when so large a -city as London can point to a death rate of only twenty per thousand, -and many an English town of 30,000 inhabitants, to a death rate of only -sixteen or eighteen. The sea coast of New Jersey, more than that of -any other state, abounds in popular summer resorts. The State Board of -Health has carefully inspected these resorts, notified the proprietors -of existing defects, and reported them to the public when they were not -remedied. Their first visits were often occasions of protest, and even of -denunciation on the part of proprietors, many of whom, on sober second -thought, were convinced of the truth, and corrected the evils complained -of. The latest inspection says that the sanitary condition of most of -these places has been greatly improved. In 1883 it is said of ⸺, where -are six hotels and over one hundred cottages, “This locality shows no -improvement in its care of sanitary conditions. No skilled attention is -given to drainage. The water supply is mostly from driven wells, which -are generally surface wells. Privy vaults are of the crudest description. -Slop water is disposed of in cess-pools, often in close proximity to -wells. This sanitary lawlessness has not been without its deleterious -results.” The last report speaks of the same place as improving, but -there are still some sanitary defects. - -One popular resort shows some marked improvements. While some of the -large hotels have still rows of cess-pools, they are kept in better -condition than formerly. Still it has not equaled expectation in its -efforts to provide a much needed system of sewerage. The hotels exhibit -some of the very best and some of the very worst methods for the disposal -of water-closet refuse. In one hotel enormous brick vaults had no modes -of ventilation, and nothing but the shortness of the season protects -the inmates. These New Jersey resorts are no worse than those in other -states, and as a rule are salubrious and most desirable retreats, but -the self-satisfied carelessness of some wealthy owners of hotel property -has made light of these defects, and they have been tardy in their -correction. Visitors in such hotels, before taking rooms, should have an -expert make a sanitary inspection in their behalf. - -These facts from different states clearly show that the sanitary -condition of summer resorts is the question of first importance to all -who frequent them, and that a rural location, naturally salubrious, -has often proved a death-pool when made the home of a dense crowd in -the hottest months of the year. This frequent outbreak of preventable -diseases in large watering places proves the necessity of applied hygiene -in such resorts, where the management often betrays gross ignorance or -carelessness on this vital point. - -In this respect the Assembly grounds at Chautauqua form a happy -exception. Some details may suggest the changes and plans needed -elsewhere. Last summer, while meeting lecture appointments there, I made -a cursory inspection of the grounds around each of the four hundred -and twenty-eight cottages in this “city in a forest,” including its -numerous boarding houses. The village is very compact, and the cottages -are sometimes too closely crowded together. But everywhere the sanitary -conditions are admirable. The three essentials—pure air, pure soil, and -pure water—are well assured. Special effort is made to guard these three -“Ps.” No old fashioned privies are _now_ allowed. The last two nuisances -of this sort were removed while I was on the grounds. Some ten public -vaults are located at convenient points, each built of stone or brick, -laid in cement, and thus made water tight. Each is _daily_ supplied with -disinfectants, and emptied every other night, and then well cleansed with -water. There are sixty-seven private vaults, made in like manner, water -tight, and frequently emptied. The water-closet pipes emptying into them -are said to be all carefully trapped. The waste is conveyed by night to -farms far away from the grounds. - -Every family is required to provide a barrel for garbage, kitchen slops -and wash water, which is emptied _daily_. No soiled water may be thrown -on the grounds. The daily inspection detects any violation of this rule. -There are no alleys, lanes, back yards or dumping grounds where garbage -can be thrown and secreted. There is no filth-saturated soil, and the -atmosphere is not tainted with the gases of decay. The decaying leaves, -so abundant in this forest city, are removed or burned. - -Numerous wells, carefully guarded from surface drainage, and eight -springs furnish pure water. Borings some thirty feet deep, near the -engine house by the lake, have opened three flowing springs, the water -in five-inch pipes rising seven feet above the lake. This proves to be -a mineral water (pronounced by Dr. Edwards, the lecturer on chemistry, -a wholesome chalybeate tonic), is forced into a large tank on the hill, -and thence distributed in pipes near the surface over the grounds free -to all. There was little to criticise in the sanitary condition of the -grounds, and the few suggestions which I made were promptly carried out -by the efficient superintendent. - - - - -WAYSIDE HOMES. - -BY HELEN CAMPBELL. - - -No form of charitable work undertaken in this busy century holds more -perplexity and uncertainty than that for women, who, whether for great or -small offenses, have come under the ban of the law, and who pass from the -shadow of the prison to confront a public feeling which is, in the main, -so absolutely antagonistic as to leave small chance for reform, or hope -of making new and better place. - -It is certain that there is much justification for such feeling. There -are few in whom the missionary spirit is strong enough to enable them to -accept undaunted, the possibilities involved in receiving as a member -of the family, a woman whose desire for reform may be outweighed a -thousand times by the power of her appetites, and whose influence may -bring contamination to all within its reach. Even in less dangerous -cases, where youth and ignorance are the excuses for the violation of -law, there is always the fear that association with older offenders has -given a knowledge of evil that will work equal disaster, and thus the -door is as effectually closed against the slight as against the confirmed -transgressor. It is part of the popular conviction that work for women -is far less productive of results than work for men, a conviction that -has a certain foundation of truth. Even in the Water Street Mission of -New York, in which the most apparently hopeless class was reached and -held, McAuley was constantly baffled by this fact, and in time accepted -it as inevitable. He did not question, more than other workers have done, -why this was so, or how far the world was responsible for the state of -things he bewailed, but came at last, by almost unconscious steps, to the -conclusion given in a talk with the writer. - -“You’ve wondered, at times, that we didn’t have more women here,” he -said, a year or two before his death. “Don’t you know that you can haul -in a hundred men to one woman? What it means, the good Lord only knows, -but they don’t stay put. They cry an’ promise, an’ promise an’ cry, -an’ you do for ’em with all your might, an’ all at once they’re off, -an’ may be you never see ’em again.… When a girl’s once down, it isn’t -once in five hundred times that you can pull her out. Take that very -one you was so sorry for. She’s been to every meeting ’round here, an’ -cried an’ begged to be helped. She’s been taken first to one ‘Home’ an’ -then to another, an’ she’s run from every one back to her old life. The -system’s wrong. That’s my opinion. You take a ‘Home’ where a lot are in -together, an’ the devil’s let loose. They chew tobacco an’ chew snuff, -an’ get drunk on the sly, an’ the old ones tell the young ones all their -lives, an’ the last end is worse than the first, for they learn a lot of -deviltry to add to their own. There ain’t but one way, as I can see, to -save ’em. Keep ’em apart. Let Christian families that can, make up their -minds to take one at a time; hedge her round; give her enough to do, an’ -get her interested, an’ pray night an’ day she may be kept. That will -save a good many, for it’s mostly worked where it’s been tried. But there -ain’t anything in our work so discouragin’ as this very thing. What you -going to do? These girls comin’ out of homes where a dozen, may be, has -herded in one room, what do they know of decency or cleanliness? What -can they know, I’d like to know? No, I tell you; the work’s got to begin -at the beginning. Get hold of the children. Send them off. Do anything -that’ll train them differently. They’re born in sin and born to sin, and -the Lord only knows what’ll come if good men and women don’t wake up and -take hold.” - -Admitting the serious nature of the difficulties involved, it is quite -certain that many of them have been born of an utterly false estimate -of the relative degrees of guilt in men and women. Neither time nor -space allows discussion of this point beyond the suggestion that in the -present White Cross movement, and the questions that at once arise as -the first necessity in any understanding of its nature or need, may be -found the secret of much that has made against women. Simple justice, the -last acquired and, it would seem, the hardest won of all virtues, makes -chastity as binding an obligation upon man as upon woman, and gives to -both, when repentant, the same pardon and the same hope for a future. -Thus far, charity has ignored the woman, forcing her to bear not only the -pain and sorrow of unblessed motherhood, but the sentence of perpetual -banishment from the society whose laws she has defied. - -It is at this stage that workers among the poor most often find her, -hopeless, and in the large proportion of cases driven back to crime as -her only resort. They form a great proportion of the inmates of any -prison for women. Every town and village has its quota of candidates for -reformatory or jail, and mourns, collectively and individually, over the -terrible tendencies of this class, with small thought that prevention -may be easier than cure, and that if children born to such conditions -come into the world, society is bound to see that their training shall, -as far as possible, neutralize the results of such inheritance. Society -has no time for prevention. It proposes to pay for prisons rather than -for industrial schools; to labor with full fledged criminals, rather -than to crush out vice while still in embryo, and congratulates itself -on the magnificent liberality of its provision for the criminal, and the -remarkable success of the prison system as a whole. - -Women are supposed to be merely occasional offenders, and that there -are, in every state, hundreds outside of the prison who are habitual -law breakers, and an equally large proportion within its walls, is a -proposition received as incredible. Yet it was not till Massachusetts -found herself forced to deal with eight hundred per year of such cases, -that the first reformatory was organized, in 1865, and the number has -increased steadily with the increase in population. County prisons, -of which there were twenty-one, were, too often, simply nests for -propagating vice. In a few of the larger ones great order and system -prevailed. In the smaller ones there was next to none, and male and -female prisoners, dirty, ragged and obscene, mingled together and -interchanged lessons in new forms of vice. In all of them three classes -of offenses were to be found, women convicts being sentenced usually for -drunkenness, unchastity, or larceny; the relative prevalence of the three -being indicated by the order in which they are given. The first class, -wherever found, are most often Irish women, at, or past, the middle age. -They are not criminals, though at times, in some cases, dishonest or -unchaste. Often they are eager to reform, and yield to the temptation to -drink as many men yield, for the momentary relief from grinding care and -anxiety. Many of them become accustomed to the short sentences usually -given by magistrates for this offense, and there are countless women -who have had thirty, forty, and even fifty short imprisonments. A long -term, or, in aggravated cases, imprisonment for life, affords the only -security, the mere smell of liquor being often enough to awaken appetite -and bring on a wild debauch. The three crimes can in almost every case be -traced back to a neglected childhood. - -“My mother died whan I was a bit of a child, an’ my father drank and beat -me,” is the story of nine tenths of these cases, and will remain the -story. The life of a single great tenement house, if told in full, as -it has recently been done, shows how the seed is sown, and what harvest -we may expect, and prison systems, however admirable, can touch but the -smallest proportion of those who come within their walls. And even here, -in this system, which deserves all the eulogy it receives, women have had -but the most meager share of the benefit intended. It is only here and -there that, spurred on by some great souled woman, wrought to white heat -of indignation at the suffering and ignominy heaped upon these weak and -most miserable sisters, there has grown up a better system of treatment, -or a refuge in which reform has been made possible. Even to-day, in -cities where reform is supposed to have perfected itself, there are -Houses of Detention, at the mention of which compassionate judges shake -their heads, and use any and every pretext to avoid condemning, for even -a week, a young girl guilty of some first and slight offense, to their -unspeakably infamous walls. Who enters there leaves hope behind, and -life in any real sense, is over, once for all, for the sad soul that has -learned what awaits it there. - -In a little town of Massachusetts, many phases of this question have long -since been answered. The work is so quietly carried forward that few -save those interested in philanthropic problems have any knowledge of -its nature or scope. In the belief that its story will awaken, not only -interest, but stronger faith in the possibilities of reform, its outlines -are given here. From its success grew the greater work which makes the -title of the present article, a work which would have seemed well nigh -impossible had not such demonstration first been made of its entire -feasibility. - -Practically, its foundation was laid in Dedham, thirty years or more -ago, where a temporary asylum was afforded to women just discharged from -prison, and much the same methods were adopted in the Springfield “Home -for Friendless Women.” But as one of the most efficient workers wrote at -the time: “The more thoughtful saw from the first that they were working -only at the top of the tree, and must go to the root to accomplish real -good in large measure. The necessity of making the term of imprisonment -one also of instruction, was apparent; also the vital need of purifying -the corrupted by personal contact with pure and good women, laboring -among them in a spirit of love and sympathy.” - -It was not until 1870 that, after a preliminary meeting in Boston, -officered by some of her most earnest citizens, a memorial was presented -to the legislature, in which the need was set forth of better prisons for -women, and of a reformatory discipline for all criminals. This was called -“The Memorial of the Temporary Asylum for Discharged Female Prisoners in -Dedham, and of the Springfield Home for Friendless Women and Children, -and of others concurring with them.” The names of Whittier, Henry Wilson, -Bishop Eastburn, and many others equally noble, were affixed, and the -almost immediate result was the establishment of the Prison Commission -of the state, and a few years later, the building of the separate prison -for women at Sherborn. Thirty acres of land were purchased here, and the -prison was placed upon a knoll, from which one of the finest views in -the county may be had, a neighboring pond giving a full supply of pure -water, and the facilities for drainage being excellent. The form chosen -for building was a cross, with two more transverse sections, one at the -front, and one for hospital purposes, at the rear. But forty-eight strong -cells for the more refractory class were built, the majority occupying -small, separate rooms, divided by brick partitions, and each owning a -window. The basement has two large laundries, one for prison, the other -for outside use, the latter bringing in a comfortable income toward -the support of the prison. Over this laundry is the prison kitchen and -bakery, the work in both being done by the prisoners, under supervision. -Above this, in the third story, is the large hall used as a chapel, and -a library adjoining it, while the second story contains two large work -rooms, one for sewing, and the other for making chair bottoms. Sewing -machines are in the first one, and here all the clothing for the prison -is made, as well as a good deal for another institution. A school room is -also on this floor, occupied six hours a day, the women going to it in -classes, each class having an hour’s instruction a day. Here many take -their first lessons in reading and writing; easy arithmetic and geography -are also taught. - -The prison has four divisions, for the classification of convicts, the -three higher ones each containing what is known as a “privilege room,” -the prisoners who have obeyed the rules being allowed to spend an hour -each evening under the supervision of the matrons, before they are -locked in for the night. Four cheerful dining rooms are provided, and -unlike the county jails, where prisoners eat alone from a tin pan, the -women gather, under the supervision of matrons, each with neat plate and -basin, learning order and decorum, and in many cases having their first -experience of clean and palatable food. The matrons have comfortable -rooms, commanding a view of the corridors, and a private dining room and -kitchen in the basement. A parlor on the second floor is also at their -disposal, thirty matrons and assistants using it in such intervals of -leisure as come. - -The chief officers may be either men or women, at the pleasure of -the Governor, these being superintendent, steward and treasurer, the -remainder being all women, and including a deputy superintendent, a -chaplain, a physician, school mistress, and clerk. The wishes of the -founders were carried out in making the superintendent a woman, Mrs. -Edna C. Atkinson’s name having become the synonym for patient and most -faithful labor in this untried field. There are others as worthy, but -with her, they shrink from any public recognition, content to have laid -silently the foundation of a work which is copied in detail wherever the -same results are desired. - -The hospital is a model of its kind, three stories in height, and -thirty-two feet wide by seventy-seven long. The dispensary and wash -room, the doctor’s sitting room and some small wards for special cases -are on the first floor. The second one has a large ward, sunny and airy, -with space for twenty beds, and at one side bath rooms, and a small -room where the dead are laid until burial. The convalescent ward is on -the third floor, and in each and all, is the exquisite neatness which -is a revelation to every occupant. Of the physical misery that finds -alleviation here, one can hardly speak. “Intemperance, unchastity, abuse -from male companions, neglected childbirth, hereditary taints, poor food -and clothing,” have all done their work, and demand all the skill the -physician can bring to bear. The work is hard and often repulsive, but -the sick prisoner is especially susceptible to influence, and often, when -all means have been tried in vain, yields at last under the pressure -of pain and gratitude for its relief, and goes out from the ward a new -creature spiritually as well as physically. - -From the beginning they are made to feel that here is one spot where love -and sympathy are certain. There is no convict dress branding them at once -as infamous. Each division has its own; blue check of different patterns -being chosen to distinguish the different grades. The upper ones have -neat white aprons for Sundays. Night dresses and pocket handkerchiefs -are provided to teach neatness, and every woman is required to have -smooth hair and a well-cared-for person. In the nursery, an essential -department of a woman’s prison, the babies show well fed, happy faces, -and are as neatly and warmly clothed as the mothers. This department -has sixty rooms, each ten by twelve, with a bed and crib for mothers -with infants, while above it is a lying-in ward, with all necessary -appliances. Often there is not the slightest hint of maternal instinct, -and the mother must be watched to prevent the destruction of the child, -but more often it is strong, and desire for reform is first awakened with -the longing that the child should know a better life. The bright, clean -quarters, the regular employment, the sympathy and encouragement, on -which, no matter how skeptical or scoffing in the beginning, they come -to depend, all foster this desire. Indifferent even to common decency -in the beginning, unknown instincts awaken, and here is one answer to -the argument sometimes made, that criminals have no right to attractive -quarters. Here, again, the same worker already quoted may speak: “In the -first place, the loss of liberty is a terrible privation, especially when -the term of confinement is long. Most persons will bear any hardship -rather than be confined, even in a pleasant place. The depraved women -of our prisons are indifferent, at first, to the things which please a -higher taste. The dark and filthy slums of Boston are far more charming -to them than the clean and sunny prison. The work is hateful to their -idle habits, and being unpaid, it has no motive to incite them to -performance. The silent, separate rooms, the quiet work room, try them -inexpressibly. There is no danger that the prison will be too tempting. -They long for the intoxicating drink, the low carousals of their usual -life, and when discharged from an ordinary prison, with no reformatory -influence, eagerly rush into the old haunts, and begin anew the foul -life.… Ferocious, indeed, are they, when long habits of intoxication, -joined to ignorance and strong passions, are subjected to the restraints -of a prison.” - -“No woman can govern a ferocious woman,” was asserted in the -beginning, by a well known Senator; but that point settled itself -years since, women having proved better able to control women, no -matter how brutalized, than any man has ever been. In one case a woman -was sent from a neighboring prison, who came determined to create -disturbance. Insurrection seemed inevitable, such passion of revolt -had she communicated to many, but wise management quelled it at once. -Three strong men were necessary to convey her from the yard to the -punishment cell, but this was done under the personal direction of the -superintendent, and the men were allowed no violence or abuse. For days -she remained unsubdued; then quieted, and at the end of ten was conquered -and transformed into a quiet, orderly, obedient worker. - -“She was that patient and kind she did all she could for me,” was her -comment on the superintendent, and her case is illustrative of dozens of -the same nature. Nothing impresses them more than the unselfish nature -of the care bestowed, and as their skill in manual labor develops, -their interest grows with it, and they begin to take pride in what may -be accomplished. They are ready, when the term of confinement ends, to -lead decent lives, but they must be shielded for a time, else ruin is -inevitable. - -Here, then, comes in the mission of a “Wayside Home.” The thought of -such shelter came many years ago, to the man who gave all his life to -making paths plainer for sinning and suffering souls, and who in the -“Isaac Hopper Home,” as often called the “Father Hopper Home,” solved -the problem in a degree. Even here, however, admission was conditioned -on a letter or word of endorsement, and there was no spot in all the -great city in which a homeless and friendless woman, without such word, -could find temporary refuge. It remained for Brooklyn to offer such a -possibility, and the quiet home that in the early spring of 1880 opened -its doors, asked but three questions: - -“Do you need help?” - -“Are you homeless?” - -“If taken in, will you remain a month, keep the necessary rules of the -house, and do your share of its work?” - -These question are “the hinge on which the door swings, and when once a -woman crosses its threshold she stands on her honor, and is trusted just -as far as she will allow.” - -Cramped for room, dependent upon voluntary contributions for furnishing, -provisions, and all the running expenses of such an undertaking, -the first year found them without debt, and with ninety-nine women -sheltered and protected, sixty-two of whom found places, and, with -but few exceptions, proved faithful and worthy of trust. During the -second year two hundred and twenty-four were helped, cramped quarters -forcing the managers to refuse many applications. Half of the income -for that year was earned by the inmates, in laundry, sewing room, and -days’ work outside. A larger house was taken, but the same principle of -free admission continued. Many who left the Home voluntarily, and some -even who had been expelled, returned, penitent and sorrowful, and were -received again, and given another chance, the only bar to return being in -the discovery that the influence of a woman in some cases did more harm -than could be counteracted in the Home, in which case there is written -across her name, “Not to be admitted again.” - -A matron and two assistant matrons are employed, the matron having -general charge of the house, keys, and work; the first assistant, of -sewing room and laundry; and the second of the kitchen and all household -supplies. But thirty women can be accommodated at any one time, and it -is hoped that a building especially for the purpose may soon give the -added facilities so imperatively demanded. The work holds little poetry, -and the expression of some of its subjects is so debased and apparently -hopeless, that one gentleman, accustomed to give freely, remarked: “I see -nothing better to do than to tie a rope round their necks and pitch them -into the river.” - -The poor souls were themselves much of his mind, but a month or two gave -a very different aspect to affairs, work and the certainty of sympathy -bringing new life. Undisciplined and weak, in the power of appetite -both inherited and acquired, they have fought battles whose terror the -untempted can never know; fought and won, the roll now holding hundreds -of names. Working against perpetual obstacle and disadvantage, the story -of the five years is one of triumph for managers as well as managed. “We -began,” said one of the workers, “holding in one hand the key to an empty -house, for which the rent was paid for one month, and in the other hand -all our worldly possessions—five dollars—and since that time we have -bought our present home, and furnished it comfortably for our work. It -accommodates thirty-five women, and three matrons, and we have paid on -it $5,000, carrying a mortgage of $9,000. None of these things are the -ultimate of our work. They are but means to an end, and that end the -saving of the lives and souls of these women.” - -Effort of as extended a nature is possible only for a body of earnest -workers, but this mere hint of its nature and results may perhaps -convince some who have doubted its possibility, and serve as the clue -to companion methods in country towns. Faith in possibilities, both -human and divine, has been the condition of success for what is already -accomplished, and the village may test these no less than the city. -Reports filled with every practical detail may be had by addressing a -note to “The Wayside Home, 352 Bridge Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.,” and the -writer stands ready, at any time, to answer questions as to methods, -assuring all doubters that, for all patient workers, success is certain. - - * * * * * - -The finest pleasures of reading come unbidden. In the twilight alcove -of a library, with a time-mellowed chair yielding luxuriously to your -pressure, a June wind floating in at the windows, and in your hand some -rambling old author, good humored and quaint, one would think the Spirit -could scarce fail to be conjured. Yet often, after spending a morning -hour restlessly there … I have strolled off with a book in my pocket to -the woods; and, as I live, the mood has descended upon me under some -chance tree, with a crooked root under my head, and I have lain there -reading and sleeping by turns till the letters were blurred in the -dimness of twilight.—_From Prose Writings of N. P. Willis._ - - - - -SUNDAY READINGS. - -SELECTED BY CHANCELLOR J. H. VINCENT, D.D. - - -[_Sunday, July 5._] - -THE INFLUENCE OF JESUS.—(I note again, as a characteristic of the -morality of sonship, the way in which it secures humility by aspiration, -and not by depression.) How to secure humility is the hard problem -of all systems of duty. He who does work, just in proportion to the -faithfulness with which he does it, is always in danger of self-conceit. -Very often men seem to have given up the problem in despair, and they -lavish unstinted praise upon the vigorous, effective worker, without any -qualifying blame of the arrogance with which he flaunts the duty that he -does in the world’s face. “The only way to make him humble,” they would -seem to say, “would be to make him idle. Let him stop doing duty and -then, indeed, he might stop boasting. His arrogance is only the necessary -price that the world and he pay for his faithfulness.” To such a problem -the Christian morality brings its vast conception of the universe. Above -each man it sets the infinite life. The identity of nature between -that life and his, while it enables him to emulate that life, compels -him, also, to compare himself with it. The more zealously he aspires -to imitate it, the more clearly he must encounter the comparison. The -higher he climbs the mountain, the more he learns how the high mountain -is past his climbing. It is the oneness of the soul’s life with God’s -life that at once makes us try to be like him, and brings forth our -unlikeness to him. It is the source at once of aspiration and humility. -The more aspiration, the more humility. Humility comes by aspiration. -If, in all Christian history, it has been the souls which most looked -up that were the humblest souls; if to-day the rescue of a soul from -foolish pride must be not by a depreciation of present attainment, but -by opening more and more the vastness of the future possibility; if the -Christian man keeps his soul full of the sense of littleness, even in -all his hardest work for Christ, not by denying his own stature, but by -standing up at his whole height, and then looking up in love and awe and -seeing God tower into infinitude above him—certainly all this stamps the -morality which is wrought out within the idea of Jesus with this singular -excellence, that it has solved the problem of faithfulness and pride, and -made possible humility by aspiration. - -And yet, once more, the morality of Jesus involves the only true secret -of courage and of the freedom that comes of courage. More and more we -come to see that courage is a positive thing. It is not simply the -absence of fear. To be brave is not merely not to be afraid. Courage is -that compactness and clear coherence of all a man’s faculties and powers -which makes his manhood a single operative unit in the world. That is -the reason why narrowness of thought and life often brings a kind of -courage, and why, as men’s range of thought enlarges and their relations -with their fellowmen increase, there often comes a strange timidity. The -bigot is often very brave. He is held fast unto a unit, and possesses -himself completely in his own selfishness. For such a bravery as that -the man and the world pay very dear. But when the grasp that holds a -man and his powers is not his self-consciousness, but his obedience -to his Father, when loyalty to him surrounds and aggregates the man’s -capacities, so that, held in his hand, the man feels his distinctiveness, -his distinctive duty, his distinctive privilege, then you have reached -the truth of which the bigot’s courage was the imitation. Then you have -secured courage, not by the limitation, but by the enlargement of the -life. Then the dependence upon God makes the independence of man in which -are liberty and courage. The man’s own personality is found only in the -household of his Father, and only in the finding of his personality does -he come to absolute freedom and perfect fearlessness.—_Phillips Brooks._ - - -[_Sunday, July 12._] - -TRUE CHRISTIANITY.—Lord Jesus Christ, thou eternal and only Prince of -Peace! Thou most blessed and truest rest of faithful souls! Thou hast -said, Come unto me all ye that labor and are heavy laden, and ye shall -find rest to your souls. In the world ye shall have tribulation, but in -me ye shall have peace. - -Alas! how often have I sought for rest in this world, but have not found -it! For my soul, being immortal, can not rest or be satisfied with -anything but thee alone; O immortal God, thou and thou alone art the rest -of our souls. The world and all that is in it is hastening to decay; they -all wax old as doth a garment, and as a vesture shalt thou change them, -and they shall be changed; but thou art the same, and thy years shall not -fail. How then shall my soul find rest in such fleeting and changeable -things?… O God, my soul can not be satisfied but in thee, the supreme -good. My soul hungereth and thirsteth after thee, and can not rest till -it possess thee.… - -O thou rock of my salvation! in which my soul trusteth and is at rest.… - -O Lord Jesus, how ardent is thy charity! how pure, how free from deceit! -how perfect! how spotless! how great! how exalted! how profound! In a -word, how sincere and hearty is thy love! Suffer, I beseech thee, my soul -to rest in this thy love.… Here let my poor soul rest free from fear of -danger or disquiet. In thee let all my senses rest, that I may hear thee -sweetly speaking, O thou highest love! Let my eyes behold thee, O thou -celestial beauty! Let my ears hear thee, thou most harmonious music! Let -my mouth taste, thou incomparable sweetness! Let the refreshing odors -of life breathe upon me from thee, thou most noble flower of paradise!… -Let my heart rejoice in thee, my true joy! Let my will desire thee -alone, thou only joy of my heart! Let my understanding know thee alone, -O eternal wisdom! Lastly, let all my desires, all my affections rest in -thee alone, O blessed Jesus, who art my love, my peace, and my joy! - -Take out of my heart everything that is not thyself. Thou art my riches -in poverty; thou art my honor in contempt; my praise and glory against -reproaches; my strength in infirmity; and in a word, my life in death. -And how, then, should I not rest in thee, who art my all in all? My -righteousness against sin; my wisdom against folly; redemption from -condemnation; sanctification from my uncleanness.… - -Let me, I beseech thee, surrender my whole heart to thee, since thou hast -given me all thine. Let me go out of myself, that I may enter into thee. -Let me cleanse my heart and empty it of the world, that thou mayest fill -it with thy celestial gifts, O Jesus, the rest of my heart, the Sabbath -of my soul! Lead me into the rest of a blessed eternity, where there are -pleasures at thy right hand for evermore. Amen.—_Arndt, “A prayer for -obtaining true rest and tranquility of soul.”_ - - -[_Sunday, July 19._] - - For Prayer is a - Conversing with God, - The Key of Heaven, - The Flower of Paradise, - A Free Access to God, - A Familiarity with God, - The Searcher of His Secrets, - The Opener of His Mysteries, - The Purchaser of His Gifts, - A Spiritual Banquet, - A Heavenly Enjoyment, - The Honey-comb of the Spirit, - Honey Flowing from the Lips, - The Nurse of Virtues, - The Conqueror of Vices, - The Medicine of the Soul, - A Remedy against Infirmities, - An Antidote against Sin, - The Pillar of the World, - The Salve of Mankind, - The Seed of Blessing, - The Garden of Happiness, - The Tree of Pleasure, - The Increase of Faith, - The Support of Hope, - The Mother of Charity, - The Path of Righteousness, - The Preserver of Perseverance, - The Mirror of Prudence, - The Mistress of Temperance, - The Strength of Chastity, - The Beauty of Holiness, - The Fire of Devotion, - The Light of Knowledge, - The Repository of Wisdom, - The Strength of the Soul, - The Remedy against Faint-heartedness, - The Foundation of Peace, - The Joy of the Heart, - The Jubilee of the Mind, - A Faithful Companion in this Earthly Pilgrimage, - The Shield of a Christian Soldier, - The Rule of Humility, - The Forerunner of Honor, - The Nurse of Patience, - The Guardian of Obedience, - The Fountain of Quietness, - The Imitator of Angels, - The Conquest of Devils, - The Comfort of the Sorrowful, - The Triumph of the Just, - The Joy of the Saints, - The Helper of the Oppressed, - The Ease of the Afflicted, - The Rest of the Weary, - The Ornament of the Conscience, - The Advancement of Graces, - The Odor of an Acceptable Sacrifice, - The Encourager of Mutual Good-will, - The Refreshment of this Miserable Life, - The Sweetening of Death, - The Foretaste of the Heavenly Life.—_Arndt._ - - -[_Sunday, July 26._] - -SERMON ON LUKE iv, 1-13.—The _weapons_ of Jesus?—say we rather _the -weapon_—for he has but one, it is the _Word of God_. Three times tempted, -three times he repels the temptation by a simple quotation from the -Scriptures, without explanation or comment. “_It is written_”—this one -expression tells upon the tempter like a tremendous discharge upon an -assaulting battalion. “It is written”—the devil withdraws for the first -time. “It is written”—the devil withdraws for the second time. “It -is written”—the devil gives up the contest. God’s word is the weapon -which Satan most dreads—a weapon before which he has never been able -to do aught but succumb. Most justly does Paul call it the “Sword of -the Spirit;”[A] and John describes it, in the Revelation, as “a sharp, -two-edged sword, proceeding out of the mouth of the Son of man.” With -that “Sword of the Spirit” in our hands, our cause becomes that of the -Holy Spirit himself, and we shall be as superior in strength to our -adversary, as is the Spirit of God to the spirit of darkness. Without -it, on the contrary, left to ourselves, we shall be as much below him as -is man’s nature below that of angels. Adam fell, only because he allowed -this sword to drop. Jesus triumphs, because no one can wrest it from his -hand. But why is it that the Son of God, instead of meeting the enemy -with some new sword brought from the heavens whence he came, took up only -our own weapon, from that very earth where Adam had, with such cowardice, -left it? This is for our example. From what that weapon accomplished in -his hand, we must learn what it can do in ours. Let us, then, take it -up in our turn; or, rather, let us receive it from him, resharpened as -it were, by his victory, and we shall have nothing to fear. To all the -adversary’s attacks let us oppose a simple “_It is written_,” and we -shall render vain his every endeavor.… If after having heard him on the -theater of temptation, scoffing at the word of God, we could (allow me -the expression) follow him behind the scenes, and hear him confess to his -accomplices that he is lost if he can not succeed in wresting from our -hands this irresistible weapon! If we did but know all this, and if, like -the valiant Eleazar, “we could keep hold of our sword till our hand clove -unto it”—oh, then we should be invincible, yea, _invincible_!—_Monod._ - -[A] Revelation i:16; ii:16; xix:15-21; Hebrews iv:12, “The word of God is -quick and powerful, and sharper than any two-edged sword, piercing even -to the dividing asunder of soul and spirit, and of the joint and marrow, -and is a discerner of the thoughts and intents of the heart.” - - - - -“WE SALUTE THEE, AND LIVE.” - -BY MARY MATHEWS-SMITH. - - - Soldiers brave, in days of old, - Facing dangers manifold, - Looked unto their king to cry— - “Thee we do salute, and die.” - - Service for an earthly king - Other ending can not bring; - Whatso’er thy record be, - Death is all it gives to thee. - - Christian brave, where’er thy way, - Thine it is with joy to say— - “King, to whom our hearts we give, - Thee we do salute, and live.” - - Service for the heavenly King, - Love and life eternal bring; - He alone true life can give, - Him we may salute, and live. - - - - -A GROUP OF MUMMIES. - -BY OTIS T. MASON. - - -Whenever the word mummy is mentioned almost everybody thinks of Egypt -and the ancient embalmers, with their tedious processes and costly -ceremonials. The term does include the Egyptian prepared bodies, but it -does not exclude some found elsewhere. Indeed, in Washington, there will -be seen in close proximity, in the Smithsonian building, an exceedingly -dry company, made up of individuals from Alaska, Arizona, Mexico, -Kentucky, Peru, and Egypt. - -Whoever has marked the tender solicitude with which the things around us -seem to beckon us in this way or in that will understand that even the -disposal of the dead has been influenced by such suggestions. Passing -through a dense forest one seems to hear the branches and undergrowth -say: “Come this way, pass along here, we are opening to make way for -you.” Well, it is so in every human art; natural objects supply the -materials, the tools, and suggest the simplest forms. There can be no -potters where there is no clay, no chipped arrow heads where there is -no stone to flake, no wood carving in the arctic regions where grows no -timber. Yet the good people in all these places have arts, they make -excellent baskets in which they carry water and boil their meat, polished -spearheads and axes of volcanic stone, and most delicate carvings in -ivory or antler. - -As to the disposal of the dead in different regions and ages, all we -have space to say is that the voices of nature around each people have -told them how to perform this sad rite. In the frozen regions, where the -ground is never thawed, no graves are dug. By the seaside the primitive -fisherman is launched upon the wide expanse in his own canoe. In rocky -regions cairns and cists conceal the wasting form. On the soft prairie -mounds cover the dead out of sight. In those arid regions where the -rainfall does not affect the atmosphere to any extent the process of -desiccation takes place more rapidly than chemical changes. The water, -which forms the greater part of the human body, soon removes and leaves -but a few pounds of bones, dried flesh and skin. This may be called -natural mummification, the process of which is aided either by extreme -cold, extreme aridity, or preservative elements in the soil. - -In the National Museum there is the body of a little boy, lying on his -back, his feet drawn up, and all sorts of curious relics hanging in the -case with him. The body was discovered in one of the cliff ruins of the -Cañon de Chelly, Arizona. The particular ruin referred to is on a benched -recess, seventy-five feet above the cañon, and extends backward about -thirty feet. The ancient Pueblo people, driven by some invading force, -constructed their cliff houses along only a part of this bench. About -fifty feet from the walls Mr. Thomas Kearn found a little oven-like -cist composed of angular bowlders laid in clay. The rooflet consisted -of sticks supporting stones and clay. At the bottom lay the little -child, and the remains of other burials, together with grave deposits. -Here, in this last resting place, the waters escaped so quickly and so -quietly from the body that even the form of life was not disturbed nor -any chemical changes awakened. So perfectly dried is this little fellow -that even the coatings of the eye remain. This is natural embalmment -by desiccation simply. In the Peabody Museum, at Cambridge, are dried -bodies from Mexico, preserved in the same manner. Around them were their -clothing and utensils, silent and patient watchers, waiting all these -centuries to give in evidence as to how those dead people dressed, ate, -drank, worked, and warred. - -In the palmy days of our grandparents there was a desiccated body -discovered in Mammoth Cave, Kentucky. This, also, has had the good -fortune, after many peregrinations, to find its way into the Smithsonian. -Now, Mammoth Cave is a damp place, but the earth accumulated on the floor -is in places full of nitrous and other preservative salts. Indeed, the -Kentucky cave subject may be called a natural pickle. - -To Mr. William H. Dall we are indebted for bringing to light mummies -from the frozen regions. At the time of their discovery by the Russians, -the Aleuts of Unalashka had a process of mummification peculiar to -themselves. Mr. Dall informs us that they eviscerated the bodies of -those held in honor, removed the fatty matter, placed them for some -time in running water, and then lashed them into as compact a bundle as -possible. A line was placed around the neck and under the knees, to draw -them up to the chin. If any part stuck out, the bones were broken so -as to facilitate the consolidation. After this the body was thoroughly -dried and packed in a wooden crate, wrapped round and round with seal, -sea-otter, and other precious furs, enough to make a fashionable belle’s -head swim. Over these were wrapped coarser skins, waterproof cloth of -intestines, and fine grass mats. This crate was slung to upright poles, -or hung, like a wall-pocket, to a peg driven into a crevice in some cave. -In 1874 Captain E. Hennig, of the Alaska Commercial Company’s service, -found in a cave on the island of Kagamil, near Unalashka, a number of -these framed mummies, all but two of which the company presented to the -Smithsonian Institution. - -The Egypt of America for mummies is Peru. Scarcely a museum in the world -is without its dried dogs, guinea pigs, parrots, and human beings wrapped -in costly cloths, and the last mentioned wearing the greatest profusion -of gold and silver jewelry. Along with these bodies are found corn, -beans, peanuts; pottery, gourds, and silver vases; pillows, haversacks -and masks; knives, war clubs and spearheads; needles, distaffs, spindles, -work-baskets and musical cradles. Thousands and thousands of the most -interesting things turn up, almost as expressive of ancient Peruvian life -as was the library of Sennacherib, exhumed by Layard at Kouyunjik, of -Assyrian life. - -Beyond the care of the Peruvians and Bolivians in the clothing and -encysting of the dead, it is almost certain that they left them to the -atmosphere to manipulate. The work was done most effectually. Nothing -can be dryer than a Peruvian mummy. It is perfectly useless to dust the -cases containing them, and those who handle them are in a steady sneeze, -as though invisible spirits, filled with indignation, held impalpable -snuff-boxes to the nose. It is still more wonderful that insects have not -done their destructive work upon these bodies. The wrappings doubtless -were so securely made as to prevent their inroads, and must have -contained some substance to keep them away. - -In the National Museum, finally, are two Egyptian mummies. It is hard to -tell how they got into such outlandish boxes and mountings. There they -stand, nailed and screwed into narrow, white boxes, side by side, with -mouths open, as if Pompeian convulsions had seized and embalmed them by -instantaneous mummification just as the curtain was falling on a grand -duet. Now, these two bodies were really embalmed (embalsamed); all the -other mummies were simply dried up. - -The Egyptians, Peruvians, and perhaps the Alaskans preserved the bodies -as integral parts of the individual, that would be needed again. The -others simply dried up, their depositors cherishing no belief in the -resurrection of the body. - - - - -A TRIP TO MT. SHASTA. - -Report of a lecture delivered in the National Museum of Washington, D. -C., by Prof. J. S. Diller, of the U. S. Geological Survey. - - -The Great Basin Country is bounded to the westward by the Cascade Range -in Oregon and the Sierra Nevada Mountains in eastern California. The axes -of these two mountain ranges make an angle of over 140° with each other, -and at their point of intersection in northern California rises Mt. -Shasta, one of the most conspicuous and imposing topographical features -of the Pacific coast, above which it rises 14,440 feet. Early in the -days of western exploration its summit was declared to be inaccessible, -but whether this assertion was made to inspire greater respect for the -abode of the Indian gods, or to excuse a disinclination to physical -exertion, must ever remain a matter of conjecture. Certain it is that -the ascent, frequently made within the last few years by ladies is not a -remarkable feat of mountaineering. Under the direction of Captain Dutton -of the Geological Survey, a detailed exploration of the mountain has been -accomplished. - -The belt of territory bordering upon the Pacific embraces two parallel -mountain chains, the Sierra Nevada and Cascade Range on the east, and -the illy-defined Coast Range on the west. Between these lies the valley -region of the Willamette and Sacramento rivers, whose headwaters are -among that complex group of mountains through which the Klamath River, in -a deep cañon, finds its way to the sea. - -Of all the volcanic regions of the world, the one to which Mt. Shasta -belongs is the largest. It extends from Lassen’s Peak, in California, -north through Oregon to Mt. Rainier in Washington Territory, and eastward -far into Idaho, covering an area larger than that of France and Great -Britain combined. Within this wide expanse are extensive plains, whose -broad surfaces indicate that the basaltic lava beneath at the time of -its eruption possessed such a high degree of fluidity that it spread -out far and wide like the waters of a lake. Upon the western border the -more viscous lavas built up the Cascade Range, whose mammoth arch is -surmounted by numerous mighty volcanoes, among which Mt. Shasta is one of -the most prominent. - -Seen from all sides Mt. Shasta presents a remarkably regular outline, and -its beautiful conoidal form has excited the admiration of many observers. -Its slopes are exceptional for the high angle and graceful curves of -their inclination. The upper 3,000 feet of the mountain, where cliffs are -most abundant, dips away toward all points of the compass at an average -angle of 37°. Further down the mountain the slope gradually decreases in -inclination to 20°, then to 15°, 10°, and finally the long, gentle slope -about the base of the mountain deviates but 5° from a horizontal plane. -In all directions from the summit of Mt. Shasta its flanks increase in -length as they decrease in angle of inclination, presenting a curved -mountain side concave upwards, and has the greatest curvature near the -top. Mr. Gilbert, in his excellent monograph of the Henry Mountains, -shows that such a curve is the natural result of erosion. In the case of -some volcanic mountains, however, an important coöperative cause may be -found in the fact that at each successive eruption the lava decreased in -quantity and became more viscous. The grandest approach to Mt. Shasta -is from the north, in the broad valley of the same name, where it is -presented to full view, and the deepest impression of its colossal -dimensions is experienced. It stands at the head of Shasta valley, above -which it rises 11,000 feet, with a volume of over 224 cubic miles, and -presents, in strange contrast with the sterility of the valley, the -luxuriant vegetation of the forest belt. The timbered slopes lie between -the altitudes 4,000 and 7,000 feet above the sea, and belong to the -most magnificent forest regions of the world. Above the forest belt the -mountain rises more than a mile into the heights of eternal snow, and its -brilliant white slopes present an imposing contrast to the deep green of -the pines beneath. Viewed from the southeast, Mt. Shasta appears to be -surmounted by a single peak, but seen from the north, the upper portion -is found to be double. The smaller of the two cones, broad topped and -crater shaped, has been designated Shastina, to distinguish it from the -other acute cone, which rises 2,000 feet higher and forms the summit of -Shasta proper. - -The influence of temperature upon precipitation, and the limits which it -throws about arboreal vegetation, are here most forcibly illustrated. -In Shasta valley, at an elevation of about 3,000 feet above the sea, -where the average temperature is high as compared with that upon the -mountain itself, the precipitation is always in the form of rain, -but not sufficient in quantity, especially on account of its unequal -distribution throughout the year, to support more than a scanty growth -of stunted trees. In the autumn storm clouds gather about the summit, -and showers become frequent, spreading over the land in copious rains. -Before the spring eight ninths of all the annual rain has fallen and the -country is brilliant with living green. As summer advances the refreshing -showers disappear and the cloudless sky affords no protection from -the burning sun; the bright green fades away and the earth gradually -assumes that uninviting seared aspect which pervades all nature in the -season of drought. Upon the lower slopes of the mountain, by its cooling -influence upon the atmosphere, the rainfall is greatly increased, and -the vegetation is luxuriant. The vegetation is almost wholly coniferous. -Among nearly a score of species the sugar-pine is monarch, frequently -attaining a diameter of twelve and a height of over two hundred feet. -Farther up the mountain these gradually give way to the firs, whose -tall, graceful forms are in perfect keeping with the majestic mountain -behind them. Their black and yellow spotted trunks and branches, draped -in long pendant moss, present a weird, almost dismal aspect, making a -fit promenade for the mythical deities supposed by the aborigines to -inhabit the mountains. To assume that in the timber belt the slopes of -the mountain are everywhere covered with majestic trees, would certainly -be wide of the truth, for within the forests are large treeless tracts, -sometimes hundreds of acres in extent. From a distance these green, -velvety acres appear to be very inviting pastures, and present the most -desirable path of ascent. A closer examination, however, discovers to the -observer that instead of grass these green fields are clothed in such a -dense shrubbery of manzanita, ceanothus, and other bushy plants, as to be -almost impassable. One attempt to cross a patch of chaparral, or “Devil’s -acre,” as it is sometimes appropriately called in western vernacular, -will convince the traveler that his best path lies in the forest. - -As the timber gradually dwindles away from the foot of the mountain -to almost nothing in Shasta valley, so also it diminishes in stature, -from an altitude of 7,000 feet upwards to the snow region, where the -precipitation is generally, if not always, in a solid form of snow in -winter and sleet in summer. - -Of the tree-like vegetation, one of the pines reaches farthest up -the slopes. Its stem grows shorter and the top flattens until, at an -elevation of about 9,000 feet, the branches are spread upon the ground, -so that not unfrequently the pedestrian finds his best path upon -the tree-tops. Beyond these, on the snowless slopes, are found only -scattered blades of grass, and the welcome little hulsea, the edelweiss -of our Alpine regions, with its bright flowers to alleviate the arctic -desolation of the place. The red and yellow lichens cling to the -rocks and the tiny prolococcus flourishes in the snow, so that one is -frequently surprised, upon looking back, to see his bloody footsteps. - -In the Alps, between the forests and the snow, are often found extensive -pastures where the herds which furnish milk for the celebrated Swiss -cheese are grazed during the milder seasons of the year. In northern -California similar pastures do not occur about the snow-capped summits, -probably on account of the unequal distribution of the annual rainfall. - -To those who are fond of novelty, the greatest interest of the upper -portion of Mt. Shasta attaches to its glaciers. They are five in number, -and all are found side by side upon its northern half, forming an almost -continuous covering above 10,000 feet for that portion of the mountain -point. Upon the northern and western slope of the mountain is the Whitney -glacier, with its prominent terminal moraines. Next to the eastward is -the Bulam glacier, with the large pile of debris at the lower end. Then -comes the broad Hottums glacier and the Wintum. The Konwakitong, which is -the smallest of the group, lies upon the southeast side of the mountain. -Whitney glacier is more like those of the Alps than any other one of the -group. Its snow-field lies upon the northwestern slope of the mountains, -from whence the icy mass moves down a shallow depression between Shasta -and Shastina. Mr. Ricksecker, who has made a careful topographical survey -of the mountain, has measured the dimensions of all its glaciers. The -limits of the Whitney glacier are well defined; its width varies from -1,000 to 2,000 feet, with a length of about two and one-fifth miles, -reaching from the summit of the mountain down to an altitude of 9,500 -feet above the sea. It is but little more than a decade since the first -glaciers were discovered within the United States, and we should not be -disappointed to learn that the largest of them, about the culminating -point of the Cascade Range, would appear Liliputian beside the great -glacier of the Bernese Oberland, and yet the former are as truly glaciers -as the latter. In the upper portion of its course, passing over prominent -irregularities in its bed, the Whitney glacier becomes deeply fractured, -producing the extremely jagged surface, corresponding to the surfaces of -the Alpine glaciers. Lower down the crevasses develop, and these, with -the great fissure which separates it from the steep slopes of Shastina, -attest the motion of the icy mass. They frequently open and become -yawning chasms, reaching 100 feet into the clear, green ice beneath. Near -its middle, upon the eastern margin, the Whitney glacier receives large -contributions of sand, gravel and bowlders, from the vertical cliffs -around which it turns to move in a more northerly direction. In this way -a prominent lateral moraine is developed. From the very steep slopes -of Shastina, upon the western side, the glacier receives additions in -the form of avalanches. Here the snow clings to its rocky bed until the -strain resulting from accumulation is great enough to break it from its -moorings and precipitate it upon the glacier below. The most striking -feature of the Whitney glacier, and that which is of greatest interest -from a geological point of view, is its terminal moraine, which appears -to be fully a mile in length. Its apparent length is much greater than -the real, from the fact that the glacial ice extends far down beneath the -covering of detritus. It is so huge a pile of light colored debris, just -above the timber line, that it is plainly visible from afar off. - -In comparing the morainal material about Mt. Shasta with that of Alpine -glaciers, a feature that is particularly noticeable is the smallness -of the bowlders. Upon Alpine glaciers they frequently have a diameter -greater than ten feet, but about the Whitney and other glaciers of Mt. -Shasta they are rarely as much as three feet in diameter. This is readily -explained by the fact that the glaciers of Mt. Shasta do not move in -deep valleys bounded by long, deep slopes, with many high cliffs which -afford an opportunity for the formation of large bowlders. Although the -Whitney glacier has its boundaries more clearly defined than any of the -other glaciers about Mt. Shasta by the depression in which it moves, -the valley is very shallow, and one looks in vain along its slopes for -traces of polished rocks like those so magnificently displayed on the way -from Meiningen to Grimsel, in the valley of the Aar. Below the terminal -moraine the milky water of Whitney creek wends its way down the northern -slope, plunges over a fall hundreds of feet high, into a deep cañon, and -near the base of the mountain is swallowed up by the thirsty air and -earth. The presence of marginal crevasses, lateral and terminal moraines, -and the characteristic milky stream which issues from the lower end, are -proofs that the Whitney glacier still moves, but the rate of motion has -not yet been determined. The row of stakes planted last July were covered -with snow before the party could reach them again in the latter part of -October. - -Upon the northwestern slope of the mountain, besides the Whitney glacier, -there is the Bulam, differing chiefly in that it is contained in a -broader, less definite valley, and forming an intermediate step toward -the Hottum glacier, which is one of the most important and remarkable -of the group. Unlike ordinary glaciers, it has no valley in which it is -confined, but lies upon the convex surface of the mountain. Its upper -surface, instead of being concave anywhere, is convex throughout from -side to side, and its width (123 miles) is almost as great as its length -(162 miles). At several places the surface of the glacier is made very -rough by the inequalities of its bed. This is especially true of its -southern portion, where prominent cliffs form the only medial moraine -discovered upon Mt. Shasta. Throughout the greater part of its expanse -the glacier is deeply crevassed, exposing the green ice occasionally -to the depth of a hundred feet. The thickness of this glacier has been -greatly overestimated. In reality, instead of being 1,800 to 2,500 feet -thick, it does not appear where greatest to be more than a few hundred, -for at a number of places it is so thin that its bed is exposed. Its -terminal moraine is a huge pile, nearly half a mile in width, measured in -the direction of glacial motion. - -Next south of the Hottum glacier is the Wintum, which attains a length of -over two miles, and ends with an abrupt front of ice in a cañon. Upon the -southeastern slope of Mt. Shasta, at the head of a large cañon, is the -Konwakitong glacier. Notwithstanding its diminutive size, its crevasses -and the muddy stream it initiates indicate clearly that the ice mass -continues to move. The amount of moraine material upon its borders is -small, and yet, of all the glaciers about Mt. Shasta, it is the only -one which has left a prominent record of important changes. The country -adjacent to the west side of the Konwakitong cañon has been distinctly -glaciated so as to leave no doubt that the Konwakitong glacier was once -very much larger than it is at the present time. The rocks on which it -moved have been deeply striated, and so abraded as to produce the smooth, -rounded surfaces so common in glaciated regions. At the time of its -greatest extension the glacier was 5.8 miles in length and occupied an -area of at least seven square miles, being over twenty times its present -size. Its limit is marked at several places by a prominent terminal -moraine. The thickness of the glacier where greatest was not more than -200 feet, for several hills within the glaciated area were not covered. -The striated surfaces and moraines do not extend up the slopes of those -hills more than 200 feet above their bases. The thinness of the glacier -is completely in harmony with the limited extent of its erosion, although -the rocks are distinctly planed off, so that the low knobs and edges have -regularly curved outlines. It is evident that a great thickness of rock -has been removed by the ice, and that the period of ice erosion has been -comparatively brief. During the lapse of time, however, there have been -important climatic oscillations, embracing epochs of glacial advance and -recession. None of the glaciers about Mt. Shasta, excepting the Wintum, -terminate in cañons, but all of them give rise to muddy streams which -flow in cañons to the mountain’s base. The cañons are purely the product -of aqueous erosion, and contain numerous waterfalls, whence the streams -in descending leap over the ends of old lava flows 50 to 300 feet in -height. - -In strong contrast with the arctic condition of Mt. Shasta to-day, -are the circumstances attending its upbuilding, when it was an active -volcano belching forth streams of fiery lava that flowed down the slopes -now occupied by ice. It is the battlefield of the elements within the -earth against those above it. In its early days the forces beneath were -victorious, and built up the mountains in the face of wind and weather, -but gradually the volcanic energy died away and the low temperature -called into play those destructive agents which are now reversing the -process and gradually reducing the mountain toward a general level. A -microscopical examination of the rocks of Mt. Shasta reveals the fact -that it is composed chiefly, if not wholly, of three kinds of lava. -Several small areas of metamorphic rocks occur within its borders, but -there is no evidence to show that they form any considerable portion of -the mountain. - -The range in mineralogical composition of the lavas is not extensive. -There are only four minerals which deserved to be ranked as essential and -characteristic constituents: they are plagioclase, feldspar, pyroxene, -generally in the form of hypersthene hornblende, and olivine. The kind -of lava which has by far the widest distribution upon the slopes of Mt. -Shasta is composed essentially of plagioclase, feldspar and hypersthene, -with some angite, and belongs to the variety of volcanic rocks which, -on account of composition, and the place where first discovered, has -been designated hypersthene andesite. Lava of this type has been shown -by Messrs. Cross and Giddings of the Geological Survey to be widely -distributed beyond the Mississippi. Upon the western slope of the -mountain, especially in the vicinity of the prominent volcanic cone, the -form of which suggests its name sugar loaf, the lava contains prominent -crystals of hornblende instead of so much hypersthene and angite, and -closely resembles the celebrated hornblende andesite lava from among -the extinct volcanoes of central France. The third variety of lava -which enters into the structure of Mt. Shasta is familiar to every -one as basalt. It occurs in relatively small quantities, and has been -extruded low down upon the slopes of the mountain. From the fact that -there are three kinds of lava in the structure of Mt. Shasta, it must -not be concluded that they all issued from the same volcanic vent, nor -that they were effused from three separate and distinct openings. In -reality, contributions to the upbuilding of Mt. Shasta have been made by -over twenty volcanic orifices, of which two have been principal and far -more prolific than all the parasitic events combined. This enumeration -does not include those large fissures in the side of the cone, which are -evidently attributable to the hydrostatic pressure of the molten mass -within. The small number of parasitic cones on the slopes of Mt. Shasta -is somewhat remarkable, especially when we compare it with the largest -volcano in Europe. Although it is much higher than Etna, its base is less -expansive, and its size about half that of the mighty monarch of the -Mediterranean. Upon the irregular slopes of Etna there are 200 prominent -subsidiary cones, beside over 400 of smaller size. On the contrary, Mt. -Shasta has but a score of such accessories, and the remarkable regularity -of its acute form forcibly expresses the highly concentrated type of -volcanic energy which it represents. - -From none of the vents upon its slopes have all three kinds of lava -escaped, but from the summits of Shasta and Shastina, which are the -products of the two largest and most prolific vents, both hornblende -and hypersthene andesite have been effused. All the other orifices were -subordinate, and each furnished but one kind of lava; from seven of them -came hypersthene andesite; eight, hornblende andesite; and the remaining -five, basalt. The relative age of the cones which mark the position of -the volcanic vents is indicated by the amount of degradation which each -has suffered. Judged by this criterion, those of hornblende andesite -are the oldest and those of basalt the youngest. The latter are for -the most part made of lapilli, and are not crater-shaped as is usually -the case in other portions of the Cascade Range, but are elliptical in -form, with dome-shaped summits. The presence of considerable piles of -ejectments about the subsidiary vents indicates that the eruptions from -these orifices were often of a violent character. On the other hand there -are some without a trace of lapilli, or anything else to indicate an -interruption in the quiet flow of lava welling out of the depths. - -Upon the eastern slope of the mountain the cañon, excavated by Mud -creek, brings to light the oldest Shasta lavas now exposed, and they -are seen under such circumstances that their succession can be readily -understood. The oldest lava known is hornblende andesite, which is now in -an advanced state of disintegration, and it seems probable that in the -early stages of its development a large proportion of the lavas ejected -from Mt. Shasta were of the same mineralogical constitution. These were -succeeded by extensive effusions of hypersthene andesite. Later in its -history, several small streams of hornblende andesite again burst forth -from the northeastern side of the cone, but the final effort of the -volcanic energy was spent in the ejection of hypersthene andesite. The -conditions which determine the oscillation in mineralogical composition -of the lavas are as yet conjectural, but when discovered, and their -influence demonstrated, an important step forward will have been made in -determining the relations of many volcanic rocks. - -A striking feature in the structure of Mt. Shasta is the paucity of -volcanic ashes, lapilli, and other ejected matter. Only one important -deposit of the kind has been discovered. It clings about the summit of -the mountain, and is evidently the product of its last eruption. The -summit of Shastina is so regular in outline, and the shape of its crater -so well preserved, that many have supposed it to be composed chiefly of -scoria and ashes; but this is not the case, for its slopes are of angular -fragments of compact lava. - -Mt. Shasta is almost a pure lava cone, and its remarkably regular form -is a matter of wonder. That it is so regular is a sequence of several -favorable circumstances. Although a score of parasitic cones spring from -the side of the mountain, and have contributed to its upbuilding, yet -their additions have been so small compared with the vast effusions from -the summit craters Shasta and Shastina, as not to greatly modify the -outline of the mountain. More important circumstances are to be found in -the non-explosive character of the eruptions and the successive changes -in the physical properties of the erupted lava, as the development of the -mountain progressed. - -It is well known that among the volcanoes of the Hawaiian Islands the -eruptions are quiet and effusive. The fiery streams of liquid lava course -down the gentle slopes for many miles. - -Although the mountain is 14,000 feet high, its lavas have such a high -degree of liquidity, and retain their mobility so long after eruption, -that the base of the mountain spread by them has a diameter of about -seventy miles, and an average slope of 5° 1,800 feet below its summit. -Mauna Loa is nearly twenty miles in diameter. On the contrary, at a -corresponding position its greatest diameter is less than two miles, a -very remarkable difference, which is due chiefly to the unequal fluency -of the two lavas. The very oldest lavas of Mt. Shasta lie buried within -its mass, and we know nothing of their physical properties, but from an -examination of the oldest ones now visible, it is evident that at the -time of their eruption they possessed a higher degree of fluidity, and -were more voluminous than those of later date. The long, gentle slopes -about the base of the mountain are formed by comparatively old lavas. -Ascending the mountain, one goes up as if upon a giant staircase, with -long, inclined steps rising abruptly over the ends of successive shorter -and newer lava flows. - -It is evident in comparing the older and newer lava flows of Mt. Shasta -that there has been a more or less regular decrease in the quantity of -lava extruded during successive eruptions, and this is exactly what -we should expect when we consider that as the pipe is lengthened by -successive effusions, the hydrostatic pressure of the columns of lava -within is gradually augmented. The increased compress of the lava flows -toward the summit of the mountain indicates that the lava of successive -extrusions became more and more viscous until at last the eruptions -became explosive, and gave rise to the ejectments now clinging upon the -upper slopes of the mountain to evidence the character of the final -outburst. - -It is not only possible, but very probable that the increased viscosity -of lava toward the closing scenes of the volcano is correllated to the -diminution of temperature. Since the beginning of the historic period -there have been no eruptions from Mt. Shasta, but the freshness of its -lavas indicate that not many centuries ago, with other volcanoes of the -Cascade Range, it was in a state of vigorous activity, and groups of -hot springs and fumeroles about the summit still attest the presence of -smouldering volcanic energy, which may perhaps some day break through its -confining walls. - -The upbuilding of Mt. Shasta is but a matter of yesterday, as compared -with the lapse of ages, since the birth of some of its neighbors. The -complex group of mountains to the westward, embracing the Scott, Trinity, -Salmon and Siskiyou, are composed in large part, at least, of ancient -crystalline rocks of both aqueous and igneous origin; through these the -rivers have cut deep cañons, the Klamath, on its way to the Sacramento -southward, from the very base of Mt. Shasta to its broad valley -stretching from the Sierra Nevada to the Coast Range. The cañon of the -Sacramento was cut down to nearly its present level, and the mountains -sculptured into existing forms long before the eruptions of Mt. Shasta -had ceased, for a fiery deluge escaping from the southern slope of Mt. -Shasta entered the Sacramento cañon, and as a lava stream 200 feet deep -followed its course for over fifty miles. - -Towering more than a mile above its neighbors, perhaps the youngest of -the group, Mt. Shasta is the end of a long series of volcanoes in the -Cascade Range, stretching northwest to Mt. Tacoma. This range, composed -chiefly of volcanic material, is cut across by the cañons of the Columbia -and the Klamath rivers, in the former of which, beneath a thickness of -3,500 feet of lava, are found strata containing Tertiary fossils. At the -southern base of Mt. Shasta, in the cañon of the McLoud River, similar -beds of volcanic debris are found, but without fossils, nevertheless it -is evident that the main mass of the Cascade Range and its volcanoes -originated in recent geologic times, and from the fact that solfataras, -fumeroles, and hot springs are still abundant upon their slopes, they can -not be reckoned among those which are wholly extinct. - -A frontiersman in Washington Territory tells of an outburst of Mt. St. -Helens in the winter of 1841-2. - -Upon somewhat more trustworthy authority it is said that to the southward -of Mt. Shasta, about forty miles, a small cone which may be considered -parasitic to Lassens Peak, has been in eruption as late as January, -1850, ejecting considerable ashes and cinders, and pouring forth a mass -of lava, which gradually spread, attaining a circumference of over four -miles, and presenting an abrupt embankment-like termination upon all -sides eighty to ninety feet in height. Trees, blackened by the fiery -stream, are still standing to furnish incontestable evidence of its -recency. - -The country is full of rumors of subterranean rumblings, and the people -are prone to attribute them to the dying throes of volcanic energy. - -One of the most striking features of the region is the strongly -contrasted types of volcanic action in Mt. Shasta. Both have -approximately the same area. In the valley there have been many scores of -volcanic vents, among which the energy has been so widely diffused that -none of them have furnished lava sufficient to form a hill more than a -few hundred feet in height. - -On the contrary, the mountain represents a small number of vents, and the -volcanic was nearly all concentrated in one place, so that the extrusions -were all piled up, one upon another, and resulted in the upbuilding of -one majestic elevation. - -Thus it has been from a small beginning, probably in early Tertiary -times, that by successive boilings over, so to speak, additions have -been made to the mountain until it attained a height beyond its present -altitude. The constructive agents reached their limit, dissipated their -energy, and gave way to destructive ones, which are gradually undoing the -work. - -Mt. Shasta must ever be one of the most popular mountains among tourists -of the West. It is easily accessible from a main line of travel which -passes by its base, at Berryvale, where comfortable quarters and -necessary outfit for the ascent can be obtained. - -The streams are filled with trout, and the forest with game, so that the -region affords many attractions for the sportsman. - -Several hours’ travel by a good trail brings the party to Camp Ross, -at the timber line, from which the ascent can easily be made in a day -without danger. - - - - -REASSUREMENT. - -BY ADA IDDINGS GALE. - - - Fear not, heart—though round thee ply - Battle’s emblems—far and nigh. - Though thy comrades round thee fall— - Ensigns totter on the wall— - Though the long battalions grim - Seem to cloud thy future’s rim. - If amidst the wild affray - Thou grow sick, and turn away— - Pause: that would be worst of all, - If in fleeing, thou should’st fall. - Stand fast, girt with sword and shield— - If thou fall, fall in the field. - What matters it if sad defeat - Meet thy eager, hurrying feet; - What, if when the banners wave - Thou should’st find a shallow grave. - - Foeward, bravely turn thy face, - Seek no measure small of grace; - And when loud the trumpets call, - Bravely stand or bravely fall. - Whether vict’ry or defeat, - Laurel wreath or winding sheet - Be thy meed—’twill differ not, - Soon or late ’twill be forgot. - Only thou, heart, e’er shalt know - Thy deserved praise here below. - Thou, and One that on his throne - Ne’er forgets to watch his own, - One that marks where sparrows flee, - Thee will guard with equity. - Then be brave with all thy might— - This thy guerdon—for the right. - - - - -WILL IT PAY? - -BY CHARLES BARNARD. - - -There are some people who always ask this question. You may suggest -anything, a book to read, a science to be studied, or some new work to be -done, and, though they may not be so rude as to say so, they will wonder -how it will pay. “Better not go into farming, my boy. It doesn’t pay.” -“Better not do this or do that. It won’t pay you.” After a little more -of this sort of thing you wonder if it pays to be born, or to live, or -to do anything whatever. Now, what do they mean by this question? By far -the larger part of those who ask it mean that the work, whatever it may -be, does not pay a handsome return in money. A few mean something quite -different. They know all about it, they have seen the world, and it is -all a hollow show, and their favorite dolls are full of sawdust. These -people are dead, but they have forgotten it. - -Let us see about this. If there is any one business in the world about -which the people in it are sure it does not pay, it is farming. “It does -not pay.” So many people have said this that people who are not farmers -have really come to think it must be so. Is it true? Here is an ear of -field corn with twelve rows of grains, and twenty grains to a row. Fair -average corn, with 240 grains to the ear. We can take off one grain -and plant it in the ground, and within six months have two ears of the -same corn, or 480 grains from one grain. How big a profit is that? One -grain increases to 480 grains. Is there any manufacturing business, art -or profession that pays such an enormous return? In spite of this they -say it does not pay. Then there must be something the matter with the -business. Nature has provided that the increase of plants shall be very -great. One seed may increase a hundred fold, or five hundred fold, or a -thousand fold. Clearly the work of raising plants with such advantages -in its favor ought to pay, and if it does not, it is equally clear that -something is wrong, some one to blame. - -The city housekeeper finds at her store on the avenue a head of lettuce. -Rather wilted and damaged by rough handling. Six cents. You can plant -43,560 heads of lettuce on one acre of ground. At six cents a head that -is $2,613.60 taken out of one acre of land inside of eight weeks. And -yet this person gravely tells us lettuce raising does not pay. What can -the matter be, and where has all this money gone? A city like New York -will calmly eat 40,000 heads of lettuce in a day or two, and pay out over -$2,000 for it, and be ready to eat and pay as much more the next week. -The money is certainly paid to somebody, and if the farmer still insists -it does not pay to raise the lettuce, there must be a reason for it. - -Ask the groceryman. He replies that he must live and must have a good -slice out of the money to pay him for buying the lettuce down town and -bringing it up to his store. It isn’t so evident that he must live as he -fancies, because there was a time when there were no storekeepers and -the world got along beautifully without them. However, he is convenient, -and we will allow him his slice out of the profits. The teamster, the -wholesale dealer, the freight handler, the railroad people all say that -they too must live, and to please them we will admit that is so, though -there is not much to prove it. They must share in the $2,000 paid for -the acre of lettuce. Lastly, the farmer gets what the others decide he -may have after they have had what they decide is their share. If we ask -each one of this row of men, it is quite possible each one will say it -does not pay, but, somehow, none except the farmer says anything about -it. The last man, the actual producer of the lettuce, is the only one to -complain. His business is the only one concerned that people say does not -pay. - -There was once a young man who started out bravely in life, resolved -to reform the world. After trying for some time he gave it up and was -ever after entirely contented if he paid his board regularly every week. -It is useless to think we can reform this matter all in a day. The day -will come when these things will be changed and equity and justice will -take the place of the utter selfishness that now marks competition in -business. Our best plan is to see what we can do to become producers -ourselves. We want the lettuce ourselves. We must pay the retail price -for it, and if at this price there is a big profit in raising it, we -would like the entire profit placed in our hands. The people in these -United States are divided into two great classes—the producers and the -consumers—those who raise things to eat, and those who are in other -trades and eat without producing. The producers are the farmers and -fishermen. The consumers make all the rest of the people. The producers -also eat, but their food costs them very much less than the food used -by the non-producers. Of course we can see there must be non-producers -or the trades and arts would perish, and the nation would become a mere -agricultural community, content with sleeping and eating. At the same -time, we must observe that a very large proportion of those who produce -nothing live in small towns and villages and own land. We see everywhere -in our smaller cities and towns hundreds of homes having gardens about -the house. A little discouraged grass, a dyspeptic tree or two, a forlorn -grape vine straggling over the fence, plenty of dusty gravel, and a -mortgage on the house and lot. Within the house bitter complaints against -the high price of food, much fretfulness and weariness at the scant, -monotonous bill of fare. Boys and girls growing up with white hands and -narrow chests (to say nothing of stomachs that they should be ashamed to -own) and the storekeeper saving money on the next corner. - -This is the reason it does not pay. We want to have white hands and be -genteel and all that. We want to be consumers, and we unwittingly combine -to get all we can out of the selling and handling of food and leave the -producer as little as we think he can be forced to take. We must get rid -of this imported nonsense about work. (It all came from Europe, and is -wholly un-American.) We must make the land give us more food. Our boys -and girls must go out of doors, must learn to be producers. They should -be shown that it is disgraceful to live in a mortgaged house, that it is -disgraceful to stand on any part of God’s ground and complain that food -is scarce or high when that food might come out of the very ground under -our ungrateful feet. The Chinese, the Japanese, the Dutch, the French, -the Swiss cultivate every rod of ground they own. No barren yards about -their houses, taxed and yet paying no return. Why, in England even the -strips of waste land along the railway tracks are cultivated, and the -trains move between rows of cabbages half a hundred miles long. - -This is the way for thousands of families to make it pay. Produce your -own food and sell it to yourselves. A head of lettuce grown on your own -ground and eaten on your own table saves the retail price of a head of -lettuce, and if there is a profit on it for all the people who touch it, -clearly you have the entire profit for yourself. On reading this about -five hundred people will calmly remark that this is not so. They have -tried it and it cost more to raise their own vegetables than it did to -buy them at the stores. The wages of the gardener come to more than all -the things were worth. So much the worse for the gardener. You should -be your own gardener. Where are your boys and girls? At the base ball -grounds, or the rink, or at the foolish piano—doing nothing—earning -nothing and trying to be genteel? Garden work is hard on the back and -hurts the hands. Yes, because your hands are weak and your back is not -strong, and of these things you should be ashamed. - -The price of land in this country is steadily rising. All the best farm -land is being taken up. The cost of food is advancing. It will never -again be as cheap as it has been in the past. The time has come when we -must economize. We can not longer afford to carry those neglected garden -plots and waste spaces about our houses. They must produce food for the -people who own them. We must be our own producers. We must study plants -and animals. These represent food and wealth, and it is simply an untruth -to say it will not pay to raise them. If your garden costs more than the -retail price of food in your neighborhood the fault is your own. There -is something the matter with your soil or your seeds, or your method -of culture. Think of the profit of raising lettuce at $2,000 an acre, -and yet that is the return that an acre will produce if paid for at the -retail price. Moreover, the lettuce would be removed from the ground in -ample time for another crop, likewise bringing a profit. Of course, if -your land is worth five dollars a foot, the interest on one foot would -be more than the value of the single lettuce plant you could raise upon -it. In such a case you had better sell out and buy cheaper land. For -the majority of homes where there is a garden the land is cheap enough -to produce more or less of the food needed in the house, and there is no -reason whatever why it may not be raised at a handsome profit. - -The Chautauqua University recognizes the importance of this matter. Its -aim is to help, to guide, and to instruct, and it is now, through the -liberality of its friends, able to help, guide and instruct all who wish -to learn something of the art of producing food and saving money. It sees -hundreds of boys and girls totally ignorant of these common things. It -sees young people wondering what they shall do, perplexed and worried -over this question of earning a living, and discouraged at the high cost -of living, when a part of their living is going to waste beneath their -feet. The Chautauqua Town and Country Club was formed to help those -who wish to help themselves. It aims to show by simple lessons how to -raise plants of all kinds, how to care for animals, how to take care of -your garden so that it will be a source of pleasure and profit. Half -a thousand people have already joined the club and are now at work in -good earnest. Should you wish to know more about it, write to Miss K. F. -Kimball, Plainfield, N. J. - -All this is meant for you. - -What are you going to do about it? - - - - -GEOGRAPHY OF THE HEAVENS FOR JULY. - -BY PROF. M. B. GOFF, - -Western University of Pennsylvania. - - -THE SUN, - -Of which so much has been said in these pages, continues to be -discussed with increasing interest by astronomers of both hemispheres, -who every day supply their quota of new ideas as the result of their -investigations. In THE CHAUTAUQUAN for March, 1884, the statement was -made that “it has already been demonstrated that the colored prominences -may be examined at any time when the sun can be seen; and it is believed -that Mr. Huggins has accomplished the difficult feat of photographing -the corona, so that it, too, may be scrutinized _at leisure_.” In the -April number of the _Nineteenth Century_, we find a very interesting -account by Mr. Huggins himself, of his operations in this line. As yet -the experiments have not been in all respects satisfactory; but so much -has been done as to leave no doubt of the final result. As Mr. H. tells -us, the great obstacle to overcome is the immense curtain of air, which -“hangs” between us and the sun, and absorbs some forty per cent. of the -sun’s light (and heat). This absorption renders our atmosphere as light -at least as the sun’s corona, and makes it as difficult of observation -as a lesser light placed behind a greater. The same atmosphere being as -bright, or brighter, than the stars, prevents our seeing the latter in -daylight. During an eclipse of the sun, the shadow of the moon affords -us a long, funnel shaped tube through this great air curtain (which may -be forty, or one hundred, or more miles in thickness) and we are enabled -through it to see the sun’s corona. But “on an average, once in two years -this curtain of light is lifted for from _three_ to _six_ minutes”—a very -contracted period in which to obtain a knowledge of a phenomenon that -we know is constantly changing. If we had a Joshua, who could command -sun, moon and earth to stand still for the space of a few hours even, we -might discover what we so much wish to know, what is this corona. Or, if -we could go beyond this atmosphere of ours—place it between us and the -earth, we might do without a Joshua. But we can not get outside. Then the -next best thing is to get as nearly outside as possible. Dr. Copeland -tried this by climbing an elevation of 12,400 feet. Prof. Langley -ascended Mt. Etna, and on Mt. Whitney ascended to the height of 15,000 -feet; but at these heights the curtain was still too heavy, and no view -of the corona was obtained; or, as Prof. Langley expressed it, he “met -with entire non-success.” From reports in regard to observations made -in Egypt of the total eclipse of 1882, Mr. Huggins conceived the idea -of making a photographic plate so sensitive that it would distinguish -differences imperceptible to the eye, and on this plate take a picture -of the corona, and then examine it as one would the “photo” of a friend, -and mark its peculiarities. He made his first experiment in 1882, and -as a result “there seemed to be good ground to hope that the corona had -really been obtained upon the plates.” In 1883, a second attempt, under -more favorable circumstances was made, and “images of the sun exquisitely -defined, and free from all sensible trace of instrumental imperfection -were obtained.” On the 6th of May of the same year (1883) a total eclipse -of the sun occurred at Caroline Islands, and was there photographed by -Messrs. Lawrence and Woods, photographers of the Royal Society; and on -a comparison of these photographs of the sun’s corona during an eclipse -with his own taken both before and after the time of the eclipse (which -was not visible to Mr. H.), he had the satisfaction of seeing so strong -a resemblance as to convince him that he had photographed the corona -without an eclipse. Although having no doubt of the success of his -experiment, yet, on account of the unfavorable conditions of the climate, -it was determined to try a higher elevation; and the Riffel, near -Zarmatt, Switzerland, was selected as a suitable place to make further -trials. Mr. Ray Wood was selected as artist, and reached Riffel in July, -1884. But unfortunately, the “veil of finely divided matter of some -sort,” “of which we have heard so much in the accounts from all parts -of the earth of gorgeous sunsets and after-glows” seriously interfered -with the work; nevertheless, a number of plates were obtained on which -the corona showed itself with more or less distinctness. Not satisfied -with these results, Mr. Woods was deputed to go to the Cape of Good Hope, -where, under the direction of Dr. Gill, he is to make, or is, perhaps, -now making daily photographic representations of the corona, and laboring -fully to realize the anticipations of the esteemed Mr. Huggins. - -Meantime our sun makes his accustomed rounds, bringing with him the usual -accompaniments, hot weather and the “dog days.” He will on the 1st rise -at 4:34 a. m. and set at 7:33 p. m.; on the 16th, rise at 4:43 a. m., set -at 7:28 p. m.; and on the 30th, rise at 4:56 a. m., and set at 7:17 p. m. -During the month the length of the day will decrease from 15 h. 1 m. on -the 1st to 14 h. 21 m. on the 30th. The declination will in the same time -decrease four degrees and forty-three minutes. - - -THE MOON - -Enters upon its last quarter on the 5th, at 7:18 a. m.; new moon occurs -on the 12th, at 12:07 a. m.; first quarter on the 18th, at 7:11 p. m.; -full moon on the 26th, at 9:14 p. m. In perigee, or nearest the earth, on -the 11th, at 8:24 p. m.; in apogee, or farthest from the earth, on 25th, -at 4:18 a. m. Reaches its greatest elevation above the horizon, 66° 55′, -on the 11th; least elevation, 30° 7′, on the 23d. On the 1st, rises at -10:00 p. m.; on the 16th, sets at 10:26 p. m.; on the 30th, rises 9:05 p. -m. - - -MERCURY - -On the 13th, at 6:57 a. m., is 5° 39′ north of the moon; on the 17th, at -9:00 a. m., 11′ south of Venus; and on the 26th, at 2:00 a. m., 11′ south -of _Alpha_ in the constellation _Leo_, a very interesting conjunction, -but not visible to the naked eye. Mercury has a direct motion during the -month of 51° 51′; and his diameter increases from 5″ to 6.8″. On the 1st, -he rises at 4:56 a. m., and sets at 7:56 p. m.; on the 16th, rises at -6:23 a. m., and sets at 8:31 p. m.; on the 30th, rises at 7:16 a. m., and -sets at 8:22 p. m. - - -VENUS - -Makes but little show this month, being too near the “Source of Light.” -She will be evening star throughout the month, growing brighter as the -days pass by; her diameter increasing from 10.4″ on the 1st to 11.2″ on -the 30th. She has a direct motion of 38° 8′ 45″. On the 1st, rises at -5:50 a. m., sets at 8:34 p. m.; on the 16th, rises at 6:25 a. m., sets at -8:33 p. m.; and on the 30th, rises at 6:57 a. m., sets at 8:23 p. m. On -the 13th, at 10:21 p. m., 5° 22′ north of the moon; on 17th, at 9:00 a. -m., 11′ north of Mercury. - - -MARS - -Will be a morning star during this month. On the 1st rising at 2:30 a. -m., and setting at 5:08 p. m.; on the 16th, rising at 2:11 a. m., setting -at 5:01 p. m.; and on the 30th, rising at 1:54 a. m., setting at 4:50 p. -m. His diameter increases one tenth of a second of arc, and he makes a -direct motion of 22° 56′. On the 9th, at 3:44 p. m., he is 5° 1′ north of -the moon. - - -JUPITER. - -_Et tu, Jupiter_, art on the wane. Each day he sets more nearly with the -sun, and his diameter grows smaller, though monarch still of all the -planets. He rises on the 1st, 16th and 30th, at 9:00, 8:14, and 7:33 a. -m., respectively, and sets on the corresponding days at 10:19, 9:28, and -8:39 p. m. He makes a direct motion of 5° 25′ 42″. On the 15th, at 2:02 -a. m., is 3° 7′ north of the moon. - - -SATURN. - -Those who have not improved the past few months to obtain a view of the -beauties of this planet can not blame the writer. Their attention has -been called to the fact that his rings stand more widely open now than -they will again for fifteen years. But they need not despair; for in the -delightful coolness of a summer morning they may still improve their -opportunities; for Saturn rises the latter part of this month nearly with -the dawn, and those who care to leave their “downy couch” can catch him -before the rising of the sun. 3:56, 3:05, and 2:18 a. m., on the 1st, -16th and 30th will find him “at home;” and in August an earlier hour -will suit as well. During the month his diameter increases two tenths -of a second. On the 10th, at 5:48 p. m., he may be found 4° 7′ north of -the moon; and on the 20th, one minute south of the star _Eta_ in the -constellation _Gemini_. - - -URANUS. - -This planet, on the 1st, rises at 11:14 a. m., and sets at 11:20 p. m.; -on the 16th, rises at 10:17 a. m., sets at 10:23 p. m.; on the 30th, -rises at 9:25 a. m., sets at 9:29 p. m. No change in diameter, which -remains at 3.6″. On the 16th, at 6:37 p. m., 34′ north of the moon. - - -NEPTUNE. - -This slow motioned body, of which we know so little, and which not more -than one person out of 10,000 ever saw, makes a direct motion during the -month of 42′ 55″; its diameter is 2.6″; and on the 8th, at 6:59 a. m., -its position is 2° 33′ directly north of the moon. It may be interesting -to know that it will be a morning star which “will _not_ light the -traveler on his way,” during the entire month. Its times of rising are -1:52 a. m. on the 1st; 12:57 a. m. on the 16th, and at midnight on the -30th. - - - - -HOW AIR HAS BEEN LIQUEFIED. - -BY J. JAMIN, - -Of the French Academy. - - -In the interval between 1602 and 1626 four philosophers were born who -seem to have been divinely appointed to teach men the mysteries of air. -These were a German, Otto von Guericke (1602); two Frenchmen, Mariotte -and Pascal (1620, 1623), and finally an Englishman, Boyle (1626). Pascal -conceived the idea that air being material must have weight like other -materials, and consequently that the earth must be pressed upon by its -atmospheric envelope, and he proved this by the celebrated experiment at -Puy de Dôme. - -Soon after, Otto von Guericke, having invented the air pump, succeeded in -exhausting the air from a vessel and confirmed Pascal’s idea that air was -really heavy, while Mariotte and Boyle at the same time, each in his own -country, and by almost identical experiments, proved that air is elastic, -that its volume decreases by pressure, and generally in proportion to the -weight to which it is subjected. Mariotte modestly called this discovery -a rule of nature. We call it a physical law, and very suitably name it -in France “Mariotte’s Law,” and in England “Boyle’s Law.” - -It seemed necessary for science to collect her thoughts after this great -achievement. She seemed to think there was nothing more to discover. -Boyle and Mariotte would have been very much astonished if some one had -told them that this air, whose properties they had been demonstrating, -could be reduced to a liquid like water, and even to a solid like snow. -Nearly two centuries passed before the world was prepared for this new -discovery. We ourselves were ignorant of it until the month of April, -1883, when the Academy of Sciences received from Cracow these two -dispatches: - - “Oxygen completely liquefied; the liquid colorless as carbonic - acid.” (April 9th.) - - “Nitrogen frozen, liquefied by expansion; the liquid colorless.” - (April 16th.) - - WROBLEWSKI. - -Thus air has been reduced to a volume a thousand or fifteen hundred -times less than under ordinary conditions. It ceased to be a gas and took -the appearance of water. This astonishing result is only the last in a -long list of experiments which for a long time were fruitless; it is the -finishing touch to a building begun long ago, and on which many workmen -have labored. What has been the work of each of them? It is a long story. - -Van Marum, a philosopher and chemist of Harlem, is celebrated as the -constructor of an electric machine, the largest known, but he is more -justly celebrated for having been the first to liquefy a gas. Wishing -to know if ammonia would obey Mariotte’s law, he compressed it. Under a -pressure of six atmospheres it changed quickly to a transparent liquid. -Van Marum did not foresee the consequences of his experiments, and is -honored only as being the first successful performer of the experiment. -But Lavoisier, whose keener mind grasped all that these results implied, -did not hesitate to declare the general law that all substances were -capable of existing in three different states, and he illustrated his -belief most forcibly. “Let us consider for a moment what would happen to -the different substances which form the earth, if the temperature should -be quickly changed. Let us suppose that the earth were suddenly placed in -a region where the temperature would be much above that of boiling water; -soon the air, all liquids which can be vaporized at a temperature near -that of boiling water, and many metallic substances even, would expand, -be transformed into air-like fluids, and form part of the atmosphere. - -“On the contrary, if the earth should be suddenly placed in a very cold -temperature, for example, that of Jupiter or Saturn, the water of our -rivers and seas, and, probably, the greatest number of liquids which we -know would become solid.” - -“Air,” according to this supposition, or at least a part of the air-like -substances which compose it, “would doubtless cease to exist in its -present form; it would be changed to a liquid state, and this change -would produce new liquids of which we know nothing.” - -Lavoisier was mistaken about the temperature of Jupiter and Saturn, but -was right in his supposition that air would become a liquid; however, -as experiment did not prove the theory, the prediction was forgotten -and the question dropped. It slept a long time, for it was not until -1823 that it was revived by Faraday. The first experiments of this great -philosopher were on this subject. He was but twenty-two when he made -his first discovery, the liquefaction of chlorine. The details of this -experiment have been told by Tyndall. It is well known that when chlorine -gas and cold water are united, crystals are formed which contain to every -molecule of chlorine ten molecules of water. Faraday put some of these -into a closed tube and heated them until two separate liquids appeared; -one was water, the other floated on the surface of the water, and a -certain professor of Paris declared that it could be nothing but oil -carelessly left in the vessel. Faraday having opened the tube, found that -this substance began to boil, and then changed with an explosion into a -green gas. It was chlorine. Faraday, who was quick-tempered, immediately -took his revenge on the professor, to whom he wrote: “You will be pleased -to know, sir, that the oil left by carelessness in my apparatus was -nothing less than liquefied chlorine.” - -This first success decided the career of the young chemist. He announced -that all gases could be reduced to this state if subjected to a -sufficient pressure, and he undertook a series of experiments, of which -the success was doubtful, but the danger certain. He operated in this -way: He took a thick glass tube in the form of an inverted U; one branch -was left empty, in the other the materials for producing the gas to be -studied were placed and the whole closed. Obliged to gather in the empty -branch, the gas continually increased in pressure, and there were two -possible results to the experiment; either the gas would not change its -state, and the pressure would increase until the vessel broke, or when a -certain limit of pressure was reached, then the liquid would appear and -would continue to accumulate as long as the gas was disengaged. A dozen -gases were reduced in this way; among them were the following, which we -shall need: Ammonia, sulphurous acid, carbonic acid, and protoxide of -nitrogen, which at a temperature of ten degrees required a pressure equal -to sixty atmospheres. - -This pressure leaves no doubt about the danger which one runs in carrying -on such researches. If we remember that steam boilers generally support -a pressure of no more than ten atmospheres, if we recall the number and -the horror of their explosions we can hardly understand how a simple -glass tube could resist a pressure five or six times as great. When a gas -reaches the point of liquefaction, then the pressure ceases to increase, -but if it does not change from that condition the pressure increases -until an explosion necessarily occurs, and the debris of the vessel is -scattered as powder scatters the fragments of a shell. In the course of -Faraday’s researches he had thirty explosions. They did not stop him, but -it is easy to see that they did not encourage others. - -Happily there is a less dangerous method of reaching the same result, -it is to freeze the gas. In the same way that the vapor of water is -condensed when the temperature is lowered, so gases, which are really -vapors, will yield to sufficient cold. In 1824, Bussy succeeded in -condensing sulphurous acid gas. The gas was introduced into a balloon, -which was plunged into a freezing mixture of ice and salt. The gas was -liquefied and could be preserved indefinitely, if the balloon were -enclosed in an enamel vessel. In heating, it gave off vapors which, by -their pressure kept the remainder of the fluid, providing the glass was -strong enough. Thus, in two ways, by cold and by pressure, and still -better, by both combined, it is possible to liquefy a large number of -gases. - -When water is heated, it remains immovable up to 100 degrees Centigrade, -but then it is changed into vapor, or boils. This boiling is -characterized by a peculiar feature, the temperature remains fixed at -100 degrees. It must be concluded, therefore, that the heat produced by -the furnace and absorbed by the liquid is simply used in transforming -the water into vapor. This fact was first discovered by the English -philosopher, Black, who, not being able to explain the phenomenon, was -content to demonstrate it and to speak of the heat as _latent_. He saw -that it took five and a half times as long to change water into vapor -as to heat it from zero to 100 degrees, and that consequently it must -require five and a half times as much heat to work the change. Such is -the law of boiling in the air, but let us see what it is in a vacuum. - -It is clear that the pressure of the atmosphere on water is a hindrance -to its expansion into vapor, and that this hindrance increases or -diminishes with the pressure. In a vacuum, of course, the liquid is -free from the pressure, so that boiling ought to take place at a lower -temperature. - -And experiment teaches that this is the case; water boils at a -temperature of 82° or 65°, as the pressure is reduced to one half or a -quarter of an atmosphere, it boils at zero, and even below, in a vacuum. -And we reach this remarkable result, that the boiling and freezing points -unite, and that ice is formed while vapor is set free. But, although the -boiling is advanced, although it takes place at zero instead of at 100 -degrees, although the vapor is cold instead of hot, and the change takes -place in a vacuum instead of in the air, it is a general law that a large -quantity of heat is used, becomes latent, and enters into the formation -of vapor. - -Supposing that we fill a bronze vessel of very thick sides with water, -close it with a lid and fit into it a valve loaded with lead. Place this -in a furnace whose temperature has been raised to, say, 230 degrees. The -water will reach this temperature, and vapor will accumulate until it -reaches a pressure equal to more than twenty-seven atmospheres. - -Let us now open the valve, the vapor will escape, and as it carries with -it the heat necessary for its expansion, the temperature of the water -will gradually fall until it reaches 100 degrees, after which the boiling -will continue slowly and regularly; thus the water has been cooled and is -kept below the temperature of its surrounding wall because it must absorb -the extra heat which is required to change it to vapor. This apparatus is -called Papin’s digester. - -There is a similar experiment, but performed in a vacuum at the ordinary -temperature. Put some water into a closed decanter which is connected by -a tube with an air pump. As soon as a vacuum is produced the water begins -to boil and to freeze, for the vapor can only be formed by borrowing -heat, and there is nothing to take it from but the water itself, which -soon reaches zero and is frozen. This apparatus makes a very simple ice -house, as useful as convenient, and it proves, first, that boiling takes -place at the lowest temperatures providing the pressure is sufficiently -diminished; secondly, that it is always accompanied by a loss of heat; -and thirdly, that it lowers the temperature of the liquid below that of -the surrounding envelope, and the more as the vacuum is more complete. - -Just as opening the valve lets the vapor accumulated above the water in -Papin’s digester escape, and causes a fall in the temperature, so, by -opening the reservoirs in which one has confined a liquefied gas, one -sees it fall back to the boiling point. For example, take the liquid -obtained from the compression of sulphurous acid gas. As soon as the -reservoir containing it is opened the liquid begins to boil, and a -vapor is formed, it is the gas which re-forms. It absorbs the latent -heat necessary, taking it from exterior objects by radiation from the -liquid itself, from the vessel which holds it, and from the materials -into which it has been placed. It cools these until the point at which -sulphurous acid gas boils is reached, twelve degrees below zero; then the -liquid remains balanced between the radiation which tends to heat it and -vaporization, which cools it. The final result is that the temperature is -lowered and remains fixed at twelve degrees below zero. This is not all: -just as the boiling point of water is lowered below zero in a vacuum, -in the same way that of sulphurous acid gas falls below twelve degrees. -Bussy brought it down to sixty-eight, where it remained; not only water, -but mercury may be frozen by this means. - -Finally, the boiling of liquefied gases will freeze all neighboring -substances, and the greatest cold which one could obtain is produced -by their boiling in a vacuum. This property of sulphurous acid was -discovered in a still greater degree in protoxide of nitrogen, which was -changed into a liquid at a temperature of 0 degrees, and under a pressure -of thirty atmospheres. If allowed to boil in a vacuum, a temperature of -one hundred and ten degrees below zero was obtained. When science has -sown trade reaps the harvest; since by allowing liquefied gases to boil, -a temperature of one hundred and ten degrees below zero can be obtained, -and since the vapors which they give off carry away an enormous amount -of heat from the surrounding bodies, it is possible by means of this -cold produced to freeze water, make cold drinks, solidify mercury, cool -cellars, prevent food from decay, and to do many other things of similar -nature. A new art became possible, that of making cold. To-day it is -at the height of success. It is founded on this general principle: to -liquefy the gas by means of pressure, taking care that it does not become -heated, to introduce it into a freezer, where it is allowed to boil, -and from which it absorbs the heat, to carry off the gas and introduce -it again into the vessel, where it will by pressure be liquefied. The -action is constant, the same gas acts indefinitely, and there is no other -expense than that which is caused by running the pumps. In spite of these -fine results and the extraordinary efforts put forth, the end was not -attained. To be sure, some gases had yielded, but still there was a large -number which resisted every effort. Was it necessary to give up the idea -that the law of liquefaction of gases was general, or was it true that -the exceptions were only the results of insufficient means? Faraday had -never varied in his belief. One easily returns to the affections of his -youth, and he believed that the time had come for making fresh efforts -to prove his theory. After a rest of twenty-two years he determined to -again take up the liquefaction of the rebellious gases. Means were not -wanting. Thilorier had taught him how to solidify easily large masses -of carbonic acid, and by mixing this solid with ether make a powerful -freezing mixture; protoxide of nitrogen could be prepared with the same -ease and abundance, and would boil regularly in a vacuum at a temperature -of one hundred and twenty degrees below zero. Thus he was able to secure -a degree of cold before unknown. For compression, he had a pump formed -of two parts; one took the gas at its generation, and accumulated it in -a reservoir under a pressure of fifteen atmospheres; the second part -then received it; here it was subjected to a much greater pressure in a -strong glass vessel which was plunged into carbonic acid or protoxide of -nitrogen. Cold and pressure were thus combined. At that time nothing more -could be done; fortunately this was enough to subdue most gases. Faraday -had the satisfaction of liquefying nearly all gases, and of extending the -law which he had announced, but still six, only six, refused to give up; -among them were marsh gas, oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen. Science is a -battle which must be continually renewed; the more the gases resisted, -the greater the efforts made to conquer them. At first, new and energetic -means of pressure were invented. Aimé, a professor in Algiers, secured a -pressure of four hundred atmospheres, without result. M. Cailletet used a -hydraulic press which exerted a force equal to seven hundred atmospheres, -and afterward increased this to one thousand atmospheres, but still the -gas resisted. At last it was found that pressure alone, however enormous -it might be, could not liquefy the gases. - -An English philosopher, called Andrews, put a new face on matters. -He took carbonic acid gas at a temperature of about thirteen degrees -and compressed it. The gas began to diminish in volume, and under a -pressure of fifty atmospheres was suddenly liquefied, taking quickly -a very great density, and falling to the bottom of the vessel, where -it remained separated from its vapor by a surface as plainly marked -as that which marks water and air. Andrews afterward tried the same -experiment at a higher temperature, about twenty-one degrees. The same -results were produced with but one difference: the liquefaction was less -sudden. At a temperature of thirty-two degrees, instead of a separate -and distinct liquid, undulating striæ appeared as the only signs of a -change in condition which was not completed. Finally, at a temperature -of above thirty-two degrees there was neither striæ nor liquefaction, -but still it seemed as if a trace was preserved, for under certain -pressure the density increased more quickly, and the volume diminished -more rapidly. Thirty-two degrees is then the limit, a point between the -degrees which permit and which prevent liquefaction. It is the _critical -point_ which marks the separation between two very different conditions -of a substance; below, we have a liquid; above, there is no change in -appearance, but there enters a new condition, whose characteristics I -will describe. - -Generally a liquid is more dense than its vapor; for this reason it -falls to the bottom, and the two are separated by a level surface. -But supposing that we heat the vessel which contains them. The liquid -expands little by little, until it equals, or even surpasses, the -expansion of the gas, so that an equal volume weighs less and less. On -the other hand, a continually increasing quantity of vapor is formed, -accumulates at the top of the vessel, and becomes constantly heavier. -Now, if the density of the vapor increases, or if that of the liquid -diminishes under the right temperature, the two densities become equal. -Then there is no longer a reason for the liquid falling, the vapor -rising, or for a surface of separation. The two are mingled. Neither are -they any longer distinguished by their different degrees of heat. When -this critical point is reached, it is impossible to tell whether it is -liquid or gas, since in either state it has the same density, the same -heat, the same appearance, the same properties. This is a new state, a -gaseous liquid state. The discovery of these properties showed why all -the attempts to liquefy air had been useless. At an ordinary temperature -the gas is in a gaseous liquid condition. Liquefaction can take place -only when the liquid is separated from the vapor by its own greater -density. The next step was therefore to lower the temperature below that -of the critical point. This was understood and carried out about the -same time by MM. Cailletet and Raoul Pictet. On the 2nd of December, -1877, M. Cailletet subjected oxygen in a glass tube to a pressure of -three hundred atmospheres, and reduced its temperature to twenty-nine -degrees below zero. The gas did not change in appearance, and was in all -probability in the gaseous liquid condition. Nothing but more cold was -wanting to liquefy it. The valve was turned, the gas escaped, and the -temperature fell two hundred degrees, and the characteristic whitish -mist was seen. Oxygen had been liquefied, perhaps solidified. The same -result was reached with nitrogen, but nothing was done with hydrogen. -While M. Cailletet performed this decisive experiment at Paris, M. Raoul -Pictet achieved the same at Geneva. He had at his command all necessary -materials, so that he subjected the oxygen to a pressure of three hundred -and twenty atmospheres, and to a temperature of one hundred and forty -degrees below zero. In this condition the gas was probably below the -critical point, and when the reservoir was opened suddenly it began -to boil and was thrown in every direction. M. Pictet believed that he -liquefied, and even more, had solidified hydrogen, but he was doubtless -mistaken. These results, however, were not satisfactory. M. Cailletet was -preparing a new experiment when the Academy received the two telegrams -given at the beginning of this article. - -Wroblewski and his colleague, Olszewski, had boiled ethylene, a gas -similar to that used for heating purposes, in a vacuum. The temperature -fell to one hundred and fifty degrees below zero. It was the greatest -degree of cold yet obtained, and was sufficient. The success was -complete. The oxygen, previously compressed in a glass tube, became -a fixed liquid. It was like the others, in the form of a colorless -and transparent liquid, like water, but of a little less density. Its -critical point was at one hundred and thirteen degrees below zero, -forming itself below, never above, this temperature, and boiling rapidly -at a temperature of one hundred and eighty-six degrees below zero. A few -days after this the two Polish professors succeeded, in the same way, in -liquefying nitrogen. - -But if the question was settled for air was it also for nitrogen? M. -Pictet, in his experiment, had used a weight of three hundred and twenty -atmospheres, and cold of one hundred and forty degrees below zero. When -he opened the reservoir a jet of gas, mingled with mist of steel gray -color, burst forth. At the beginning of the experiment, solid fragments -accompanied the jet; these fell to the floor with a sound like that -of grains of lead. Naturally, M. Pictet thought that he had not only -liquefied, but even solidified hydrogen, but unfortunately the experiment -was not wholly satisfactory. For perfect success still more acute cold -was needed, and here was oxygen and nitrogen to get it from. Nitrogen, -the most refractory, was taken, and a degree of cold undreamed of before, -attained; in the open air it reached one hundred and ninety-four degrees -below zero, and in a vacuum two hundred and thirteen degrees below. These -temperatures were so low that it was necessary to invent new methods -for measuring them. A mercury thermometer was useless, because it froze -at forty degrees, and alcohol because it became a solid at one hundred -and thirty degrees. No liquid is able to resist such temperatures, so -electric, or hydrogen thermometers, were employed. - -Wroblewski and Olszewski have but lately achieved success. Having -compressed the hydrogen in the above named manner, they froze it by -means of nitrogen boiling in a vacuum. Still it did not liquefy. It was -yet in a gaseous liquid state, but when the tube was opened then there -appeared a transparent and colorless liquid. At last the question of -the liquefaction of gases, which has been discussed so long, has been -settled. When we think of the simplicity of these final experiments, it -seems strange that the problem was so difficult to solve. The trouble lay -in the fact that at the start there was everything to find out; there -was the critical point and the means of freezing to discover. It was -necessary to proceed by steps, using each gas for the reduction of the -one more stubborn than itself. Really, as Biot says, nothing is so easy -as what was discovered yesterday, nothing so difficult as what must be -discovered to-morrow. It might be asked whether the result is worth the -trouble necessary to collect these liquids. The answer must be left to -the future. The chemist will take up this new law of gases, and art will -adapt it to its purposes. For the present, all that it amounts to is -that the natural philosopher has proven that all kinds of materials may -exist in three conditions, and obey the same common laws.—_Abridged and -Translated from “Révue des Deux Mondes” for “The Chautauquan.”_ - - - - -AMERICAN DECORATIVE ART. - -BY COLEMAN E. BISHOP. - - -Among the many so-called “booms” that followed the civil war, as the -result of the wonderful intellectual, moral and material impulse that -it gave the country, one of the most marked and promising of influence -on the national character is the advancement in decorative art that -this generation has seen and felt. Its presence and influence are -observable in the general demand for more artistic interior finishing -and furnishing: for better form and coloring in wall paper, frescoing, -painting, floor-coverings, upholstery and drapery, and in that broader -study of the harmonious wholes of which these are related parts. - -It is not an art renaissance, so much as a new birth of popular art -feeling; a creation, rather than a revival. Facts seem to indicate the -beginning of the long-talked-of American school of art. It is a peculiar, -and peculiarly-encouraging circumstance that this new development is -native and popular instead of imported and select. - -For, we may be very sure that any movement that is to abide and have -much power over our people must be one that touches the average citizen. -To reach him it must be American. It need not be divergent from, and -it should not be antagonistic to established art principles; but, not -the less, in its sympathies, subjects, and methods it must be national. -An art that is to live with any people must be _of_ that people. With -us this requirement of popularity is doubly strong, because we are so -intensely national; because all institutions live and move and have their -being in the commonalty, and because the citizen is the only source of -living patronage of art here, where the state does not foster art as -foreign states do. The artist must eat, and the people must feed him. -Before they will pay for art, they must have sufficient culture to -care for it dollars’ worth, and it must be of a nature to reach their -sympathies. Even in monarchial England, Ruskin perceives the necessity -for beginning at the bottom to upbuild national taste, and he addresses -volumes of letters upon art “To the Workmen and Laborers of Great -Britain” (see “Fors Clavigera”). - -We have not much to hope for in the way of education of American taste -from imported art, for this can never reach or touch the people. A few -_dilettanti_ in our cities can do very little toward creating, or even -influencing a national taste. They have no _rapport_ with true American -culture; they offend national sensibilities by unreasoning rejection of -everything undertaken here; and, above all, if they be brought to the -test, it will be found that they generally have no fixed art principles -back of their opinions and—prejudices. If the average American could -not appreciate foreign works, he was not much helped to a better -understanding of them by their admirers; and he came to think himself at -least quite capable of correctly estimating devotees who could no more -give good reasons for worshiping everything foreign than they could for -scorning everything indigenous. - -The most hopeful augury for this new interest is in the fact that it -relates to that department of art which goes most directly into the lives -and the homes of the people: and that it has been the first to take on -marked American characteristics. Moreover, its commercial features will -be potent influences for its spread and growth. It is capable of being at -once the refiner, the educator and the almoner of thousands. - -Confidence in the inherent genius of my countrymen, led me years ago to -predict that all that was needed for the establishment of a school in -any art was (1) the foundational training of mind or hand; (2) a belief -that it can be done; (3) a market for it. The last most important of -all, because demand inspires originality and creates supply, and because -recompense is the great stimulus to inspiration. Genius in this age is -pretty apt to have an eye to the main chance. - -For all these reasons we are prepared for the conclusion that the impulse -given to decorative art by the organizations known as the “Decorative Art -Society,” and the “Associated Artists,” all of New York City, is the most -valuable of anything that has been done since the nation’s new sense of -the beautiful awoke. These are the parts of one movement possessing these -characteristics: - -It is distinctively American. - -It has compelled recognition at home and abroad as well of its indigenous -originality as of its artistic correctness and merit. - -It has begun the production of exclusively American materials, designed -and manufactured in this country, which are unequaled by anything foreign. - -It is commercially successful. - -By virtue of all these achievements, it is doing a missionary work for -American art by encouraging similar efforts in other cities and other -countries; by demonstrating that “good _can_ come out of Nazareth;” -by putting in the way of thousands of talented women, suffering under -repression and lack of opportunity or for inspiration of hope, the -opening for culture and compensation combined. - -It is to celebrate what has been accomplished, and haply, to suggest the -opportunities open to others, that this narration is essayed. - -The movement was, indeed, patriotic in its birth. It was inspired by the -Centennial Exposition at Philadelphia. The specimens of decorative art -from the South Kensington School in the English exhibit impressed Mrs. -Thomas M. Wheeler, of New York, by their lack of originality and freedom, -insomuch that she declared, “We can do better than that in this country -without any school!” and she set about doing it in genuine American -spirit. The first organization, The Decorative Art Society, which she -instituted, was composed of several hundred ladies of New York. The plan -was national, philanthropic and commercial—to serve art, help women, -beat the British, and make money. Ladies in a large number of cities -were influenced by correspondence and other efforts to form auxiliary -societies. The seed of the new art interest thus widely sown is still -bearing crops. - -From this nucleus there were before long offshoots in two directions—in -a higher and in a more rudimentary line. The Woman’s Exchange was -organized to provide a market for the large surplus of handiwork of -all kinds that was pressed upon the society; and a less numerous, more -compact organization was originated to attempt a higher development -of the work—this being called the Associated Artists. Thus they had -three efficient agencies occupying ground in this order, artistically -considered—The Woman’s Exchange, The Decorative Art Society, The -Associated Artists. Each of these is still doing its appointed work, but -our present purpose has to do only with the most advanced—The Associated -Artists. - -It should be said, however, of the Woman’s Exchange, that it has spread -the most widely; because it deals with the simple forms of ornamentation -which require but little training, but it produces articles that are -salable. Thus it has become a bread-and-butter enterprise to a large mass -of women. Not only do all of our leading cities now boast of Exchanges, -but Princess Louise, after her first visit to this country, caused one to -be formed in Canada. This “Yankee notion” has also been transplanted to -Germany and Sweden. - -The Associated Artists, as first organized, was directed by Mrs. Wheeler -and three gentlemen, artists like herself—Mrs. Wheeler having charge of -the needlework department; one gentleman, of interior wood decoration; -another, of glass painting, and the third, of the color scheme, painting, -etc. They undertook the interior finish of rooms and houses upon entirely -new decorative notions. Among their public undertakings, also, were the -entire interior decoration of the Madison Square Theater, including the -drop curtain; the finish of the “Veterans’ Room” in the Seventh Regiment -Armory, and parts of the Union League Club House. - -The business success of the Associated Artists grew on the managers. The -educational and philanthropic aims were in danger of being overshadowed -by the commercial consideration, and New York gave them abundant -employment without their going into all the world and preaching the -gospel of beauty and self-help to all women. Moreover, Mrs. Wheeler’s -department in the work grew so rapidly and opened out possibilities of -development and creation so great, that she decided to make it a special -and separate enterprise. This she did three years ago, retaining the -name, Associated Artists. - -Success has vindicated the wisdom of the segregation, while the other -members of the older organization have not suffered by the separation. -From that time to the present the enterprise has been managed and worked -by women only. - -The gentlemen formerly of the Associated Artists are working on -independent lines. The decoration of the new Lyceum Theater, New York, is -the latest and greatest triumph of one of them. - -The Associated Artists now have to do with decoration as using or applied -to textile fabrics, including as well all upholstery as the hangings, -draperies, tapestry and applied decoration of any part of a room. In -the building which they occupy in East Twenty-third Street, there are -large exhibition and salesrooms, the studios or designing rooms, the -departments of embroidery, of tassels, fringes, etc., of tapestry, and -the curtain department—an entire floor. There are about sixty employes. - -This is an art school as well as a business house. Many women come -to them with no other preparatory training than the drawing lessons -of our public schools afford. The best talent is furnished by the -Women’s Art School of Cooper Union. Aside from such preparation, the -Associated Artists furnish the education of their own designers and -workers. Unendowed, small, modest and young as it is, we shall see in -what respects this American school has outstripped the great English -institution. - -One of the most serious obstacles that the effort to create American -design has had to meet, is the lack of suitable materials to work with. -All imported textiles were found to be, in color, texture and pattern, -unsuited to the new uses and ideas; and American manufacturers were so -much under tutelage to European tastes, that nothing different was to be -had from them. It is a fact as lamentable as it is astonishing, that a -carpet, wall paper or textile mill in this country rarely has an American -designer of patterns and colors. The schemes of color made by the -Associated Artists were out of harmony with French, English and American -fabrics and embroidery materials. The colors of these were too sharp, -strong and cardinal for the blending of tones that was sought. - -To meet this case a Massachusetts silk mill was engaged to manufacture, -first embroidery silks of the desired shades; and, that being -accomplished, to undertake the coloring of fabrics. The greater step to -the manufacture of special fabrics was next taken. Now the Associated -Artists use only materials made for them in this country. - -There are three different mills engaged on their work, one of which last -year supplied them with $30,000 worth. The work is a great advertisement -to a mill—such recognition have these fabrics gained, here and in -Europe, for fineness, design and beauty. Several European decorators of -first rate have sent for samples of them. Foreign artists and designers -visiting this country regularly have in their note-book memoranda to see -the wonderful new American fabrics at the Associated Artists. These goods -have also been used for garments. Mrs. Langtry, Mrs. Cornwallis West and -Ellen Terry bought largely of them for their wardrobes. Felix Moschelles, -artist, and son of that Moschelles who was the biographer of Mendelssohn, -declared that there was nothing in Europe to compare with these joint -products of American artists and artisans. Truly, there is nothing on the -shelves of dry goods men on either continent to match them; they revive -the traditions of the wonderful products of Oriental looms. - -Another _chef d’œuvre_ of these artists is their tapestry work. It has -the definiteness and freedom of drawing, and the delicacy and feeling -of color of an oil painting; nay, deft fingers with a needle and thread -can produce effects in colors that the painter’s brush can not, because -colored threads reflect and complement each other. This work is done -upon the surface of a canvas, the stitch being similar to that used -upon “honey comb canvas,” all surface work. To make it more effective, -a fabric has been woven with a double warp, the embroidery being run in -under the upper thread, somewhat like darning. The process and fabrics -were invented by Mrs. Wheeler and are protected by letters-patent in this -country and Europe. - -A portrait was woven in this way, thread by thread, so faithful as to be -preferred by the family, to the best work they had of photographer or -painter. A piece of this tapestry has been under the hands of from one -to three embroiderers—or darners, if you please—every day for nearly a -year. It is one of ten large needle-work pictures of American subjects -now in preparation. One of them is a Zuni Indian girl, by Miss Rosina -Emmett, and another, “Hiawatha,” a typical Indian girl of the North, by -Miss Dora Wheeler. (These two artists are directors of the Association.) -The pictures are life size, and are very characteristic studies. The -remaining eight tapestries are mainly upon events of American history. -Only close examination would convince any one that they were not oil -paintings. After seeing this work I am inclined to think less of the -famous Bayeux tapestry and all other pictorial needlework. William the -Conqueror was unwise not to have deferred his exploits until Yankee girls -could embroider them. The best we can now offer William is to invade and -conquer England over again—with American tapestry. - -These high-class works are mentioned simply to show the height that this -line of decorative art has reached, in a short time, by the efforts of -native genius and mechanical skill. - -Nor is the story yet all told of the relation of design to manufactures. -One of the largest manufacturers of paper hangings in this country not -long since offered prizes amounting to $2,000 for the best four designs -for wall paper. The competition was great, sixty designs being entered by -European artists, and many times more by American. When the awards were -opened the examining committee, as well as the donors, were astonished to -learn that the Associated Artists had taken all the prizes, the European -trained talent none. Now, the freshest, best-selling patterns for wall -paper are of American design. - -There is more still to tell that is gratifying to patriotism. These -efforts have discovered to the world, as a fact, what was before the -cherished theory of a few, viz.: that an American school of art already -existed, dominant in brains and hands, waiting to be awakened to -activity. There is a distinctive character in all that has been done -in decoration, different from anything seen in other people’s work. It -has a nationality in choice of subjects and materials, an originality -in conception, a freedom and freshness in treatment, that fairly mark -the beginning of a new school. More than that, when the work of native -designers has come in comparison with that of the Kensington or other -schools, it has justified the opinion that was expressed at the outset as -to the ability of our women to surpass the latter. - -When the Decorative Society was organized, it sent to Kensington for a -teacher, and employed the one that was the most highly recommended by the -management there. At the close of the very first lesson that was given by -this instructor to the leading ladies of the society, she was overcome -by the reception her teaching had met. “Why,” she said, ruefully, “these -ladies have got from me, in a single lesson, all that I know. _I have -nothing more to teach them._” This incident reveals the reason for the -contrast in work—gives the explanation of the stereotyped forms and stiff -designs of the foreign school. The difference is in the human material -that enters into the work in either case—the difference of development -and general culture back of special art training. The English girl who -is forced to earn a livelihood by needlework, and qualifies therefor at -Kensington, represents a different order of preparatory training, general -culture, social position and aims, from those leaders in art who engage -in the work _con amore_ in this country. But there is, also, a race -difference that runs through all society in both countries. The American -woman is a thinker—the English an observer; the American woman is by -nature an innovator, the English conventional; the one an originator, -the other an imitator. The same climatic, dietary, social and political -influences that make the American artisan the most inventive and free -handicraftsman in the world; the American business man the most daring -and rapid, have conspired to make their sisters, and their cousins, and -their aunts the most original and apt pupils of art in the world. We -may confidently look to them, and the sons that they shall give their -country, to go on and create for it a school of art as free and as -characteristic as are all our institutions. - -The movement is but in the embryo stage. All this is the result of a -single effort, and it is still young. Time is of the essence of art -culture, and the United States offers ample verge and scope enough for a -wonderful work in the future. The field for invention in decorative art -is boundless, because genius may touch every item and phase of home and -carry into the innermost life of the whole people the refining influence -of Beauty. - - - - -SOME MODERN LITERARY MEN OF GERMANY. - - -Professor George Ebers, the distinguished Egyptologist, strange to -say, is known in America more by his novels than by his scientific -attainments. He had a severe attack of rheumatism, or something similar, -which confined him to his bed for a long time, but did not prevent him -from using his mind, and during this tedious suffering he undertook, as -I think he himself relates, in the preface of his first novel, to put -into story facts and history with which his mind was so richly stored. -The work grew and fascinated him, and now I dare say it has not only -become remunerative but beguiling. Since the death of Prof. Lepsius, the -distinguished scholar of Egyptian history, George Ebers will doubtless -stand in his stead as the next best informed man in Germany, on Egypt. -The deceased Lepsius thought highly of one of our countrymen, Dr. Joseph -P. Thompson, as a successful student under him, and here we pay a tribute -of respect to this generous man who never failed to escort party after -party of Americans through the Egyptian department of the Berlin Museum, -explaining the tombs and reading the inscriptions. “The Egyptian King’s -Daughter” is the title of Ebers’s most elaborate novel, and if one is -disposed to read it carefully and observe all the foot-notes, there is -quite a chance for the reader to feel delighted with himself for all he -can acquire in this way about Egypt, and to have an inexpressible longing -for more. And what a power of enchanting one these Egyptians have, with -their gloomy and mystified learning, and their frequent contemplation of -death. To give the reader an idea of Ebers’s style, in romance writing -and subject matter, we quote what accurate pictures he gives of all the -state of affairs in Egypt. Speaking of the schools or universities, -in his novel entitled “Uarda,” he says: “The lower school was open to -every son of a free citizen, and was often frequented by several hundred -boys, who also found night quarters there. The parents were, of course, -required either to pay for their maintenance or to send due supplies of -provision for the keep of their children at school. This university, or -school, was connected with the House of Seti, or one of the sanctuaries -of the Necropolis, founded by Rameses I, and carried on by his son -Seti. High festivals were held there in honor of the god of the gods of -the under world. This extensive building was intended to be equal to -the great original foundations of priestly learning at Heliopolis and -Memphis; they were regulated on the same pattern, and with the object -of raising the royal residence of Upper Egypt, namely, Thebes, above -the capitals of Lower Egypt, in regard to philosophical distinction.” -“Many proficient in the healing art,” he tells us, “were brought up in -the house of Seti, but few need to remain after passing the examination -of the degree of Scribe. The most gifted were sent to Heliopolis, where -flourished in the great “Hall of the Ancients,” the most celebrated -medical faculty of the whole country, whence they returned to Thebes, -endowed with the highest honors in surgery, in ocular treatment, or in -any other branch of their profession, and became physicians to the king, -or made a living by imparting their learning, and by being called in -to consult on serious cases.” From this short extract from Ebers any -one can see that he treats his situations, although lying so remote in -history, in the most simple and natural manner. Egypt, with her enormous -architecture, her ponderous institutions, peculiar beliefs and somber, -heated atmosphere, is not to him the dark “sorceress of the Nile,” but a -real, breathing and tangible thing—he has so seriously studied her that -he writes of her as he would of a familiar friend in whom he is intensely -interested. - -Ebers not alone excels in historical pictures and accurate descriptions, -but he has, as a novelist, much feeling, and makes clear comments on -human nature—for example, in writing of Nebsecht, the learned surgeon, -in his novel “Uarda,” he says: “Nebsecht was of the silent, reserved -nature of the learned man, who, free from all desire of external -recognition, finds a rich satisfaction in the delights of investigation; -and he regarded every demand on him to give proof of his capacity, as a -vexatious but unavoidable intrusion on his unanswering but laborious and -faithful investigations.” Then he remarks Nebsecht loved Pentaur, who -possessed all the gifts he lacked, manly beauty, child-like lightness of -heart, the frankest openness, artistic power, and the gift of expressing -in word and song every emotion that stirred his soul. - -Again, behold the picture or a glimpse into a feast of the best -Egyptians. In an open court, surrounded by gaily painted wooden pillars, -and lighted by many lamps, sat the feasting priests in two long rows, on -comfortable arm chairs. Before each stood a little table, and servants -were occupied in supplying them with the dishes and drinks which were -laid out on a splendid table in the middle of the court. Joints of -gazelle, roasted geese and ducks, meat pasties, artichokes, asparagus, -and other vegetables and various cakes and sweet-meats were carried to -the guests, and their beakers well filled with the choice wines of which -there was never a lack in the lofts of the house of Seti. In the spaces -between the guests stood servants with metal bowls, in which they might -wash their hands, and towels of fine linen. - -“Tante Therese,” a drama in four acts by Paul Lindau, is a cleverly -conceived and brightly written thing, showing that the writer is full of -pathos and wit. The audience cried and laughed and applauded the first -night it was given in Berlin. In fact, Lindau is so sharp a critic and -so talented a writer, that, as editor of _Die Gegenwart_, a neat and -pungent weekly, he was a great potentate in Berlin society. His pen -spared no one—musician, artist, soldier—and even royalty fell under -its point if he, Lindau, was not in sympathy with their productions or -actions. He is the life of a dinner party, the most interested musician -and art connoisseur, and among journalists and in the literary coterie -he is the star which lights or exposes the objects around. His reviews -in _Die Gegenwart_ (The Present) are somewhat after the matter of the -reviews in _The Nation_—a little pessimistic or hypercritical, but always -accomplishing their object, and whatever comes from his pen is looked -for with eagerness. With a lovely home, and a beautiful young wife to do -its honors, he attracts about him many brilliant companies. He was once -thrown into prison for having written something which was not prudent in -regard to government matters—the press being not so free in Germany, as -the reader will observe, as in this country. - -Dr. Julius Rodenburg, editor of _Die Rundschau_, is of Jewish extraction, -resembling Felix Mendelssohn so much that one must immediately remark -it. As Mendelssohn was also a Jew, the association seems to grow more -intimate in one’s mind, as an acquaintance with this light-hearted, -spirited man progresses. He seems never to be weary—the world and his -friend have a charm for him, and he and his intelligent wife know well -how to attract them to their weekly receptions. They both speak English -well, and have spent some time in England. He has published a little book -entitled “Ferien in England”—Vacation in England. - -Sometimes he comes out in his review, which corresponds to our _Atlantic -Monthly_, with learned and elaborate articles, but his time is, as -editor, consumed with other people’s productions. Editors of papers and -presidents of colleges have little time for anything but reflection upon -the merits or demerits of others. - -Ferdinand Gregorovius, half German and half Italian, has published four -volumes of the “History of Rome,” also in 1874 a very attractive volume -on “Lucrezia Borgia.” In the back of the book appears a _fac-simile_ -letter from Pope Alexander IV. to Lucrezia, and one of hers to Isabella -Gonzogo—most curious documents. - -Dr. Friedrich Kapp, who came to America when Carl Schurz did, returned -after a short residence and entered political life in his own country. -Beyond his exertion in this direction he has found time for considerable -literary work; has edited the “Autobiography of Benjamin Franklin,” -which contains a preface by Berthold Auerbach. Dr. Kapp is better known, -perhaps, through the press, than through his books. - -Adolf Stahr, in his book on Goethe’s “Frauengestalten,” or female -characters, gives a close analysis, and if the same theme has been -written and rewritten upon as all Goethe’s productions have, Stahr -maintains a dignified review, as if he were surveying the subjects for -the first time. His wife, who is a novelist, is equally literary, and -the two old people have grown beautiful in common sympathy in their -winter work and summer resorts. She attracts more attention than he at a -fashionable watering place, but one is the accompaniment of the other, -and both have done honest, good work. - - - - -HISTORIC NIAGARA. - -BY EDITH SESSIONS TUPPER. - - -The Chautauquan takes back to his or her busy life in the school room, -the college chair, the pulpit, the sanctum, the parlor, and the kitchen, -many beautiful pictures of memory. - -In fancy does one often see the branches of grand old trees, fit pillars -of one of God’s first temples, cross above one’s head, making a network -for the laughing, blue, summer skies; in imagination does one again see a -green landscape turn golden in the light of a fast setting sun. Ah! those -vistas about the Hall in the Grove; can not you see those leafy avenues -bending down to the lovely lake, now in the early morning stretching -glassy and waveless, now at noon, tumbling and tossing its white -caps abroad, now in the solemn night lying black and motionless, and -reflecting the light of stars? Can one who has seen the moon rise over -Long Point ever forget the sight? Recall now that midsummer night, when -drifting out in your boat you idly watched those masses of clouds shift, -part and separate to let the white glory of the moon shine through! How -serene and lofty she hung, poised in mid-heaven. Higher and higher she -climbed, pouring her wealth of light down upon the clouds heaped beneath -her, until they, massed and piled upon each other, seemed like the -glittering domes and towers of a city not made with hands. In vivid fancy -you could almost trace the shining streets of gold, the gates of pearl, -the walls of precious stones. The summer wind sighed softly around; the -murmuring waters rippled about the keel of your boat; on the shore the -lights danced and flickered like fireflies. Such a night is never to be -forgotten. It is a scene of enchantment, a mid-summer night’s dream. - - “In such a night as this, - When the sweet wind did gently kiss the trees - And they did make no noise in such a night, - Troilus methinks mounted the Trojan walls, - And sighed his soul toward the Grecian tents, - Where Cressid’ lay that night. - - “In such a night, - Stood Dido with a willow in her hand, - Upon the wild sea banks, and waved her love - To come again to Carthage.” - -Ah! these beautiful pictures “that hang on memory’s wall,” these day -dreams, by their potent magic, heal the heart and brain when life’s fret -and worry are hardly to be endured. A writer has truly said: - - “’Tis well to dream.” - - “I dream, and straightway there before me lies - A valley beautifully green and fair; - Bright, sparkling lakes, blue as the summer skies, - And trees and flowers dot it here and there. - - “I wake, and straightway all familiar things - Display new beauty to my wondering gaze. - My soul refreshed by wandering, folds her wings - And finds contentment in life’s common ways.” - -To all these beautiful pictures of memory many a Chautauquan adds the -remembrance of one indescribable scene—a look at the great fall. - -A short trip to Niagara is indeed one of the features of a summer’s -sojourn at the city in the woods. Every week a crowd of excursionists -leaves with reluctance the delights of the fair lake and takes a day’s -jaunt to the Falls, which are distant about eighty miles from Chautauqua. -Many of you, my readers, remember that trip—the magnificent views of Lake -Erie, which you got from time to time, on the way to Buffalo. Then the -run down from that city along Niagara River, past Fort Erie and Black -Rock, historic names. You remember how your heart beat a little faster -when the brakeman called, “Niagara Falls,” and you realized that you were -soon to stand in sight of one of the wonders of the world. Of course you -remember the clamoring hackmen, once heard not easily forgotten. Then -have you forgotten that short walk or drive down a shaded street, past -many shops filled with feathers and Indian temptations? Do you recall -that dull, booming sound which suddenly broke upon your ear, and can you -not now sense that delicious, fresh smell of the water as you turned into -Prospect Park, and ah! can you ever forget when you at last stood within -hand reach of that awful presence, when your bewildered and startled -eyes glanced now at the shouting, leaping, laughing, maddening, scornful -rapids; now at that overwhelming mass which flung itself over that -tremendous precipice into a seemingly bottomless pit? Was it a pleasant -day when you were there? Do you then remember the exquisite coloring of -the water, the dazzling white, the vivid green, the pellucid blue? How -the sun seemed to catch up every drop of that vast volume, and shine -through it, giving a tiny rainbow effect to every crystalline particle? -How the rapids called aloud to each other in glee, and chased one another -in a mad race, as to which should first make that mighty leap? Or was it -a dull, gloomy day? Then did they not shriek aloud in horror, and hurl -themselves in black and hissing despair to their awful plunge? - -Did you chance at nightfall to drive or walk about Goat Island, and hear -the chattering and cawing of myriads of crows, which blackened the tree -tops? This is their rendezvous, and the woods are alive with them, and -their weird sounds at dusk, added to that ever present, sullen roar, -produce an unearthly and fantastic effect. Did not your breath almost -forsake your body when you crossed to the three fair sisters lying so -peacefully far out in the midst of that seething, tumbling, foaming hell -of waters? - -At night you saw the electric lights turned on the American Fall, playing -now with sulphuric effect, now giving a ghastly, blue appearance, and now -turning this white, pure Undine to a very Scarlet Woman. The day on which -you first saw these pictures will long be marked with a red letter in -your calendar. - -But, sublime as is the physical beauty of Niagara, we have to deal -with quite another phase of her character; one of which the tourist, -limited by time, seldom thinks. It is only after becoming familiar with -every inch of her picturesque surroundings, after spending days and -weeks drinking in her superb beauty, content to sit, oblivious of time -or space, or sun or sky, that one at last remembers that for many miles -around the ground is covered with the footprints of history. Ground that -has echoed the thundering tread of armies, that has been drunken with -the blood of brave men, that now smiles peacefully, from which violets -spring, and on which children play. - - “Once this soft turf, this rivulet’s sands - Were trampled by a hurrying crowd, - And fiery hearts and armed hands - Encountered in the battle cloud. - - “Now all is calm and fresh and still, - Alone the chirp of flitting bird - And talk of children on the hill, - And bell of wandering kine is heard.” - -To say nothing of the French and Indian wars, the country about Niagara -was the scene of many of the fiercest struggles of the war of 1812, and -some of the sorest defeats to the American side. The battle of Queenston -Heights and Lundy’s Lane, or Bridgewater, were both disastrous to the -American cause, while Fort George, at the mouth of Niagara River, a hard -earned and costly acquisition of the Americans, was wrested from them by -General Drummond, who also laid waste Lewiston, Youngstown, Tuscarora, -and Manchester, then called, now the village of Niagara Falls. Those were -dark days for the Americans, when they fought not only Englishmen, but -crafty and treacherous Indians. - -The first great battle of the campaign on the Niagara during the war -of 1812, was that of Queenston Heights, on the 13th of October. This -was the second attempted invasion of Canada, the first having been the -humiliating failure of Hull, at Detroit, in August previous. General -Stephen Van Rensselaer determined to capture Queenston Heights, and for -that purpose, early in the morning, sent two small columns down the -river, most of which succeeded in landing under a brisk fire from the -vigilant English. Captain John E. Wool led the Regulars up the hill, and -was met by the British on the broad plateau, where a sharp engagement -took place, ending in the Americans being forced back to the beach. -Here they were reinforced and ordered to scale the Heights. This order -was obeyed, and for a short time the Americans had the advantage, when -suddenly brave General Brock, who defeated Hull at Detroit, and who was -now at Fort George, at the mouth of the river, having ridden from thence -at full speed, appeared and took command. A furious contest followed, in -which the Americans, though fighting with the bravery of despair, were -driven to the extreme edge of the precipice, and in which Brock fell, -mortally wounded. - -Then General Winfield Scott crossed the river and assumed command of the -American forces, expecting to be reinforced by the militia, but through -stubbornness and cowardice they fell back on their prerogative, and -refused to be taken out of the state. Twice was Scott attacked by the -British and Indians, and twice repelled them with the bayonet, but at the -third attack the Americans were obliged to retreat. Back, back, further -yet, over the edge of that awful chasm they went scrambling from ledge to -ledge, leaping from rock to rock, stumbling, falling, blindly catching -at twig, branch, stem, blade of grass, even, powder blackened, faint, -weary, bleeding, wounded, dying, only to reach the river to find no boats -waiting to succor them, compelled at last to surrender. Ah! dead heroes! -that was indeed a descent into Avernus. - -In this engagement the Americans lost one thousand men. - -Let the visitor to Niagara not leave until he has taken the drive to -Queenston Heights. It is only seven miles below the cataract, not a long -drive for a summer afternoon. A pretty drive, too, past many beautiful -farms and country seats. Once there one can drive to the top of the -broad plateau, on which the lofty and magnificent monument to General -Brock stands. Now leave your carriage, go to the front of the plateau, -and look. What a view! Directly at your feet lies old Queenstown; across -the river old Lewistown; for seven miles before you, peacefully and -languidly, as if weary from its terrible work up above, flows the green -river, flecked with foam. Yonder, at its mouth, lies Fort Niagara, on the -American side; the ruins of Forts George and Mississaga, on the Canadian -side, while beyond, far as the eye can reach, stretches Lake Ontario, -flooded with the light of a western sun—a sea of glass, mingled with fire. - -In the spring of 1813, Isaac Chauncey, an American Commodore, after a -successful expedition against York, now Toronto, which he held for four -days and then abandoned, after firing the government buildings, captured -Fort George. The Americans held it until the following December, when -General Drummond appeared on the peninsula, between Lakes Ontario and -Erie. On his approach the American garrison abandoned Fort George and -fled across the river to Fort Niagara. As they went they ruthlessly -burned the village of Newark. One week after, the British captured Fort -Niagara, and killed eighty of the garrison, showing no quarter to the -sick in the hospital. Then followed the triumphant march of the British -up the American side of the river, burning and sacking Youngstown, -Lewistown, Tuscarora, Niagara Falls, even to Black Rock and Buffalo. All -the farms were laid waste, and desolation stalked relentlessly through -the entire region. - -The whole campaign on the Niagara had been a series of blunders, and was -most disastrous to the American cause. - -The old town of Niagara, at the mouth of the river, is to-day an -interesting and picturesque place to visit. Here the tourist takes the -steamer for Toronto, and if he have an hour or two to wait, let him -stroll about through the beautifully shaded streets, past the elegant -hotels and private country seats, for the old town is a famous summer -resort now, and is likely to be still more attractive, for a little -Chautauqua is soon to spring up within stone-throw of the ruined -breastworks of old Fort George. - -From the round tower of Fort Mississaga, which commanded the harbor, one -gets a superb view of the lake and of Fort Niagara, just over the border -on the American side. Fort and lighthouse are in capital condition, and -the sight of the flutter of the stars and stripes against the blue sky is -very dear to the American who stands on British soil, and, thinking of -all it has cost to preserve that flag, realizes that it is still there. - -In 1814, the Secretary of War having persisted in his project to invade -Canada, determined, as a first step, to take Kingston. In order to -conceal this movement, and also that there might be no enemy left in the -rear, Major-General Brown, of the American forces, commenced operations -on the peninsula, between Lakes Erie and Ontario. - -On the 2nd of July he left Buffalo, and captured Fort Erie, on the -opposite side of the river. He then pursued his way down the river until -he reached Chippewa Creek. He then fell back a little to Street’s Creek, -and waited for the main body of the force, which arrived on the morning -of the 5th. - -General Scott’s camp was located on a little plain lying mid-way between -these two creeks. In the afternoon he ordered out his brigade for a -dress parade. Approaching the bridge he was met by General Brown, who -informed him that a battle was imminent. The head of Scott’s column -had scarcely reached the bridge when the British opened fire from the -extensive forests that surrounded the creek. Riall, the British General, -sneered contemptuously at the “Buffalo militia,” as he believed them -when they first came in sight, but when he saw them cross the bridge -steadily under fire, he discovered they were Regulars. General Peter B. -Porter had command on Scott’s left, and his men fought well until charged -by the bayonet, when they gave way. Major Jesup, however, covered the -exposed flank, and the fighting became hot and furious along the entire -front. After a time the right wing of the British disengaged from the -line and charged against Jesup. Scott was quick to observe this, and in -his turn charged against the exposed flank. Simultaneously Leavenworth -attacked the left wing of the British, and through the gap between these -two attacking columns, Towson’s battery poured in its canister with -speedy effect, and the British soon retreated in great confusion, and the -Americans had won their only decisive victory on Niagara. - -Chippewa is to-day a tumbledown, uninteresting spot, attractive only to -the student of history. There are some beautiful private residences near -the town, on the banks of the river, and just below the village the river -breaks into the rapids. After the well fought battle of Chippewa, the -invasion of Canada seemed more feasible. General Brown was very sanguine -of success, providing he could secure Commodore Chauncey’s assistance, -with his fleet. He wrote urgently to Chauncey, assuring him that the -British force at Kingston was very light, and that between their two -forces they could conquer Canada in two months, if they were active and -vigilant. But those qualities Chauncey did not possess; besides, he was -ill, and thought he had more important business on hand than to carry -provisions for the troops, and therefore did nothing. Nearly opposite the -American Fall a road runs back over the hill, past the Clifton House and -the Canada Southern Railroad Depot. The tourist following this road, and -turning to the left after passing the depot, will soon find himself in a -beautiful little village. Cottages of quaint and old fashioned design, -nearly covered with vines and roses, and narrow lanes in lieu of streets, -are its distinguishing features. Up a hill you go past a brick church, -and a graveyard, in which you may find many curious inscriptions. The -top of the hill is reached. Look back down that pleasant street, where -old trees stretch out their long arms to meet each other. See those -comfortable happy homes on each side. Hear that group of children laugh -at their play; and listen, from that little brick Methodist church, on -a soft summer evening, come the solemn strains of an old time hymn. No -more peaceful, pastoral scene in the world, and yet the spot on which we -stand was the scene of frightful carnage, terrific struggle, horrible -bloodshed; here was fought the famous battle of Lundy’s Lane. At noon -of July 25, 1814, General Brown received intelligence at Chippewa, -that General Drummond had reached Fort George the night previous, with -reinforcements, with which he intended to capture the stores of the -Americans at Fort Schlosser, which was located just above the rapids, -on the American side. Scott—now a Brigadier-General—was ordered forward -to divert the enemy from this project. He had advanced about two miles -when he was confronted by the entire British force, drawn up in Lundy’s -Lane. Scott engaged the right wing of the British, ordering Jesup to look -after the left. These movements were successful, Jesup capturing many -prisoners, among whom was General Riall. After the battle was well under -way, General Brown arrived from Chippewa with reinforcements. The British -held an eminence on which were planted seven guns. General Brown saw at -once that unless this battery could be captured no impression could be -made. - -“Can you take that battery?” he asked Colonel James Miller. - -“I’ll try, sir,” was the memorable answer of Miller—and he tried. It was -now night, and the approach of Miller’s men was hidden by a high fence. -The gunners held their lighted matches in their hands when Miller’s men -thrust their muskets through the fence, shot down the men at the guns, -rushed forward and captured the battery. - -The British made two valiant attempts to retake the battery, but were not -successful. Generals Brown, Scott, and Major Jesup were all wounded, and -the command devolved upon the inefficient Ripley, who, after idly waiting -half an hour, anticipating another attack, instead of following up the -advantage already gained, withdrew from the field. The British returned, -took possession of the field and the battery which Miller had captured. -The American forces were obliged to beat a retreat to Chippewa for food -and water, and the British claimed the victory as the last occupants of -the field. The loss of men on both sides was about equal. - -Drummond followed the Americans to Fort Erie, opposite Buffalo, and -there ensued a regular siege until the 17th of September, when the -Americans made a sudden sortie and destroyed the works of the enemy. -This was accomplished only by terrific fighting on both sides, in which -the Americans lost five hundred men, and the British nine hundred. -Drummond now abandoned the siege, and in October the Americans destroyed -Fort Erie, and returned to their own side of the river. Thus ended the -campaign on the Niagara. It had been productive of no results save the -digging of thousands of graves, and proving to the British that the raw -Yankee troops were able to give the trained English soldiers some hard -work. - -Just above Goat Island, where the river breaks into rapids, on the -American side, the tourist notices the ruins of Fort Schlosser, of which -we have spoken before as containing stores and provisions on which -General Drummond had designs. Later history has something to say of this -fort. Here occurred a circumstance out of which grew results which for -a time threatened a third war between England and the United States. In -1837, just after the close of the second Seminole war, a rebellion broke -out in Canada. Great sympathy was felt on the American side, for the -insurgents. Despite the fact that the United States made great efforts -to preserve neutrality, a small American steamer, the “Caroline,” made -regular trips across to Navy Island, carrying supplies to a party of five -hundred insurgents, who were staying there. In December, one Captain -Drew was sent out from Chippewa with a force to capture this steamer. He -did not find her at Navy Island, as he expected, and so crossed to Grand -Island, which was American territory, boarded her, killed twelve men on -board, towed her out in the stream, set her on fire, and left her to -drift down the river and go over the Falls. - -The United States promptly demanded redress, but could obtain no -satisfaction for three years. In 1840, one McLeod, who had boasted of his -part in this affair, came over to the American side, where he was under -indictment for murder. He was seized and held for trial. - -The British government demanded his release on the ground that he had -participated in an act of war, and therefore could not for that act -be tried before a civil court. The President answered that as yet the -United States had received no answer to the question whether the burning -of the “Caroline” had been an authorized act of war. In all events the -administration could not interfere with a state court, and prevent it -from trying any one indicted within its limits. England threatened war -unless McLeod was released; but the trial proceeded. The two countries -would doubtless have been brought into conflict had not McLeod been -acquitted. It was proved that he was asleep in Chippewa at the time the -“Caroline” was burned, and that a vain desire for notoriety had caused -him to inculpate himself. There was great excitement in 1841, over -this trial, which was augmented by the indifferent attitude of acting -President Tyler. A District Attorney of New York was allowed to act as -McLeod’s counsel, and retain his office, thus presenting the astonishing -spectacle of a government officer attempting to prove, in such a question -as this, which was liable to result in war, his own government to be in -the wrong. - -Nothing now remains of Fort Schlosser but a tall, gaunt chimney, which -has weathered for many long years the terrific winds which sweep down the -river. - -Throughout this fair and smiling region there are but few traces of these -fierce battles. - - “No solemn host goes trailing by - The black-mouthed gun and staggering wain; - Men start not at the battle cry,— - O, be it never heard again.” - -No blackened farms and desolated villages; no rattle of musketry and roar -of cannon; the sword is turned into plow-share and pruning hook; from -the soil watered with the blood of heroes spring thrifty orchards and -sweet flowers; in the place of fire from the blazing torch of red handed -war rises the smoke of prosperous town and thriving hamlet; Canada and -the United States stretching out friendly hands to each other; the Union -Jack and the Stars and Stripes floating side by side; peace, plenty, and -prosperity on both sides the broad river. Everything is changed save the -great Falls themselves. Unceasingly they do their awful work; unceasingly -their thunders sound; unceasingly their mists roll heavenward. - - - - -TWO FASHIONABLE POISONS. - -BY M. P. REGNARD. - - -Some one said one day before Fontenelle, that coffee was a slow poison. -“I can bear witness to that,” replied the witty academician, “for it will -soon be fifty years since I began taking it every day.” - -This, which was on the part of the cultivated scholar, a brilliant sally -of wit, is, alas! the common reasoning of many people who, simply because -danger does not immediately confront them, allow themselves to be slowly -but surely drawn to the tomb, because, forsooth, the way, for the time -being, is pleasant, or fashionable! - -In the midst of us there are persons poisoning themselves to death. I -refer to those addicted to the use of morphine. In England they have -another class of these unfortunates, for whom the most adulterated -liquors no longer suffice, and who drink ether; they are a sort of -perfected inebriates, who by the scientific laws of progress succeed -simple drunkards just as habitual morphine users follow the opium smokers -of China. Our fathers in Asia who have already bequeathed to us many -misfortunes, held in check until within recent years, among themselves, -the singular taste which they have for opium. Let me tell you in a few -words of the ancestors of morphine users of to-day, and you will better -understand the history of the latter. - -The mania for opium eating diminishes rather than increases among the -Mussulmans. Zambaco, who for a long time lived in the Orient, gives the -reason. The Turk seeks in opium only intoxication—a delicious sort of -annihilation—which he finds to-day more readily in champagne or Bordeaux -wine. These give him, in addition, the pleasures of taste. Then, too, he -can indulge himself freely in them, and still hold to the letter of the -Koran. In the time of Mahomet neither rum nor cognac were invented; it -does not then forbid them. But that which is not forbidden is permitted, -and so the Mussulman, who considers wine so impure that he will not touch -it, even with his hands, will become beastly intoxicated upon brandy, and -think that by this process he is not compromising his part in Paradise. -But their religionists—and above all their medical men—do not reason -thus. They still cling to the opium. - -Its first effect upon the system is far from causing sleep. It is rather -a sort of intellectual and physical excitant, which renders the Oriental -(in his natural state sad and silent), turbulent, loquacious, excitable, -and quarrelsome. - -These Turks are not contented to take opium themselves, they give it also -to their horses. “I have just,” says Burns, “traveled all night with a -cavalier of this country. After a fatiguing ride of about thirty miles I -was obliged to accept the proposition he made to rest for a few minutes. -He employed this time in dividing with his exhausted horse a dose of -opium of about two grammes. The effects were very soon evident upon both; -the horse finished with ease a journey of forty miles, and the cavalier -became more animated.” - -In China they do not eat opium, they smoke it. There is an historical -fact connected with them well known to all the world to which I would -not now call attention were it not to show you to what extent a like -calamity may go, and consequently with what the French people are -threatened if the love of morphine continues to take among us the same -intensity. - -Hundreds of years ago opium was, in the Chinese empire, a great luxury, -reserved for the mandarins, who did not keep secret at all their use of -it, but who interdicted it to all persons under their jurisdiction. All -the more did they consider it a great honor to their invited guests, and -especially to strangers, to be asked to partake of it. Recently it has -come into general use, and since 1840 its abuse has reached the last -limits. There is for all this an economic reason which I shall not fear -to call abominable. The Chinese received in payment for their products -only gold and silver, in money or in ingots; the specie thus introduced -into their country never left it, and it was a veritable drainage which -on this account Europe and America underwent. - -A neighboring nation of ours, and one whose Indian possessions furnish -prodigious quantities of opium, forced China, in a celebrated treaty, -to allow the entrance of this opium into her ports and to pay for it in -ingots and not in merchandise; the empire was thus obliged to disgorge -a part of its money held in reserve. You will have an idea of the -importance of this operation when you know that to-day there enters -annually into China 70,000 packing cases of opium from India, worth at -least $558,000. So much poison forced by right of war upon a whole people! - -The Chinese smoke opium from the age of twenty to twenty-five years. The -immediate effect is a sort of dizzy sensation. The preoccupations of the -mind disappear, as do also all ailments of the body. Then comes a noisy -delirium, a kind of insanity, in which the subject is deeply agitated; he -is apt to hurl down and break everything around him. Sometimes he rushes -out of the house, attacks the first passer-by, and not infrequently in -his frenzy has committed murder. - -The opium smoker, as well as the eater, is obliged rapidly to increase -the dose of his poison. At the end of six or eight months he must smoke a -dozen pipes a day. His money is soon all spent; he is ruined in a year. -He sells all that he possesses, and then he gambles. Writers agree in -saying that the maximum of the life of a smoker is then five or six years. - -In the face of such an evil as this the imperial government has tried to -act on the defensive; it placed a heavy duty on the entrance of opium; -but this system was not successful. And before this attempt it tried -penal jurisprudence. - -This is the decree which the Viceroy of Canton published in 1841: - -“It is two years since the Emperor of the Celestial Empire forbade all -his subjects to smoke opium. This delay of grace expires the twelfth -day of the twelfth moon of this year. Then all those guilty of offense -against this law will be put to death, their heads will be exposed in -public, in order to frighten those who might be tempted to follow their -example.” (Then follows this modification.) “I have reflected, however, -that solitary confinement would be more efficacious than capital -punishment, in order to arrest such a dreadful misdemeanor. I declare -then, that I am going to have built a special prison for opium smokers. -There they will all, rich or poor, be shut in narrow cells, lighted by -one window, with two boards serving as a bed and a seat. They will be -given each day a ration of oil, of rice, and of vegetables. In case of a -second offense they will be put to death.” - -This legislation was not practicable. The punishment was out of -proportion to the crime, and consequently inapplicable. - -Besides, in looking around him the emperor found that his own wives -smoked opium, and I would not guarantee that if he meant to live up to -the letter of his law, he would not have to begin by committing suicide. - -After this legislation they tried moralization and preaching. The -misfortunes of the opium smoker were depicted in an infinite number of -ways. All this propagandism had about as little success as societies -against intemperance, and this state of affairs is existing to-day in the -East. - -There are not noticeably many opium eaters or smokers among the French. -But every one knows that the people of the Orient have for their European -brothers the morphine users. There is between the first and second the -same difference that is found in everything pertaining to barbarous -and to cultivated men. Civilization prescribes as to the manner of the -poisoning. - -While the Oriental eats or smokes simply the juice of the poppy almost as -nature furnishes it, the European is more refined, and wishes only the -active principles of opium. So he uses it prepared in such a way as to -have lost almost entirely its disagreeable properties. - -How does one become a morphine user when he is a Frenchman, an inhabitant -of Paris, and when there is not a temptation to it from the fact of a -general habit, or the existence of special establishments? This can be -accounted for by two methods. The most common is some painful affliction -from which one is suffering, it may be neuralgia, acute dyspepsia, or -violent headaches. The physician, often at the end of his resources, -prescribes injecting a little morphine under the skin. The effect is -marvelous; the pain ceases instantly, but temporarily. The next day it -returns with new force. The afflicted patient remembers the success of -yesterday, and insists upon his anodyne. It seems necessary to give it, -and so it goes on for several days. Soon the nature of the drug manifests -itself: no longer will one injection a day answer; there must be two, -then three, later four, and so on, always increasing, until it reaches -formidable quantities. Meantime, the original trouble may have entirely -disappeared, but the patient does not cease to use the remedy. The first -time that the sick one insists upon having the treatment the doctor is -called to perform the operation. But soon, as it becomes necessary to -repeat the process oftener, making it expensive, it is entrusted to the -nurse or to the family, and from that day the patient is lost; for how -can the supplications of a suffering person whom one loves be resisted? -Then on a day the sick one practices on himself—and from that on, without -any control, with the avidity of passion, he uses the drug in the -quantities of which I have told you. - -This is one way in which many victims fall into this sad habit. There is -another. The victims of the second method are those who seek in exciting -tonics the sensations which their weakened nerves and their surfeited -imagination can no longer afford them. These are the proselytes of a -veritable association, and they, in their turn, soon become missionaries -in the same cause. It is a habit which the vicious have of wishing to -make others like themselves. The fable of the fox which had its tail cut -off is not a fable of yesterday. Two friends meet; one of them complains -of slight annoyances; dullness, _ennui_; he no longer enjoys anything; -the world, the races, the theater, do not procure for him distraction; -he is _bored to death_. His friend admits that he also has suffered in -the same way, but that he had recourse to morphine, of which some one -had told him, and that he found in it a perfect cure. And thus by such -conversations there is formed, as it were, a new class; they are the -volunteers in this unhappy army. - -One can but remark, that luxury, which tends to introduce itself -everywhere, has already invaded the domain of morphine. The little -syringe of Pravas, which permits of the injection of the poison under the -skin, and the consequent avoidance of the bitter taste and the nausea -which would be occasioned by eating morphine, has received ingenious and -artistic modifications. It was necessary to render it easy to carry, and -at the same time to make it deceptive to the eye. I visited a surgical -instrument maker at Paris, and he placed at my disposal for inspection -his whole line of morphine instruments, those which the taste, the -luxury, or the imagination of his clients had caused him to fabricate. - -There was first the syringe, containing a centigram of morphine, such -as the physicians employ. It was not delicate enough, was difficult to -handle and difficult to conceal; it is used now only by those who no -longer care to conceal their vice—who feel no shame in regard to it. -Then there was one adroitly concealed in a match box. At one side was a -little bottle containing a dose of powder necessary for a half day. There -was, too, a false cigar holder, containing all that was necessary for -injecting the poison. But most remarkable of all was a long, sheath-like -instrument. It is somewhat inconvenient in the midst of company to put -the morphine into the syringe before making a puncture. This sheath, -filled beforehand, can be carried in the pocket; the puncture can be -made, and to inject the drug it is only necessary to move the piston in a -certain direction; in the evening the sheath will be found empty. There -were little gold syringes contained in smelling bottles; a little silver -sheath which one would take for an embroidery stiletto; open it; it -contains an adorable little syringe of gold and a bottle of the poison. - -Among morphine users in fashionable life they make gifts according to -their taste, and there are manufactured syringes and bottles enameled, -engraved, and emblematic—in every conceivable device. - -Do men more often become subject to this vice than women? According to -the printed statistics, yes. Out of every one hundred who used the drug -there are counted only twenty-five women. But practicing physicians say -that the women are the more numerous victims. They are more artful, and -try to keep the habit concealed; they do not consult the physicians -regarding it, and so are not counted in the statistical returns. - -Is it then so very agreeable to live under the influence of this poison, -since so many people expose themselves, for its sake, to such grave -perils? To this I reply, no, not at the beginning. It is with this vice -as with others, the beginning is hard. The first injections are not -enjoyable—the puncture is painful, and sometimes nausea follows. But -the habit is easily and quickly formed, and the disagreeable effects -disappear. The introduction of the morphine produces almost immediately -a sort of general vagueness, an annihilation of being which causes to -disappear all external realities and replaces them by a sort of happy -reverie; and at the same time the mind seems more alert, more active. -Physical and moral grievances disappear, all troubles are forgotten for -the time being. “You know,” says Mr. Ball, “the famous soliloquy of -Hamlet, and the passage where the Prince cries out that without the fear -of the unknown, no one would hesitate to escape by means of a sharp point -from the evils of life which he suffers, in order to enter into repose. -Ah well! this sharp point of which Shakspere speaks—this liberating -needle—we possess; it is the syringe of Pravas. By one plunge a person -can efface all sufferings of mind and of body; the injustice of men and -of fortune; and understand from this time on, the irresistible empire of -this marvelous poison.” - -The habit of taking ether is induced by the same causes that lead to the -use of morphine. The danger, however, is not so great, and the habit can -more easily be broken up. At the end of the inhalation one experiences -a little dizziness that is not at all disagreeable; the sight becomes a -little blurred, and the ears ring; the mental conceptions become gay, -charming; hallucinations are developed, generally very pleasing. It is -not necessary to increase the dose, for one would then reach a state of -excitement, or be thrown into a sound sleep, such as physicians produce. -Those who use it know this well, and moderate the dose, in order to make -the pleasure of long duration. After the inhalation the subject returns -almost immediately to his natural state. There is a little heaviness -in the head and a dullness of the mind. Morphine users can secretly -indulge in their habit, but ether emits a penetrating odor. In London, -where it is more frequently practiced, the keepers of public squares and -large parks often find in the more retired places empty bottles labeled -“Sulphuric Ether.” These have been thrown down by those who have left -their homes in order to give themselves up in the open air to their -favorite passion. - -These victims commence by breathing ether. Then they drink a few -drops—and after a while larger quantities. This burning liquid soon -becomes a necessity; and some even go so far as to drink chloroform—a -veritable caustic. - -Can anything be done for these unfortunate people? Yes, certainly—but -only on one condition—that they wish to be cured. The best method is to -separate, instantly, entirely, the patient from his family; to place him -in an establishment where his movements can be watched, where he can be -debarred, suddenly or gradually, as shall be judged best, from the poison. - -The Americans—a practical people—have already built asylums for the -treatment of morphine users. The Germans have recently finished two, one -at Marienberg, the other at Schönberg. - -But unfortunately, the French law does not permit us to do this. We can -place in hospitals only those poison users who have become maniacs or -idiots. - -If the French are to be saved from this rapidly increasing evil, it is -evidently necessary to prevent its beginnings. In order to do this, -the sick must be kept from procuring it. Its sale must be regulated so -that it will be impossible to get it in any quantity, or to use the -same prescription twice. The emperor of Germany, upon the proposition -of Prince Bismarck, has issued a decree to this effect. Under such a -regulation the law for the physician would be never to prescribe the use -of these drugs save in cases of absolute necessity. - -The reading of medical books by the people is generally pernicious. I -would, however, permit them to read the recent accounts of the effects -of these drugs. If they are of comparatively late origin, these two -fashionable poisons have already destroyed more victims than in a whole -century has all the poison used by assassins.—_An Abridged Translation -for “The Chautauquan” from the “Révue Scientifique.”_ - - - - -OUR C. L. S. C. COLUMN. - -BY CHANCELLOR J. H. VINCENT, D.D. - - -For the past year I have given in THE CHAUTAUQUAN a series of articles -on the interior significance and higher aims of the Chautauqua movement, -instead of the answers to questions which filled the C. L. S. C. column -in former years. The closing article of this year must be made up of -answers to questions which are of general interest. - -1. A correspondent inquires “whether Alfred Ayres, author of the -‘Orthoepist,’ and editor of the English Grammar of William Corbett, is a -recognized standard authority in pronunciation, and whether he should be -preferred to Webster or Worcester.” To this I can only reply that I do -not so understand Mr. Ayres’s claim or position in the field of letters. -He certainly is not accepted as are Webster and Worcester; and the chief -advantage of his little volumes is in showing what one man who has given -much attention to the subject of pronunciation thinks on the subject. -That is all. - -2. “How can a knowledge of Greek, Roman, or any other history be of any -benefit to me? I prefer to study the works of God, and in chemistry and -other departments of science to trace the signs of his wisdom.” - -_Answer_: It is important to study God’s great gifts to the race in the -great characters of history and literature. The genius of Homer is as -much a wonder as is any fact in physical science. Acquaintance with the -vivacity, enterprise and energy of the Greek character is as valuable -to people who now live in the world as is a knowledge of the physical -constitution, shape, habits of life, and movements of the colossal -creatures reported by geology as having occupied this planet ages on ages -ago. No education is complete that has not to some extent been influenced -by the spirit of the old Greek culture. The whole history of that people -shows the impotence of mere culture without moral character, and we may -trace through the ages of Greek history the evidences of divine wisdom -and justice. By all means let us study natural science, but let us not -abandon history. Whatever pertains to man in any age of the world should -possess peculiar interest to us. - -3. “People in our neighborhood often say to me: ‘Why study those books? -You will not live to finish the course; and if you do, what good will it -do you or your children?’” - -_Answer_: Ignorant people often ask the question, “Of what use is -education, beyond a small amount of reading, writing and arithmetic? Why -should people who have to work in kitchens and fields study the stars? -Why should men who neither care to act on the stage, or to write for the -press, give much attention to William Shakspere?” Whatever our business -may be, we need to read general literature because we are members of -society, and owe something as rational beings to society. Parents should -keep in sympathy with their children, whose world of knowledge must -of necessity in this age grow wider and richer all the time. We are, -moreover, members of this universe, and God is our Father. We have a -right as his children to know something about his works and ways and -wisdom. Life is a wearisome thing to people who are ignorant. There is -sustaining power in the large thoughts which a true culture brings. If -one expects to live forever with God, he should cultivate noble and -worthy character on this side the grave, and such nobility is increased -and such holiness promoted by a wide range of reading and study with -worthy motive. - -4. I am happy to announce that the “Chautauqua Press” has been fully -organized. Under its direction some of the books of the C. L. S. C. will -be published, and a series of standard books will be issued at once for -the formation of home libraries; books adapted to the special courses and -bearing also upon the Required Readings. - -The first series of three or four volumes will be ready by August 1st, -and will supplement the regular work of the coming C. L. S. C. year. -While all the classes are reading Roman History, Latin Literature, -Italian Biography, and Italian Art, our “Chautauqua Library, … Garnet -Series,” will provide for those who wish to read more than the required -books, and for those who, as graduates, wish to win seals, the following -admirable volumes: - -“Readings from Macaulay. Italy. With an Introduction by Donald G. -Mitchell (Ik Marvel).” - -“Readings from Ruskin. Italy. With an Introduction by H. A. Beers, -Professor of English Literature in Yale College.” - -“Art and the Cultivation of Taste, by Lucy Crane, with an Introduction by -Charles S. Whiting, of the Springfield (Mass.) _Republican_.” - -[The fourth volume of the first series will soon be announced.] - -This series of four volumes will constitute a special course, for the -reading of which the Garnet Seal (a new one) will be given to all -graduates, and may be won by those undergraduates who are able to do more -than the Required Reading for each year. - -The Chautauqua Press will soon have on hand a rich library of cheap but -handsomely printed and bound volumes with which every Chautauquan will -desire to decorate and enrich “The Chautauqua Corner.” - -Now we are on the eve of another summer of rest, of convocation, of -Assembly reunions. From these retreats comes much of inspiration which -keeps the Chautauqua movement in operation during the remainder of -the year. Let me urge all members who can possibly do so to attend -the nearest Assembly. Go to the Round-Table. Record your name on the -list kept by the local secretary. Show your colors, and thus lend your -influence to the Circle. - -In behalf of the administration, the president, the counselors, the -secretaries, I extend to all members of the Circle a hearty salutation; -and to all of you who read these lines who have for any reason grown -remiss or apathetic in C. L. S. C. service, I give an earnest invitation -to come back, resume your readings, join the class of ’89, and make sure -of a successful four years’ course. - -You will join me, I am sure, in one universal Chautauqua salute to the -honored editor of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and his competent associates and -contributors as our tribute to the ability with which our monthly has -been conducted. - -And now, as we “study the word and the works of God,” may our Heavenly -Father be “in the midst,” and “may we never be discouraged” in pursuing -the high and beautiful ideal of the C. L. S. C.: The attainment of -symmetrical and practical culture which will fit us the better to serve -our fellows upon the earth, and to enjoy the blessings promised by our -Father in the heavens! - -PLAINFIELD, N. J., May 21, 1885. - - - - -GLIMPSES OF THE CHAUTAUQUA PROGRAM. - - -A part of our creed of late has come to be that we need change in summer. -If our homes are in cities, we need it because we can not have there the -requisites of good health—fresh air, pure water, quiet; if we live in the -country, we want and need a change which will give us social advantages; -if we are teachers or students, we want opportunities to see, to get new -ideas, to observe new people and their customs. This theory of summer -living makes the demand for summer resorts. It is rare, however, that -any place offers with any degree of completeness health, society and -opportunities. It is claimed for Chautauqua that all three may be found -there; that it is, in short, an ideal summer resort, open to all classes -of people. The outlook for Chautauqua in 1885 confirms this claim, and -gives to its admirers most satisfactory glimpses of what is in store for -them during the coming season. - -Chautauqua is fortunate in having had candid, disinterested men examine -its condition and management, and pronounce their verdict as to its -healthfulness. One of the most critical examiners of public places in -America, Hon. B. G. Northrup, made his visit to Chautauqua last summer -a kind of inspection tour. He pried into every corner and cranny, and -publicly denounced every abuse he found. With “courage indomitable,” the -Chautauqua “powers that be” attacked the enemy, and “they are ours.” This -summer there is no pestilential spot, not one vault nor cess-pool nor -wet spot to poison the water and breed disease. The determination of the -management to have perfect sanitary arrangement at any cost—even if all -other improvements are abandoned—is producing a condition unparalleled. -This result, and the means taken for its accomplishment, are worthy of -close study by every visitor at Chautauqua, particularly by those who are -property owners, or are interested in the government of towns. - -Chautauqua is a _safe_ resting place. But it is more. It is preëminently -a social place. Its social life is as pure and wholesome and natural as -the air and water. Simple, unaffected manners, free, kindly intercourse, -characterize the daily life of the people. “How very democratic you -are here,” said a visitor last year, “and I don’t see a particle of -snobbishness.” And it is true. The simple reason, perhaps, is that -Chautauqua brings out of every one the best in them. People literally -live too high there for snobbishness. They can run out in the morning -for their milk or bread or steak; they can carry their bundles or do -their own washing, and the high, clear, mental atmosphere of the place -forbids them minding who sees them at their duties, forbids any one who -sees them feeling that the work is menial. This mental and social air is -indeed one of the most exhilarating things about the place. You do live -socially above your ordinary level—live so because it is “in the air.” -You can not help it. - -How wonderfully good health and good company contribute to making a good -_working place_. Above all things else Chautauqua is that. Its pure air -stirs your blood until you feel like working; its social life stimulates -you; its opportunities are a constant temptation. Of course Chautauqua -temptations begin with the platform. There are at least two features of -the program for the platform of 1885 which deserve special attention. -Of these the first is—it is timely. The questions which are interesting -society are the questions it discusses. Note what a prominent place -“Mormonism” holds. Miss Kate Field makes it the subject of two lectures: -“The Mormon Creed” and the “Political and Social Crimes of Utah,” and -Mr. W. L. Marshall takes up “Utah and the Mormon Question” in a third -lecture. Temperance, our knottiest social problem, is elucidated by -Miss Frances Willard in the “Evolution in the Temperance Reform,” by -Mrs. Ellen Foster, by Hon. G. W. Bain, by a National Temperance Society -Day, by temperance bands, by conventions, and by every attraction -which Chancellor Vincent can devise and valiant Chautauqua temperance -workers carry out. Missions, too, have a brave array of talent to plead -their claim. The first four days of August are mission days, on which -are discussed means of increasing interest and improving methods of -evangelizing both foreign and home heathens, of raising funds, and of -securing workers. One of the leading mission workers of 1885 will be -the Rev. Wm. F. Johnson, of Allahabad, India. Mr. Johnson has been in -the field nearly twenty years. He will fill the place this summer that -Ram Chandra Bose and the Rev. Mr. Osborne filled in the missionary -conferences of last year. - -A second characteristic is—the program is practical. Every day is full of -hints; every exercise is suggestive. As an illustration, no profession -is attracting so much attention to-day as is journalism; a successful -journalist is to discuss it. Such a subject will be of practical benefit -to numbers of young men and women who will be listeners to Mr. Carroll. -Practical Christian ethics and Christian work form prominent subjects; -as, for example, the three days’ examination of “Parish Work in Cities,” -by Edward Everett Hale, and the interesting meetings of the Society -of Christian Ethics. The tours abroad, while they are so bright and -entertaining, are brimful of suggestions. This summer is to be unusually -rich, the time being given largely to Italy. One pleasing variety will be -a tour around the world with Philip Phillips. - -The special features of the summer will be strong. The Teachers’ Retreat, -which begins its sessions in July, is arranged to do for teachers one -peculiarly necessary work, to show them how to use the best methods, to -lessen the friction which is incident to all school work. It is ably -manned to produce this result, Prof. J. W. Dickinson, of the State Board -of Education of Massachusetts, being at the head of the department of -Pedagogy, and nearly a score of successful specialists assisting in -expositions of their peculiar methods. The terms for the C. T. R. are -very low. - -Persons holding the $5 ticket of the Chautauqua Teachers’ Retreat will -be entitled to the following privileges: All general exercises in the -Amphitheater, including lectures, concerts, recitals, and entertainments, -during the sessions of the Retreat; fourteen lessons in Pedagogy; -fourteen lessons in Practical Application of Pedagogical Science; -four Tourists’ Conferences; two Expositions of Method in Chemistry; -one Exposition of Method in Penmanship; two Expositions of Method in -Elocution; one Exposition of Method in Phonography; one Exposition of -Method in Stenographic Reporting; two admissions to each of the several -classes in the Schools of Language; two lectures on School Methods by -Prof. Edw. E. Smith, Superintendent of Schools, Syracuse, N. Y.; ten -Half-hour Drills in School Calisthenics. Special classes are arranged as -well for those who can find time to take in more than the full program, -or who desire special instructions. - -Each summer, since the idea of a summer school was conceived, there -has been a steady growth in the opportunities given to students. The -coming season keeps up the record for improvement. The C. S. L. stands -preëminent among Chautauqua institutions. In its departments of Greek, -Latin, Hebrew, English, French, German and Spanish, the practical benefit -to be derived in six weeks is altogether inconceivable to those persons -who are unacquainted with the teachers directing the studies, and with -the methods used. To two or three features we would call particular -attention—features which serve merely as samples of work being done daily -in all classes. In the Anglo-Saxon room there is a class which studies -“Hamlet” for four weeks, a series of lessons rich in illustrations and -full of facts. A particular beauty of this class is the free discussion -and analysis of character which Professor M’Clintock encourages. - -Professors Worman and Lalande have many novel devices for fascinating -their students. As interesting study as there was at Chautauqua last -summer was the children’s hour in German, conducted by Professor Worman; -as a lesson to teachers it was unsurpassed, as a drill for children it -would teach them German if anything would. As for the French, the weekly -lectures, the French receptions, and now this year, the “French table” -which Professor Lalande has arranged for, are prominent features. - -Not content with reading Latin, Professor Shumway proposes that his -students talk it. For many students at Chautauqua last summer a tree -became _arbor_, the forest _silva_, the shade _umbra_, the dead alive—a -result, by the way, that very often is accomplished at Chautauqua. The -successful introduction of a School of Microscopy was accomplished in -1884; 1885 will see the work enlarged. This department is under the -direction of an able teacher, Professor Hall. His outfit for observation, -and for preparing and mounting objects is most complete. - -It is said that when the Egyptians moved the huge rocks which form the -pyramids, musicians were stationed among the workmen, and every motion -was made in time to music. Chancellor Vincent seems to have profited by -this suggestion in preparing the Chautauqua program for 1885, for it is -all set to music of the rarest kind. To begin with, the great organ is -handled by a skillful master, Mr. I. V. Flagler. His series of recitals -contain selections from the greatest masters. The chorus will be led by -our old favorites, Professors Case and Sherwin. The Fisk Jubilees, the -Meigs-Underhill Combination, a new quartette—the Schubert, of Chicago, -vocalists with rare voices, and with a splendid _repertoire_—and Miss -Dora Henninges, of Louisville, a superb mezzo-soprano, will complete the -musical program for 1885. - -These are but hints of what the six weeks’ session holds in store for -visitors to Chautauqua this season. The entire program, with all its -specialties, has been prepared with consummate care and with close -regard for popular needs. The management has striven honestly to make -Chautauqua a perfectly healthy place, with abundant social life, and with -opportunities suited to the needs of all classes of people. The verdict -of its thousands of visitors is that in the past they have succeeded. The -outlook for 1885 declares that this year will be still more abundantly -successful. - - - - -LOCAL CIRCLES. - - -C. L. S. C. MOTTOES. - -“_We Study the Word and the Works of God._”—“_Let us keep our Heavenly -Father in the Midst._”—“_Never be Discouraged._” - - -C. L. S. C. MEMORIAL DAYS. - -1. OPENING DAY—October 1. - -2. BRYANT DAY—November 3. - -3. SPECIAL SUNDAY—November, second Sunday. - -4. MILTON DAY—December 9. - -5. COLLEGE DAY—January, last Thursday. - -6. SPECIAL SUNDAY—February, second Sunday. - -7. FOUNDER’S DAY—February 23. - -8. LONGFELLOW DAY—February 27. - -9. SHAKSPERE DAY—April 23. - -10. ADDISON DAY—May 1. - -11. SPECIAL SUNDAY—May, second Sunday. - -12. SPECIAL SUNDAY—July, second Sunday. - -13. INAUGURATION DAY—August, first Saturday after first Tuesday; -anniversary of C. L. S. C. at Chautauqua. - -14. ST. PAUL’S DAY—August, second Saturday after first Tuesday; -anniversary of the dedication of St. Paul’s Grove at Chautauqua. - -15. COMMENCEMENT DAY—August, third Tuesday. - -16. GARFIELD DAY—September 19. - - * * * * * - -The present number closes Volume V. of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and interrupts -for a time the pleasant monthly visits with Local Circles. A review of -the year’s work must be satisfactory to all. It has been a progressive -year for the circles; few have fallen out of line; numbers of new -organizations have been formed; almost all have increased their -membership; the circle work has been done more thoroughly than ever -before; new methods have sparkled on every page of reports; the social -life has been quickened and intensified; the circle evening has become -the most important evening of the week; it has been made the occasion of -practical discussions and of intelligent conversation; a stronger feeling -of union exists; the local circle has become a permanent institution. -There is much encouragement in the review, but there is much for each -circle to learn in a study of the reports of the past year. - -The present issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN will contain all the reports -received up to the date of going to press; those received after that date -will necessarily be held over for the October issue. - -Very interesting and encouraging reports have been received from HALIFAX, -NOVA SCOTIA, where the local circles are prospering, and much earnest -work has been done. While their routine work and the required course of -reading and study are pursued by the several circles separately, their -occasional reunions are found profitable, and furnish much real enjoyment -for the members. One such was held on Longfellow day at Dartmouth, -across the harbor, which proved intensely interesting to an expectant -audience. Thorough preparation was made for this meeting, and the whole -arrangement was admirable. On Shakspere day an equally excellent program -celebrated the day. The programs for both were highly original. The -annual _conversazione_ of the “Central” circle, TORONTO, was held on -May 19th. The novel little arrangement for a program—three ribbon-tied -circles—looks most inviting. A half hour of orchestra music preceded the -address and concert, after which were stereopticon views and a promenade. -The guests were entertained at the Normal School building, where the -museum and picture galleries were thrown open to them. - -Among the MAINE circles is a goodly one at ROCKPORT, composed at its -beginning in 1882 of twenty-one ladies. They have clung together through -separation in a way quite remarkable. One of their number spent last -year at sea, but took her books along, and had her CHAUTAUQUAN sent -to meet her at various points. Another friend who has been around the -world during the past year missed her books at Antwerp, but writes -from San Francisco that she is ready to make up the year’s work. The -Rockport circle has the peculiar honor of having for its president a -lady over seventy years of age.——“Mountain Echoes” have reached us from -BRIDGETON—nineteen of them. This circle was formed in 1883, and for a -year met monthly; the success was so great that they have doubled their -number of meetings. A sufficient proof of their statement that “good -work is being done.”——Fifteen members of a circle at BANGOR write us -that they have enthusiasm quite sufficient for a class much larger. It -is the steady variety, too, we fancy, for since 1881 they have met, with -few exceptions, every Monday night from October to July. The studying is -done on this evening, and time has been faithfully used, for they have -succeeded in reviewing several books. A talented young physician in their -midst has favored them this winter with lectures on Animal and Vegetable -Biology, with microscopic illustrations.——A spirited circle, the -“Whittier,” of twenty-five members, is working at NORTH BERWICK. Debates -are frequent features of their programs, and they have adopted the -sensible habit of choosing timely questions. Shakspere day was observed -by a reading of the “Merchant of Venice,” the characters being assigned -by a committee. At North Berwick the circle is fortunate in having -members of different denominations who mingle in perfect cordiality. The -result of their work together has been, they write, “an improvement of -mind and broadening of ideas.” - -A pleasant gathering of C. L. S. C. folks has been carrying on local -circle work since October last at MEREDITH VILLAGE, NEW HAMPSHIRE. -Some fifteen members are in the company. A gentleman interested in the -work kindly furnishes them a room, lighted, warmed, and furnished. The -memorial days are held in honor, and recently they have had “an extra” in -a talk on chemistry from a teacher of the town. - -VERMONT is represented this month in a lively letter from MONTPELIER: -“Our circle is not dumb, as might be inferred from our silence, neither -are we deaf to the appeals for reports from local circles. The trouble -is this: Though an organization of about twenty members since October -last, we have until this month been nameless. One name after another was -suggested until ‘The Idea Hunters’ was proposed, and met with general -favor. I think our motto should be, ‘Hunt until you find,’ for we are -constantly hunting in reference books for settlements to the many -questions proposed. We are learning, of course, and getting no little -amusement out of our researches as well.” - -From the “Chautauqua Quintette,” of CHELSEA, MASS., we have this cheery -report: “We are a little company of five ladies, all intensely interested -in the C. L. S. C. work. We derive great benefit from our work, and -some of our programs would be creditable to a larger organization.”——A -slightly discouraged circle, finding it “hard to exist,” is the -“Thaxter,” of ATTLEBORO. The small membership troubles them. It should -not, it seems to us, especially since they have five members who write -“fine essays.” We surmise that if the “Thaxter” has five good essay -writers it is better off than many a large circle, and from the program -of their Longfellow entertainment it is evident that some one of their -number knows how to manage such things. Cheer up, friends.——A really -joyous letter comes from MELROSE, where the secretary of the “Alpha” -has been delaying her report because the new members would not cease -coming in, and she wanted to get them all. She writes: “Every member is -enthusiastic, and I believe that excellent work is being done. This is -my last year—that is to say the last of my _first_ four years’ course. -Please accept the most cordial greetings of our circle; we hope to send -annual greetings for many years to come.”——A dainty hand-painted souvenir -of the Shakspere evening of the “Alpha,” at UXBRIDGE, accompanies their -report of good, strong work. The circle is small, but, says one of -their number, “Chautauqua means a good deal with us.” The “Alphas” are -to be congratulated on the success of the memorial exercises they have -held this year.——Twenty-eight “Pilgrims,” of DORCHESTER, with their -pastor as leader, are pursuing their course up the hill of knowledge -courageously. Their meetings are well attended and interesting. Their -verdict is: “We certainly feel that our circle has been a great benefit -to us all the year, though it has been our first attempt at such work. -We have no reason to regret starting, and look to next year for greater -results.”——At LYNN the “Raymond” circle carried out a very taking list -of exercises in celebration of April 23d. It was the first entertainment -of the kind the circle has ever given, and certainly they ought to -be pleased with their success. Their program has that unusual merit, -originality.——The “Vincent” circle, of NEEDHAM, was organized early in -the fall, and has been flourishing since. Nearly forty members are in the -class, and next year additions are expected. The “Vincent” is going to do -what we wish every circle in existence would do, have a representative -at their nearest Assembly—if you can not go to Chautauqua. The ideas -and stimulus gained would be worth many times the cost and fatigue.——A -suggestion comes from “Clark” circle, of JAMAICA PLAIN, that deserves a -comment. It is that THE CHAUTAUQUAN print more of the programs which it -reports. Did we not furnish at least four programs each month for the use -of circles we should certainly do this. As it is, we prefer to take the -many good suggestions which we get from the programs sent us, and use -them in our monthly programs. We do this because the programs sent us can -not be printed until so long after the performance has taken place that -they are of no practical use to circles; by readapting them we can give -them to circles in a way in which they will be of use. The “Clark” itself -has sent us a program that deserves reprinting, only of what practical -good would be a March program in THE CHAUTAUQUAN for July?——“Although but -a very small part of the great Chautauqua army, we have caught something -of its spirit, and wish it ever increasing success.” So writes the -secretary of the correspondence circle of “Earnest Workers,” of which -Alice C. Jennings, of Auburndale, is president. The circle has a thorough -and systematic plan of work. Frequent letters from the president offer -counsel and hints. At each monthly meeting memoranda from the students -are read. These memoranda contain answers to a list of printed questions, -such as: “What books have you read in connection with the C. L. S. C.? -What three subjects in them have most interested you? Have you met with -any difficulties, and if so, what?” etc. The whole plan of their work -is admirable——The “Acadia” circle of FRANKLIN, MASS., was organized in -1882. It has now sixty members. The president, although pastor of a large -church, has been absent but five times since the circle’s organization. -One of their great helps has been the pronouncing matches on Greek names -and common English words. On Shakspere day the circle had the pleasure of -listening to a lecture from Dr. R. R. Meredith, on “Leisure Hours.” - -From WOODBURY, CONN., comes a plea: “Pray receive into your host of -local circles the ‘Lone Star,’ for we are alone. There were others with -us who are not faded, but gone.” Marriage and going west has robbed the -circle of its members, until but one is left to keep the fire burning on -the shrine. We are glad to find a corner for that one here—certainly in -these columns there is plenty of company and no need to grow lonely.——The -“Newfield” circle of WEST STRATFORD is still “marching on.” On Shakspere -day the circle read “Merchant of Venice” and “Julius Cæsar” with hearty -appreciation, closing their celebration with a C. L. S. C. experience -meeting. Many were the stories told of what Chautauqua had done for -them.——MANSFIELD CENTER, a rural village in a dear old fashioned -Connecticut street, is the home of a circle of eleven members. It was not -begun until January last, but has shown its colors by having quite caught -up. Two of the professors of the neighboring Agricultural College have -given them very interesting lectures, and on Longfellow and Shakspere -days recitations and music furnished pleasing entertainments. - -A report of a successful first year comes from AUBURN, RHODE ISLAND, -where the “Clio,” of fourteen members, was formed in October last. The -new circles are all, like the “Clio,” promising to start next fall with -fresh vigor.——Our thanks are due the “Esmeralda Bachelor” circle for the -program of the first memorial services under the auspices of the Rhode -Island Chautauqua Union. Great credit is due to Prof. John H. Appleton, -the president of the Union, for his efforts to make the occasion a -success.——The _Sentinel Advertiser_, of HOPE VALLEY, devoted almost -a column to a Shakspere evening, at which the “Aryans” of that town -entertained the “Pawcatuck” circle of CAROLINA. Some twenty-six of the -guest circle were present and were greeted with elegant hospitality by -the home circle. - -They are always doing something new at OCEAN GROVE, NEW YORK. The last -has been a Tree Planting Day. On April 15 the C. L. S. C. planted a -beautiful maple for each class respectively of ’85, ’86, ’87, and ’88. -Representatives of each class were present, the largest number, of -course, being for 1888. There was a short address by Dr. Stokes, prayer -by the Rev. A. E. Ballard, and an appropriate song for each tree set out -in Bishops’ Grove. In the evening a “service extraordinary” was held; -trees and tree planting were the topics of talks, of songs, reading -and reminiscences.——The PALMYRA C. L. S. C. has enjoyed two evenings -in chemistry recently, Prof. J. C. Norris, of Walworth Academy, kindly -explaining dark points to them, and performing many fine experiments. -The circle is very warm in its praise of the lecture and lecturer.——A -Chautauqua circle consisting of fifteen members was organized at -UNION SPRINGS in January of this year. The members make their lessons -interesting and profitable with music, questions, and readings.——The -“Philomathean,” of LANCASTER, has a capital way of working in its -inexperienced members. “Questions, criticisms, and commendations are -interspersed through the whole evening. We aim to draw out the silent -ones, to make all interested and feel themselves responsible; try to -have every one feel that he _must_ take every appointment, and allow no -one to escape his turn at getting up question lists and easy work, and -so seek to train them for the more difficult work.” This circle is not -yet a year old, and numbers fifteen members.——We are happy to introduce -the first C. L. S. C. inventors. The “Unique” circle, of LOCKPORT, claim -that honor. Their invention is a game made up from the questions and -answers in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, and is intended to form a comprehensive -review of the year’s work. “The Unique” is the title of it. Would it -not be generous in the Lockport circle to share their discovery with -the rest of us?——The “Argonaut” circle, of Buffalo, entertained a large -number of invited friends at a special meeting held in April. The affair -was a decided success. The “Argonauts” deserve special credit for the -efforts that they are making to awaken interest in the affairs of the -C. L. S. C. by extra meetings.——At YONKERS there is a circle now in -its third year which has never reported to THE CHAUTAUQUAN before. In -all it numbers twenty. Their work during the past three years of their -existence has been in regular programs of essays, readings, and questions -and answers, with an occasional variation to suit necessity. This year -they held a very successful memorial service in honor of Longfellow’s -day, and more recently have had a valuable lecture, with experiments, on -chemistry.——Fourteen persons are reading the Bryant course in connection -with THE CHAUTAUQUAN, at MUNNSVILLE. The circle did not undertake work -until January, so adopted a short course for the rest of this year rather -than try the regular course. We hope to find them at work on the regular -course next fall, with their hopes of a larger membership gratified. - -“Our Junto” is a circle within a circle. Five young men of the “Broadway” -circle, of CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, form it. Their program for the spring -(of which they ought to be very proud) is a little book rather than a -single page, containing the work laid out for the “Juntonians.” The -plan is admirable. Each member has something to do at every meeting, -and he knows what it is to be so long beforehand that he has ample -opportunity to gather material. All circles will find it to their -advantage to give attention to “Our Junto’s” plan.——Last October a few -of the many students in the C. L. S. C. in NEWARK, organized a local -circle. By the perseverance of these few others have been persuaded -to join until the circle numbers about twenty. They have taken the -name “Arcadia.” Memorial days in particular find pleasant observance. -The last celebration, Longfellow day, was especially interesting. The -chemistry is furnishing an excellent opportunity for experiments, which -the “Arcadia” is fortunate enough to have a chance to carry on in an -academy laboratory.——For the sake of northern New Jersey, which they are -sorry not to see often reported in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, the members of the -“Hawthorne,” of HACKETTSTOWN, a circle of five members, formed in April -last, has sent us thus promptly its report. The “Hawthorne” plunged _in -medias res_ and celebrated the Shakspere memorial almost as soon as its -organization was complete. Such a vigorous start promises well for their -progress next year.——The “Round Table” circle of JERSEY CITY is a band -of twenty enthusiastic workers. A great deal of genuine hard work has -been done by them the past year. The memorial days are celebrated, and -every incentive used to foster the true Chautauqua spirit. Experiments -have recently been given the class at the high school under the direction -of the teacher of science.——The “Ionic,” organized in DOVER, in January -last, grows in interest with each meeting. There are nine members, whose -happy experience thus far has been never to be discouraged. But why -should they be? “Each member does his part.” - -The “Kensington,” of PHILADELPHIA, is a circle of eleven members who are -much in love with their readings. Such a success has their circle become -that the members are willing to sacrifice other things to be present, and -the president writes that he has received great benefit in going over -again the fields of study that he harvested years ago.——A letter from -the secretary of the “Pleiades,” of PHILADELPHIA, says: “‘Pleiades’ is -now nearly two years old. We began the present school year by increasing -our membership from nine to eighteen. We took the advice given in THE -CHAUTAUQUAN on simplicity of government, adopting such rules only as -would systematize matters, and having as little formality as possible. -It is a success. The meetings are so profitable that we think of -continuing them all summer. Two of our members have taken college courses -in chemistry, and they have been giving us some practical experiments -in this delightful study. Greetings to our sister circles, and praises -to our _alma mater_.”——The “Emanon” circle, of WEST PHILADELPHIA, has -sustained a sad loss in the death of Mr. John S. Rodgers, to whom the -circle ascribes its success. He had been the instructor of the class for -a long enough time for its members to appreciate his worth and sincerely -mourn his death.——A similar sorrow has come to the circle of WEST -BELLEVUE, where Mrs. Dr. W. G. Humber, a loyal member of the C. L. S. -C., died on the morning of May 3d.——The Chautauquans of PITTSBURGH make -more of Special Sunday than any other circles that we know of. Our last -reminder of this is a tiny vest-pocket program of the exercises carried -out by the “Duquesne” and “Mount Washington” circles on the second -Sabbath in May.——The circle at UNIONDALE writes us that it has chosen -for its name “Meredith,” in honor of Samuel Meredith, first Treasurer of -the United States, and for their motto they have selected “Spare minutes -are the gold dust of time.”——What better proof of the efficiency of the -course than this testimony from the “Tennyson” circle of thirty members, -at ROCHESTER, PA.: “We think generally that our most pleasant evenings -are spent at our circle. One thing that deserves to be especially noted -is that light reading among us is being superseded by solid study and the -reading of standard authors.”——A circle of ’88s, at ALLEGHENY CITY, bears -the popular name of “Wallace Bruce.” Starting with eighteen members they -have grown to twenty-eight, a sign, we hope, that next year they will -increase with the same rapidity. Their program of Shaksperean exercises -is before us, and it bears some excellent numbers.——The “Carbondale” -circle reports a prosperous year. The interest and enthusiasm of the -members is increasing. The memorial days are all observed, and by -devoting ten to fifteen minutes of each session to singing the circle is -becoming familiar with Chautauqua songs. Mr. and Mrs. G. R. Alden gave -the circle some very happy talks on their return from their recent trip -to the Florida Chautauqua and New Orleans Exposition. The circle closed -its first year with a trip to England; this year it closed with a “Greek -night.” Going direct to France they propose to visit Paris, Switzerland, -Italy and Greece. Arrived in Hellas, the manners, customs, home life and -amusements of the Greeks are to be described in short essays. Each member -intends to constitute “thonself” a committee of one to secure a new -member for next year’s circle.——An appreciative letter reaches us from -SPRINGBORO, where a circle now numbering fifteen has been in existence -since 1881. The president writes: “While we are nearing the goal of -graduation we look back with gratitude at our rich feast with kings and -princes, with masters of art, of science, and of literature. Best of all, -we find that we have been made to more clearly understand the wonderful -power of the Infinite in all things. With our motto ‘Invincible’ still -before us we hope not only to finish the course, but keep climbing with -the Chautauqua brotherhood while life lasts.”——Let all good Chautauquans -congratulate the fraternity at MONTROSE. Thus the secretary writes: “It -has long been a wish that we might have a branch of the C. L. S. C. -in our ‘City on the Hill.’ Four attempts were made, but to no avail; -finally a few who were especially enthusiastic endeavored to push ahead -once more. The result has been more successful than we anticipated. We -organized in January with nine members, and now have grown to sixteen. We -trust that July will find us with the desired amount of work fully and -well accomplished. There is a most encouraging prospect of doubling the -membership another year.” - -Twenty-seven enrolled members make up the circle at ERIE, PA. The circle -meets in the Y. M. C. A. parlors, and the informal, pleasant meetings -have proved a great attraction to the members. The Shakspere memorial -was observed very successfully, by a parlor session. The literary part -of the program consisted of a discussion on the authorship of Shakspere, -followed by readings, then came refreshments and the evening was closed -by a half hour of Chautauqua songs. Not many evenings ago an address was -delivered by the president on Emerson, followed by an hour of practical -observation through the telescope. The Erie circle claims that they have -interesting meetings, and as a proof say that a non-member, a blind man, -is in almost constant attendance.——About 100 members of the C. L. S. C. -Alumni Association of PITTSBURGH met in a social way at the parlors of -the Seventh Avenue Hotel on April 20th, to enjoy the pleasures attendant -upon the third annual reunion of the society. Arrangements had been -partially made for the reception of Dr. Vincent, who had been expected, -but the following letter was received instead: - - To the Annual Reunion of the Pittsburgh C. L. S. C. Alumni - Association, Pittsburgh, Pa.: - - MY DEAR FELLOW-STUDENTS—I sincerely regret the engagement which - had been made prior to the invitation to meet you this evening. - The original engagement it was impossible to break. I am - therefore denied the privilege of your feast of reason and flow - of soul. The Chautauqua work increases in expansion and power. - The later classes are steadily growing. I have the good hope that - the classes of ’89, already forming, will be the largest and - most flourishing of all. I am more and more convinced that there - are multitudes of people who would hail with joy the provisions - of the “C. L. S. C.” if they were simply informed concerning - them. Are you doing all you can toward the enlightenment of the - great public with regard to the C. L. S. C. and other branches - of the Chautauqua work? Let me urge you to renewed zeal in this - direction. Bidding you “a hearty God speed,” I remain your - servant in this goodly work. - - J. H. VINCENT. - -The banquet passed off most pleasantly. - -At a recent meeting of the “Evergreen” circle, of GREENVILLE, S. C., the -circle expressed in a series of fitting resolutions the sorrow of the -members at the death of Mr. Richard Grant White, and their appreciation -of the value of his recent work for THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - -A letter from PETERSBURG, VIRGINIA: “We organized our circle last -October, but it was almost January before we got fairly started. We -follow closely the work laid out in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, occasionally having -a public meeting. Our observance of the Longfellow and Shakspere days was -as creditable as any literary exercises ever presented in our vicinity. -Our desire for books has been so much increased by the C. L. S. C. that -we have resolved to establish a library for the reading element of our -city, and we have begun by the purchase of a few works as a nucleus.” - -ORANGE CITY, FLORIDA, has the beginning of, we hope, a large circle, in -six readers who are taking the C. L. S. C. with their general reading. -They use the questions and answers and make the general news of the week -a feature of every program. The “Orange City” circle is looking forward -to an assembly some day at Mount Dora. - -OHIO comes in with a letter too good to lose: “I discover in your May -number that a Kansas member of the C. L. S. C. class of ’85 says he is -the oldest of that class and was born (1815) in the year of the great -battle of Waterloo. I hope he will persevere and enjoy the exercises -until he reaches the age of at least three of the ‘Irrepressibles of -’84,’ two of whom are 75 years of age and one 84. The last is still -reading for another seal and hopes to be at Chautauqua in August. Hope -the member from Kansas will press on in the work he has begun, for -there are great possibilities before him which can only be attained by -perseverance. He will retain his mental faculties fresh and vigorous as -in youth. Press on, good brother, and you will reap your reward here and -hereafter.”——The C. L. S. C. of CINCINNATI and vicinity held their _Sixth -Annual Reunion_ on May 5th in the parlors of the First Presbyterian -Church. A goodly number were present from “Alpha” circle, “Cumminsville,” -“Christie,” “Mt. Auburn,” “Cheviot,” “Grace M. P.,” “Third Presbyterian,” -“Emanuel,” “Covington,” “Newport,” “Madisonville” and “Walnut Hills.” -The program consisted of an address of welcome by J. G. O’Connell, Esq.; -prayer by Rev. S. N. Spahr, followed by music, readings, and recitations. -The room was brilliantly decorated with mottoes and class emblems, and -a profusion of choice and fragrant flowers. From the chandeliers were -suspended the class dates, ’85, ’86, ’87, and ’88, and the letters S. H. -G. and under these were grouped merry companies, who took part in the -collation, which was not the least enjoyable feature of the program. The -quarterly vesper service was held on Special Sunday, May 9th, at Grace -M. P. Church. It was ably conducted by Mr. E. F. Layman, President of -“Grace” circle. Rev. S. N. Spahr gave a very excellent address to the -members upon knowledge rightly directed.——The “Young Men’s” circle of -CINCINNATI has been doing good work this year. The circle is composed -of companion workers in church and Sabbath school, and the bounds of -union have been strengthened by the united study of the “Word and Works -of God.” The Chautauqua studies were taken up by them with an earnest -desire to better fit themselves for successful work. Their faith and -courage has been severely tried by the death of one of their active, -earnest members, Mr. George E. Wilcox—a sorrow which they are struggling -to make a blessing.——The class of ’88 has a live section at MORROW, the -“Irving.” There are over thirty regular attendants in the band and their -fortnightly meetings are conducted like college recitations, a pastor -being the instructor. May the “Irvings” prosper and multiply. - -A friend writes from NORWAY, MICHIGAN: “We wish to be recognized by our -fellow-workers as a prosperous circle, although a small one, and we are -very glad we have joined them.” The “Norway” has made a splendid record -in its year’s existence, having met every week since last October. It -need not fear a lack of cordial welcome here.——“Thornapple” circle, of -NASHVILLE, boasts a history very similar to that of the “Norway.” It -was first organized a year ago, and its membership is ten. The members -are all workers, and kindly report themselves highly pleased with the -Chautauqua Idea.——A letter full of the Chautauqua characteristics comes -from DECATUR: “Our ‘Pansy’ circle of twenty-five members have held -regular meetings since October. We are enthusiastic, and have done -genuine work. But it has not all been work. We have had a ‘question -match’ upon Greek History and Mythology, the winner of the contest -receiving as a prize an original poem. On Founder’s day the question -box was on ‘What has Chautauqua done for me?’ On Longfellow’s memorial -the circle visited a neighboring class, spending a merry evening. But -the red-letter day of the year was April 23d, when a dinner party was -tendered the members and their husbands by one of the circle. It was -generally pronounced the most enjoyable affair the town had had in many -a day and served as a good advertisement of what the C. L. S. C. does -for its members. Few of our guests knew how much we had done or could -do.”——An unusually good joint meeting took place at FLINT in honor of -Shakspere. Two circles of the C. L. S. C. and one of the Spare Minute -Course united. We like one thing on the program particularly. After -taking up in essays Shakspere’s Character, Home Life and Contemporaries, -the essays were all studies of one play—“Macbeth;” thus the plot of -“Macbeth” was outlined, then followed “Macbeth’s Character,” “Lady -Macbeth,” “Who was Duncan?” “Witches and Ghosts,” and “Moral of Macbeth.” -This is a much more satisfactory method than several disjointed readings -or studies. The evening was closed by conversation and readings, -conducted by an able Shaksperean scholar, Hon. E. H. Thompson. - -Shakspere himself would, we wager, have been nothing loath to have taken -part in the celebration given in his memory at GOSHEN, INDIANA; for -“Kitchen Science” illustrated took up the first part of the evening, and -the supper, we are told, was not confined to the articles on which THE -CHAUTAUQUAN has tried to instruct its readers this past year. In the -evening, after these gastronomic exercises were finished, a literary -program was carried out.——Here is a circle “of the first magnitude.” Read -its record. “The FRANKLIN C. L. S. C. of INDIANA has increased during the -past three years from a membership of twelve to forty-five. We have never -failed in having our regular meetings every two weeks since we first -organized. During the past winter the circle managed the lecture course -of our city, and as one of the results cleared nearly $100. Chancellor -Vincent was one of the lecturers, and the members of our circle were -delighted to meet him after hearing ‘That Boy.’”——The C. L. S. C. at -LIMA, representing classes ’85, ’86, ’87 and ’88, is one of the brightest -and most wide-awake circles in the State. The circle was organized -three years ago, and now has a pleasantly furnished room with piano, -library, etc.; meets every Friday evening, and observes all memorial -days.——SHAWNEE MOUND has a Chautauqua class of twenty-three members. We -are pleased to notice that the circle passed, at a recent meeting, a -resolution of respect in memory of Richard Grant White, expressing their -sorrow at the loss which American scholarship, and in particular the -C. L. S. C. have sustained.——We are pained to record the death of Mr. -Hermon St. John, at SALEM, on May 1st. The Chautauqua work loses in him a -faithful friend. - -It has been remarked in these columns already that “Alpha” of QUINCY, -ILLINOIS, is famous for its novelties. Their latest sensation was the -very practical illustration of a subject given before the circle by the -secretary. This gentleman is a native of Hibernia, and so was chosen for -a paper on dynamite. When called upon to perform he produced a package -of the explosive, much to the consternation of the members.——There died -at RUSHVILLE, on April 18th, the oldest member, without doubt, of the -C. L. S. C. in the world, Mr. Van Rensalaer Wells. Three years ago his -daughter began reading to him the books of the course. He took a lively -interest in these readings, and finally joined the class of ’86. Had he -lived it was his intention to have visited Chautauqua at the graduation -of his class.——A good woman from CHICAGO writes: “I went about from house -to house among my friends, and finally succeeded in inducing three young -persons, all earning their own living, to begin the readings with me.… -We sit around a table socially, and discuss freely our literary repast.… -I forgot to say that I am a very busy woman, the mother of three boys. -My best reading is often done after nine at night, when the little eyes -are closed in sleep.”——The announcement of a new C. L. S. C. arrival -is made from OREGON, where the “Ganymede” of twenty members appeared -in October last. Busy people, but they feel that they can not afford -to miss the Saturday evening meeting. The meetings are to be continued -through the summer for the purpose of review.——Another Illinois addition -made to the C. L. S. C. last fall was at SAVOY, where a club of eighteen -was gathered. Notwithstanding the very severe weather and deep snow, -and the fact that the circle members are farmers, living far apart, the -sessions are full and wide-awake. A very good plan has been tried by -the circle in chemistry, the blackboard being used for exercises. Every -circle ought to have a blackboard.——The history of the class at BUCKLEY -began in 1882, when six members met in informal meetings for discussion. -In 1884 it was thought wise to organize formally. Since that time the -circle has been making a decided impression upon the community. Two -public meetings have been given, which have attracted general attention. -At the last, the closing session of the year, thoughtful remembrance was -made of the president by the gift of a beautiful chair.——A band of nine -join the ranks from WARREN. It is only of late the class has found a -name. It is “Meridian,” from the fact that the town is situated on one -of the meridians. The circle has been following THE CHAUTAUQUAN in its -plan of work, using the published programs, with slight variation.——“It -takes three to make a circle,” writes a lady from FARINA, “and we are -three; one ‘Invincible,’ one ‘Pansy,’ and one ‘Plymouth Rock.’ We are -scattered as to time, but are united in interest, in enthusiasm, and -in determination. Our circle was organized in November, 1881, only a -dot—myself—but though alone, and unsuccessful in securing readers, -and hindered in every way from doing the best of work, there was a -satisfaction in doing the readings that nothing had ever brought into my -life. What we shall accomplish as a circle, the future will reveal, but -there is no ‘giving up’ to any of us.”——A Chautauqua circle of MOLINE, -not yet a year old, and a Shaksperean circle, under the same direction -as the former, have been coöperating the past season in a series of -parlor meetings of great interest. In January it was a dinner party; on -Founder’s day a literary performance with brief essays on Chautauqua -subjects; and on Shakspere day a decidedly new thing—a Shaksperean -quotation contest. No one was allowed to give a quotation that had been -given by another, and the successful competitor took the prize on his -ninety-fifth quotation.——We are in receipt of the Longfellow program of -the “Oakland” circle, of CHICAGO; an excellent and varied list of numbers -it is. The “Oakland” is a wide-awake circle. - -From MARKESAN, WISCONSIN, the secretary of “Climax” circle writes: “We -are still in a flourishing condition. Although some who were with us last -year have gone to new homes, we have new members to make up those we have -lost. There are no very young students in the class, but one has to wear -two pairs of spectacles to see. We have observed most of the memorial -days, and found the programs in THE CHAUTAUQUAN very useful.”——What one -zealous reader did is told in a note from DARLINGTON: “Last year myself -and daughter read the course alone. Before the beginning of the present -year I put a short article explaining the C. L. S. C. scheme into our -local paper, and called a meeting of all those who would like to take the -course. The result is that we now have a circle of thirteen. There will -probably be an increase next year.” - -A beautiful souvenir of the Longfellow celebration of the “Vincent” -circle at MILWAUKEE, MINN., has reached our table. The memorial was a -perfect success, and with justice the members felt very proud of it. The -“Vincent” is another circle sprung from the faithfulness of a single -reader, a lady who in 1883 began the course, and in 1884 had gathered a -circle of twenty-two about her, each one of whom responds promptly and -faithfully to all calls for class work.——The “Quintette” of “Plymouth -Rocks” at DULUTH have been doing the regular work since October, in -informal meetings led by the different members in turn. They expect soon -to change their name to suit an enlarged membership.——The “Gleaners,” -of ZUMBROTA, with a goodly number of their friends were treated to an -interesting program of exercises on Shakspere day. The “Gleaners” are -a power in their community, and have, they say, “enough enthusiasm to -fill up an evening without refreshments.”——At HASTINGS a circle began -life in October with sixteen regular members, besides several local -members. The class has had a sad break in its ranks by the death of Miss -Kate Stebbins, a bright young woman who had undertaken the C. L. S. C. -studies.——ST. PAUL bids fair to become exactly what its Chautauquans are -aiming to make it, a great C. L. S. C. center. To this end a “Central” -circle has been formed in the city, composed of six circles, the -“Wakouta,” “Itasca,” “Dayton’s Bluff,” “Plymouth,” “Canadian American,” -and “Pioneer,” and numbering in all over an hundred members. The -“Central” circle celebrated Longfellow’s day by a very enjoyable program, -and is trying to make arrangements for other joint entertainments. The -St. Paul friends are proud of having two of their number prominent at -Lake de Funiak, Mrs. Emily Huntington Miller, one of the founders of -the “Pioneer” circle, and Dr. L. G. Smith, pastor of the First M. E. -Church.——The home of the Minnesota Summer Assembly, WASECA, is the center -of a stirring circle of twenty members. The increase in the circle is -largely due to the efforts of the Rev. A. H. Gillet and his colaborers at -the Assembly, which met at this lake for the first time last year. The -“North Star,” of Waseca, offers a very attractive plan of work. - -The IOWA friends come in as strong as ever. WINTERSET reports a new -circle of twenty-five members, with a weekly program published in the -local paper, and growing zeal.——DUNLAP reports another which is in its -second year, and which numbers twenty-three. An especially good program -was arranged by these friends recently. A number of their members -visited New Orleans the past winter, and an evening of sketches of -Exposition sights was arranged.——“Sunny Side Straight Line,” of HAMBURG, -is composed of two school ma’ams. They meet whenever and wherever it is -convenient; after five p. m., before eight a. m., at the gate or in the -kitchen. Pleased with the course, they are looking forward to joining -the “Pansies” at Chautauqua in 1887.——The AFTON circle had the pleasure -of celebrating its first memorial day on April 23d. They succeeded so -admirably that Addison day was observed as well. The Afton circle pays a -kind tribute to the work: “We are glad the Chautauqua Idea struck us, but -sorry it failed to reach us sooner. It has been of untold benefit to us, -opening to our view new fields of thought, and arousing new resolutions -for the future.”——At BLANCHARD the “Pansy” class gave an entertainment -not long ago for the benefit of their work. An elocutionist was secured -and after the performance the C. L. S. C. and its aims were presented to -the audience. The circle realized a nice little sum from their venture, -which they propose to turn into maps, charts and the like for their room. -An excellent idea.——Kindly mention we must make, also, of the DECORAH -circle. Like all Iowa circles, it “grows.” The secretary writes: “We -began last year with quite a small number, but have kept adding to our -numbers until there are eighteen now who are reading the course. Our -circle is composed entirely of ladies, the most of whom have work that -takes up the greater part of their time. We have very pleasant meetings -and derive much pleasure and profit from them.”——WASHINGTON, IOWA, has a -circle of thirty members. It has been holding weekly meetings for over -two years. At the close of last year this circle held a picnic with -the Fairfield circle, and this year they have distinguished themselves -by an elaborate Longfellow entertainment. “Miles Standish” was read -and illustrated by tableaux. The Washingtonians certainly displayed -extraordinary artistic ability in arranging one, at least, of these -tableaux. They wanted “Priscilla” led in on her “Snow-white Bull,” but -how to manage the “palfrey” was a question. Here is how they did it: A -long narrow table was padded, the legs wrapped, a head with suitable -horns constructed, and the whole thing finally wrapped with white -cotton-flannel. “Necessity is the mother of invention.”——A beautiful -memorial comes from one of the members of the circle at HUMBOLDT. “My -mother, aged eighty-one years, died March 4th. She was the first one in -this county to become interested in the C. L. S. C. She made her eldest -grandson a member, bought the books for the first year’s course, and -read them first, marking whatever she wished him to notice. At our class -meetings she always selected from the Bible the chapter to be read at -the opening exercises.… A grand helper has left us.”——At KEOSAUQUA a -circle was organized as long ago as ’82. Of the original eight members -only three are left, but the circle has more than held its own, now -numbering twelve or more members. They are fortunate in having as a -leader a teacher of unusual ability.——At TABOR a circle was organized -last September, which, with a goodly membership of interested members, -is doing excellent work. A Professor from Tabor College has helped this -circle much by performing for them chemical experiments. - -The Chautauqua work has lost one of its strongest members in COOPERSTOWN, -DAKOTA, this year, in the sad death of Mrs. H. G. Pickett, who -accidentally shot herself in her husband’s bank in that town. She was an -ardent admirer of the Chautauqua work, and her life a true exposition of -the truths that the C. L. S. C. is striving to bring into the practical -every-day life of its members.——A spirited Shakspere anniversary was -celebrated at FAULKTON. The parlors where the circle met were filled to -overflowing with delighted guests, and full exercises of tragedy, song -and jest were carried out. - -The “Kate F. Kimball” circle, of MINNEAPOLIS, KANSAS, started on its -career in October last with a membership of thirteen. Their plan is -simple and practical—a sure way of introducing conversation. Each member -is required to prepare five questions on the readings, which are given -to the circle, and which are then discussed. This method would serve a -good purpose in the _conversazione_.——The _Kansas City Journal_ suggests -that Tuesday night in that city ought to be called Chautauqua night, as -nearly a dozen circles meet there on that evening.——The “Clytie,” of -ARKANSAS CITY has had a severe trial of its loyalty this year. Malarial -fever has broken their ranks so that they have been able to hold but a -few meetings. It does not dampen their ardor though, and they express -all honor and gratitude to Superintendent and Counselors for their wise -help. The “Clytie” joins another Kansas circle in protesting against -the name “Plymouth Rocks.” This is the “Greenwood,” of EUREKA, which -declares, “We can not become reconciled to it.” The “Greenwood” does not, -however, allow its pleasure in the reading to be spoiled by the class -name, for it writes: “Chautauqua gives us a broad departure from our -daily cares and ruts which is very refreshing, and we trust it will be of -benefit to us.”——Here is a five-year-old Kansas town, EVEREST, of five -hundred inhabitants, with a circle of sixteen members. Here is certainly -a chance, with such a start, to grow up with the country.——Greetings -to the class of ’86, and to all Chautauquans, come from the circle at -LEAVENWORTH. This circle has ten members. Its chief circle interest is -the question box, which frequently leads to a lively discussion. They are -favored in having secured an excellent leader, the Rev. J. A. Monteith. -Several of this class are reading the White Seal course. - -There are in NEBRASKA nineteen circles of the C. L. S. C. A strong -effort is being made to secure at the Assembly at CRETE, in July, -a full attendance of representatives from all these organizations. -Accept a word of advice from THE CHAUTAUQUAN. Go to Crete if you can -get there. It will pay you in more than double measure to take part in -the exercises of C. L. S. C. day. Of the nineteen circles of Nebraska, -the one at LINCOLN takes the lead, we believe, in numbers. It has -reached forty-seven, with an average attendance of about forty. In -recognition of the literary character of the circle the Superintendent -of Public Instruction in Lincoln has kindly opened a room in the new -State House to the circle. The Lincoln circle, as befits its location -at the capital of the State, is taking active measures to make the C. -L. S. C. day at Crete a success. Already they have attracted public -attention by a unique Shaksperean festival, at which a number of guests -were entertained.——Another of the nineteen is at FALLS CITY, an ’88 -offspring. The circle has seventeen members. An executive committee of -three appoints instructors for the review of each meeting, following -the plan in THE CHAUTAUQUAN. The class observed Longfellow day with -appropriate exercises. Our Falls City friends have chosen a name with a -meaning—“Misselts”—“I will surmount all difficulties.” Not an easy name -to take, by any means, but the “Misselts” is made up of school teachers -mainly, and what can they not do?——An addition to the Nebraska circles -is made at HOLDREGE. It came about in this way, writes a friend: “I left -my home circle in Indiana in December last and started out to ‘try my -fortune in the far West.’ I first stopped at Odell, Nebraska, and tried -to introduce the ‘Chautauqua Idea’ there. I found it was already being -talked of, and by the efficient efforts of a gentleman interested in the -movement, a grand, earnest circle was organized. In February I came to -Holdrege, the ‘Magic City,’ as it is called, naturally expecting every -one to be interested in the C. L. S. C. I had almost decided to give up -the course, because I was so busy, when I met a teacher of the town—a -‘Pansy.’ We have formed a circle, and next year instead of having the -smallest number possible, expect to compare favorably with any in the -State.”——BLAIR has a circle of twenty-two members this year. A small -circle has been at work in the town for two years, but this year its -membership has increased in remarkable proportions. Blair is situated -within sight of the Missouri River, and from this noble stream the circle -calls itself the “‘Souri.” Occasional parlor meetings for invited friends -are enlarging the work rapidly in Blair. - -Already we have given our readers hints of the noble way in which -Professor Spring has been representing Chautauqua at NEW ORLEANS. His -last public exploit was the Shaksperean Anniversary. From a local paper -we learn of the success of the undertaking: “The thirty-first birthday of -the Stratford-on-Avon bard was celebrated last evening at the Exposition. -The ceremonies were gotten up almost entirely by Prof. Edward A. Spring, -director of the Chautauqua classes in sculpture. It was hoped that Judge -Braughn and other local gentlemen learned in Shaksperean lore would have -been present, but a heavy storm prevented. The ceremonies, however, -were very successful, though briefer than had been intended. They were -presided over by ex-Governor Hoyt, from far-away Wyoming, chief of the -jury on education, who made a brief but eloquent oration in commencing -the proceedings. He dwelt on the incomparable greatness of Shakspere -and the immense influence his writings have had on the many millions of -people speaking the English tongue, and showed how, as the centuries roll -on and as the English speaking peoples grow and multiply, the luster -that attaches to his name must grow brighter and brighter. Following -Governor Hoyt, Professor Spring made a neat little speech, setting forth -the benefits accruing to those connected with the great educational -institutions with which he was connected, and how appropriate it was for -the Chautauquans to include in the fifteen great events they commemorate, -the birth of Shakspere. Mr. Spring then introduced Mrs. Florence Anderson -Clark, of Bonham, Texas, a member of the C. L. S. C., who closed the -evening by reading an original poem on Shakspere.” - -From the far western frontier of TEXAS, at ALBANY, comes this letter: -“Three of us associated ourselves together the first of October to read -the Required Readings of the C. L. S. C. In January we were joined by two -more. Our method of study has been to have each member originate twenty -questions, to present at each weekly meeting to the members, who on the -following week take them up to answer and discuss. The circle has been -quietly but seriously working. The benefit of having a certain course of -reading has already been felt, and we believe that many others will be -influenced to join us the next year.” - -COLORADO is represented by a circle of seventeen at DELTA, a growing -young town blessed with many people of culture and refinement. The circle -belongs to the ranks of the ’88s, and is proceeding with the vigor -characteristic of the class. They luckily can introduce good music as a -part of each evening’s program. By the secretary of the Delta circle a -word of experience is added: “After pursuing the course of study nearly -four years, I can add my testimony as to its great inspiration to all who -are systematically keeping it up.” - -CARSON, NEVADA, has the “Sierra Nevada” circle of twenty-five ’88s, a -vigorous young life that, in spite of delays in getting books, and the -discouragements in starting, is getting along famously. The spread of the -C. L. S. C. in the West depends very largely upon the organized circle. -The “Sierra Nevadas” have a summer work of bringing in recruits, as well -as of making up back lessons. - -The flags are flying from the “Green” circle, of PORTLAND, OREGON, and -“we are getting along splendidly,” is their watchword. They write that -they are growing more and more enthusiastic, and that the circle is -becoming “a joy and a feast of good things” to them all. “Green” circle -had a brilliant Longfellow celebration last winter. The feature of it -was a Longfellow picture gallery, representing the principal heroes and -heroines. A good idea to remember when we come around to February 27, -1886. - -The remarkable Floral Festival held in SACRAMENTO, CALIFORNIA, on May -5th, in honor of Mrs. M. E. Crocker, to whom that city owes so much for -her munificent charities and endowments, was participated in by two of -the local circles of that city. The “Sacramento” circle sent an elegant -tribute to the festival. On a bust about three feet high, decorated -with flowers and bearing the letters C. L. S. C., was erected a gateway -with gates ajar; within was an open book. The “Vincent” circle sent one -equally unique—a pyramid of flowers surmounted with a flower-wreathed -pole, from which was suspended a banner of flowers. - -The “Alma” circle of SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA, consists of seventeen members -of the class of ’87. Longfellow’s day was a very pleasant occasion with -them. The president tells us: “The good effects of the reading are -already to be seen among our numbers; a desire for good and profitable -reading being manifested more and more as we pursue the course.”——The -Chautauquans of SAN JOSÉ had a very interesting meeting in celebration -of the “Bard of Avon.” A most excellent program was rendered. One of the -leading features was a very able critical review of “As You Like It,” -read by a lady of the circle. - - - - -THE C. L. S. C. CLASSES. - - -CLASS OF 1885.—“THE INVINCIBLES.” - -“_Press on, reaching after those things which are before._” - - -OFFICERS. - - _President_—J. B. Underwood, Meriden, Conn. - - _Vice President_—C. M. Nichols, Springfield, Ohio. - - _Treasurer_—Miss Carrie Hart, Aurora, Ind. - - _Secretary_—Miss M. M. Canfield, Washington, D. C. - - _Executive Committee_—Officers of the class. - - * * * * * - -There will be excursions from Chautauqua to Niagara Falls every few days -during the season, and there will be no difficulty in securing ample and -satisfactory accommodations for the class of 1885, or any portion of it. - - * * * * * - -The challenge of our classmate in Kansas brings forth the following from -Maryland: “I see in the May CHAUTAUQUAN a chivalric old gentleman hailing -from Kansas, claiming to be the oldest member of the class—being born in -the year the battle of Waterloo was fought. Now, I have entered on my -seventy-fifth summer, and remember distinctly the battle of Waterloo. -But, he claims also to be the _youngest_. Now, if I shall have the -pleasure of meeting him at Chautauqua, and he is so disposed, we will -run a foot race. But, really, this is the time for ‘grave and reverend -seigniors’ to speak out. Who comes next?” - - * * * * * - -NEBRASKA.—I trust that I shall be numbered with those who shall “pass -under the Arches” at dear Chautauqua this summer, thereby proving that -I am one who is earnestly striving to “Press on, reaching after those -things which are before.” The C. L. S. C. means a great deal to me. These -magic letters are the key which unlocks all the enthusiasm of my being. -These four years have been a new revelation to me, and have been of -deep, abiding interest, and a well-spring of joy. Last year my dearest -friend, a devoted Chautauquan, a member of the class of ’85, a thorough -“Invincible,” in every sense where right was involved, went on before. -Since that time I have read alone, but hope to be one of the successful -many who shall pass under the Arches and “begin” again, instead of ending -on Commencement day. - - * * * * * - -An earnest society lady writes: “The whole bent of my life is changed by -the C. L. S. C. Next to being a Christian, it is the greatest blessing of -my life. I read and listen to sermons and lectures more intelligently, -and have been led into a spiritual life.” - - * * * * * - -ONTARIO.—I have often felt it my duty to express my thankfulness to the -C. L. S. C. for the information I have received from their well chosen -books. Words are inadequate to express my gratefulness to Chancellor -Vincent and his coadjutors for the great and lasting benefit I have -received from this course, although being unable to do the work as -thoroughly as I would if time permitted. I complete my four years this -summer, and I am more anxious than ever to explore other books which -I have not read. This circle of reading has created a desire for some -branches that hitherto was dormant, and revived the desire for others. -From the first I have been anticipating a trip to Chautauqua, but will be -unable to gratify my desire this summer. I hope to be able to receive my -diploma at home. I think our class motto is excellent, and hope we will -all prove worthy of our name—“Invincible.” - - -CLASS OF 1886.—“THE PROGRESSIVES.” - -“_We study for light, to bless with light._” - - -CLASS ORGANIZATION. - - _President_—The Rev. B. P. Snow, Biddeford, Maine. - - _Vice Presidents_—The Rev. J. T. Whitley, Salisbury, Maryland; - Mr. L. F. Houghton, Peoria, Illinois; Mr. Walter Y. Morgan, - Cleveland, Ohio; Mrs. Delia Browne, Louisville, Kentucky; Miss - Florence Finch, Palestine, Texas. - - _Secretary_—The Rev. W. L. Austin, New Albany, Ind. - - * * * * * - -From all quarters there comes up the assurance from members of ’86 that -they mean to be at Chautauqua or Framingham this summer. Attendance at -an Assembly, with its enthusiastic “Round-Tables,” conferences upon -literature, art and science, new lights upon past reading, and new -outlooks for the future, well nigh doubles the value of the course. Come, -earnest readers of ’86, and see. - - * * * * * - -Plans are already being formed for the graduation exercises at Chautauqua -next year, and the hardly less interesting observances at the New England -Assembly. Any suggestions bearing upon this important matter may be -freely made by letter to the president or secretary, by those who can not -be present at the Assemblies. The class of ’86 is the first _large_ class -to graduate; it has done grand work in the course, and it means to honor -Chautauqua and itself by suitable exercises and observances, when its -thousands shall come up to receive from the University their diploma in -August, 1886. - - * * * * * - -We shall hear, personally or by letter, at the Assemblies, from our -honorary members, of whom the class of ’86 is justly so proud. - - * * * * * - -Will members of ’86, in New England, remember the new Hall of Philosophy -at Framingham, now under way, and to be completed by July 1st? Send your -subscription, if you have not done so; subscribe and send at once if you -have not yet taken a share in this grand enterprise, and induce your -friends to lend assistance, that the few hundred dollars needed to finish -and furnish the building may be at once forthcoming. Remit to N. B. Fisk, -Woburn, Mass. - - * * * * * - -It is hoped that there will be a large number of the New England members -at the Framingham Assembly in July. - - * * * * * - -Let your light shine! hold the torch on high! let every one see that the -class of ’86 is true to its name—“Progressives.” - - * * * * * - -Miss Alice C. Jennings, ’86, whose poems from time to time have appeared -in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, writes as follows: “A severe sickness in childhood -deprived me entirely of the sense of hearing. This has been more -effectual than bolts and bars in excluding me from all institutions of -learning. You can easily imagine how precious to a person so situated -must be the opportunities of the C. L. S. C., and of the ‘Society to -Encourage Studies at Home.’ At least four of my deaf friends have joined -the C. L. S. C. on my own solicitation. We have tried to have a circle -among ourselves. We live in five different places, but our headquarters -are at Boston Highlands, and we send reports there every month.” - - * * * * * - - “We study for the light,” we would not be - Like the black hue, absorbing every ray, - But like the white, gladly reflecting all, - That we may be true children of the day. - “Blessing with light,” as we have each been blessed, - For wisdom makes the weary earthway bright, - And walking in its ways we soon shall rest - With _Him_ in realms of everlasting light. - - —_Mrs. E. J. Richmond._ - - * * * * * - -To the New England Branch a suggestion is made in the interest of the -class, and in behalf of the excellent Secretary of the New England -Branch. Will not _every_ member not able to attend at Framingham this -summer send (July 15-28) to Miss Mary R. Hinckley, South Framingham, -Mass., a postal card with postoffice address, and bearing, if nothing -more, “Yours for ’86”? To ascertain those who and how many are affiliated -with “the good class of ’86” in New England, is most desirable for -weighty senior and graduation interests. - - * * * * * - -Reports from various quarters lead to the conclusion that, compared with -the whole number at any time enrolled in the class of ’86, the number -entering upon the Senior year will be exceptionally large. It ought to be -large—larger than any class preceding, more thorough, more enthusiastic. -We have the advantage of the experience of all who have gone before. Let -us rise to our privileges. - - -CLASS OF 1887.—“THE PANSIES.” - -“_Neglect not the gift that is in thee._” - - -OFFICERS. - - _President_—The Rev. Frank Russell, Mansfield, Ohio. - - _Western Secretary_—K. A. Burnell, Esq., 150 Madison Street, - Chicago, Ill. - - _Eastern Secretary_—J. A. Steven, M.D., 164 High Street, - Hartford, Conn. - - _Treasurer_—Either Secretary, from either of whom badges may be - obtained. - - _Executive Committee_—The officers of the class. - - * * * * * - -At a great camp meeting near Indianapolis, in the first week of August, -the Rev. Frank Russell, President of the class of ’87, is to set forth -in an address, the nature of the C. L. S. C. as an educational and moral -force. - - * * * * * - -The wake of a C. L. S. C. class is found to kindle a bright way for the -next. Much correspondence of the officers of the class of ’87 has been -toward the interest of the class of ’88, and is now extending even toward -that of ’89. Each succeeding class seems to promise increasing numbers -and power. - - * * * * * - -A member of ’87 has succeeded in forming a circle at Jefferson, Ohio, of -ten members. She writes: “I can not tell you all the good our circle is -doing for us individually. We have enjoyed our chemistry very much. We -were very pleasantly entertained and instructed by experiments given by -Professor Perry in April.” - - * * * * * - -From St. Johns, N. B., Mr. G. A. Henderson sends the following account of -the C. L. S. C.: “We organized with five ‘Pansies,’ and were joined this -year by seventeen ‘Plymouth Rocks.’ We were the means also of influencing -the formation of another circle of ’88, over twenty in number. At present -there are about sixty reading the course in our city. We look forward -with deep interest to the publication of the book by our chief ‘Pansy,’ -and although we have not contributed to it, we hope to meet and march -with you through the Gates in ’87.” - - * * * * * - -Hannah Percival Hamer, a member of the “Pansy” class, died at her home in -Taunton, Mass., April 24, 1885. She was a most faithful worker and firm -advocate of the Chautauqua course. - - * * * * * - -On the 9th of April Miss Maggie B. McKnight, of Chambersburg, Pa., a -member of the “Pansy” class, died. She was a devoted and enthusiastic -Chautauquan, and looked with great pleasure toward the time when she -could visit Chautauqua. She was reading with another member of the class, -who intends, however, to keep on, saying that she “could not do without -it now.” - - * * * * * - - “Pansy—a tender thought!” - A happy prophecy was that, to send - That one bright flower of our class to hide - Behind this modest emblem, while she penned - Her strong, sweet thought. A prophecy fulfilled; - For pansies—tender thoughts of her—are found - Within the garden of our hearts in bloom - The whole year round.—_J. B. Stuart._ - - * * * * * - -Westfield, N. J., is the home of a “Pansy” circle, calling itself by -the cheerful name of “Hope.” It began with three sisters reading the -course together. It was very fitting that they should receive their -first inspiration from reading “Four Girls at Chautauqua.” The “Hope” is -working hard to increase its membership. - - -CLASS OF 1888.—“THE PLYMOUTH ROCKS.” - -“_Let us be seen by our deeds_.” - - -CLASS ORGANIZATION. - - _President_—The Rev. A. E. Dunning, D.D., Boston, Mass. - - _Vice Presidents_—Prof. W. N. Ellis, 108 Gates Avenue, Brooklyn, - N. Y.; the Rev. Wm. G. Roberts, Bellevue, Ohio. - - _Secretary_—Miss M. E. Taylor, Cleveland, Ohio. - - _Treasurer_—Miss M. E. Taylor, Cleveland, Ohio. - - All items for this column should be sent, in condensed form, to - the Rev. C. C. McLean, St. Augustine, Florida. - - Class badges may be procured of either President or Treasurer. - - * * * * * - -The following are among the circles not yet reported in our column. I -first give name of circle, then place and number of members: “Gradatim,” -Kennebunk, Me., four; Bloomfield, Ind, seven; Niobrara, Neb., eight; -“Master” (motto, “Labor is the price of mastery”), Ionia, Mich., eleven; -“Peripatetics,” Chicago, Ill., twelve; “Magnolia,” Marianna, Fla., -fourteen; “Philomathean,” Lancaster, N. Y., eighteen. The last named has -by quotations, recitations, readings and essays celebrated the “memorial -days.” For six months none but ladies composed the circle. They, however, -so charmed three gentlemen that they sought admission and became -enthusiastic students. The members of this circle so dislike the class -name that they have refused to adopt it. They are among the others who -express their enjoyment of the class reports in our ’88 column. - - * * * * * - -The circle at Hastings, Minnesota, twenty-three members, has instructed -its secretary to write their objection to our name. Among other things -is the following: “In THE CHAUTAUQUAN we read of one class talking of -establishing a ‘Heliotrope Bed’ at Chautauqua, and another a ‘Pansy Bed.’ -We might send a coop of ‘Plymouth Rocks,’ but we fear they might demolish -the beds of flowers.” We have received encomiums of praise of the name. -One from Mount Carmel, Connecticut, says: “Our name, like every other -worthy thing, in spite of its ‘fowl’ associations, needs no defenders.” -One from Toronto, Canada, writes: “I am satisfied with our name, for -although it represents a speckled bird it will ‘crow’ a good deal when -four years old.” Another from Marine, Ill., after thanking Chancellor -Vincent for “How to Read Alone,” protests against a change of name or -motto.—A member of our class, a boarder in a Young Women’s Christian -Association of New Haven, Connecticut, writes: “I think as one takes up -Chautauqua books he loses the relish for stories, e’en though written by -good authors. What an opportunity for gaining knowledge of the highest -order!”—“Angle” circle, North Groton, N. H., is bereaved in the loss of -one of their earnest workers, Mrs. E. E. Merrill, a lady who read much -and well, and yet in the five short months had become so fascinated with -the C. L. S. C. that almost her last words were those of appreciation of -the same.—The East Norwich, L. I., circle is likewise bereaved in the -death of a devoted member, Miss Lizzie Franklin.—A class of unmarried -ladies complains that they have not been noticed. If they will send us -another letter, writing the name of their circle so we can decipher it, -and also give the town, or city, and state in which they live, we will -gracefully and gladly bow our recognition. - - * * * * * - -“Among the Indians: Osage Agency, Indian Territory.—Our circle consists -of six members—five teachers and one bookkeeper. Although each lives -a busy life, we have had weekly meetings, kept up with the required -reading, and celebrated two authors’ days, Bryant’s and Longfellow’s. -Surrounded as we are by Indians, who still wear blankets instead of -citizen’s dress, and who are not far advanced in the arts of civilized -life, we feel doubly thankful for the benefits arising from such a course -of reading.” - - * * * * * - -In Bingham Cañon, Utah, a mining camp situated about twenty-eight miles -southwest of Salt Lake City, the New West Education Commission has a -school established. One of the teachers proposed taking the Chautauqua -course alone, but, mentioning it to several, organized a circle of six. -Of the name she writes: “I like it so much. My home is in Plymouth, Mass.” - - * * * * * - -Half of the members of “Carleton” circle, Hudson, Mich., live out of town -from two to six miles, yet they are numbered among the most enthusiastic -and faithful. They have had full programs at every meeting, and have -observed all memorial days. They number thirty-seven, twelve being of our -class. The ’88s wear on their hats a symbolical badge (a _fac-simile_, in -brass, of the pedal extremity of a Plymouth Rock). They like the _motto_, -but not the _name_. - - * * * * * - -One from Gilbert’s Mills, N. Y., writes: “I can not longer refrain from -expressing how much I enjoy the reading of the course, although I am -pursuing it alone, occasionally meeting with the circle at Fulton, five -miles from here, which I much enjoy. The more I read and learn, the more -anxious I am to go on, that I may be no disgrace to our grand class name, -that takes me back to dear New England, and home. I would prove myself -worthy of it and of our motto.” - - * * * * * - -The “Chippewas” is the name of a circle of twenty-two members, formed at -the city of Eau Claire, Wis., October of 1884. Four of the members belong -to the class of ’86, the others to that of ’88. The society has met once -a week, and has observed the memorial days. In addition to the prescribed -course, the class is reading the two volumes of Timayenis’s History of -Greece. - - * * * * * - -“Mountain City” circle, Frederick, Md., very appropriately and -enthusiastically celebrated “Shakspere Day.” The program consisted of a -“Sketch of his Life,” and the reading of “The Merchant of Venice,” the -members taking the different characters. - - * * * * * - -Mrs. F. B. Edwards, who with her daughter joined the class of ’88 last -fall, and was a faithful and diligent member, died at her home in -Hartford, Conn., March 14, 1885. She was a lady of excellent education, -and had also the culture of much foreign travel and residence in Europe. -She was delighted with the C. L. S. C. plan, and especially with the -opportunities it offers for mental and moral growth. - - * * * * * - -One of the most earnest and beloved members of the “Pierian” circle, -of Brooklyn, N. Y., Morgan Morgans, has lately died. Mr. Morgans was a -young man of but twenty years of age—a member of the class of ’88, and a -zealous Christian. - - * * * * * - -So much having been written _pro_ and _con_, respecting our class -name, it is proposed to have the entire class vote for or against the -name. The circles will send their vote, giving the number in favor and -against present name. Those who are not in circles can send their votes -as individuals. The vote should be sent to the Rev. C. C. McLean, St. -Augustine, Fla., at as early a date as possible. - - * * * * * - - Thoughts are but the seeds of truth ready for the ground, - Promises of future good that will within be found; - Yet, with purer, truer thoughts the words have purer sound. - - Words are slender saplings, growing in the earth, - Starting from the very spot where the thoughts had birth, - But the noblest words can never tell the deed’s great worth. - - Deeds are mighty forests, towering and grand, - Not results of thoughts that were planted in the sand, - But deeply rooted, broad-leaved trees that will forever stand. - - Thoughts are truly noble, yet their work lasts but a day, - Words are often mighty, still their power may not stay, - But the influence of noble deeds can never pass away. - - —_Emily G. Weegar._ - - - - -THE SUMMER ASSEMBLIES. - - -FRAMINGHAM, MASSACHUSETTS. - -The writer of this article has visited, in different years, most of the -Sunday-school Assemblies, and he has found none, not even Chautauqua -itself, where the wave of C. L. S. C. enthusiasm runs higher than at -the New England Assembly, South Framingham, Mass. Every class has its -headquarters, trimmed with greens and flowers, with the class-motto -wrought upon its walls; and every class has its anniversary, with toasts -and cream. The Round-Table is crowded at every session with intelligent -students, who can both ask and answer questions. If a reporter could have -taken down and printed all the replies given one afternoon last summer -to the inquiry, “What good is the C. L. S. C. doing?” it would have -furnished a valuable document for the use of workers in the cause. The -camp-fire is always crowded; last year the ranks, arranged by classes, -counted over five hundred members; and this year it will be greater. - -The traveler on the railway sees already a white columned building -gleaming among the trees on the summit of the hill. If he be a -Chautauquan, he needs no one to tell him “The Hall of Philosophy,” for -he recognizes it at once as the copy in every detail of the building at -Chautauqua. This Hall will be dedicated by the Chancellor during the -coming session of the Assembly, when from all New England the faithful -will rally to participate in the great occasion. Its dedication will take -place on Wednesday, July 22d, and the address will be delivered by the -Rev. Edward Everett Hale, D.D., one of the Counselors of the C. L. S. C. - -The Recognition day services will be held on Thursday, July 25th, when an -address will be given by the Rev. Luther T. Townsend, D.D., of the Boston -University. - -Among the leading lecturers (and lecturesses) of the Assembly during the -present season will be the Rev. F. E. Clark, D.D., Prof. W. N. Rice, -Dr. E. C. Bolles, Dr. R. R. Meredith, Dr. Geo. C. Lorimer, Robert J. -Burdette, Miss Kate Field, and Mrs. Mary A. Livermore. - - -MONTEAGLE, TENNESSEE. - -Monteagle is in the State of Tennessee, upon the Cumberland Mountains, -2,200 feet above the sea-level. We have here the most invigorating, -health-giving atmosphere, the purest water, the most beautiful wild -flowers, the grandest mountain scenery, the most picturesque views of -the valley lying hundreds of feet below, the loveliest vales, the most -magnificent forests of native trees—indeed, a combination of all the -desirable natural conditions for a pleasant summer resort. - -This is the place which has been selected by the Christian people of -the South, of broad views, of liberal hearts and generous impulses, of -intellectual culture and refinement, for the location of the Monteagle -Sunday-school Assembly. This Assembly is permanently established by a -charter granted by the State of Tennessee. For two years they have been -very successful. - -If there is virtue in faithful and capable teachers and honest work, no -one in 1885 will go away from Monteagle dissatisfied. - -These schools offer to teachers and intellectual people a place where -they can spend the heated term of each year, combining study with rest -and recreation, in a delightful and inexpensive mountain resort, free -from all social dissipation. It is proposed to furnish in the summer -schools of Monteagle the best instruction in every department open. All -who seek absolute rest on these mountain heights will be free to take it; -those who shall seek only lighter courses will find entertainment; and -those who wish thorough instruction will not be disappointed. - -The summer schools open June 30th. The Assembly opens August 4th, and -closes August 28th. Among the lecturers will be Dr. B. M. Palmer, -President Chas. Louis Loos, Dr. D. M. Harris, Bishop Walden, Sau Ah-Brah, -the Rev. Sam Jones, Dr. Lansing Burrows, Wallace Bruce, and Hon. G. W. -Bain. - - -ISLAND PARK, INDIANA. - -The Island Park Assembly will hold its seventh annual session on the -beautiful grounds of the association near Rome City, Indiana. The -Assembly will open July 14th, and remain in session until July 30th. The -Tabernacle Lecture Course will be unusually brilliant and attractive. -Among the speakers will be Bishop Foster, Bishop Bowman, Prof. C. E. -Bolten, Wallace Bruce, Dr. Geo. C. Lorimer, Dr. H. H. Willets, Dr. John -Alabaster, the Rev. John DeWitt Miller, and Miss Lydia Von Finkelstein. - -The music will be under the general management of Prof. C. C. Case. The -Goshen full band and orchestra, and the Hayden Quartette will be in -attendance. The Sunday-school Normal Class will be under the personal -instruction of the Superintendent of Instruction, and will be one of -the most important features of the coming Assembly. The course will be -identical with the Chautauqua course, and graduates will be entitled to -the Chautauqua diploma. - -The visitor finds the Island, some twenty acres in extent, a few -minutes’ walk over a bridge and through a shady avenue from the railroad -station, Rome City, with the village at an equal distance westward. -The Island is naturally beautiful, always fanned by cool breezes, with -hills and miniature valleys, romantic nooks, a beautiful beach, and a -drive partially surrounding it, many fountains and wells, and a plaza -surrounded by hotels and offices. Beyond the rustic bridges of the canal -are a Tabernacle seating 3,000, a building containing the Model of -Palestine, and the Art Hall with its large lecture rooms. - -From the north is to be seen, a mile across the Lake, “Spring Beach,” a -well appointed hotel in an elaborately improved park, containing mineral -springs and the famous trout ponds. - -South of the Island, across a bridge, are the Assembly lands, containing -the Amphitheater, and laid out in lots and avenues, with a high bluff -to the Lake. Here are opportunities to tent in perfect quiet or in the -liveliest streets of the Assembly City. - -Two steamers ply on Sylvan Lake, between the Island, the head of the Lake -and Spring Beach. Two hundred row boats are kept. - -Postoffice, telegraph, bathing and laundry facilities on the ground. -Ample hotel and boarding arrangements in the village. - - -MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA. - -The sixth summer Assembly of the Chautauqua Literary and Scientific -Circle will be held at Pacific Grove, near Monterey, California, opening -with an address Monday evening, June 29th, and closing Friday, July 10th. - -This Assembly, in spirit and purpose, resembles the famous Assembly held -each summer at Chautauqua Lake, New York. The course of lectures during -the coming session will include in its subjects not only scientific -themes, but those of art, history, and general literature. - -Microscopes, stereoscopes and other apparatus will abundantly illustrate -the lectures. The managers also intend to add to each evening’s lecture -the attraction of beautiful music, illustrative tableaux, recitations, -etc. - -The Assembly will open on the evening of June 29th, with an address by -Dr. C. C. Stratton, of San José, President of the Pacific Branch. - -A few of the speakers and subjects will be as follows: The Rev. Dr. -Wythe, Oakland, “Scenes in Great Britain and the Continent;” Prof. H. -B. Norton, San José, “The Knights of the Temple;” F. B. Perkins, San -Francisco, “Wit and Humor;” Dr. C. L. Anderson, Santa Cruz, “Diatoms;” -Edward Berwick, Carmel Valley, “World Federation;” Adley Cummins, Esq., -San Francisco, “The Sanscrit Language and Literature;” the Rev. Dr. E. G. -Beckwith, San Francisco, “School and Skill.” - -Sunday-school Normal Work will receive its due share of attention. - -The music of the Assembly will be in the very competent hands of Mrs. -Helen M. Cushman, of San Francisco, and will be artistic and delightful. - -The morning of Friday, July 10th, will be occupied with the interesting -exercises of the Third Graduating Class of the Pacific Branch C. L. S. C. - -Pacific Grove is situated on the beautiful Bay of Monterey, and connected -with the ancient capital of the State by a pleasant drive of one and a -half miles, over a macadamized road lately constructed. In beauty of -location it can not be excelled—its graceful pines, extending to the -water’s edge, affording a delightful refuge from the heat of the sun. As -a healthful place of resort, it is not surpassed by any locality in the -State. The value of the Assembly held here has been fully assured by the -delightful sessions of the past five years. - -The well known facilities for studying Natural History at Pacific Grove -have made that one of the important topics of study, and much enthusiasm -has been aroused on the coast by the work of the C. L. S. C. in this -department. - - -LAKESIDE, OHIO. - -The prospects for the work of 1885 in this beautiful and healthful -summer resort are commensurate with the energy displayed by the zealous -management. The grounds are charmingly located on the northern shore -of the Peninsula, opposite Sandusky, Ohio; accessible by an hour’s -delightful steamer ride from this city, and will probably be connected -with the Danbury station of the Lake Shore Railroad by rail this season. -The Encampment sessions begin on Tuesday evening, July 21st, the brief -enthusiastic “Reunion” to be followed by one of the spicy and wise -lectures of the Rev. P. S. Henson, D.D., of Chicago. There will then -follow for nearly two weeks a rare program under the superintendency -of the Rev. B. T. Vincent, of Philadelphia, Pa., assisted by the Revs. -F. Russell and E. Persons. Mrs. B. T. Vincent will have charge of the -Primary Teachers’ Department, and also the Boys’ and Girls’ Meeting, -assisted by the Rev. J. S. Reager, of Ohio. The Models of the Tabernacle, -Jerusalem, etc., will be explained daily by the Rev. Dr. Hartupee and -Mr. Tannyhill. Miss Ross, of Chicago, will give daily instruction in -Kindergarten work, and Professor Trueblood, of Delaware, Ohio, in -Elocution. Daily devotional meetings will be conducted by the Rev. W. H. -Pearce, of Erie, Pa. Lectures and sermons are announced from Bishop R. S. -Foster, Drs. Henson, Alabaster, Nelson, Bayless, Parsons, Rev. Messrs. -Young, Pearce, Russell, Reager; Colonel Bain, of Kentucky, Wallace Bruce -and Leon H. Vincent. Brilliant stereopticon exhibitions, with lectures by -the Rev. Mr. Young and Professor Bolton. Oriental exhibitions by Miss and -Mr. Von Finkelstein, with their gorgeous collection of Oriental costumes, -etc. The Meigs Sisters and Professor Underhill will give concerts and -elocutionary readings; Professor Trueblood will also give popular -readings. Mr. French, of Chicago, a racy and instructive Chalk-talker, -will “draw.” The music will be under the able direction of Professor -Brierly, of Erie, Pa., and Miss McClintock will delight the crowds who -gather at Lakeside. The C. L. S. C. will, of course, have a large place -in the attention of the people, as Lakeside is a center of a large field -of workers in this line. There will be “Round Tables,” etc., and a public -Recognition service for the class of ’85, all of whom who desire it may -secure this privilege there, and receive their diplomas, which will be -there for distribution, if they inform the Rev. B. T. Vincent in time to -see that the diplomas are sent to him for them. A Soldiers’ day, with war -songs and a lecture on “Echoes from Round Top,” by the Rev. J. B. Young, -of Harrisburg, Pa., will form one of the enthusiastic features. The -promises of Lakeside, one of the finest of Chautauqua’s daughters, were -never so good, nor so sure of rich fulfillment. - - -CRETE, NEBRASKA. - -The Nebraska Sunday-school Assembly Grounds consist of one hundred and -nine acres on the banks of the Blue River, at Crete, Nebraska. Its first -session was held in that town in July, 1882, under the direction of the -Rev. J. D. Stewart. Last year, at its third session, a splendid tract of -land was donated to the Assembly. It extends along the river bank, with -admirable opportunities for boating, contains a beautiful grove and ample -grounds for buildings, walks, drives, and other purposes. Two lecture -halls and a dining hall have already been erected, and some hundreds -of tents provided; while a Normal Hall, several cottages, and other -buildings are proposed. - -The Normal Department will be in charge of Prof. R. S. Holmes, who has -been for many years a teacher of this department at Chautauqua. - -The Primary Normal Department will be in charge of Miss Lucy J. Rider, -who will also conduct a children’s class daily. - -Dr. J. H. Vincent, President of the Circle since its commencement, and -Chancellor of the Chautauqua University, will be present and give two -lectures. Others who have had wide experience in literary pursuits will -give their counsels on the ways of spending time most profitably in -reading and study for the people. - -Among the lecturers engaged are: The Rev. R. R. Meredith, D.D., of -Boston; the Rev. O. H. Tiffany, D.D., of New York City; the Rev. -Robert Nourse, of Washington, D. C., and the Rev. H. M. Ladd, D.D., of -Cleveland, O. - -A course of musical instruction will be given by Prof. J. E. Platt. Prof. -W. F. Sherwin will give a lecture and conduct concerts. - - -OTTAWA, KANSAS. - -By the time that this reaches the readers of THE CHAUTAUQUAN the -Inter-State Assembly of Kansas and Missouri will be in session at its -home in Forest Park, in the city of Ottawa, Kansas. No other assembly -is entertained with such hospitality, for the people of Ottawa throw -open to it their public park, in the limits of their city, on the banks -of the historic Marais du Cygne, “The Swamp of the Swan,” celebrated -by Whittier’s pen in the border days of Kansas. Among the orators -whom they expect to hear are many whose names are well known to all -Chautauquans, as Wallace Bruce, Dr. Henson, Robert Nourse, Dr. Tiffany, -Sau Ah-brah, and our own Chancellor, Dr. Vincent. Indeed, it will be -quite a transplanting of the Chautauqua Idea to the western prairie, -for as at “the Mecca of us all,” we shall hold daily a Round-Table; the -Commencement service will be fulfilled, the Chancellor will deliver the -address to the graduating class and confer the diplomas of the C. L. S. -C.; Prof. Sherwin will wave the baton before the chorus on the platform; -Prof. Holmes will teach the Normal class; Sculptor Spring will instruct -the class in clay modeling; and the general Superintendent of Instruction -will be Dr. J. L. Hurlbut. - -Last year, the C. L. S. C. interest showed a great increase. In 1883, -the number of C. L. S. C. members who clasped hands around the camp-fire -was twenty. In 1884, it was nearly ninety, and if we could count those -who joined before the close of the Assembly it would reach a hundred. -We look for twice as many on Tuesday evening, June 30, when we expect -to be entertained with stereopticon pictures of “Sights and Insights -at Chautauqua” by the Rev. O. S. Baketel, of New Hampshire, and at the -close of the lecture, march in procession to the camp-fire, and sing and -talk together. We expect also a great day on July 1st, which is given -to the “Grand Army of the Republic.” Perhaps no other State went into -the war with quite the enthusiasm of Kansas; certainly no other has as -large a proportion of veterans settled within its borders. Every year -the Assembly recognizes these old heroes, and “Old Soldiers’ Day” always -draws a multitude. We shall have a concert of war songs in the morning, -and a lecture by General O. O. Howard, U. S. A., in the afternoon, when -the Governor of Kansas is expected to preside. - -No gathering in Kansas is complete without a Temperance meeting, for -Kansas is the banner State in constitutional prohibition. Let it be said, -all stories to the contrary notwithstanding, that there is no defection -in the ranks of the prohibition army, and no retreat. The cause is as -strong as ever, and no one thinks of rescinding or re-submitting the -Amendment. We hold “Temperance Day” on July 2, when Dr. Philip Krohn -and Col. Geo. W. Bain will speak, and various conferences on different -aspects of the work will be held. - -The Ottawa Assembly extends a welcome to all Chautauquans who may enter -its gates, and gives its assurance that they will find themselves at home. - - -MOUNTAIN LAKE PARK, MARYLAND. - -This delightful summer resort is situated on the Baltimore & Ohio -Railroad, in Garrett County, Maryland. It is 2,800 feet above sea level, -in the midst of sublime scenery. The place itself is enough to attract -all lovers of the true, the beautiful, and the good, but besides the -feast for the eyes and lungs, there is a feast of reason and a flow of -soul prepared to profit, entertain, and inspire the hosts who gather to -the Assembly. - -The principal lecturers are Prof. H. L. Baugher, D.D., of Pennsylvania -College; the Rev. G. W. Miller, D.D., of Philadelphia; the Rev. C. P. -Marsden, D.D., of St. Louis; the Rev. Z. Warner, D.D., of Parkersburg, -West Virginia; the Rev. N. L. Reynolds, of Mt. Pleasant, Pa.; the Rev. -J. B. Van Meter, D.D., of Baltimore; J. B. Phipps, Esq., Secretary of -Maryland Sunday-school Union and author of pictorial designs for the -Berean Lesson Periodicals. - -“Thorough Normal Work” is the motto of Mountain Lake Park Assemblies. The -Assembly Normal Union course of study will be pursued during the session, -and diplomas awarded on Normal Union day, August 19th. - -The C. L. S. C. Department was organized two years ago, and Monday, -August 17th, has been set apart to this interest. A lecture on -“Self-help” will be delivered by the Rev. J. T. Judd, A.M., of Lewisburg, -Pa., president of the circle, with special C. L. S. C. exercises. -Round-tables, vesper services, class unions, and camp-fires will be -enjoyed during the Assembly session. - -New Testament Greek will be made a specialty. The Rev. C. E. Young, of -Baltimore, instructor. - -Geology will receive the attention of the Rev. N. L. Reynolds, who -inspires enthusiasm in this noble study. - -Elocution classes will be formed as last year, and Amateur Photography -will be the pleasant recreation of lovers of the art. - -The Assembly meets August 6th and closes August 19th. For further -information address the Rev. W. Maslin Frysinger, D.D., Baltimore, Md., -or the Rev. Jesse B. Young, Harrisburg, Pa. - - -ROUND LAKE, NEW YORK. - -The management of the Round Lake, N. Y., Sunday-school Assembly sends -greetings to its hosts of old friends and to many others whom it hopes to -make warm friends in the near future. The last year was one of the best -in its history. Numbers, meetings, speakers, work and workers, influence -and the divine blessing, all combined, made it a power for good, -wide-felt and lasting. It is the aim to make the coming Assembly better -than ever. They have planned on the same generous breadth and scope of -the last season, and are confident their work will merit approval. - -The program already completed is full and rich and varied. On July 9th -and 10th there will be a reunion of chaplains and soldiers. The meeting -is most vigorously planned for. There will be a large gathering of the -old soldiers; Col. G. A. Cantine will act as Grand Marshal. Gen. John -A. Logan has been secured as speaker. The Sunday-school Assembly will -hold a longer session this season than ever. Beginning July 14th, it -will continue fourteen days, and each day will be packed with varied and -most profitable exercises. They have a larger variety of specialties -than formerly, viz.: French, German, Painting, Drawing, Clay Modeling, -Oratory, Vocal Music, Kindergarten, Calisthenics, Phonography, etc., etc. - -On C. L. S. C. day, Tuesday, July 21st, Dr. John H. Vincent, the -originator of the Idea and developer of its plans and inspirer of its -growing work, will be present and address the graduating class, who -will pass the “golden gate” and from his hand receive their well-earned -diplomas. - -The following is a partial list of the lecturers: The Rev. J. H. Vincent, -D.D., the Rev. John P. Newman, D.D., the Rev. H. A. Buttz, D.D., the Rev. -S. W. Dike, A.M., the Rev. A. D. Vail, D.D., the Rev. Geo. L. Taylor, -D.D., the Rev. I. J. Lansing, A.M., Prof. J. L. Corning, the Rev. D. H. -Snowden, the Rev. C. C. McCabe, D.D., Senator James Arkell. - -The Trustees, with great care and cost, have given special attention to -every part of the grounds, draining, cleansing and beautifying, rendering -the grounds, if possible, more healthful than ever. - -Never was this “charming spot of nature and art” more beautiful and -health-inspiring than to-day! Never was it more sought for as a FAMILY -SUMMER HOME than this spring. - - -MONONA LAKE, WISCONSIN. - -The Sunday-school Assembly at Monona Lake, Madison, Wisconsin for 1885, -will hold its session from July 28th to August 7th. The specialties -are: Music, Prof. Sherwin; Grand Chorus of 300 voices; Goshen Band and -Orchestra; Sunday School Normal; Children’s Class. Some of the speakers -are: Bishop R. S. Foster, Wallace Bruce, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein, the -Rev. George C. Lorimer, D.D., Prof. William I. Marshall, Prof. W. C. -Richards, Ph.D., the Rev. O. C. McCulloch, D.D., the Rev. D. Read, D.D., -the Rev. G. H. Ide, D.D., Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, C. F. Underhill -reader. - - -WASECA, MINNESOTA. - -The Assembly at Maplewood Park, Waseca, Minnesota, opens June 30th, and -continues in session until July 10th. - -Thursday, July 9th, will be Chautauqua day, and on that day a public -recognition service of the graduating class will be held. There will be -an address suitable to the occasion, and the recognition service as used -at Chautauqua will be used here. In the evening there will be a camp-fire. - -The names of Prof. H. B. Ridgeway, D.D., the Rev. Frank Bristol, Miss L. -M. Von Finkelstein, the Rev. C. A. Van Huda, D.D., and the Rev. J. F. -Chaffee, D.D., are found in the list of lecturers. No one has visited -Maplewood Park without feeling that Nature has done her part in providing -here a delightful retiring place for tired people and for those who are -in danger of becoming so. - -A dense grove rises forty or fifty feet above the lake. The lake itself -is a beautiful sheet of water, around which is a magnificent carriage -drive. All so quiet that the busy world seems shut out, while all Nature -seems to say, “Come and rest.” - -Besides, there are the attractions of the Assembly, calling the mind -into new channels and awakening new thoughts and kindling new and noble -desires for intellectual and moral improvement. - -The time at which the meetings are to be held this year has been -selected, with special reference to the convenience of the people. - -Bro. Gillet, superintendent of the Assembly, never needs an introduction -to the Northwest. He will make the occasion one of lasting good to the -interests he represents. - - -MAINE CHAUTAUQUA UNION. - -Arrangements are being made by the officers of the Maine Chautauqua -Union for a grand meeting at Fryeburg, to begin July 27th, 1885, and -to continue one week. The grounds at Martha’s Grove are being put in -order and beautified by Mrs. Nutter, the prime mover in this matter, and -everything will be done for the comfort and enjoyment of all Chautauquans -who visit this lovely spot. There is soon to be erected on the grounds a -“Hall in the Grove,” after the style of the one at Chautauqua. - -The program for this season is an attractive one and will consist of -illustrated lectures, vocal and instrumental music, essays and readings. -Some part of each day is to be devoted to the Round-Table, question box, -discussions and reports of circles. As a result of our meeting last year, -circles have sprung up all over the State. In Portland alone, there are -_three hundred_ Chautauquans where there were only _nine_ last year. - - - - -EDITOR’S OUTLOOK. - - -VICTOR HUGO. - -The greatest of the French writers of this century has passed away from -earth, after eighty-three years of a life which was, like Carlyle’s, full -of work to the very end. Victor Hugo’s greatness is difficult to measure -at this hour; we are too near to know whether this is an Alp or only a -hill. That it has attracted the attention, the admiration, the homage of -mankind for half a century would seem to mean that this was one of the -three or four great lives of the nineteenth century. Victor Hugo came of -a union of aristocratic and plebeian blood. His father’s tribe had been -of the nobles since 1531; his mother was the daughter of a seafaring -race. The current sketches of his father omit the most dramatic incident -of Colonel Hugo’s career. We refer to his long chase and final capture of -Fra Diavalo—the brigand hero of the opera which bears his name. In the -whole history of brigandage in South Italy, there is no more exciting and -romantic story than that of his hunt and capture of the “Friar-Devil” by -the father of Victor Hugo. In the blood of the poet the plebeian mother -triumphed at length over the Monarchist father, and Victor Hugo’s pen -has rendered the Republicanism of France more valuable service than his -father’s sword gave to the Napoleonic crown. - -His genius was fortunate in the poverty which compelled him to work for -bread, and the banishment which in 1853 threw him into exile, and again -forced him to take up the severe literary labor which brought forth -“Les Miserables” in 1862. This son of the aristocracy might have lived -a life with out fruit if he had not abandoned the ideals of his father -for those popular sympathies which made him the most dangerous enemy of -Napoleon III. The change in his views came slowly. He was a Royalist -under Louis Phillippe, and that king created him a peer of France in -1845. It was not until 1849 that he changed his political attitude, and -he was then forty-seven years of age—so that he divided his life pretty -evenly between the aristocratic and popular causes. His works show the -influence of his political thoughts, and the differences between the -earlier and later are very marked. The earlier works gave him the ears -of the great world; the later won him the hearts of the people. Whether -in prose or in verse, all that he ever wrote was poetry. His later prose -is a collection of poems of human aspirations. It is idle to seek in -them any system, they are emotion rather than thought; but the emotion -is the throbbing of the universal human heart. He believed in God and -in man. He rejected the religion of his people less under the stress of -conviction than through the force of his hostility to the organized human -world in which he saw men suffering. It was not his office to resolve -the riddles of human pain; it was his to gather men’s tears into God’s -bottle. It may be called a one-sided life; but it was on that side where -great lives are too seldom found. It may be said that emotion is blind, -passionate, dangerous, as Frenchmen have abundantly proved; but it is -still true that the emotion which rouses men from lethargy is necessary -to beneficent change, and that even though the wail of human misery -must go up forever, we must honor the great souls who seek solutions of -the mystery of evil in a happier ordering of human society. We need not -become socialists to reverence Victor Hugo’s socialistic philanthropy. -Its aim was high, and it has its great uses. Though only God’s bottle -be large enough to hold the tears of his children, it is a noble poetry -which considers the sorrows of the earth and seeks to pour the sunshine -or hope into the low valleys of humanity. Hugo’s way may be the wrong -way—probably it is—but it is good for men to hold fast the hope that -there is _some_ way through the sea to the promised land. There is a -desert beyond the sea; but somehow we shall cross the desert into the -Canaan of humanity. - -It is, therefore, as a poet of the sorrows and aspirations of our race -that we shall most profitably think of Victor Hugo. He was somewhat -too French in spirit to be a poet of mankind; he was too egotistic to -be on the heights of his human song; he would have been greater if his -knowledge of Jesus of Nazareth had been deeper, and his imitation of -him perfect in the measure of his great capacity; he would have left -something unsaid which wounded men whose purpose was as high as his own, -if he had been more Christian and less Hugoist. But why do we ask all -things of all men? Victor Hugo did a great work in his own great way. -A dangerous socialism has temporarily profited by his denunciations of -society, but in the end of the account it will probably appear that he -has advanced Christian socialism by the uplift he has given to human -aspirations. Men are not so willing to go back to the fleshpots of Egypt, -not so much in danger of leaving the bones of the whole race in the -desert, more anxious to move on to their promised land. - - -THE REVISED OLD TESTAMENT. - -It required fifty years of the Elizabethan age to introduce that revision -of the English Bible which has so long been the standard edition of -the Holy Scriptures in our tongue. It would be strange if the revision -of that standard Bible which has just been completed were to come into -immediate and general use. The New Testament revision met with a harsh -reception from the critics of conservative temper; and it certainly -has some defects, though the _sense_ of the original is more obvious, -to use the mildest term, in the new than in the older revision. The -revised Old Testament has consumed fourteen years of the labor of the -English and American committees, and the most obvious fact is that it is -a more conservative piece of work than the revised New Testament. The -committees probably profited by the buffetings of their New Testament -revision brethren; but they had a simpler task, since they had not to -settle the text of the original Hebrew, whereas the Greek text of the -New Testament is still a battle ground of criticism. After all, however, -the two revisions constitute one “revised Bible,” and must stand or -fall together. The general judgment may probably run to the effect that -the New Testament is revised too much and the Old too little. There -is a special defect, however, in the New Testament English—it is not -idiomatic, and it is not always intelligible. There is a rumor that it -will be re-revised into harmony with the conservatism which characterizes -the new Old Testament. It is not to be overlooked that there are various -demands made upon a revision. Those who most earnestly desire one have -in view a more plain and understandable text for popular use. Wycliffe’s -great thought, “a Bible understonden of the people,” is their desire. -But the literary demands upon the revisers exclude intelligibility by -the people as a governing rule. This group of demands defies the skill -of any revision committee. They ask for improvements; but they object -to any changes. The Bible as an Elizabethan classic is their admiration -and they seem not to be willing that the people should have any other -Bible. There would seem to be ample room for both revisions; let the -literary people have their English of 1611, while the people have English -of this century. We are not yet, however, sufficiently advanced in the -thinking which revision requires to qualify even the critics among us -to distinguish between a classic text for scholars and a plain text for -the millions. A modern English Bible will come by and by; we can afford -to wait, and meanwhile to study the fruits of the labors of a Revision -Committee loaded down with a great weight of conservative environments. -For it is not the classicist alone who stands guard over the old English -text; conservative theologians regard that old text as too sacred to be -modernized, and distrust modernizing as involving changes in the moral -and religious influence of the Bible upon mankind. The intelligibility of -the Bible is not, to such thinkers, a leading requisite; reverence for -its mysteries ranks all other considerations. We are probably outgrowing -this view of Holy Scripture; but it is an opinion strong enough yet to -keep utterly dead English locutions in the revised Old Testament of 1885. -This conservatism is much stronger in England than in this country; the -American Committee desired to substitute modern for obsolete words. - -That any changes have been made under such respectable and imposing -auspices is a great gain to Christian knowledge. The thing is done; the -grand old text has been subjected to a revision. It is quite possible -that we are entering an age of biblical revision; and it should be -remembered that the Bible of 1611 closed an age of revision. It was -the last in a series of revisions, each of which contributed to the -perfection of the English text. We can not be content with an English -Bible which employs _which_ for _who_, _wist_ for _knew_, _earing_ -for _plowing_ and _ouches_ for _settings_. The American Committee was -thoroughly right in desiring to use modern words in these and other -cases. If any revision is to stand, it must contain such modifications -of the old text. A satisfactory English text can not be attained so long -as the English Christians insist upon retaining archaic forms of such -insignificance as the foregoing; there must be an agreement to make an -English text on Wycliffe’s principle of popular intelligibleness, before -a revision can be of very high utility. The present revision breaks the -ice; we have begun; some time or other we shall go on to the logical -conclusion of the movement—a modern English Bible for all who use our -mighty speech. The assent of the conservative to a single change concedes -the principle of revision; his assent to many changes prepares the way -for all that are necessary to the modernizing of the Book of Books. - - -SUMMER HEALTH AND PLEASURE. - -The summer is looked forward to with eager desire and it is dismissed -without regret by the residents of the temperate zone. The explanation -lies partly, if not mainly, in our defective adaptation of ourselves -to the hot season. Charles Lamb once wrote, “The summer has set in with -its usual severity.” The wit covers a truth; we adjust ourselves so -imperfectly to the heated term that we suffer from the high temperature. -The art of living must include devices and cautions through which we -get the good and shun the evil of each season. Men are slowly learning -that to “enjoy life” on this planet one must pay the same price as for -liberty—“eternal vigilance.” The summer of the North ought to be our -golden time of health and enjoyment. We have the whole of the atmosphere -to breathe from—not bits of it let into artificially heated spaces. -There is shade for the noonday heats, and the evenings and mornings -for exercise and refreshment of muscular energy. But the hot hours are -often dangerous and the atmosphere may be poisoned by our own neglect -of decaying vegetables or animal matter. We must aim to keep clean and -keep all things about us clean; food should be lighter than in winter -(less heat-producing); exercise should avoid the hours of fervent heat; -the occupations should take a more leisurely pace; the scene of life -should, if possible, be shifted for some week or weeks so as to diversify -our mental interests and break the dreary monotony of long days spent -in one environment of body and soul. The word which describes the art -of summer life is _moderation_; but moderation is not indolence, though -there is a natural tendency to drop into the laziness which characterizes -barbarian humanity in hot lands. To be healthy and happy one should -resist the disposition to be idle. Neither health nor happiness come to -lazy people in any desirable measure. The best forms of both depend on -activity; but in summer it must be moderate and regular. If, then, one -has constant occupation, he should cultivate moderation of interest and -exertion, shun the blazing noontide, and take his food as well as his -exercise in reduced doses. Too much food, care, exercitation, these are -our northern summer dangers. Our civilization is yet very imperfect in -this region of art. We have attained to food, clothing, shelter. We do -not quite understand how to use them all wisely; but beyond these lie -the adjustment of exertion, rest, air, water, electrical and chemical -instruments of vitality, and the inner forces of our own being. Happiness -is the result of a complex mass of conditions and instruments of life -acting upon the spirit and reacted against by the spirit. Our knowledge -grows; but while it is growing we have to take for our text moderation, -and elaborate the sermon each man for himself. - -The great opportunities of the year come to us in summer. Nature is all -alive to please and instruct us—to give us the delights of the eye and -the inspiration of study. The world has been dressed with infinite art, -to afford us a holiday which shall be full of instruction. We need travel -to widen our vision of God’s modern Edens dressed by human art. We need -an active intelligence, to see and understand the Eden world of summer. -But all depends upon our care of our bodies. Health is the condition of -all summer pleasures. Is it not strange that we will spend months and -years learning how to use lifeless tools, and yet will not spend needed -time to learn the management of this vital tool by use of which all -happiness comes to us? Let us all try this time to keep the instrument -of life in tune for the music of the summer; to make of the season of -highest opportunity all there is in it for ourselves. Starting with that -selfish purpose, we shall soon find that we need social food, and that -here also, “it is more blessed to give than to receive.” Helping others -to enjoyment is the healthiest of “health movements;” for no tonic is so -spiritually exhilarating as the sight of other people’s happiness which -we have made. The man who sends a child out of the city suffocation -of summer time has a poor imagination if he can not enjoy the gambols -of that child in the country meadows and groves as he never enjoyed a -banquet in his own house. Doing as many generous actions as possible is -one way to get both health and pleasure out of the summer. - - -SCIENCE AND PRACTICAL LIFE. - -It is somewhat remarkable that at a time when science is indubitably -failing to justify the exalted hopes of those who looked to it for a -solution of the deepest questions of being, it is enlarging our sense -of its value to practical every-day life. The mystery of the molecule -is insoluble, but the usefulness of chemistry is rapidly increasing. -Professor W. Mattieu Williams proposes to use maltose as a cooking agent -to produce foods which are both more palatable and more easily digested. -Those who attend the cooking school at Chautauqua this summer will -probably learn how this work is to be done, and what results will follow. -The theory sprang out of attempts to feed cattle on malted grain. It was -found to be too expensive for cattle, and also hardly necessary, because -cows have good digestive apparatus. Human beings have impaired digestion, -and can afford more expensive food than the beasts have need of. The -maltose cooking carries graniverous foods up into an advanced stage of -nutritive condition, lessens the labor of weak stomachs, and tickles -dull palates with new flavors. There is no near limit to the possible -fruits of this thought. The chemist may render us incalculable services -along this line. We have suffered something from the chemistry of men -who adulterate our food; it is a comfort to know that the good uses of -chemistry are coming forward to render us most valuable compensations. - -It is a matter of course that in this field we shall often be -disappointed; but so many solid gains are secured that we shall readily -excuse some fanciful experiments. In lighting public streets and -buildings, electricity has made it possible to turn night into day; -chemical studies have perfected the grinding of flour; a hundred more of -small and great practical advances in scientific living are secure. We -shall go on. It is very noticeable that the conveniences of modern life -have triumphed in unexpected ways over natural difficulties. The zone -of comfort for human life has been widened toward the pole and toward -the equator. The gains are more slowly harvested southward; any reader -who feels the languor of this season will know why we do not march so -triumphantly toward the equator as we do toward the north pole. Moral -energy is in larger demand, as we go south, to resist the tendency to -idleness. The north wind puts spurs into us and whips us into action. -We shall therefore find the northward limit of vigorous life before we -find the south boundary of it. And naturally our science, invention and -discovery bear upon cold rather than heat. We have the means now of -living in higher latitudes, in full moral and mental activity, than were -good for body or brain a hundred years ago. We know how to build for -warmth in zero weather, and we have cheap fuel and cheap light for the -frosts and the dark of the North. - -An enthusiastic writer says that natural gas is to be the fuel of the -immediate future—the next fuel. We have as yet found it only here and -there on the earth; but we are not done searching for it. Imagine, then, -that we have found this gas all round the shores of Hudson’s Bay, and -calculate the consequences. A new Mediterranean is opened in a region -which has always been reckoned uninhabitable. Poets and philosophers -flourish far up toward Doctor Warren’s original Eden! For what but a -cheap and abundant fuel and light is needed to make possible a large and -flourishing empire around Hudson’s Bay? Migration, which is said to move -on parallel lines, has been trending northward for twenty-five years. The -wheat fields of America are a hundred and fifty miles nearer the pole -than they were fifty years ago. The Dakota and British Northwest which -we were willing to leave to the Indians fifty years ago, are eagerly -coveted for the plow of the wheat farmer. We are undeniably moving north; -the limit of that movement will be fixed for us by devices, discoveries, -sciences, which will enlarge our fields toward the eternal ice—on -principles similar to those which have already extended our domain in -that direction. For several generations the silk grown in Lombardy has -been packed on the backs of horses or in carts and transported across -the Alps to be spun and woven in Switzerland. Why should not our cotton -travel by sea to the shores of Hudson’s Bay to be spun and woven? Give -them power, heat and light in one natural agent, and the people of the -American Mediterranean might excel in any industry. And in default of -natural gas, who will now dare to say that the chemist may not solve the -problem in a more intellectual way than by the use of the drill? We write -here only of a _possible_ expansion of the human domain by the services -of science. - -A more practicable matter is that the age of steam, out of which, into -something better, we are probably to pass at a day not distant, has been -a very prodigal one. Waste is its great fault. It wastes three fourths -of the coal it consumes; it therefore wastes infinite sums of human -energy. It wastes everything, nature and man, the streams, the forests, -the vitality and the hopes of men. Its motto is _concentration_. It -herds human beings in towns; it makes transit laborious and long. The -age of economies has begun, and new agents, such as electricity and gas, -have for their mottoes _disperse_ and _distribute_. It is probably not -extravagant to say that mankind are wasting every week enough of natural -bounties to sustain them for a month, perhaps for a year. If science, -then, shall only barely help us to the economic use of all natural -bounties, it will have enriched human life (for the mass of mankind) -at least four-fold. It will probably be well for us if this enrichment -comes gradually and is preceded by a moral preparation for the use of -abundance. We have never, as a race, been good enough to be safely rich. -We have no poets from the equatorial regions. It may be many generations -before we are good enough to grow philosophy and high bred cattle in the -torrid zone. Perhaps we do not any where keep up in moral training with -the march of science. - - -THE COURSE OF READING FOR 1885-86. - -The student about to enter college has scarcely a pleasanter task than -that of examining the course he is about to begin. The prospect of -future achievements, how fascinating it is! That Livy which he has heard -discussed by learned seniors and professors will soon be his property, -too. The problems that are historical among his big brothers and cousins, -and sisters as well, sometimes, he will soon grapple with. Whole fields -of unknown literature and science and art open to him in his brief -glance. He enjoys familiarizing himself with the names of the authors -of the text-books, in marking among the elective studies his choice, in -looking up the old text-books in the library, in preparing note-books -for the next year, in picking up random bits of information. Getting -ready for his college course often becomes quite as engrossing as the -actual work. The C. L. S. C. student will experience this same interest -in looking over what he is going to do another year. The course is now -ready, and he will have the entire summer for contemplating his coming -conquests. Enjoy the prospect to the full; it is certainly a goodly -one. The bone and sinew of next year’s course is to be Roman History -and Literature. The place Greece and its men filled in the course of -1884-85 will be taken by Rome. While the subject is equally interesting, -the course of the coming year has one great advantage. Greece has no -modern history of particular importance, its heroes died with Corinth’s -destruction, its literature and art and philosophy faded with its loss -of patriotism. Where Rome stood, now Italy stands. The history of the -decadence of Roman rule and the growth of Italian freedom is one of the -most thrilling chapters in the world’s history. A literature, an art, and -a science belong to this new growth. In studying Rome’s life we have a -modern chapter that keeps up our interest. The course happily provides -for us papers on “Modern Italy” and “Italian Biography,” in addition -to the works on the History of Rome, the “Preparatory Latin Course in -English,” the “College Latin Course in English,” and “A Day in Ancient -Rome.” A practical turn is given to the work by a study of the relations -of Rome to modern history. - -The more general work of the course is selected from the wide fields of -philosophy, science, art and religion. Dr. Geo. M. Steele has prepared -a work on “Political Economy,” which will furnish some of the liveliest -reading for the year. This subject will be supplemented by two series -of papers on “Parliamentary Practice” and “International Law,” to be -published in THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - -Robert Browning in “Pomegranates from an English Garden” will be the -representative of English poetry. It will be seen that, as in the case -of Robert Browning’s poems, several studies are introduced to brighten -the more solid work; for this purpose we have “In His Name,” by Edward -Everett Hale, read in connection with a book by Dr. Townsend on “The -Bible and the XIXth Century,” and a series of studies, to appear in THE -CHAUTAUQUAN, on “God in History.” - -One work which will be a real treat to everybody is “Studies in Human -Nature,” by Dr. Lyman Abbott. The additional readings in THE CHAUTAUQUAN -are: “Wars and Rumors of Wars To-day,” “The Age we Live In,” “Religion -in Art,” “Art Outlines,” “Studies in Mathematics,” “Moral Philosophy,” -studies on “How to Live,” by Edward Everett Hale, papers on the past, -present and future of electricity, and “Home Studies in Physical -Geography.” A better course has never been presented to the members of -the C. L. S. C. - - - - -EDITOR’S NOTE-BOOK. - - -The July issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN closes the fifth volume of the -magazine. In October the sixth volume will begin. The outlook for THE -CHAUTAUQUAN for 1885-86 is much brighter than ever before. We shall offer -our friends a much improved magazine. The place of THE CHAUTAUQUAN will -be taken in the summer by the _Assembly Herald_. The _Herald_ for 1885 -will contain full reports of the work of the Assembly for the summer. A -glance at the elaborate program printed in this impression will convince -the reader of the value of a paper containing such a course of lectures -as that of the Chautauqua platform. Besides the lectures many suggestive -and useful reports will be printed, which members of the C. L. S. C. in -particular will find helpful. Those who may wish to subscribe for both -THE CHAUTAUQUAN and _Herald_ will find it profitable to take advantage of -our COMBINATION OFFER, found in another column of this impression. - - * * * * * - -The war rumors of a month ago have subsided almost as quickly as they -were aroused. The cries of “On to Khartoum” and “Smash the Mahdi” have -died out. Instead of running the frontier below the Soudan, the English -have been content to fix it at Wady Halfa. After all the excitement over -Afghanistan, peace has been established between Russia and England. -The Americans, most of them, have come home from Panama. Riel has been -captured. The comparatively easy settlement of misunderstandings between -nations is our best hope for the future. Each new victory of arbitration -over “bad blood,” even if it be at the sacrifice of a little of our pride -and possessions, is so much of a stride toward the millennium. - - * * * * * - -For the third time Mr. James Russell Lowell has been called upon to speak -in Westminster Abbey. This time at the unveiling of the bust of the poet -Coleridge. In summing up his remarks he said: “Whatever may have been -his faults and weaknesses, he was the man of all his generation to whom -we should most unhesitatingly allow the distinction of genius, that is, -of one authentically possessed from time to time by some influence that -made him better and greater than himself. If he lost himself too much in -what Mr. Pater has admirably called ‘impassioned contemplation,’ he has -at least left us such a legacy as only genius, and genius not always, can -leave. It is for this that we pay him this homage of memory.” - - * * * * * - -A series of statistics most suggestive to those interested in the -temperance question have of late been published. According to this -table there was drunk in the United States twenty-five years ago over -86,000,000 gallons of spirituous liquor, while now, with a population -almost doubled, the consumption is decreased by about 15 per cent. To -balance this comes in the enormous consumption of light liquors, nearly -six times as great as in 1860. But it must be remembered that a large -proportion of the latter is consumed by the foreign element introduced -since 1860. - - * * * * * - -The tragic fate of the town of Plymouth, Pennsylvania, is one more -melancholy example of the result of breaking Nature’s laws. There is -no doubt but that an epidemic of typhoid fever is a crime traceable to -somebody’s neglect. In Plymouth the refuse from a house situated at the -head of the stream which supplied the village with drinking water was -allowed to poison the water. This outrageous state of affairs is to be -seen in many other towns, and in parts of our cities. If after Plymouth’s -suffering a repetition occurs in any part of the country, public -sentiment ought to be strong enough to hunt down and punish the guilty -authorities that will hold human life and God’s law so lightly. - - * * * * * - -There is one sure way of securing sanitary reform in every city or town -with dilatory health board or indifferent council. Arouse the women. The -Ladies’ Health Protection Society, of New York City, has done work in -that community during the past six months, before which its large Board -of Health seemed perfectly helpless. If cleanliness and purity are not -to be secured by the civil authorities, there is no more suitable public -work for women than to constitute themselves the guardians of the health -of their home towns. - - * * * * * - -At the recent commencement of the Union Theological Seminary, of New -York, the alumni association elected as president an Indian of pure -Choctaw blood, now a pastor in the Indian Territory. His son was a member -of the graduating class of this year. We are growing broader. - - * * * * * - -The position that Mr. Phelps will take at the Court of St. James has -been agitating the English correspondent of one of our great dailies. -He finds that being a minister merely, Mr. Phelps must come in among -the ministers, after all the seven ambassadors; and that, alas! he -will be literally at the foot of this class of twenty-three. Ministers -take social rank according to the length of time they have held their -positions, so Mr. Phelps and the stars and stripes trot along after -Guatemala and Columbia and Siam and Hayti. - - * * * * * - -The teachers who tried Chautauqua last summer for their vacations, found -the spot so suitable for their uses, so delightful for recreation, that -they have spread abroad the rumor of her beauty, and in July of the -coming summer two State Teachers’ Associations—that of Ohio and that of -New York—will meet there. - - * * * * * - -There are very few people unfamiliar with law and its phrases, who have -not been bewildered over the complicated expressions and seemingly -useless repetitions found in almost all documents. This “iteration in -law” has lately been made the subject of some interesting computations by -David Dudley Field. By his counting every deed contains 860 superfluous -words, and every mortgage 1,240. The people of New York State, he -calculates, pay every year $100,000 for the recording of useless words. -The next reform in law should be rhetorical. - - * * * * * - -Mr. John Ruskin, of Oxford, and Prof. J. Rendel Harris, of Johns Hopkins, -have resigned their professorships in their respective universities -because, it is stated, vivisection is practiced in the institutions. -There is no reason in such hyper-sympathy. The abuse of vivisection is -quite probable, but that does not lessen the force of the fact that -vivisection has done much to alleviate human misery, and will in the -future undoubtedly do more. The question is, if man or beast must suffer, -which life is the more precious. - - * * * * * - -Houghton Farm, the headquarters of the Chautauqua Town and Country Club, -has an interesting history. Several years ago 1,000 acres of land lying -about nine miles from Newburgh, N. Y., were purchased by a Mr. Valentine -as an experimental farm. About thirty buildings, adapted to every kind of -farm work, were erected; the best of stock, the most skillful laborers -were secured. The farm soon became a kind of educational institution. -Farmers were invited to inspect its work, and to listen to lectures from -the learned managers; children had days set apart for their enjoyment. -Orange county has been educated by the Houghton Farm. Now its generous -hearted proprietor has extended the work by opening its advantages to all -those who will join the Chautauqua Town and Country Club. - - * * * * * - -The strange fascination lurking in dangerous feats which so powerfully -affects some minds, was never more forcibly manifested than in the case -of Robert E. Odlum, who jumped from the Brooklyn bridge not long ago. -For some time the thought had been a passion with him, and although the -police were watching to prevent the attempt, he escaped their vigilance -and took the fatal leap. His body was three and one-fourth seconds in -making the descent of 140 feet, thus corroborating almost exactly the law -of falling bodies. He breathed only a few times after he was picked up, -being inwardly literally “mangled to death.” His is only one more name -added to the list of those who, by their folly, may teach others lessons -of wisdom, and so, perhaps, have not died utterly in vain. - - * * * * * - -Although war-like preparations have ceased in the Soudan, and no -more troops are to be transported thither to help “smash the Mahdi,” -the railroad across the desert is progressing slowly but surely. The -correspondent of the _Times_ telegraphs the following: “The construction -of the railway is a curious and interesting sight. In advance is a -picket of cavalry, while far off on either side the videttes scout in -the bush. At the immediate head of the line is a battalion of infantry -echeloned, and advancing as the rails are laid. Streams of coolies carry -the sleepers from the trucks, and teams of four artillery horses drag up -the rails, two at a time, to the navvies, who lay them in a twinkling, -and drive the spikes. In the rear are gangs who complete the line, and -further back the ballasting parties.” - - * * * * * - -Visitors to Niagara Falls this summer will enjoy their trip as never -before. Everything that tends to mar the beauty of the natural scenery is -to be removed, and after July 15th, access to all points of interest is -to be free of charge. To bring about this happy consummation which during -so many long years past has been devoutly wished by all right-thinking -men, required a long and hard-fought battle against willful ignorance and -greed of gain. - - * * * * * - -General Gordon’s “Life and Letters,” recently published, prove him to -have one accomplishment of rare beauty and usefulness, but too often -nowadays neglected. He was a good letter writer, and that under -circumstances the most trying. Here is the picture his biographer draws -of the surroundings under which many of his letters were written: “The -temperature is over 100°; the ink dries on the pen before three words are -written; books curl, as to their backs; mosquitoes are busy at the ankles -under the table, and the hands and wrists above; prickly heat comes and -goes. How one realizes, for instance, the whole scene in the over-wakeful -traveller’s night: ‘I am writing in the open air by a candle-lamp, in -a savage gorge; not a sound to be heard. The baboons are in bed in the -rocks.’” The letters which the most of us write under the most favorable -circumstances are limited to the narrowest space possible. What we would -do in Gordon’s place it is difficult to say. - - * * * * * - -The most beautiful celebration of the month of June is Children’s day. -With every season Protestant churches give more time and money to their -preparations for it, and it bids fair to take rank in importance with -Christmas and Easter. Certainly no day comes at a season when it is more -easy to decorate, it being the very heyday of the flower season, and no -cause is more worthy our efforts than the children’s. - - * * * * * - -An important discussion has been going on for a few weeks in the New -York papers, concerning the advisability of closing the dry goods -stores on Saturday afternoons. Clerks have no day for recreation or for -improvement except Sabbath. The same is true of nearly all classes of -laboring people. The result is that the Sabbath, instead of being a day -of religious rest, is turned into one of pleasure, and often of extra -work. A half holiday would enable busy workers to prepare for Sabbath. It -is a reform in the arrangement of time that is worthy the attention of -Christian people particularly. - - * * * * * - -There is a capital hint in the following story, told by a lady prominent -in mission school work in one of our large cities: “We had some of our -Chinese pupils at a church sociable a few nights ago, and we had at -supper some candies which are rolled up in paper with printed couplets -inclosed—some of them extremely silly. The Chinese boys read them and -looked surprised, but were too polite to say anything. Soon afterward -they gave an entertainment, and the same sort of candies were provided; -but when we unrolled the papers we found they had taken out the foolish -verses and had substituted texts of Scripture printed on little slips of -paper.” - - * * * * * - -Here are a few of M. Bartholdi’s interesting figures about his great -Statue of Liberty: “The forefinger is 96½ inches in length, and 56½ -inches in circumference at the second joint. The nail measures 17¾ -inches by 10½ inches. The head 13¾ feet in height. The eye is 25½ inches -in width. The nose is 44 inches in length. About forty persons were -accommodated in the head at the Universal Exposition of 1878. It is -possible to ascend into the torch above the hand. It will easily hold -twelve persons.” Compared with other colossi it far outstrips them all, -being about three times the height of both the statue of Bavaria and -of the Virgin of Puy, and about 58 feet higher than the Arminius in -Westphalia. - - * * * * * - -The French Republic would not allow the remains of Victor Hugo to -be placed in the Pantheon until that celebrated structure was again -secularized. The priests were allowed just forty-eight hours to vacate -the sacred precincts which, as a church, they had held uninterruptedly -since 1877. This action plainly shows the position of the Republic toward -the Church. “French skeptics,” says _The Nation_, “are not content, like -English or German skeptics, with ceasing to go to church.… They insist -on proclaiming in every possible way their hostility to the clergy.” The -fact that the Pantheon is again restored to its primitive design as “a -last resting place for distinguished public men” can but be pleasing to -all. - - - - -TALK ABOUT BOOKS. - - -Among the books belonging to the “Famous Women Series,” the biography of -Harriet Martineau[B] takes a leading place. The life of this remarkable -woman is written by one whose clear insight into human character, and -keen appreciation of that which tends to make it noble and strong, -render her eminently qualified for such an undertaking. The style of -the book is simple, unadorned, direct. No step has been neglected which -could add to the author’s information, or, as she quaintly expresses -it, could help her “get touch” with her subject. That Mrs. Miller is -something of a hero worshiper is evident from the fact that, with but -one or two slight exceptions, she justifies all the facts of the life -she relates. The rigor of Harriet Martineau’s early home; the longings -of the young girl for freedom from a needless restraint, and the desire -to read and study, which led her to steal the time for it in the early -morning and late at night, might convey a lesson to many a mother who -now insists upon having her daughters follow the conventional methods of -living. One can but rejoice in the advanced position women have attained -as he reads of Harriet Martineau, the statesman, and sees that she is -as thoroughly understood and appreciated in this aspect of her life by -her biographer as in the more womanly elements and instincts of her -nature, which were never in the least violated by her study of political -interests. Excepting the skepticism which marked all the mature years of -Harriet Martineau’s life, one finds in her a good type of strong, noble -womanhood. Christian readers can but deprecate this fact, and also that -it is justified by Mrs. Miller. - -A volume of the prose writings of N. P. Willis[C] will be received by -the reading public in much the same manner as the work of a new author, -so little are they known. His reputation rests almost entirely upon -his poems and a few Scriptural sketches, which it seems natural to -think of as belonging to the early periods of American literature. It -will probably strike most people with a feeling of surprise to recall -that his death occurred so recently as 1867, and that he was therefore -contemporary with Bryant and Longfellow. Just why this recent oblivion -has fallen upon his writings is hard to tell, for the collection in this -volume shows that they deserve a better fate. The character sketches -are fairly drawn; and the bits of description indicate powers of a high -order in this particular. The personality of the author is manifest in -all the articles; the reader is conscious of constantly looking through -the writer’s eyes. The wild, unchecked bent of his imagination is shown -in such pieces as “The Lunatic’s Skate,” and “The Ghost-Ball at Congress -Hall,” somewhat resembling the more intense works of Poe. Aptness in -illustration, implying a delicate perception of resemblances, and a happy -faculty of associating ideas is a marked characteristic. He fails to -touch the deeper emotions of one’s nature, and there is a lack of both -strength and plot in all he writes. Whether Mr. Beers succeeds in making -Willis’s works live or not, he has by his selections and editing, and by -his introductory memoir, given to the public a very interesting work. - -Perhaps no one ever more perfectly caught the spirit of all things -Egyptian than Professor Ebers. The _genius_ of the country which brings -under its sway all that comes within its domain, affecting them to such -a degree that one can but fancy even the sphynx would be less gloomily -impressive in any other land, gained such an influence over him, and so -makes itself felt in his books, that it is almost impossible to imagine -him otherwise than as a man wrapped round with that somber, mysterious -air which constantly hints of the power to reveal things more and more -wonderful. From the beginning to the end of Serapis[D] one is conscious -of being under some spell that fascinates and charms. The little -party introduced at the beginning gives rise to a sense of the vast -possibilities hidden away in each life—even that of little Dada, the -merry-hearted, seemingly thoughtless, young girl—and the sequel reveals -in each one these possibilities realized. The story is laid in the times -of the Roman emperor, Theodosius I., and its interest centers in the -destruction of the Serapeum, the Alexandrian temple containing the statue -of Serapis, the great Egyptian divinity, which was also mutilated and -torn down. A description of the races is given in such a way as to render -readers virtually eye-witnesses of the scene, and it is with an effort -that one keeps himself from rising with the crowd as the decisive moment -nears, and shouting in the general frenzy of excitement. The author lacks -the power of putting his readers into nearer relation with his characters -than that of mere acquaintances, in whose welfare a general sympathetic -interest is taken. One prizes the book for its impressive historical -facts and beautiful descriptions. - -“Troubled Waters”[E] is a novel with a purpose. The question of capital -and labor is discussed, and the plan of coöperation is upheld as the key -which is to unlock the difficulties thickening fast and threateningly -around the business interests of to-day. The dangers lurking in the -fact of poorly compensated labor, as it watches the fast increasing -gains of capital amassed at its expense, are vividly set forth. In the -strike of the Tradelawn mill hands, will be seen a faithful picture -of what transpires in many a similar town. The style of the book is -vigorous, independent, and clear. The number of persons introduced, and -the characterization of some of them, particularly Mr. Thomas Street, -reminds one of Dickens. In the web of adverse circumstances enmeshing and -ever tightening about the really noble Robert Croft, until he is driven -to the very verge of desperation and crime, the greatest power of the -author is shown. Of course all ends well, and as one leaves all the hands -in the new mills, in which every worker is a stockholder, contented and -happy, there remains with him a conviction that coöperation is the right -principle. - -One of the most attractive of all the books of its kind is “The -Chautauqua Birthday Book”[F] just issued. Daintily bound, and containing -illustrations of the places so familiar and endeared to all Chautauquans, -it can not fail to receive a warm welcome at their hands. The “Prefatory -Note” is written by Chancellor J. H. Vincent. The selections made of the -best things said by the best authors. As one turns the pages bearing -the dates, the eye lights upon the names of many familiar friends, and -the pleasing memories that instantly arise make one glad for the happy -thought that originated so genial a souvenir. - -No undertaking more deserves the thoughtful consideration and hearty -support of every community than that of the introduction of a line of -classics for children into the public schools. Mr. Ginn has already -edited for the use of scholars of from nine to fourteen years of age, a -number of very attractive books, among which are “Tales from Shakspere,” -by Charles and Mary Lamb, and Scott’s “Tales of a Grandfather.”[G] The -original works have been changed very little. A few verbal alterations -were required, and the parts beyond the comprehension of a child were -omitted. A young boy or girl after reading these editions will have -practically the same knowledge that the older acquire from the unabridged -works, and they certainly will be equally as much interested in them. - -[B] Harriet Martineau. By Mrs. F. Fenwick Miller. Boston: Roberts -Brothers. 1885. Price, $1.00. - -[C] Prose Writings of Nathaniel Parker Willis. Selected by Henry A. -Beers. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. - -[D] Serapis. By George Ebers. New York: William S. Gottsberger, 11 Murray -Street. 1885. Price, paper cover, 50 cents. - -[E] Troubled Waters. A Problem of To-day. By Beverly Ellison Warner. -Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott. 1885. Price, $1.25. - -[F] The Chautauqua Birthday Book. Arranged by Annie M. Cummings. Buffalo, -N. Y.: H. H. Otis. Price, $1.00. - -[G] Tales from Shakspere. By Charles and Mary Lamb. Tales of a -Grandfather, Vol. I. Being the History of Scotland. By Walter Scott. -Abridged and edited by Edwin Ginn. Boston: Ginn, Heath & Co. 1885. - - -BOOKS RECEIVED. - -Valeria. By the Rev. W. H. Withrow. New York: Phillips & Hunt. -Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe. 1885. Price, $1.00. - -The Sentence and Word Book. By James Johonnot. New York: D. Appleton & -Co. 1885. - -Vain Forebodings. By E. Oswald. Translated from the German by Mrs. A. L. -Wister. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. 1885. Price, $1.25. - -Pestalozzi’s Leonard and Gertrude. Translated and Abridged. By Eva -Channing. Boston: Ginn, Heath & Co. 1885. - -Dante. A Rare Collection of Texts, Commentaries, etc., of Dante’s Divina -Commedia. Cincinnati: Anton Bicker. - -The Meisterschaft System for the Italian Language. By Dr. Richard S. -Rosenthal. Part I. Boston: Meisterschaft Publishing Company. - -General Gordon: The Christian Hero. By the author of “Our Queen,” “New -World Heroes,” etc. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell & Co. - -Pulpit and Easel. By Mary B. Sleight. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell & Co. - -Hearing and How to Keep It. By Charles H. Burnett, M.D. Philadelphia: P. -Blakiston, Son & Co. 1885. - -Dogma No Antidote for Doubt. By a member of the New York Bar. -Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. 1885. - -Catechism on Alcohol. (In German.) By Julia Colman. New York: National -Temperance Society. 1885. - -Circulars of Information of the Bureau of Education. No. I.—1885. -Washington: Government Printing Office. - -Planting Trees in School Grounds and the Celebration of Arbor Day. -Washington: Government Printing Office. 1885. - -The Russian Revolt. By Edmund Noble. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. -1885. Price, $1.00. - -From the Golden Gate to the Golden Horn. By Henry Frederick Reddall. New -York: Phillips & Hunt. Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe. 1885. Price, $1.25. - - - - -CHAUTAUQUA IN JAPAN. - -BY WM. D. BRIDGE. - - -Japan moves to the front, for _Chautauqua_ has taken firm root in Japan. -The Chautauqua Idea is an ecumenical idea, and it is the province of this -article to show the workings of this idea in Japan during the past six -months. - -Late in the summer of 1884 Mrs. A. M. Drennan (C. L. S. C. class of ’82), -a resident missionary in Japan, at Osaka, entered into correspondence -with Chancellor Vincent as to the possibility of translating valuable -English materials in the line of the “C. L. S. C.” into the Japanese -vernacular. Among the material tracts, papers, etc., sent, was one -which she put into the hands of an educated native, well versed also in -English, who said on reading it: “If that book can be put into the hands -of the young men, Tom Paine and other infidels must leave Japan.” - -Chancellor Vincent, on reviewing the necessities of the field, and -marking the wondrous developments of that newborn nation, arranged -with Mrs. Drennan for the translation of the “Required Reading” in THE -CHAUTAUQUAN into Japanese, guaranteeing a prescribed sum per month for -expenses of translating for one year. - -March 30, 1885, Mrs. Drennan writes: “I wish I could convey to you -something of an idea of the enthusiasm in reference to our Chautauqua -Society here. In much less than a week after the first advertisement in -the papers, our secretary had received nearly three hundred letters of -inquiry, and, on application, had given out every one of the first five -hundred copies of the ‘Hand-Book.’ A second edition of five hundred was -made, and now, in less than a week, only two hundred copies remain.” - -The “Hand-Book” referred to is the first number of a magazine, in book -form, containing articles from THE CHAUTAUQUAN, viz.: “Mosaics of -History,” “Africa,” “Alexander the Great,” “One Hundred Questions,” -“World of Science,” and “The Results of the Discovery of America.” - -Mr. C. S. Hongma, of Osaka, a native Japanese, President of the “Japanese -Literary and Scientific Circle,” writes to Chancellor Vincent, in good -English, a letter full of hope, and expressing his delight in aiding to -organize the circle, and asking help and prayers for its success. - -The laws of Japan require six months’ notice to be given of intention to -publish a magazine, and but one month’s notice for publishing a book. The -quotations from THE CHAUTAUQUAN are therefore given the book form. - -Mrs. Drennan says the natives will pay the expense of advertising -the movement in Japanese papers, and will, ere long, pay the cost of -translation. - -April 13, 1885, Mrs. Drennan writes: “It would take a long letter to -tell you the good things about our J. L. S. C. We have just received -to-day from the press our third edition of the ‘Hand-Book;’ this makes -twenty-five hundred printed. Our secretary is preparing to-night a list -of the paid-up members. There have been over three hundred applicants -for membership, but only one hundred and fifty have as yet paid all -dues. You know there is the house rent (for place of meeting of the local -circles), and the fixing up, lights, etc., to give us a comfortable place -of meeting. These, with most of the advertising and other expenses, have -been met by the members; and with your kind aid for a little while we -will have an influence that will spread over this entire land, doing -great things for this people. Our secretary has answered over _seven -hundred letters of inquiry_. Applications have come from several cities -for the privilege of organizing branch societies. - -“The first article in our ‘Hand-Book’ is an editorial by the editor -of the largest paper in this part of Japan. He is a very fine writer -and highly educated. He is perfectly enthusiastic over the work. It -is an argument for this plan, giving his views as to the good it will -accomplish in Japan. The second article explains the object and aim of -the Society. - -“My heart has been thrilled with delight on receiving letters and -applications for membership from some soldiers in a distant city. It -has been a punishable offense for any teacher of Christianity, or Bible -reader, to go into the army or among the soldiers. I thought, if this -course of reading spread among them, who can compute its influence, who -can tell the result of this silent teacher for Christ!” - -The new members are not satisfied with Japanese cards of membership, but -are anxious for enrollment at the Central Office of the C. L. S. C., -Plainfield, N. J., and for cards of membership from America. - -Mrs. Drennan, under date of April 14th, says: “One hundred and -seventy-five names of members have just been given me, fifty new names -being added last evening. [She sends for three hundred membership cards.] -I never saw such an interest created by anything in any country. Oh that -God may bless it to the good of this people, and make it a permanent -organization for all time! Pray for us.” - -That our readers may know of what “stuff” this earnest C. L. S. C. -worker is made, I will say that she has charge of a Girls’ School at -Osaka, teaches young men three hours per day, teaches a Bible class of -young men (twenty-five in number) on Sabbath evenings, and for a year -and a half has kept up a Chautauqua circle among the English speaking -people and others. In order to secure government permission to publish -the Chautauqua literature, permanent resident officers must be chosen; -therefore the existing local circle suspended, and was reorganized with -such officers as the government will recognize. - -One of the members is now translating “Outline Study of Man,” another -“Cyrus and Alexander,” and two others are at work on THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - -Mrs. Drennan sends an itemized financial statement, showing three eighths -of the expenses (total, $66.25) paid by the Japanese to date and five -eighths by the Central Office, with the assurance that hereafter the -heaviest part will be borne by the enthusiastic natives. God bless a work -like this in young Japan, and God bless Mrs. Drennan and her associates! - - - - -PROGRAM OF POPULAR EXERCISES. - -TWELFTH SUMMER ASSEMBLY AT CHAUTAUQUA. - - -_Saturday, July 11._ - - 10:00 a.m.—Organ Prelude, Mr. I. V. Flagler, of Auburn, N.Y. - - 10:30 a.m.—Opening Address before the “Chautauqua Teachers’ - Retreat” and “Chautauqua Schools of Language,” - by Chancellor C. N. Sims, of Syracuse University. - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - 8:30 p.m.—Parlor Reception, C. T. R. and C. S. L. - - 10:00 p.m.—Night Songs—Flotilla on the Lake. - - -_Sunday, July 12._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Opening Sermon, by Chancellor C. N. Sims. - - 2:00 p.m.—Platform Meeting—Addresses by Dr. C. N. Sims - and Dr. J. H. Vincent. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—Vesper Service of the C. L. S. C. - - 7:30 p.m.—Evening Song, conducted by W. A. Duncan, Esq., - assisted by the Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - -_Monday, July 13._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Adjustment of Classes, and Beginning of C. T. R. - and C. S. L. Work. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Venice, - the Faded Queen of the Adriatic.” - - -_Tuesday, July 14._ - - 11:00 a.m.—First Organ Recital, Mr. I. V. Flagler. - - 1:30 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - 5:00 p.m.—First Tourists’ Conference. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Florence, - the Athens of Italy.” - - -_Wednesday, July 15._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture: John Alabaster, D.D., “Michel Angelo.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees. - - 7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. John Alabaster: “Leonardo Da Vinci.” - - -_Thursday, July 16._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. John Alabaster: “Naples, Pompeii - and Vesuvius.” - - 5:00 p.m.—Second Tourists’ Conference. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: - “Rome;” first lecture. - - -_Friday, July 17._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Second Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture: “From Chautauqua to Casamicciola,” - by Prof. J. C. Freeman. - - 7:00 p.m.—A Popular Lesson in Music, Prof. A. T. Schauffler. - - 8:30 p.m.—Lecture, C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Rome;” - second lecture. - - -_Saturday, July 18._ - -Excursion to Niagara Falls, at Reduced Rates, for Members of the C. T. R. -and C. S. L. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “Around Vesuvius,” Prof. J. C. Freeman. - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.—Readings, Prof. A. Lalande. - - -_Sunday, July 19._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon by —— - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon by Dr. B. G. Northrop: “The Bible as an - Educator.” - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 7:30 p.m.—Song Service, Fisk Jubilees. - - -_Monday, July 20._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. B. G. Northrop: “Memory, and - How to Train It.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Latin Symposium. - - 8:00 p.m.—Spelling Match. - - -_Tuesday, July 21._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Third Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, and - Chas. F. Underhill, Elocutionist, all of New York. - - 5:00 p.m.—Third Tourists’ Conference. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Leon H. Vincent: “A Trip through Italy.” - - -_Wednesday, July 22._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. G. C. Lorimer, of Chicago: “Philanthropy - of Humor.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, and - Chas. F. Underhill. - - 7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Parlor Soirée. - - -_Thursday, July 23._ - - 11:00 a.m.— - - 2:00 p m.—Fourth Organ Concert, I. V. Flagler. - - 5:00 p.m.—Fourth Tourists’ Conference. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. D. H. Wheeler: “Memories of Life - in Italy.” - - -_Friday, July 24._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Miss Kate Field: “The Mormon Creed.” - - 2:00 p.m.—The Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, Lecture: “The - Homes and Habits of Ants.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Lecture on “The Oil Regions.” - - 8:00 p.m.—Pronouncing Match. - - -_Saturday, July 25._ - -Excursion to Oil City, Pa. - - 9:00 a.m.—Conference on “Visible Speech” and “Phonetics,” - Dr. J. W. Dickinson. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Miss Kate Field: “Political and Social - Crimes of Utah.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Mr. A. T. Schauffler, of New York, conductor. - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.— - - -_Sunday, July 26._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon by the Rev. Dr. George Dana Boardman, - of Philadelphia. - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon by the Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, of Philadelphia. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 7:30 p.m.—Sermon by the Rev. George W. Miller, D.D., of - Philadelphia. - - -_Monday, July 27._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Geo. W. Miller, D.D.: “Martin Luther.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. G. D. Boardman: “The Graphic Art.” - - 3:30 p.m.—Public Exposition Chautauqua School of Modern - Languages and Methods. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. J. T. Edwards: “The Telephone and - Edison’s Inventions.” - - -_Tuesday, July 28._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Fifth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 2:00 p.m.—Public Readings, Prof. R. L. Cumnock. - - 5:00 p.m.—Public Chautauqua Teachers’ Retreat Question Drawer. - - 8:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees. - - -_Wednesday, July 29._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton, of England. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, the Rev. Robert Nourse: “Blighted Women.” - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—First Lecture on “Khartoum and the Soudan,” by - the Rev. Dr. Henry M. Ladd, with Stereopticon. - - -_Thursday, July 30._ - - 10:00 a.m.—Sixth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon by Dr. J. M. King: “The Dignity of - Small Duties.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert—Fisk Jubilees. - - 8:00 p.m.—Second Lecture on “Khartoum and the Soudan,” - by Dr. H. M. Ladd, with Stereopticon. - - -_Friday, July 31._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Concert, A. T. Schauffler, conductor. - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon by Dr. J. M. King: “Paris, and a Chapter - on Cæsarism.” - - 4:00 p.m.—Closing Exercises C. T. R. - - 4:00 p.m.—C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Philip Phillips: “Around the World,” - with Stereopticon. - - -_Saturday, August 1._ - -“Mid-Season Celebration.” Excursion to Panama Rocks. - - 9:00 a.m.—First Woman’s Missionary Conference: 1. “Best - means of creating an interest in missions.” 2. “How - can we increase the zeal and efficiency of present - methods of work?” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “Wm. Carey,” by the Rev. J. W. A. - Stewart, of Hamilton, Ont. - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees. - - 4:00 p.m.—First General Missionary Conference: “How can - the work for Missions, being done in every church by - a minority of its members, be presented for the - consideration of the church _en masse_?” - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Philip Phillips: “Around the World.” - - -_Sunday, August 2._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon by the Rev. J. W. A. Stewart. - - 2:00 p.m.—Second General Missionary Conference: Addresses - by Dr. George Sexton, the Rev. C. C. Creegan, and Dr. - William Butler. Topic: “The Ability and Responsibility - of the Church to Evangelize the World.” - - 4:00 p.m.—Second Woman’s Missionary Conference: Mrs. - D. R. James, of Washington, D. C.: “The Future of - Our Country.” - Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Service of Song, Philip Phillips. - - -_Monday, August 3._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Third Woman’s Missionary Conference: “The - Immediate and Pressing Necessity for Home Mission - Work.” - - 11:00 a.m.—General Missionary Meeting: Address by the Rev. - Dr. Wm. F. Johnson, of Allahabad, India. - - 2:00 p.m.—Songs of the South, Fisk Jubilees. - - 4:00 p.m.—Third General Missionary Conference: “The - Present and Pressing Emergency for Increased Activity - in Home Missionary Work, how can we meet it?” - - 7:00 p.m.—Missionary Prayer Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Anniversary “Chautauqua Missionary Institute:” - Addresses by the Rev. William Kincaid and Dr. - William Butler. - - -_Tuesday, August 4._ - -“OPENING DAY.” - - 9:00 a.m.—Fourth Woman’s Missionary Conference: 1. “The - Importance of Missionary Training, especially - for the young.” 2. “The Relation of Missionary - Literature to successful Missionary Work.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mr. H. K. Carroll, editor New York - _Independent_: “A Lost Doctrine.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - - 4:00 p.m.—Fourth General Missionary Conference: 1. “Active - Service,” Dr. William Butler. 2. “Systematic - Giving,” the Rev. C. C. Creegan. - - 7:00 p.m.—Chautauqua Bells. - - 7:30 p.m.—Chautauqua Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Chautauqua Reunion: Addresses; Music by Fisk - Jubilees, Miss Dora Henninges, Mr. Hutchins, of - Chicago, cornetist, etc. - - 9:30 p.m.—Fireworks. - - -_Wednesday, August 5._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - Bible Reading, Dr. John Williamson. - Normal Class, Dr. J. L. Hurlbut, the Rev. R. S. Holmes. - Children’s Class, the Rev. B. T. Vincent. - - 9:00 a.m.—Devotional Hour, Dr. B. N. Adams. - Intermediate Class, the Rev. B. T. Vincent. - - 10:00 a.m.—Primary Teachers’ Class, Mrs. B. T. Vincent. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague, of Boston: - “Shakspere’s Youth.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, H. K. Carroll, Editor N.Y. _Independent_, - “Journalism.” - - 4:00 p.m.—First W. C. T. U. Conference. - C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Denominational Prayer Meetings. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture (illustrated), Miss Von Finkelstein and - Brother: “The Bedouins of Arabia.” - - -_Thursday, August 6._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - - 10:00 a.m.—Eighth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Shakspere - as an Author.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Henninges-Hutchins. - - 4:00 p.m.—Second W. C. T. U. Conference. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—S. S. Normal Question Drawer—Dr. J. H. Vincents. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein and Brother: - “The Fellaheen of Palestine.” - - -_Friday, August 7._ - -“LOOK-UP LEGION DAY.” - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - - 10:00 a.m.—First Session “American Church-School of Church-Work.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Milton - as an Educator.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss Frances E. Willard: “Evolution - in the Temperance Reform.” - - 4:00 p.m.—Third W. C. T. U. Conference. - “Look-Up Legion Anniversary.” - - 8.00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein and Brother: - “City Life in Jerusalem.” - - -_Saturday, August 8._ - -“C. L. S. C. INAUGURATION DAY.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Milton’s - Paradise Lost.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. C. C. Case, conductor. - - 4:00 p.m.—Fourth W. C. T. U. Conference. - - 5:00 p.m.—“C. L. S. C. Inauguration Day.” Address, the Rev. - R. S. Holmes. - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-School Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - - -_Sunday, August 9._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon, Bishop R. S. Foster. - - 2:00 p.m.—“Memorial Service:” Bishop I. W. Wiley, Mrs. - Victor Cornuelle, the Rev. Joseph Leslie, Hon. - Schuyler Colfax. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. Lecture, Dr. George - Sexton. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Sermon, J. A. Worden, D.D. - - -_Monday, August 10._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “The Story of Two Brothers,” the Rev. - H. M. Bacon. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Bishop R. S. Foster: “India and its - People.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Normal Council. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, the Rev. S. R. Frazier: “A Yankee in - Japan.” - - -_Tuesday, August 11._ - - 10:00 a.m.—Ninth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mrs. Mary A. Livermore: “Wendell - Phillips.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Schubert Quartette. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—A Question Drawer, Dr. J. M. Buckley. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. M. R. French: “The Wit and Wisdom - of the Crayon.” - - 9:30 p.m.—Music on the Lake. - - -_Wednesday, August 12._ - -“DENOMINATIONAL DAY.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. J. M. Buckley: “The Peculiarities of - Great Orators.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Denominational Sunday-school Congresses. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Denominational Prayer Meetings. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Mr. W. M. R. French: “A Knack of - Drawing.” - - -_Thursday, August 13._ - -“ALUMNI DAY.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mrs. Mary A. Livermore: “A Dream of - To-morrow.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Dedication of Normal Hall: Addresses by B. F. - Jacobs, Esq., the Rev. A. E. Dunning, and Dr. J. - L. Hurlbut. - - 4:00 p.m.—Conference, Chautauqua Alumni. - - 7:00 p.m.—Alumni Reunion, Annual Address: Dr. J. M. - Freeman, of New York. - - 9:00 p.m.—Illuminated Fleet. - - -_Friday, August 14._ - -“INTERNATIONAL SUNDAY-SCHOOL DAY.” - - 10:00 a.m.—Tenth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 11:00 a.m.—Concert by the Choir of the Lafayette Street - Presbyterian Church, Buffalo, N. Y. - - 2:00 p.m.—International Sunday-school Meeting, B. F. Jacobs, - Esq., presiding. - - 4:00 p.m.—C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table. - - 5:00 p.m.—Conference, “Chautauqua Baptist Circle.” - - 8:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. C. C. Case, conductor. - - -_Saturday, August 15._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Anniversary “Chautauqua Baptist Circle,” B. F. - Jacobs, Esq., presiding. Address of Salutation by - Dr. J. H. Vincent. - Oration: The Rev. Dr. O. P. Gifford. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Mr. W. M. R. French: “A Chalk Talk.” - - 3:00 p.m.—Concert, “Schubert Quartette.” - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table: “St. Paul’s Day.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - Lecture: “Sunday-schools in New England,” W. F. - Sherwin. - - -_Sunday, August 16._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Baccalaureate Sermon, Dr. J. H. Vincent. - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon, Dr. Charles F. Deems, of the “Church - of the Strangers,” New York City. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - Y. M. C. A. Conference, B. F. Jacobs, Esq. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 7:00 p.m.—Even-Song. - - 8:00 p.m.—Address, B. F. Jacobs, Esq. - - -_Monday, August 17._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish - Work in Cities.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. Charles F. Deems: “A Scotch Verdict.” - - 2:00 p.m.— - - 4:00 p.m.—Public Exposition Chautauqua School of Modern - Languages, Methods. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—“Look-up-Legion” Reception to the Rev. Edward - Everett Hale. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. A. I. Hobbs, of Louisville, Ky.: - “Poverty Amidst Plenty.” - - -_Tuesday, August 18._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish - Work in Cities.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Opening “Chautauqua Society of Fine Arts.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. O. P. Fitzgerald, of Nashville, Tenn. - - 4:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Class Reunions. - Meeting C. L. S. C. Counselors. - - 7:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. W. F. Sherwin, conductor. - - 9:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Camp-Fire. - - -_Wednesday, August 19._ - -“C. L. S. C. RECOGNITION DAY.” - - 9:00 a.m.—Guards of “Gate” and “Grove;” Misses with - Floral Offerings; “Society of S. H. G.;” Glee Club - and Choir; Members of ’85. - - 10:00 a.m.—Chautauqua Procession; Passage of the “Arches.” - - 10:30 a.m.—“Recognition” in the Hall. - - 11:00 a.m.—“Public Recognition” and Commencement Oration, - Counselor Edward Everett Hale. - - 2:00 p.m.—Addresses, Counselor Lyman Abbott and others. - Presentation of Diplomas. - - 7:00 p.m.—Prayer Meetings. - - 8:00 p.m.—Athenian Watch-Fires and “Reception.” - - -_Thursday, August 20._ - -“NATIONAL TEMPERANCE SOCIETY DAY.” - - 8:00 a.m.—Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish Work in Cities.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Temperance Address, Hon. George W. Bain, of Kentucky. - - 2:00 p.m.—Temperance Address, Mrs. J. Ellen Foster, of Iowa. - - 7:00 p.m.—Temperance Address, Prof. J. C. Price, President - of Zion Wesley Institute, North Carolina. - - 9:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. I. Marshall—“An Evening in Wonderland, - or the Yellowstone,” with Stereopticon Illustrations. - - -_Friday, August 21._ - -“ROMAN DAY.” - - 8:00 a.m.—A Conference on the Study of Latin—Prof. Edgar - S. Shumway. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Francis Murphy. - - 2:00 p.m.—Readings, Prof. R. L. Cumnock. - - 4:00 p.m.—Closing Exercises C. S. L. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Normal Sunday-school Council, Prof. W. F. Sherwin. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. I. Marshall: “Sierra’s Enchanted - Valley, or the Yosemite Valley and the Big Trees.” - - 9:30 p.m.—Songs by the Schubert Quartette. - - -_Saturday, August 22._ - -“HARVEST AND C. T. C. C. DAY.” - - 10:00 a.m.—Harvest Service, the Rev. R. S. Holmes, conductor. - - 11:00 a.m.—First Rally C. T. C. C. Addresses by Mr. Charles - Barnard, of New York, Major Henry E. Alvord, of - “Houghton Farm,” and Dr. J. H. Vincent. - - 2:00 p.m.—Grand Army of the Republic Reunion. - - 3:30 p.m.—Concert, Prof. W. F. Sherwin. - - 5:00 p.m.—Meeting “Chautauqua Society of Fine Arts.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.—W. I. Marshall: “Utah and the Mormon Question.” - - 9:30 p.m.—Illuminated Cottages. - - -_Sunday, August 23._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon, Bishop Cyrus D. Foss, D.D., LL.D., of - Minnesota. - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon, the Rev. R. B. Welch, D.D., LL.D., of - Auburn Theological Seminary. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 7:00 p.m.—Sermon, Dr. B. M. Adams. - - 9:00 p.m.—“Vigil,” Class of 1886. - - -_Monday, August 24._ - - 8:00 a.m.—“The Farewell.” - - - - -SPECIAL NOTES. - - -Readers of THE CHAUTAUQUAN, particularly if they do not expect to visit -Chautauqua this summer, will find a very useful and interesting paper -in the _Assembly Daily Herald_. The _Herald_ is the daily chronicler of -the proceedings at Chautauqua during the session of the Assembly. Its -most important work is to furnish to its readers stenographic reports of -all the leading lectures delivered on the platform. More than seventy -lectures appear in its columns during the nineteen daily issues of the -_Herald_. Among the lectures of the present season are to be several on -Italy. The Tourists Ideal Foreign Tour will be mainly located in Italy. -Now, for those who expect to read the C. L. S. C. course of 1885-86 -this will be particularly interesting and profitable, as a portion of -the course is to be on Italy and its life. A feature to which we would -particularly call the attention of readers of the C. L. S. C. is the -reports of special meetings and special classes, together with the daily -reports of C. L. S. C. news. Much of the best of the C. L. S. C. work and -planning is done at the Assembly, so that no one thoroughly interested in -the C. L. S. C. can keep abreast of the news of this institution without -the _Herald_. The first issue of Volume X. of the _Assembly Herald_ will -be on August 1st, and it will appear daily, Sundays excepted, in nineteen -numbers. Its price is $1.00 for the season, or in clubs of five or more, -90 cents. Subscribers to THE CHAUTAUQUAN will find it to their advantage -to accept our combination offer until August 1st of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and -_Assembly Daily Herald_ for $2.25. - - * * * * * - -Through the help of the C. L. S. C. Loan Library, a number of students -who would otherwise have been obliged to give up their C. L. S. C. -studies entirely, have been enabled to continue the course during the -past year. These books (about half a dozen sets) will be for sale at -reduced rates, at the Plainfield office after July 1st. - - * * * * * - -Another Chautauqua Idea of great practical importance is out. It has been -devised to meet the demand for competent training in phonography. Within -the last ten years shorthand writers of ability have become necessary to -business offices, courts and editorial rooms. For those young men and -women who would fit themselves for the numerous positions open to expert -phonographers, the “Chautauqua University” has opened a “College of -Phonography.” It is under the direction of W. D. Bridge, A.M., a reporter -of nearly thirty years’ experience, who has associated with him F. G. -Morris, A.M., one of the most successful and accomplished phonographic -teachers in the country. For circulars of the College of Phonography, -address the registrar, R. S. Holmes, A.M., Plainfield, New Jersey. - - * * * * * - -We are in receipt of the finely illustrated catalogues of the church -furnishers, Messrs. J. & R. Lamb, of New York City. The designs which -they are offering in Metal Work, Stained Glass, Church Upholstery and -Church Embroideries are all of them beautiful, many of them unique and -original. Churches that are contemplating refurnishing, or are building, -can not do better than to send for the Messrs. Lamb’s catalogue. They -will get good ideas, if nothing else. - - * * * * * - -The Chautauquans of Minnesota and the Northwest propose to hold this -summer a Chautauqua Assembly of the Northwest. The first step in -furtherance of this plan has been taken by the circles of St. Paul and -Minneapolis, best situated as they are for united action, and strong in -the presence of sixteen circles. On the 15th day of May, an association -was formed by representatives from ten of the sixteen circles, to be -known as the Central Chautauqua Committee. - -The first Assembly will be held at the “Enchanted Island,” a beautiful -place in Lake Minnetonka, Hennepin County, Minn., on June 26th. Reduced -rates have been obtained on all railroads leading into Minneapolis and -St. Paul. Circulars containing programs and full particulars will be sent -to all applicants. Let all Chautauquans of the Northwest be present at -the “Enchanted Island.” Address E. T. Brandeburg, Secretary, Room 14, -Webb Block, Minneapolis, Minn. - - * * * * * - -Reports from the following local circles have been received at this -office too late for the July issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN: Osceola, Iowa; -“Thornapple,” Vermontville, Michigan; “Beta,” Milwaukee, Wis.; “Aryan,” -Hope Valley, R. I.; “Vincent,” Needham, Mass.; Jewett City, Conn.; -“Springhill,” Morris Cross Roads, Pa.; “King Philip,” Medfield, Mass.; -West Winsted, Conn.; Prattsburgh, N. Y.; “The Athenian,” Lanark, Ill.; -“Longfellow,” Cambridge, Mass.; “Pansy Quartette,” Oshtemo, Mich.; -Brantford, Ontario, Canada. Reports from local circles in the following -towns have been forwarded to THE CHAUTAUQUAN from Plainfield, but too -late for the July issue: Hope, R. I.; Luverne, Minn.; Rushville, Ill.; -Wellington, South Africa; Monroe, Iowa; Jonesville, Mich.; Jacksonville, -Ill.; Billerica, Mass.; Charlestown, Mass.; Wabash, Ind.; Amherst, N. -H.; Brookville, Ind.; Madison, Conn.; Minneapolis, Minn., from “Highland -Park,” “Alden” and “Vincent” circles. - - * * * * * - -Transcriber’s Notes: - -Obvious punctuation errors repaired. - -Page 566, “differents” changed to “different” (These facts from different -states) - -Page 572, “Onalashka” changed to “Unalashka” (the island of Kagamil, near -Unalashka) - -Page 576, “Helena” changed to “Helens” (an outburst of Mt. St. Helens) - -Page 581, duplicate word “by” removed (mercury may be frozen by this -means) - -Page 584, “in honor of the god of the gods of the under world” _may_ be a -misprint for “in honor of the god of the under world” or “in honor of the -gods of the under world”, but has been left as printed: it’s not obvious -which alternative might be correct, or indeed whether it’s an error at -all. - -Page 594, “Shakespere” changed to “Shakspere” (souvenir of the Shakspere -evening) - -Page 599, “eighteen” changed to “nineteen” (There are in NEBRASKA -nineteen circles of the C. L. S. C.) - -Page 605, “Monoan” changed to “Monona” (Assembly at Monona Lake, Madison, -Wisconsin) - -Page 609, “Gautemala” changed to “Guatemala” (the stars and stripes trot -along after Guatemala) - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, -No. 10, by The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1885 *** - -***** This file should be named 55444-0.txt or 55444-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/4/4/55444/ - -Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/55444-0.zip b/old/55444-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0898d94..0000000 --- a/old/55444-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55444-h.zip b/old/55444-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 33cc008..0000000 --- a/old/55444-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55444-h/55444-h.htm b/old/55444-h/55444-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 794489c..0000000 --- a/old/55444-h/55444-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10545 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. V, July 1885, No. 10, by The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle. - </title> - - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - -<style type="text/css"> - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -p { - margin-top: .75em; - text-align: justify; - text-indent: 1.25em; - margin-bottom: .75em; -} - -img { - border: 0; -} - -.tnote { - border: dashed 1px; - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - margin-bottom: 1em; - padding: 0.5em; -} - -.blockquote { - margin-left: 5%; - margin-right: 10%; - text-align: justify; - text-indent: 0; -} - -.maintitle { - font-size: 200%; - font-weight: bold; - text-align: center; - text-indent: 0; -} - -.center { - text-align: center; - text-indent: 0; -} - -.right { - text-align: right; - text-indent: 0; -} - -.smcap { - font-variant: small-caps; -} - -.smcapuc { - font-variant: small-caps; - font-style: normal; - text-transform: lowercase; -} - -.unindent { - margin-top: .75em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .75em; - text-indent: 0; -} - -.sig { - margin-right: 10%; - text-align: right; - text-indent: 0; -} - -.faux { - visibility: hidden; -} - -.footnotes { - border: dashed 1px; -} - -.footnote { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - font-size: 0.9em; -} - -.footnote .label { - position: absolute; - right: 84%; - text-align: right; -} - -.fnanchor { - vertical-align:baseline; - position: relative; - bottom: 0.33em; - font-size: .8em; - text-decoration: none; -} - -.indent2 { - margin-left: 2em; -} - -h1,h2,h3 { - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -h4 { - margin-bottom: 0; - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -hr { - width: 95%; - margin-top: .5em; - margin-bottom: .5em; - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; - clear: both; -} - -hr.tb { - width: 45%; -} - -hr.chap { - width: 65%; -} - -hr.double { - width: 95%; - border: double 2px; -} - -hr.shorter { - width: 8%; - border: thin solid; -} - -.poetry .stanza { - margin: 1em auto; -} - -.poetry .verse { - text-indent: -3em; - padding-left: 3em; -} - -.poetry .i1 { - text-indent: -2.5em; -} - -.poetry .i2 { - text-indent: -2em; -} - -.poetry .i3 { - text-indent: -1.5em; -} - -.poetry .i10 { - text-indent: 2em; -} - -.poetry .i13 { - text-indent: 3.5em; -} - -.poetry-container { - text-align: center; -} - -.poetry { - text-align: left; - display: inline-block; - text-align: left; -} - -.smaller { - font-size: 80%; -} - -.spacer { - margin-left: 4em; - margin-right: 4em; -} - -ul { - list-style-type: none; -} - -table { - margin: 1em auto 1em auto; - max-width: 40em; - border-collapse: collapse; -} - -td { - padding-left: 0.25em; - padding-right: 0.25em; - vertical-align: top; -} - -.tdr { - text-align: right; - white-space: nowrap; -} - -table.program { - min-width: 40em; -} - -table.program td { - text-align: justify; - padding: 0.25em 0em; -} - -table.program .tdr { - text-align: right; - white-space: nowrap; -} - -.pagenum { - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; -} - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; -} - -@media handheld - -{ -.poetry { - display: block; - margin-left: 1.5em; -} -} - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, No. 10, by -The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, No. 10 - -Author: The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -Editor: Theodore L. Flood - -Release Date: August 27, 2017 [EBook #55444] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1885 *** - - - - -Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -</pre> - - -<h1 class="faux">The Chautauquan, July 1885</h1> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 522px;"> -<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="522" height="800" alt="Cover" /> -</div> - -<div class="tnote"> -<div class="center"><small><b>Transcriber’s Note:</b> This cover has been -created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.</small></div> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_559" id="Page_559">[559]</a></span></p> - -<div class="maintitle"><span class="smcap">The Chautauquan.</span></div> - -<p class="center"><i>A MONTHLY MAGAZINE DEVOTED TO THE PROMOTION OF TRUE CULTURE. ORGAN OF -THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE.</i></p> - -<hr /> - -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Vol. V.</span> <span class="spacer">JULY, 1885.</span> No. 10.</p> - -<hr /> - -<h2>OFFICERS OF THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE.</h2> - -<p><i>President</i>, Lewis Miller, Akron, Ohio. <i>Chancellor</i>, J. H. Vincent, D.D., New Haven, Conn. <i>Counselors</i>, The Rev. Lyman Abbott, D.D.; -the Rev. J. M. Gibson, D.D.; Bishop H. W. Warren, D.D.; Prof. W. C. Wilkinson, D.D.; Edward Everett Hale. <i>Office Secretary</i>, Miss Kate -F. Kimball, Plainfield, N. J. <i>General Secretary</i>, Albert M. Martin, Pittsburgh, Pa.</p> - -<hr class="double" /> - -<h2>Contents</h2> - -<div class="tnote"><b>Transcriber’s Note:</b> This table of contents -of this periodical was created for the HTML version to aid the reader.</div> - -<table summary="Contents"> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Some Damascene Pictures</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#SOME_DAMASCENE_PICTURES">559</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">The Boston Museum of Fine Arts</span></td> - <td class="tdr"></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="indent2">Second Paper</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#THE_BOSTON_MUSEUM_OF_FINE_ARTS">562</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Sanitary Conditions of Summer Resorts</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#SANITARY_CONDITION_OF_SUMMER_RESORTS">564</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Wayside Homes</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#WAYSIDE_HOMES">567</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Sunday Readings</span></td> - <td class="tdr"></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="indent2">[<i>July 5</i>]</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#JULY5">570</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="indent2">[<i>July 12</i>]</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#JULY12">570</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="indent2">[<i>July 19</i>]</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#JULY19">570</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="indent2">[<i>July 26</i>]</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#JULY26">571</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">“We Salute Thee, and Live”</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#WE_SALUTE_THEE_AND_LIVE">571</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">A Group of Mummies</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#A_GROUP_OF_MUMMIES">572</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">A Trip to Mt. Shasta</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#A_TRIP_TO_MT_SHASTA">573</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Reassurement</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#REASSUREMENT">576</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Will It Pay?</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#WILL_IT_PAY">577</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Geography of the Heavens for July</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#GEOGRAPHY_OF_THE_HEAVENS_FOR_JULY">578</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">How Air Has Been Liquefied</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#HOW_AIR_HAS_BEEN_LIQUEFIED">579</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">American Decorative Art</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#AMERICAN_DECORATIVE_ART">582</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Some Modern Literary Men of Germany</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#SOME_MODERN_LITERARY_MEN_OF_GERMANY">585</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Historic Niagara</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#HISTORIC_NIAGARA">586</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Two Fashionable Poisons</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#TWO_FASHIONABLE_POISONS">589</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Our C. L. S. C. Column</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#OUR_C_L_S_C_COLUMN">591</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Glimpses of the Chautauqua Program</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#GLIMPSES_OF_THE_CHAUTAUQUA_PROGRAM">592</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Local Circles</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#LOCAL_CIRCLES">593</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">The C. L. S. C. Classes</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#THE_C_L_S_C_CLASSES">600</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">The Summer Assemblies</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#THE_SUMMER_ASSEMBLIES">603</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Editor’s Outlook</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#EDITORS_OUTLOOK">606</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Editor’s Note-Book</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#EDITORS_NOTE-BOOK">609</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Talk About Books</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#TALK_ABOUT_BOOKS">611</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Chautauqua in Japan</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAUTAUQUA_IN_JAPAN">612</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Program of Popular Exercises</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#PROGRAM_OF_POPULAR_EXERCISES">613</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Special Notes</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#SPECIAL_NOTES">616</a></td> - </tr> -</table> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="SOME_DAMASCENE_PICTURES">SOME DAMASCENE PICTURES.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY BISHOP JOHN F. HURST, D.D.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>One is forcibly struck with the Damascene bazars. They -thread the old city in all directions. Some of them are new, -and some very old. The most of them are covered ways, -where either side is divided into small booths, or shops. The -bazar has its specialty—the brass bazar, the silversmith bazar, -the goldsmith bazar, the shoe bazar, the silk bazar, and all the -rest. Then there is another order of division, such as the -Greek bazar and the Frank bazar. There is sometimes, however, -a breaking up of all orders, for goods of very varied character -you can sometimes get in the same bazar. The oldest of -these quaint marts date back many centuries, and are mere -holes, or rickety houses, where buying and selling have been -going on for many a generation. The venders love these old -places. I imagine their fathers, and even remote ancestors -sat in the same spot, and did business in much the same -way, and chaffed about the prices in quite as much hyperbole, -four or five centuries ago, as their children do to-day, when -a Frank drops into the busy way, and halts, and asks a question -concerning the beautiful wares.</p> - -<p>The love is for the old. No Damascene wants to change to -the new. The smooth floor and familiar shelves of his booth -he could not give up to another for many a bright <i>bishlik</i>.</p> - -<p>Not long since the Pasha of Damascus, who had been -long making vain efforts to get the shop-keepers of a stretch of -the bazar in the “street that is called straight,” to pull down -their booths and put up new ones, had to give up the task as -hopeless. Finally he ordered that, at a given signal, one -night, the bazar should be set fire to in a number of places. -His officers did their duty well. They knew what they were -about. The result was that long reaches of this one bazar -were burned to the ground. The wares went up in smoke with -the tinder which enclosed them.</p> - -<p>“What could the people do?” I asked my informant.</p> - -<p>“Do? Why, nothing at all.”</p> - -<p>“Were they insured? Did they get any compensation back -again for the destruction of their property?”</p> - -<p>“Not in the least. The Pasha had the power. No questions -were asked. The consequence is, that, as you see, new -bazars are building in various places. Soon they will be occupied -by gay, oriental wares, and things will go on quite the -same as before. Only there will be more light and fresher -air.”</p> - -<p>Among the specialties sold in the Damascene bazars we may -mention silk goods, first of all. They are combined with cotton, -and woven into various patterns for dress and furniture. -They defy all competition the world over. The patterns are -exquisite. No wonder this artistic weaving has given the -city’s name, or damask, to such fabrics for all time. Curtains -and all manner of stuffs are woven, and are here displayed in -such combinations as to bewilder any but Orientals. I saw, -during my stay, the places where these fine silks are woven. -There are no great shops, no few places where they come from. -They are produced in small houses, in obscure and ill-odorous -streets, and by thousands of hands, young and old. It is the -toil of the poor, the young, and the infirm, in sunless cellars -and obscure corners which brings out these sunny silks and -beautiful designs. Queens send here from afar to buy them. -There, in the hotel, I saw the Crown Prince of Austria and his -fair-haired Belgian bride. Before twenty-four hours will have -passed they will be buying these silks of Damascus, and in -less than six months Stephanie will be wearing them at a -court dinner. When she becomes Empress she will be having -more of them, and her favorite rooms will likely be hung -with the rich stuffs sent direct from these busy bazars, but -coming first from dingy homes and little rickety looms.</p> - -<p>Yes, one learns an easy lesson here, in these oriental countries, -of the contrast between the hand that weaves and the -body that wears the stuffs that adorn the world’s gayest places. -In Agra, behind the barred gate, I saw the chained prisoners -of the jail weaving most patiently one rich India carpet for the -ex-Empress Eugenie, and another, of different figure, but even -more rich, for Queen Victoria. It takes about six months for -the workers to finish their work. As they weave, one hears -the clank of the chains about their feet. But, in the later years, -when those great carpets will still delight the eye, few will ever -think of the places where the fine wool from Cashmere was -woven into such pleasing shapes.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>DAMASCENE TRADITIONS.</h3> - -<p>There is nothing in the way of safe tradition in Damascus. -They will show you—yes, what will they not show you? I let<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_560" id="Page_560">[560]</a></span> -them tell me everything, and have given no interdict to our -dragoman. He is to tell me all the wildest traditions he -pleases, and take me to every sacred spot, and I am to listen. -No wonder he has brought me to the house of Ananias, the -good friend of the blind Saul, before he became the far-seeing -apostle to the Gentiles. We had to leave our carriage and go -through several narrow and dirty streets, and got thoroughly -wearied by the walk, and then had to wait for a key, and be -surrounded by begging children, and be pounded between -donkeys with heavily-burdened panniers, and be led down a -damp stairway into the darkness, to find the way to the house -of Ananias.</p> - -<p>There is no harm in asking questions. So, to the question -as to how they know this is where he lived, the answer came:</p> - -<p>“Until lately, nobody knew where Ananias lived. But some -years ago a learned man from the west came here and told us -this was the place, and so it must be true.”</p> - -<p>Now, I take this comfort: Ananias lived somewhere in -Damascus, and there is as much probability that he lived -here as anywhere else. That is enough for me. Why should -we disturb things of such little moment?</p> - -<p>But there is not much room for doubting the neighborhood -of the place where Paul entered the city. It was the gate nearest -the southern side of the city. The old Roman road northward -terminated at the gate. It is probable that no change -has taken place in the road, and that it follows just the general -line, and even the curves, that it did in the remote period. -On this southern side of Damascus there has been but little -change in the wall from Paul’s day to ours. You can see at a -glance that all the lower part of the wall is of Roman work. -The blocks are large, clear cut, and brought into closest brotherhood -without a grain of mortar. The joining is still perfect. -It was the wall of Paul’s time, and only the upper part has -been torn down and rebuilt. It is as easy to see the difference -between Roman and Turkish workmanship as to trace the line -between a Moslem mosque and the Theseum in Athens.</p> - -<p>They will show you, in Damascus, the very place where Paul -was let down from the wall in a basket. Let them enjoy their -definite locality! But I did get, very near the alleged spot, an -idea which I had never had before—that there was a mode of -building which favored the letting down of any one from the top -of the wall. One can see, in several places on this same -southern side of Damascus, that people live in houses adjusted -on the top of the wall itself. I saw one of these diminutive -houses which projected over the wall so far that one might -well wonder why it did not fall down to the earth. What more -natural thing than that Paul was let down from just such a -place. There was not a gate in the wall near by, and nothing -was more natural and easy than to aid his escape in this way.</p> - -<p>I lingered some time about the Roman gateway. It is an -enchanting spot. The great blocks of stone, the pillars, the -archway, the smooth stones, over which you walk to reach it, -the general curve of the wall, tell of the Roman times, and -bring you face to face with the little church in Damascus which -was soon to set the whole eastern and western world ablaze by -its leading of Paul to the light. Along all the ways, out by this -Roman gate, the people were twisting silk, and getting it ready -for the loom. It was of hard fiber, yellow, rich, and glistening -in the afternoon shimmer of the sun, as it came back from -the pink sides of the Anti-Libanus mountains. There was no -available spot which was not utilized by long stretches of the -silk cord. It was drawn off in all directions, and we had to -walk carefully to keep from stumbling against the twister’s -twist.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>THE CAMELS.</h3> - -<p>Not very far from the Roman gate was the great camel -space. It was the point of departure for caravans to Palmyra, -Mecca, and the whole eastern world. Here were hundreds of -camels. They seemed to be waiting for the finishing burdens. -Some were already loaded, and were pausing for the rest. I -know not how long it requires for the completing of a caravan. -But it seems that when some camels are loaded they are taken -to the outside space, and are kept watch over until all of the -others are ready. It must be no small or brief matter to get -a caravan ready. Then, when the last camel is laden, and he -takes his place in the caravan, and the signal is given to move -on, what a commotion it makes! Friends come down to see -their friends off. It is the moving off of many people, and of -vast treasures of merchandise. Merchants and travelers, and -many others who wish to go to the distant places across the -desert, for any purpose whatever, go with the caravan. It is -the safest way, for the train is guarded, and has, I imagine, -the protection of the government. There is something singularly -poetical, as well as practical, in the moving of the caravan. -It is a thing which does not occur every day. Much -commercial gain depends upon its safe conduct and arrival. -The camels must be of just the right kind to endure the long -journey and the great fatigue. The gait is slow and dull. -There is the dreariest monotony. Yet this is the way these -people have been traveling and doing business, and keeping -up the connections for all these long ages. As things now -seem, it would appear to be ages still before the railway, or -even the wagon, will take the place of the much-enduring -camel, the ship of the desert.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>BUCKLE’S GRAVE.</h3> - -<p>Close beside the space allotted for the camels which make -the long caravans for Damascus, I came across the little English -cemetery. It is a quiet spot, surrounded by a high wall. -The gate was locked, and there was no way of getting within -it. I could not tell where the key was to be found; wherever -it was, it was a long distance off, in the heart of the city. So, -by the aid of our dragoman, I succeeded in climbing to the -top of the wall, and seeing the one grave in which I was most -interested—that of Henry Thomas Buckle, the author of the -“History of Civilization.” Buckle had wearied himself out -with literary work. His methods were not the most wise nor -expeditious. He was an indefatigable gleaner of facts, and a -patient gatherer of notes from all quarters, and he piled up his -note-books in great heterogeneous masses. He seems to have -had but little help, and not to have husbanded his strength. -So, like many men who begin to rest when it is all too late, -he went off on distant travel. He reached Damascus. His -mind must have kindled afresh as he saw this city of weavers -and strange oriental combinations, and the thought of the long -and hoary history of the place. But he was too weary to think -longer. He lay down to die, and here he rests, under the -shadow of the thick and high walls of a little graveyard, -where only seldom an Anglo-Saxon comes to visit the sacred -place. The accumulation of years is beginning to tell upon -the inscription. But it is still very legible, and gives the -record of his brief and toiling life.</p> - -<p>There is something singularly touching in this little graveyard. -There are only a few graves, yet among them, besides -Buckle’s, are several English noblemen and titled ladies. The -inscriptions repeat the story of love and tears, as everywhere -else. None who come here expect to die. But the difficulties of -removal are great. There are great and long settled superstitions -against the transportation of the dead in all these -eastern countries. The best way is to let our friends lie where -they fall, and to care for the perpetual beauty of their resting -place. The little graveyards of the Anglo-Saxons in all the -eastern cemeteries make a strange appeal to the sympathies. -I have seen many of them, and always they teach a new lesson -of the suddenness of death, of the pilgrimage which we -call life, and of the burning love of those who remain behind, -and who write their words of tenderest affection upon stone in -far-off lands.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>THE GREAT MOSQUE.</h3> - -<p>There are few mosques which have a more interesting history -than the great one of Damascus. Of all those in existence,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_561" id="Page_561">[561]</a></span> -save only that of Mecca, the greatest interest probably -clusters about this one. It is not as splendid as that of St. -Sophia, in Constantinople, and yet it has some elements of -touching story that not even that one possesses. It stands -upon the foundation of a Greek temple. In the early Christian -ages it required only an imperial order to convert a temple -into a church. So, when the Emperor Arcadius, toward the -close of the fourth century, wished to convert this temple into -a church, all he needed to do was to declare his will, and hurl -out the pagan priesthood, and make a few minor changes, and -the deed was done. It became a splendid church, whose fame -went out into all lands. Thus it remained until the rise of the -Mohammedan faith. When Damascus was conquered, so arduous -was the strife that the leader of the Christians met the -leader of the Moslems near the spot where the church stood, -and, by agreement, part of the church was given up to the -Mohammedans, and part still reserved by the Christians. -But Christian and Moslem had the same doorway. This state -of things could not last a great while. The Caliph Omar I. -asked the Christians to sell their right to a part of the church. -They refused, and then he took it from them. But he was fair -enough to given them perpetual right to other churches in the -city and its environs. He then set to work to beautify and -make still more splendid this ancient building. He is said to -have brought from Constantinople 1,200 skilled artists, and to -have searched over all Syria for the most splendid pillars and -architectural adornments, with which to beautify and enlarge -the building. Precious stones were used for mosaic, vines of -solid gold were made to run over the archways, the wooden -ceiling was overlaid with a plating of gold, and from its glittering -height there hung six hundred gold lamps.</p> - -<p>The wars and time have told strangely upon this rich, historical -building. The lamps are gone, no doubt to serve the purposes -of warfare. The plating on the ceiling has disappeared, -probably for the same reason. Much of the splendor has departed. -But there are still the magnificent columns, with -mutilated capitals and defaced bases, which once belonged to -the Greek pagans of Syria, and in their long life, have witnessed -the worship of Baal, Jupiter, Mohammed, and the one -true Savior.</p> - -<p>The present reminders of the time when this vast building -of four hundred and twenty-nine feet in length and one hundred -and twenty-five feet wide, was new, are numerous and -very prominent. Everywhere, at every step you take, you see -the old peering out boldly through the new and the late. -Here is a patch of rich and deep-stoned mosaic, which has -escaped a thousand destructive forces, and still stands as a -witness to the time of remote Christianity, when Mohammed -was not yet born. The stained windows, with glass so somber -and subdued that one can hardly see even this blazing Syrian -sun’s rays through it, are few in number, but they must have -been made by Christian hands, in the far gone and fading -Byzantine times. Even the Roman peers through the Christian, -and one sees strong evidences of the times when the star had not -yet stood over the manger at Bethlehem, and when the Greek -paganism ruled from the Mediterranean to the borders of India. -Here is an archway with only one stone missing, which is as -perfect a bit of Greek architecture as Athens can furnish to-day.</p> - -<p>One of the most singular features of this building is this—the -respect which the Mohammedan shows here for Christianity. I -have seen nothing equal to it elsewhere. There is here, belonging -to the Greek mosque, the Madinet ’Isa, or “Minaret of Jesus,” -and the Mohammedans have a belief that when the Christ -comes he will appear on this minaret. Bloody as has been -the history of Damascus, and violent as has often been the -treatment of the Christians by the natives, the Mohammedans -have been compelled to respect the Christians, and to remember -the relation of this wonderful city to early Christianity.</p> - -<p>Let me give another illustration of how the old still looks -through the new. To the dragoman I said, when he seemed -to have shown us everything:</p> - -<p>“Where is that Christian inscription?”</p> - -<p>“Oh,” he replied, “nobody goes there much now. It is -dangerous to get to it. You have to leap across a bazar, from -one house-top to another. It is very dangerous.”</p> - -<p>There were two ladies in our little party, and they were not -at all frightened by the outlook. It was simply a dragoman’s -excuse to save himself a little trouble. We all agreed that -Franz must show us the inscription. We went out of the -mosque, down the street, then into the silver bazar, then up a -rickety stairway, and finally out over the flat roofs of various -buildings back to the outer wall of the mosque. We were at -the limit, and either had to leap over a deep span, the width -of a narrow street, or put a wide board across it. A couple of -piasters soon provided the board from a man who was just -waiting to serve us, and in one minute more we were reading, -along the architrave of one side of the old mosque, these words -from David, in early Greek:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>“Thy kingdom [O, Christ] is an everlasting kingdom, and thy dominion -endureth throughout all generations.”</p> - -</div> - -<p>This inscription has stood here through all the years since -they were put there first by the Christians of the fourth century, -after they had changed the temple into the church. The -letters are as clear as the sun in the heavens.</p> - -<p>It is, perhaps, the only illustration where Mohammedanism -has permitted a Christian inscription to stand. It is not likely -to be removed in the future, but will come into use when all -the mosques are again made into Christian temples.</p> - -<p>It is not an easy climb to the top of one of these lofty minarets. -But we resolved to do it. The picture never fades from -the mind. Toward the west we could see, as though within -arm’s length, Ubel Sheikh, or Mount Hermon, with its great -folds of snow, that make his perpetual turban of spotless -white. Out from the sides of the Anti-Libanus burst the -Abana and Pharpar, which go singing down to the desert, and -produce the damascenes of all the countries. Yonder is the -Christian quarter, there the Jewish, and in another direction -the Mohammedan. Far off to the northeast lies Palmyra. -But we can not see it. It is a four days’ camel journey distant. -The illimitable desert stretches east and south and north, and -these two “better rivers” of Damascus lose themselves in -those two little lakes, whose silver surface just glistens a little -in this perfect sun. Fruit trees are everywhere in bloom. The -almond, the plum—the damson takes its name from Damascus—and -the apricot, are everywhere in full blaze, and make -the city one vast nosegay. The murmur of fountains rises -from a thousand courts, while the streets are alive with the -streams which have been vexed and teased away by many a -device from these living rivers. You get weary with the view.</p> - -<p>We now descend. How shall we see the way down the -dingy steps? By the same lamp which had guided us up. -Yes, it is a veritable coal-oil lantern. Think of it—the mixing -up of the centuries! My Anglo-Saxon feet have been guided -to the topmost point of one of the world’s oldest buildings here -in grand and hoary Damascus, by the aid of a kerosene lantern, -every drop of whose petroleum has come from Oil City -or its neighborhood.</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">Damascus</span>, March 8, 1885.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p>I do not pretend that books are everything.… -Some day I may say some very hard things about people -who keep their books so close before their eyes that they -can not see God’s world, nor their fellow men and women. -But books rightly used are society.—<i>E. E. Hale, in “How to -Do It.”</i></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_562" id="Page_562">[562]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="THE_BOSTON_MUSEUM_OF_FINE_ARTS">THE BOSTON MUSEUM OF FINE ARTS.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY CLARENCE COOK.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>SECOND PAPER.</h3> - -<p>Before proceeding to describe the contents of the second -floor of the Museum, I must say a few words about the School -of Drawing and Painting which, for the present, has its home -in the building.</p> - -<p>Although it is generally thought by those who hear of this -school, and always in connection with the Museum, that it is a -department of the institution, yet in fact it is only partially under -the control of the trustees.</p> - -<p>It will be remembered that the Museum was not made all at -once, and out of whole cloth, so to speak, but was formed by -bringing together certain collections already existing—the -Athenæum casts and pictures, and the Gray collection of engravings, -for instance, and by offering hospitality to certain -projects connected with the study of the arts, which were in -the air, but which could not take shape without some such -help as an institution could give.</p> - -<p>As my readers know, the Museum became a fact in 1876, -but two years earlier, in 1874, there had been earnest talk -about a school of drawing and painting, and though nothing -was actually done, yet the ground was prepared by much discussion -for establishing such a school on right principles of -theory and practice when the time should come for doing something. -The Museum once established, the trustees conferred -with those of their fellow-citizens who had been urging -the foundation of a school; the trustees offered rooms in the -new building, the others raised the necessary funds to equip -the school, and on Tuesday, January 2, 1877, the school was -opened.</p> - -<p>The school is under the control of a permanent committee, -consisting of four painters, three architects, the three principal -officers of the Museum, and two other gentlemen. The -rooms occupied by the school are in the basement of the building; -they are well lighted, warmed, and ventilated, and are -furnished with all the necessary means and appliances for -instruction, while the pupils have, in addition to the excellent -teaching provided for them in the school itself, the advantage -of free access to the permanent collections of the Museum, as -well as to the special exhibitions that, from time to time, take -place in the building. The school holds a high rank among -similar institutions in the country; it is under the able and -high minded management of Mr. Frederic Crowninshield, and -it is sincerely to be hoped that before long it may find itself in -quarters more ample, and better suited to the dignity of so important -a factor in the culture of the community. At the same -time the hope may be expressed, that the school and the Museum -may never part company, but that their relations, on the -contrary, may grow closer and stronger, and that in time the -school may become an active part of the foundation, and be -put under the complete control of the trustees. There could -not be a better place for students than an institution like this, -where daily seeing the finest forms of antique art, and constantly -increasing opportunities for acquaintance with good -modern work, illustrate and strengthen the lessons learned -in the school itself.</p> - -<p>Immediately in front of the visitor as he enters the Museum -rises the ample staircase that leads to the upper rooms. The -stairs mount in a broad flight in the middle of the hall, to the -first landing, where they divide, and returning on themselves -finish the ascent in two flights, one at the right hand and the -other at the left. On this first landing was at one time placed -a handsome original example of the carved settles or benches -of the Italian Renaissance, but this has now been replaced by -a cast of the reclining female figure called Cleopatra, but to -which the name of Ariadne is now more commonly given. -The original marble is in the Vatican. This cast is one of -those purchased with the bequest of the late Charles Sumner. -On the walls of the staircase and of the upper hall several pictures -are hung, among them a few that have, at least for Americans, -a historic interest. Here are the “Belshazzar’s Feast” of -Washington Allston, a picture at one time much talked and -written about, and which played an important part in the artist’s -life; the “St. Peter delivered from Prison,” by the same -painter; the “King Lear” of Benjamin West, and the “Sortie -from Gibraltar” of Jonathan Trumbull. Of course these pictures -are only placed here for a time, until the Museum building -shall be enlarged, for when all deductions have been made -on the score of artistic merit that sound criticism can demand, -they will still remain as monuments in our development, -and as such deserve to be hung where they can be better -seen.</p> - -<p>Lack of room crowds into the hall of this second story a -number of small works, such as the collection of water-color -copies from the pictures of Dutch and Italian masters made -for the late Mr. Douse, and by him bequeathed to the Athenæum. -They are of little value except as memoranda, and -might as well be removed from their frames, mounted, and -consigned to the custody of portfolios in the print-room.</p> - -<p>Of far more value are the drawings in chalk, in pencil, and -in pastel by the late J. F. Millet, belonging to Mr. Martin Brimmer; -they were among the first things loaned to the Museum, -and they still remain among the most valuable for delight and -for instruction. At the same end of the hall, and so placed -that the light from the large window is most advantageous to it, -is placed a cast of the second of the Gates, made by Lorenzo -Ghiberti for the Baptistery in Florence.</p> - -<p>At the left hand, as we leave the stairs, is the entrance to the -extensive loan-collections which fill all but one of the rooms on -this side of the building. Although they are directly over the -rooms on the first floor, the space they occupy is not so subdivided; -we have only four rooms above the five below. The -apartment we first enter is a large one, fifty-five feet long by -thirty-two wide, and was formerly given up to the pictures -which have since been transferred to the answering room on -the opposite side of the building. The room opening out of -this, at the western end, and of nearly the same size, is devoted -to the same object, but it would be impossible within our narrow -limits to give an adequate notion of their contents, particularly -since, owing to want of space, no scientific arrangement is possible, -and the dazed spectator moves about among objects of -great value and interest, brought from every clime and belonging -to every age, but deprived of much of their value because -the key which order gives, is wanting.</p> - -<p>The department of textiles, embroideries and laces is full, -and of great value, and includes some Italian stuffs and embroideries -purchased by the Museum under the direction of the -late Alessandro Castellani. There are some fine Flemish -tapestries which came from the Château de Neuilly, and a few -other pieces of value, but the Museum is richest in that part of -the loan collection which belongs to Japan. Dr. W. S. Bigelow -has loaned to the Museum his magnificent collection of -objects from that country, and it may be said of it that in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_563" id="Page_563">[563]</a></span> -field of embroideries, lacquers, swords, sword-mounts, bronzes, -ivories, and ceramics, it exhausts the subject. It is now greatly -to be desired that some one should undertake the collection of -the works of the Japanese artists in painting—a field of great -importance, and strangely neglected.</p> - -<p>The Museum is rich in specimens of pottery and porcelain -of Oriental and European manufacture. In the latter field it -is richer than the Metropolitan Museum of New York, but the -Avery collection of Chinese and Japanese porcelain in the -New York Museum is finer in quality and more complete in its -representative character than anything the Boston Museum -has. It is also far more attractively displayed. The collection -of Captain Brinckley, of Japan, of eight hundred -and forty-two pieces of Chinese and Japanese porcelain, -loaned to the Boston Museum since 1884 is, however, an -acquisition of great value and artistic interest, and although -not particularly well displayed is instructively arranged and -classified.</p> - -<p>In the large western room there is a considerable number -of small objects of the period of the Italian Renaissance, some -bronzes belonging to the Athenæum, and some medals loaned -by Mr. Charles C. Perkins; there is also a considerable number -of reproductions of Italian medals, made by Elkington, -of London, which serve a useful purpose in the absence of -original specimens. There are also, in this room, several good -pieces of Italian majolica; two specimens of the Della Robbia -ware—one attributed to Luca, the other to Andrea, both -loaned by Mr. Perkins. The collection is not rich in glass, -either antique or modern. There are a few pieces of old Venetian -glass, but they are neither very interesting nor very -valuable.</p> - -<p>On the south side of this division of the Museum are two -rooms, one of which is occupied with a miscellaneous collection -of objects in carved wood and ivory, Italian marriage -chests, cabinets, tables, etc., etc., with some Japanese objects, -chiefly swords, while the other is fitted up with carved oak of -the sixteenth century, the lining of a room in some English house, -with additions from other quarters. This is an extremely -interesting apartment, and, besides the wood-carving, contains -six portraits painted on panel, and forming a part of the -original decoration of the room; among them heads of Henry -VIII., Edward VI., and Queen Elizabeth. There are several -pieces of antique furniture in this room, and in the center a -glass case containing some good illuminated manuscripts. -The mantelpiece, in the style of the period, is a modern reproduction.</p> - -<p>Returning to the stair-case hall, and crossing to the eastern -side of the building, we find ourselves in the picture-galleries. -The shape and disposition of these rooms are similar to those -in the opposite wing, but owing to the greater height of the -sculpture-gallery on the ground floor at the eastern end, the -space above it, divided into two rooms, is several feet higher -than the rest of the wing. The great height of the upper story -permits this division be to made without injury to the effect.</p> - -<p>The pictures belonging to the Museum are not without -interest, although their value is not very great, if reckoned -in money. The early American pictures include portraits by -Copley, Stuart, Allston, and West, but with the exception -of the well-known portraits of Washington and Mrs. Washington, -by Stuart, there is nothing here of particular interest, -although there are often pictures loaned to the Museum -by old residents of Boston, which are historically valuable. It -is much to be desired that the collection of portraits by Copley -in the Museum of Harvard College could be deposited in the -Museum. There ought to be in this institution as complete a -representation of the early art of the country as can be procured, -and it would be comparatively easy to accomplish this -at the present time. It must not be inferred that the authorities -of the Museum have neglected this portion of their mission. -On the contrary, they have rendered important service -in this direction, and the special exhibitions have been of interest, -and of great importance. Beside miscellaneous loan -collections, there have been exhibitions of the works of Allston, -of William M. Hunt, and of George Fuller, and every -year the visitor finds representative pictures by artists of repute -at home and abroad, which excite interest, discussion, -criticism, and keep the flame of art and the love of art burning, -even if—and this by no fault of the institution—comparatively -few avail themselves of the light. The French school -of painters which had its seat near the Forest of Fontainebleau, -and which is associated with the names of Millet, Corot, -Rousseau, and Diaz, is better represented here than any -other of the modern schools, although Courbet and Couture -are both seen in good examples, Courbet especially, of whom -there is a fine picture, “La Curée”—the huntsman winding -his horn to call the chase together to cut up the stag. The -Couture is the Heads of Two Soldiers seen in profile, and -though of no importance as subject, is a good example of his -method.</p> - -<p>The school of Fontainebleau, or more properly speaking, of -Barbizon, is represented by the large “Dante and Virgil,” a -companion in size to the “Orpheus” of the Cottier collection -in New York, but by no means so fine a work. There is no -important work by Millet at present, although there have been -here some good examples from time to time, and especially -his “Sower,” the fine <i>replica</i> of that picture belonging to Mr. -Quincy A. Shaw, with other smaller subjects, particularly a -Sheep-shearing, a picture in which all that is best in Millet -was to be seen.</p> - -<p>The picture gallery at the Museum is such a movable feast -that it would be useless to attempt a catalogue of its contents. -Just now the “Automedon taming the Horses of Achilles,” by -Baptiste Regnault, the “Joan of Arc,” by Bastien Lepage, and -“The Walk by the River Side,” by Henri Lerolle, are among -the most noticeable of the contents of the large room, although -there are a number of smaller pictures that are well worth looking -at. There is an effort making to purchase the picture by -Regnault, and the Lerolle was presented to the Museum in -1884 by Mr. Francis C. Foster.</p> - -<p>The remaining rooms in this portion of the building are a -small one in which some fine old Dutch paintings are exhibited, -and those which contain the Gray collection of engravings. -The Dutch pictures, it is hoped, will one day -belong to the Museum; they will form a valuable addition to -its collection.</p> - -<p>The Gray collection fills the room which runs along the -southern side of this wing answering to the large picture gallery -which is parallel with it on the north. This collection, -formed for the late Francis C. Gray by M. Thies, a German -connoisseur, is one of the two or three important collections of -prints that are owned in America, and in some departments is -excelled by none, while the fact that there is a fund derived -from moneys left by Mr. Gray, which is devoted to the maintenance -and increase of the collection, gives it the advantage -over all others here, and ensures its one day becoming of national -importance. It is already very rich in Rembrandts and -Dürers, but the aim of those who have it in charge is to make -it representative in its character, not of any one school in particular -but of all the schools and styles of engraving which have -existed. The collection is under the intelligent care of Mr. -Edward H. Greenleaf, who makes the contents of the portfolios -useful to the public by a series of exhibitions of the finest specimens -of the various schools, accompanied with titles, notes, -and instructive memoranda, so that in default of proper space -for doing full justice to the collection in any permanent way, -the course of the year brings before the eyes of students and -visitors a considerable number of the prints, and thus makes -no slight contribution to general enlightenment on the subject.</p> - -<p>The next paper in this series will take up the Metropolitan -Museum of New York.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_564" id="Page_564">[564]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="SANITARY_CONDITION_OF_SUMMER_RESORTS">SANITARY CONDITION OF SUMMER RESORTS.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY THE HON. B. G. NORTHROP, LL.D.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>The progress of modern civilization is marked by increasing -attention to the sanitary condition of cities, towns and homes. -Barbaric races are comparatively puny and short lived. Very -old men are seldom found among savages, and the rate of -mortality bears some proportion to the degree of barbarism, -while early deaths everywhere diminish as the art and science -of sanitation advance. The increase of knowledge and the -influence of Christianity have greatly lengthened human life. -Science is constantly showing how many diseases and deaths -are preventable. These facts are abundantly established by -statistics in all the most educated nations, and, more recently, -by the careful investigations of life insurance companies -and public boards of health. There has been a far greater -advance in sanitary science during the last fifty years than in -any previous century. But the popular appreciation of this -science, though steadily advancing, has not kept pace with its -discoveries. The pressing demand now is the diffusion of the -art of sanitation—the practical application of its methods by -the people at large. The public press, the daily, weekly and -monthly journals are doing much in this direction. Some of -the most widely circulated religious journals have a column -regularly devoted to this subject. Our schools are helping on -this good work, and here the art of promoting health and prolonging -life should be learned and then applied in the family. -Such principles, though they seem truisms to the scientist, -should be taught to our youth, who should early memorize -mottoes like the following: “Health is the prime essential to -success.” “The first wealth is health.” “The health of the -people is the foundation upon which all their happiness and -all their power depend.” “The material precedes and conditions -the intellectual.” The school may do more to popularize -sanitary science than any other one agency. When this work -is once done here, it will not long be true that a large -proportion of our people are still living in ignorance and violation -of so many of the essential laws of health. The <i>popular</i> -neglect of such laws should not be overlooked in our gratification -at their discovery.</p> - -<p>Our wisest sanitarians affirm that more than one fourth of -the diseases which still afflict modern life are preventable. -Great prominence has recently been given to this subject in -England and other European countries. Dr. Simon, chief -medical officer of the English Privy Council, says that “the -deaths which we in each year register in this country (now -about five hundred thousand) are fully a hundred and twenty-five -thousand more numerous than they would be, <i>if existing -knowledge</i> of the chief causes of disease, as affecting masses -of population, were reasonably well applied throughout England.” -With our larger population, probably a still larger -number of lives in America might be prolonged by the more -general observance of the laws of health. If 125,000 needless -deaths occur annually, that implies 3,500,000 needless sicknesses, -there being on an average twenty-eight cases of sickness -to every death. Saying nothing of the hopes thus blasted -and the hearts and homes desolated, the mere money value of -the lives thus prematurely ended every year would amount to -many millions of dollars, often involving the abandonment of -lucrative enterprises, and inducing poverty if not pauperism. -In this lowest view, it costs to be sick and it costs to die.</p> - -<p>Modern civilization relates specially to the homes and social -life of the people, to their health, comfort and thrift, their intellectual -and moral advancement. In earlier times and other -lands men were counted in the aggregate and valued as they -helped to swell the revenues or retinues of kings and nobles. -The government was the unit, and each individual only added -one to the roll of serfs or soldiers. With us the individual is -the unit, and the government is <i>for</i> the people, as well as by -the people. This interest in the people has been manifested -in new laws for protecting their health, and by the general organization -of State and local Boards of Health.</p> - -<p>Their investigations have embraced not only the needs of -cities, towns and individual homes, but have revealed startling -facts as to the unsanitary condition, and consequently the -peril, of certain summer resorts. Cases of loss of life from the -burning of hotels have led to the enactment of laws requiring -fire escapes. On account of disasters by the explosion of -steam boilers, all steamboats are required to get a “bill of -safety” from an official expert examiner. But the violations of -sanitary laws in boarding houses, hotels and summer resorts -have produced annually far more sickness and death than -have such fires and explosions. The circumstantial horrors -connected with these sudden and terrible disasters produce a -deep and lasting impression, and prompt to stringent, preventive -laws, while the deaths from bad sanitary conditions, -though more numerous, are so isolated as to attract little notice. -The patronage of summer resorts is already so large, -and is so rapidly increasing from year to year, as to multiply -their number and increase their attractions. This summer -migration from city to country is more than a fashion, and is -favored by such substantial reasons as to insure its permanence -and growth. Even city clerks have their fortnight’s -vacation for rest and refreshment by the seaside or among the -hills and mountains. There is a greater exodus of teachers -and members of all professions during their longer vacations—still -more, families, and especially those having young children, -seek this escape from the heat, dust, and miasmatic exhalations -of the crowded city. Though their children may -have attended the kindergarten in the city, they find the best -sort of kindergarten in the open fields and varied objects of -the country, with its wider range for rambles and those freer -sports that are so attractive to every wide-awake boy, such as -boating, fishing, hunting, watching turtles, gathering bugs and -butterflies, roaming in the woods, taking long excursions on -the lakes or rivers, climbing steep hills and rocky cliffs, loving -flowers, observing the properties of plants and trees, and the -names, habits, retreats and voices of the birds. Living much -in the open air, nature becomes the great educator, and for -the summer at least, the country proffers superior advantages -for the physical, mental and moral training of youth. The -boy, for example, who observes the birds so as to distinguish -them by their beak, claws, form, plumage, song or flight has -gained an invaluable habit of accurate observation never acquired -while cooped up in a city.</p> - -<p>The apprehension of cholera during the present summer is -likely to increase the patronage of rural resorts. The condition -of some dense centers of population invites this pest. Its -most terrible ravages last summer in Naples, Marseilles and -Toulouse occurred in the squalid dens so long the reproach of -those cities. Our summer retreats should all be health resorts -in fact as well as in name. Yet many of them—little villages -in winter, with a population of a few scores or hundreds—are -too often ill-prepared to be suddenly expanded into cities with -a population of many thousands, during the hottest and most -trying months of the year. Several State Boards of Health, -within a few years, have examined many watering-places and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_565" id="Page_565">[565]</a></span> -have been reluctantly compelled to make startling statements -as to their unsanitary conditions.</p> - -<p>In some cases these unwholesome and unwelcome discoveries, -though a surprise and regret to the owners, were accepted -as facts, and the needful remedies promptly applied. In -other instances, such disagreeable revelations awakened resentment -and were treated as absurd alarms or slanderous -attacks, and ignorance and prejudice held their ground undisturbed.</p> - -<p>In regard to one famous resort the State Board of Health of -Massachusetts said six years ago: “The unsanitary grounds -invite a pestilence. They violate the plainest teachings of -hygienic common sense. There is no adequate provision for -the removal of refuse, and the wells and privies are everywhere -in close proximity, and some of the latter are immense -and offensive affairs, emptied only once a year, in the absence -of the summer boarders. At a large boarding house the sink -drain empties on the ground within three feet of the well, and -at another, the well is within a foot of an open trough sink -drain, so filled and obstructed that the water sets back, and a -filthy puddle surrounds the well.” These were mostly driven -wells, reaching water from eight to twenty feet below the surface. -The theory was, that the foulest water would be fully -filtered by the soil above and around a driven well. The peddlers -of this patent, with their boastful advertisements, are in a -measure responsible for this mischievous error, which I have -met in many states. I found a large hotel beyond the Missouri -River, where, instead of even a cess-pool, the kitchen -drainage gathered in a surface pool close to the well. At a -bakery in another resort the sink drain and cess-pool are but -twelve feet from the well. Twenty-four privies and thirteen -cess-pools are within a radius of 140 feet of a well used by -many families. When the water from forty wells was analyzed, -the chemical examination proved that sixteen of them -were bad and unsafe. The official State report for 1879 contains -many pages of similar details. In fifteen days after the -State Board of Health called attention to the results of this investigation, -the citizens held a town meeting, at which it was -<i>unanimously</i> voted that the Board of Health of this town -should adopt all proper methods to perfect and enforce stringent -sanitary regulations, and promising them their most cordial -support in all reasonable efforts they may make in the -furtherance of this end. The Board of Health of another well-known -resort, after a careful examination of the sanitary condition -of Oak Bluffs and Martha’s Vineyard Camp-grounds, -frankly said that “unless proper remedial measures were carried -out, the abandonment of the place, as a residence for -health, is but a question of time.” The State Board subsequently -commended this local board for adopting wise sanitary -regulations and carrying them out with such energy that -the high reputation of the place as a health resort might be -preserved.</p> - -<p>The same report says: “It must not be taken for granted -that this condition of things is confined to one place. Visits -to various seaside resorts of a similar character on both north -and south shores show little change for the better. Many individual -cases are worse.”</p> - -<p>The official inspection of many such summer resorts revealed -sickening details connected with the large hotels and boarding -houses. One hundred and fifty summer houses examined -were, almost without exception, objectionable, on the score of -danger to health, due in part to foul air, but more to contaminated -well water. There is always a risk in the use of such -water, and the only safe rule is to make privies and cess-pools -absolutely tight, and frequently empty and disinfect them, so -that they <i>can not</i> poison the water supply. Nearly every State -health report abounds in instances of the outbreak of typhoid -fever due to bad well water, and one affirms that the majority -of wells in the rural districts of that state are tainted.</p> - -<p>As is my custom, in order to adapt my lectures on “Village -Improvements” to local needs, I made a cursory inspection of -the streets and private grounds in the town of ⸺, which -revealed a prolific source of peril to its citizens. Though I -had heard nothing of the actual experience of the place, I -spoke in strong terms of the danger of an early outbreak of -typhoid fever and diphtheria, from the proximity of vaults and -wells. After the lecture I was informed that such a dire visitation -had already desolated many homes, but it was regarded -as “a mysterious visitation of Providence,” and nothing was -done to abate the obvious cause of the pestilence. I find it -exceedingly difficult to convince men of any danger from their -water supply. They are apt to resent a disparagement of their -wells as they would of their children, and yet I seldom inspect -a town where there is not found urgent need of the warning, -“<span class="smcap">Look carefully to your wells</span>.” Gross sanitary defects are -often found even around the homes of isolated farmers, with -every natural advantage for drainage and healthfulness. -Hence I advise that securing “better sanitary conditions in -our homes and surroundings” be made prominent among the -various objects of the “Village Improvement Associations” -organized in many states, and now numbering nearly three -hundred.</p> - -<p>The unsanitary condition of Memphis invited the terrible -scourge of yellow fever in 1878. The occurrence of four thousand -deaths in one season compelled attention to the cause -and remedy. If Memphis was then the filthiest and sickliest -city of the South, it now claims to be the healthiest. The case -demanded and received “heroic treatment.” Over forty-two -miles of sewers have been built, on the most approved plan, -with one hundred and ninety automatic flushing tanks, each -discharging one hundred and twelve gallons of water twice a -day. While collecting facts for a lecture there on “The Needs -of Memphis,” I inspected the city, and especially the “man-holes,” -in company with the city engineer, who had supervised -their construction, and found in none of them any offensive -odor. These improvements were costly, but the recent rapid -growth of this city in population and wealth proves that these -liberal expenditures were wise investments. The “death-pool” -of 1878 now justly aspires to be a health resort. An excellent -sewer system, with automatic flushing tanks, is now in -use in Denver, Colorado. I made a similar examination of -the man-holes there last October, with similar results, and received -the testimony of a prominent physician, to the marked -diminution of zymotic diseases since the completion of the -new sewers.</p> - -<p>Cumulative evidence on the danger of using tainted water -might be given to an indefinite extent, like the following: -Thirty-one out of one hundred inmates of a convent in Munich, -affected with typhoid fever; the outbreak of typhoid -fever in Princeton, New Jersey, two years ago; the fearful -epidemic at Waupun, Wisconsin, in April last, and the terrible -pestilence now desolating Plymouth, Pa. are all attributed to -infected water. In Plymouth nearly one hundred persons have -already died, and over one thousand have been prostrated—in -the opinion of the physicians, poisoned by water pollution. -Such facts should everywhere prompt to sanitary precautions, -and enforce the motto, “Eternal vigilance is the price of public -health.”</p> - -<p>In a popular summer resort of Massachusetts there occurred -eighty cases of typhoid fever during 1881, out of a population -of only 1,500. The citizens were alarmed, and prompt and -thorough investigation discovered and removed the cause. -The mischief had been done mainly by tainted water. The -remedies suggested by the board of health—clearing of premises, -securing of better drainage and plumbing, removing of -all decomposing matter, abolishing all cess-pools and leaching -vaults, draining marshes and pumping out and cleansing -all wells and cisterns that afforded chemical evidence of being -tainted—were energetically applied. The owners of these -beautiful cottages and villas spared no effort or expense to restore<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_566" id="Page_566">[566]</a></span> -this attractive resort to its former salubrity. If any community -of its size was ever more earnest, prompt and united -in such a work of restoration, I should be glad to learn its -name. In the face of peculiar difficulties on this rocky peninsula, -nearly five miles of sewers were constructed. Hundreds -of chemical analyses of the drinking water were made. Of the -wells and cisterns so examined, nearly sixty per cent. contained -water unfit for drinking or cooking. As a result of this renovation, -the local board of health is quoted in the Massachusetts -report for 1883 as saying: “These vigorous correctionary -measures completely checked the epidemic, and not a single -case of the fever has since appeared here that could not be -traced to some other locality for its origin.”</p> - -<p>Another seaside city, much resorted to in summer, with -a regular population of over 3,000, after suffering severely from -zymotic diseases, especially typhoid fever, requested the State -Board of Health to investigate the cause of this excessive mortality. -Nine tenths of the population here are crowded in one -village of small area, having many narrow streets, with small -house lots, necessitating a dangerous proximity of cess-pools, -privy vaults and wells. This danger is increased by the nature -of the soil, mostly sand or gravel, that facilitates rapid percolation. -The climate itself is pronounced more equable and -salubrious than that of any other part of the State, and therefore -specially attractive to the health-seeker. The mean winter -temperature is seven degrees warmer than that of Cambridge. -The insular position of the town, and the sensible -proximity of the Gulf Stream lend their combined influence to -modify the extremes of temperature, such as exist in the inland -parts of the State. The summer temperature of the water upon -its shores renders sea-bathing recreative, invigorating and -pleasurable, even to the delicate invalid. With such rare natural -advantages for salubrity, the high death rate is traced to -preventable causes. The water of eleven wells showed, on -chemical analysis, a great degree of pollution. The remedial -plans, prepared at the suggestion of the State Board of Health, -were submitted to the action of the town meeting held February, -1884, and were favorably received. But at a subsequent -meeting, this favorable action was reconsidered, and since that -time no action has been taken.</p> - -<p>The last two reports of the State Board of Health of New -Jersey contain valuable accounts of the sanitary investigations -of the health resorts of that state. The following statements -are abbreviated from these volumes. Within thirty miles of -New York City is to be found half the population of the state -of New Jersey. Of this number, according to the judgment of -engineers, chemists, physicians, and boards of health, not one -half are supplied with water fit to drink. As our risks from -impure water are even more than those from ordinary impure air, -it behooves all to guard against any contamination of potable -water. If there is a neglect of sanitary care, and especially of -a good water supply, it is too late to adopt the policy of concealment, -or to point to a death rate of from twenty-six to -thirty as a justification, when so large a city as London can -point to a death rate of only twenty per thousand, and many -an English town of 30,000 inhabitants, to a death rate of only -sixteen or eighteen. The sea coast of New Jersey, more than -that of any other state, abounds in popular summer resorts. -The State Board of Health has carefully inspected these resorts, -notified the proprietors of existing defects, and reported -them to the public when they were not remedied. Their first -visits were often occasions of protest, and even of denunciation -on the part of proprietors, many of whom, on sober second -thought, were convinced of the truth, and corrected the -evils complained of. The latest inspection says that the sanitary -condition of most of these places has been greatly improved. -In 1883 it is said of ⸺, where are six hotels and -over one hundred cottages, “This locality shows no improvement -in its care of sanitary conditions. No skilled attention -is given to drainage. The water supply is mostly from driven -wells, which are generally surface wells. Privy vaults are of -the crudest description. Slop water is disposed of in cess-pools, -often in close proximity to wells. This sanitary lawlessness -has not been without its deleterious results.” The last report -speaks of the same place as improving, but there are still -some sanitary defects.</p> - -<p>One popular resort shows some marked improvements. -While some of the large hotels have still rows of cess-pools, -they are kept in better condition than formerly. Still it has not -equaled expectation in its efforts to provide a much needed system -of sewerage. The hotels exhibit some of the very best and some -of the very worst methods for the disposal of water-closet refuse. -In one hotel enormous brick vaults had no modes of ventilation, -and nothing but the shortness of the season protects the inmates. -These New Jersey resorts are no worse than those in -other states, and as a rule are salubrious and most desirable retreats, -but the self-satisfied carelessness of some wealthy owners -of hotel property has made light of these defects, and they -have been tardy in their correction. Visitors in such hotels, -before taking rooms, should have an expert make a sanitary -inspection in their behalf.</p> - -<p>These facts from different states clearly show that the sanitary -condition of summer resorts is the question of first importance -to all who frequent them, and that a rural location, -naturally salubrious, has often proved a death-pool when made -the home of a dense crowd in the hottest months of the year. -This frequent outbreak of preventable diseases in large watering -places proves the necessity of applied hygiene in such resorts, -where the management often betrays gross ignorance or -carelessness on this vital point.</p> - -<p>In this respect the Assembly grounds at Chautauqua form a -happy exception. Some details may suggest the changes and -plans needed elsewhere. Last summer, while meeting lecture -appointments there, I made a cursory inspection of the grounds -around each of the four hundred and twenty-eight cottages in -this “city in a forest,” including its numerous boarding houses. -The village is very compact, and the cottages are sometimes -too closely crowded together. But everywhere the sanitary -conditions are admirable. The three essentials—pure air, pure -soil, and pure water—are well assured. Special effort is made -to guard these three “Ps.” No old fashioned privies are <i>now</i> -allowed. The last two nuisances of this sort were removed -while I was on the grounds. Some ten public vaults are located -at convenient points, each built of stone or brick, laid in -cement, and thus made water tight. Each is <i>daily</i> supplied -with disinfectants, and emptied every other night, and then -well cleansed with water. There are sixty-seven private vaults, -made in like manner, water tight, and frequently emptied. The -water-closet pipes emptying into them are said to be all carefully -trapped. The waste is conveyed by night to farms far -away from the grounds.</p> - -<p>Every family is required to provide a barrel for garbage, -kitchen slops and wash water, which is emptied <i>daily</i>. No -soiled water may be thrown on the grounds. The daily inspection -detects any violation of this rule. There are no alleys, -lanes, back yards or dumping grounds where garbage can be -thrown and secreted. There is no filth-saturated soil, and the atmosphere -is not tainted with the gases of decay. The decaying -leaves, so abundant in this forest city, are removed or burned.</p> - -<p>Numerous wells, carefully guarded from surface drainage, -and eight springs furnish pure water. Borings some thirty feet -deep, near the engine house by the lake, have opened three -flowing springs, the water in five-inch pipes rising seven feet -above the lake. This proves to be a mineral water (pronounced -by Dr. Edwards, the lecturer on chemistry, a wholesome -chalybeate tonic), is forced into a large tank on the hill, -and thence distributed in pipes near the surface over the -grounds free to all. There was little to criticise in the sanitary -condition of the grounds, and the few suggestions which I -made were promptly carried out by the efficient superintendent.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_567" id="Page_567">[567]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="WAYSIDE_HOMES">WAYSIDE HOMES.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY HELEN CAMPBELL.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>No form of charitable work undertaken in this busy century -holds more perplexity and uncertainty than that for women, -who, whether for great or small offenses, have come under the -ban of the law, and who pass from the shadow of the prison -to confront a public feeling which is, in the main, so absolutely -antagonistic as to leave small chance for reform, or hope of -making new and better place.</p> - -<p>It is certain that there is much justification for such feeling. -There are few in whom the missionary spirit is strong enough -to enable them to accept undaunted, the possibilities involved -in receiving as a member of the family, a woman whose desire -for reform may be outweighed a thousand times by the -power of her appetites, and whose influence may bring contamination -to all within its reach. Even in less dangerous -cases, where youth and ignorance are the excuses for the violation -of law, there is always the fear that association with -older offenders has given a knowledge of evil that will work -equal disaster, and thus the door is as effectually closed against -the slight as against the confirmed transgressor. It is part of -the popular conviction that work for women is far less productive -of results than work for men, a conviction that has a -certain foundation of truth. Even in the Water Street Mission -of New York, in which the most apparently hopeless class was -reached and held, McAuley was constantly baffled by this fact, -and in time accepted it as inevitable. He did not question, -more than other workers have done, why this was so, or how -far the world was responsible for the state of things he bewailed, -but came at last, by almost unconscious steps, to the -conclusion given in a talk with the writer.</p> - -<p>“You’ve wondered, at times, that we didn’t have more -women here,” he said, a year or two before his death. “Don’t -you know that you can haul in a hundred men to one woman? -What it means, the good Lord only knows, but they don’t stay -put. They cry an’ promise, an’ promise an’ cry, an’ you do -for ’em with all your might, an’ all at once they’re off, an’ may -be you never see ’em again.… When a girl’s once down, it -isn’t once in five hundred times that you can pull her out. -Take that very one you was so sorry for. She’s been to every -meeting ’round here, an’ cried an’ begged to be helped. She’s -been taken first to one ‘Home’ an’ then to another, an’ she’s -run from every one back to her old life. The system’s wrong. -That’s my opinion. You take a ‘Home’ where a lot are in together, -an’ the devil’s let loose. They chew tobacco an’ chew -snuff, an’ get drunk on the sly, an’ the old ones tell the young -ones all their lives, an’ the last end is worse than the first, for -they learn a lot of deviltry to add to their own. There ain’t -but one way, as I can see, to save ’em. Keep ’em apart. Let -Christian families that can, make up their minds to take one -at a time; hedge her round; give her enough to do, an’ get -her interested, an’ pray night an’ day she may be kept. That -will save a good many, for it’s mostly worked where it’s been -tried. But there ain’t anything in our work so discouragin’ as -this very thing. What you going to do? These girls comin’ -out of homes where a dozen, may be, has herded in one room, -what do they know of decency or cleanliness? What can they -know, I’d like to know? No, I tell you; the work’s got to begin -at the beginning. Get hold of the children. Send them -off. Do anything that’ll train them differently. They’re born -in sin and born to sin, and the Lord only knows what’ll come -if good men and women don’t wake up and take hold.”</p> - -<p>Admitting the serious nature of the difficulties involved, it is -quite certain that many of them have been born of an utterly -false estimate of the relative degrees of guilt in men and -women. Neither time nor space allows discussion of this -point beyond the suggestion that in the present White Cross -movement, and the questions that at once arise as the first necessity -in any understanding of its nature or need, may be -found the secret of much that has made against women. -Simple justice, the last acquired and, it would seem, the hardest -won of all virtues, makes chastity as binding an obligation -upon man as upon woman, and gives to both, when repentant, -the same pardon and the same hope for a future. Thus far, -charity has ignored the woman, forcing her to bear not only -the pain and sorrow of unblessed motherhood, but the sentence -of perpetual banishment from the society whose laws -she has defied.</p> - -<p>It is at this stage that workers among the poor most often -find her, hopeless, and in the large proportion of cases driven -back to crime as her only resort. They form a great proportion -of the inmates of any prison for women. Every town and -village has its quota of candidates for reformatory or jail, and -mourns, collectively and individually, over the terrible tendencies -of this class, with small thought that prevention may -be easier than cure, and that if children born to such conditions -come into the world, society is bound to see that -their training shall, as far as possible, neutralize the results -of such inheritance. Society has no time for prevention. -It proposes to pay for prisons rather than for industrial schools; -to labor with full fledged criminals, rather than to crush out -vice while still in embryo, and congratulates itself on the magnificent -liberality of its provision for the criminal, and the remarkable -success of the prison system as a whole.</p> - -<p>Women are supposed to be merely occasional offenders, and -that there are, in every state, hundreds outside of the prison -who are habitual law breakers, and an equally large proportion -within its walls, is a proposition received as incredible. -Yet it was not till Massachusetts found herself forced to deal with -eight hundred per year of such cases, that the first reformatory -was organized, in 1865, and the number has increased -steadily with the increase in population. County prisons, of -which there were twenty-one, were, too often, simply nests for -propagating vice. In a few of the larger ones great order and -system prevailed. In the smaller ones there was next to none, and -male and female prisoners, dirty, ragged and obscene, mingled -together and interchanged lessons in new forms of vice. In all -of them three classes of offenses were to be found, women -convicts being sentenced usually for drunkenness, unchastity, -or larceny; the relative prevalence of the three being indicated -by the order in which they are given. The first class, wherever -found, are most often Irish women, at, or past, the middle -age. They are not criminals, though at times, in some cases, dishonest -or unchaste. Often they are eager to reform, and yield -to the temptation to drink as many men yield, for the momentary -relief from grinding care and anxiety. Many of them become -accustomed to the short sentences usually given by magistrates -for this offense, and there are countless women who have had -thirty, forty, and even fifty short imprisonments. A long term, -or, in aggravated cases, imprisonment for life, affords the only -security, the mere smell of liquor being often enough to awaken -appetite and bring on a wild debauch. The three crimes can in -almost every case be traced back to a neglected childhood.</p> - -<p>“My mother died whan I was a bit of a child, an’ my father -drank and beat me,” is the story of nine tenths of these cases, -and will remain the story. The life of a single great tenement<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_568" id="Page_568">[568]</a></span> -house, if told in full, as it has recently been done, shows how -the seed is sown, and what harvest we may expect, and prison -systems, however admirable, can touch but the smallest proportion -of those who come within their walls. And even here, -in this system, which deserves all the eulogy it receives, women -have had but the most meager share of the benefit intended. -It is only here and there that, spurred on by some great souled -woman, wrought to white heat of indignation at the suffering -and ignominy heaped upon these weak and most miserable -sisters, there has grown up a better system of treatment, or a -refuge in which reform has been made possible. Even to-day, -in cities where reform is supposed to have perfected itself, there -are Houses of Detention, at the mention of which compassionate -judges shake their heads, and use any and every pretext -to avoid condemning, for even a week, a young girl guilty -of some first and slight offense, to their unspeakably infamous -walls. Who enters there leaves hope behind, and life in any -real sense, is over, once for all, for the sad soul that has learned -what awaits it there.</p> - -<p>In a little town of Massachusetts, many phases of this question -have long since been answered. The work is so quietly -carried forward that few save those interested in philanthropic -problems have any knowledge of its nature or scope. In the -belief that its story will awaken, not only interest, but stronger -faith in the possibilities of reform, its outlines are given here. -From its success grew the greater work which makes the title -of the present article, a work which would have seemed -well nigh impossible had not such demonstration first been -made of its entire feasibility.</p> - -<p>Practically, its foundation was laid in Dedham, thirty years -or more ago, where a temporary asylum was afforded to women -just discharged from prison, and much the same methods -were adopted in the Springfield “Home for Friendless -Women.” But as one of the most efficient workers wrote at -the time: “The more thoughtful saw from the first that they -were working only at the top of the tree, and must go to the -root to accomplish real good in large measure. The necessity -of making the term of imprisonment one also of instruction, -was apparent; also the vital need of purifying the corrupted -by personal contact with pure and good women, laboring -among them in a spirit of love and sympathy.”</p> - -<p>It was not until 1870 that, after a preliminary meeting in -Boston, officered by some of her most earnest citizens, a -memorial was presented to the legislature, in which the need -was set forth of better prisons for women, and of a reformatory -discipline for all criminals. This was called “The Memorial -of the Temporary Asylum for Discharged Female Prisoners -in Dedham, and of the Springfield Home for Friendless -Women and Children, and of others concurring with them.” -The names of Whittier, Henry Wilson, Bishop Eastburn, and -many others equally noble, were affixed, and the almost immediate -result was the establishment of the Prison Commission -of the state, and a few years later, the building of the -separate prison for women at Sherborn. Thirty acres of land -were purchased here, and the prison was placed upon a knoll, -from which one of the finest views in the county may be had, -a neighboring pond giving a full supply of pure water, and the -facilities for drainage being excellent. The form chosen for -building was a cross, with two more transverse sections, one -at the front, and one for hospital purposes, at the rear. But -forty-eight strong cells for the more refractory class were built, -the majority occupying small, separate rooms, divided by -brick partitions, and each owning a window. The basement -has two large laundries, one for prison, the other for outside -use, the latter bringing in a comfortable income toward the -support of the prison. Over this laundry is the prison kitchen -and bakery, the work in both being done by the prisoners, under -supervision. Above this, in the third story, is the large -hall used as a chapel, and a library adjoining it, while the second -story contains two large work rooms, one for sewing, and -the other for making chair bottoms. Sewing machines are in -the first one, and here all the clothing for the prison is made, -as well as a good deal for another institution. A school room -is also on this floor, occupied six hours a day, the women going -to it in classes, each class having an hour’s instruction a -day. Here many take their first lessons in reading and writing; -easy arithmetic and geography are also taught.</p> - -<p>The prison has four divisions, for the classification of convicts, -the three higher ones each containing what is known as -a “privilege room,” the prisoners who have obeyed the rules -being allowed to spend an hour each evening under the supervision -of the matrons, before they are locked in for the night. -Four cheerful dining rooms are provided, and unlike the county -jails, where prisoners eat alone from a tin pan, the women -gather, under the supervision of matrons, each with neat plate -and basin, learning order and decorum, and in many cases -having their first experience of clean and palatable food. The -matrons have comfortable rooms, commanding a view of -the corridors, and a private dining room and kitchen in the -basement. A parlor on the second floor is also at their disposal, -thirty matrons and assistants using it in such intervals -of leisure as come.</p> - -<p>The chief officers may be either men or women, at the pleasure -of the Governor, these being superintendent, steward -and treasurer, the remainder being all women, and including -a deputy superintendent, a chaplain, a physician, school mistress, -and clerk. The wishes of the founders were carried out -in making the superintendent a woman, Mrs. Edna C. Atkinson’s -name having become the synonym for patient and most -faithful labor in this untried field. There are others as worthy, -but with her, they shrink from any public recognition, content -to have laid silently the foundation of a work which is copied -in detail wherever the same results are desired.</p> - -<p>The hospital is a model of its kind, three stories in height, -and thirty-two feet wide by seventy-seven long. The dispensary -and wash room, the doctor’s sitting room and some small -wards for special cases are on the first floor. The second one -has a large ward, sunny and airy, with space for twenty beds, -and at one side bath rooms, and a small room where the dead -are laid until burial. The convalescent ward is on the third -floor, and in each and all, is the exquisite neatness which is a -revelation to every occupant. Of the physical misery that -finds alleviation here, one can hardly speak. “Intemperance, -unchastity, abuse from male companions, neglected childbirth, -hereditary taints, poor food and clothing,” have all done their -work, and demand all the skill the physician can bring to -bear. The work is hard and often repulsive, but the sick prisoner -is especially susceptible to influence, and often, when all -means have been tried in vain, yields at last under the pressure -of pain and gratitude for its relief, and goes out from the -ward a new creature spiritually as well as physically.</p> - -<p>From the beginning they are made to feel that here is one -spot where love and sympathy are certain. There is no convict -dress branding them at once as infamous. Each division -has its own; blue check of different patterns being chosen to -distinguish the different grades. The upper ones have neat -white aprons for Sundays. Night dresses and pocket handkerchiefs -are provided to teach neatness, and every woman is required -to have smooth hair and a well-cared-for person. -In the nursery, an essential department of a woman’s prison, -the babies show well fed, happy faces, and are as neatly and -warmly clothed as the mothers. This department has sixty -rooms, each ten by twelve, with a bed and crib for mothers -with infants, while above it is a lying-in ward, with all necessary -appliances. Often there is not the slightest hint of maternal -instinct, and the mother must be watched to prevent the -destruction of the child, but more often it is strong, and desire -for reform is first awakened with the longing that the child -should know a better life. The bright, clean quarters, the -regular employment, the sympathy and encouragement, on<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_569" id="Page_569">[569]</a></span> -which, no matter how skeptical or scoffing in the beginning, -they come to depend, all foster this desire. Indifferent even -to common decency in the beginning, unknown instincts -awaken, and here is one answer to the argument sometimes -made, that criminals have no right to attractive quarters. -Here, again, the same worker already quoted may speak: “In -the first place, the loss of liberty is a terrible privation, especially -when the term of confinement is long. Most persons -will bear any hardship rather than be confined, even in a pleasant -place. The depraved women of our prisons are indifferent, -at first, to the things which please a higher taste. The -dark and filthy slums of Boston are far more charming to -them than the clean and sunny prison. The work is hateful to -their idle habits, and being unpaid, it has no motive to incite -them to performance. The silent, separate rooms, the quiet -work room, try them inexpressibly. There is no danger that -the prison will be too tempting. They long for the intoxicating -drink, the low carousals of their usual life, and when discharged -from an ordinary prison, with no reformatory influence, -eagerly rush into the old haunts, and begin anew the -foul life.… Ferocious, indeed, are they, when long habits -of intoxication, joined to ignorance and strong passions, are -subjected to the restraints of a prison.”</p> - -<p>“No woman can govern a ferocious woman,” was asserted -in the beginning, by a well known Senator; but that point settled -itself years since, women having proved better able to -control women, no matter how brutalized, than any man has -ever been. In one case a woman was sent from a neighboring -prison, who came determined to create disturbance. Insurrection -seemed inevitable, such passion of revolt had she -communicated to many, but wise management quelled it at -once. Three strong men were necessary to convey her from -the yard to the punishment cell, but this was done under the -personal direction of the superintendent, and the men were -allowed no violence or abuse. For days she remained unsubdued; -then quieted, and at the end of ten was conquered and -transformed into a quiet, orderly, obedient worker.</p> - -<p>“She was that patient and kind she did all she could for -me,” was her comment on the superintendent, and her case is -illustrative of dozens of the same nature. Nothing impresses -them more than the unselfish nature of the care bestowed, and -as their skill in manual labor develops, their interest grows -with it, and they begin to take pride in what may be accomplished. -They are ready, when the term of confinement ends, -to lead decent lives, but they must be shielded for a time, else -ruin is inevitable.</p> - -<p>Here, then, comes in the mission of a “Wayside Home.” -The thought of such shelter came many years ago, to the man -who gave all his life to making paths plainer for sinning and -suffering souls, and who in the “Isaac Hopper Home,” as often -called the “Father Hopper Home,” solved the problem in -a degree. Even here, however, admission was conditioned on a -letter or word of endorsement, and there was no spot in all the -great city in which a homeless and friendless woman, without -such word, could find temporary refuge. It remained for -Brooklyn to offer such a possibility, and the quiet home that -in the early spring of 1880 opened its doors, asked but three -questions:</p> - -<p>“Do you need help?”</p> - -<p>“Are you homeless?”</p> - -<p>“If taken in, will you remain a month, keep the necessary -rules of the house, and do your share of its work?”</p> - -<p>These question are “the hinge on which the door swings, -and when once a woman crosses its threshold she stands on -her honor, and is trusted just as far as she will allow.”</p> - -<p>Cramped for room, dependent upon voluntary contributions -for furnishing, provisions, and all the running expenses of such -an undertaking, the first year found them without debt, and -with ninety-nine women sheltered and protected, sixty-two of -whom found places, and, with but few exceptions, proved -faithful and worthy of trust. During the second year two -hundred and twenty-four were helped, cramped quarters forcing -the managers to refuse many applications. Half of the -income for that year was earned by the inmates, in laundry, -sewing room, and days’ work outside. A larger house was -taken, but the same principle of free admission continued. -Many who left the Home voluntarily, and some even who had -been expelled, returned, penitent and sorrowful, and were received -again, and given another chance, the only bar to return -being in the discovery that the influence of a woman in -some cases did more harm than could be counteracted in the -Home, in which case there is written across her name, “Not -to be admitted again.”</p> - -<p>A matron and two assistant matrons are employed, the matron -having general charge of the house, keys, and work; the -first assistant, of sewing room and laundry; and the second of -the kitchen and all household supplies. But thirty women -can be accommodated at any one time, and it is hoped that a -building especially for the purpose may soon give the added -facilities so imperatively demanded. The work holds little -poetry, and the expression of some of its subjects is so debased -and apparently hopeless, that one gentleman, accustomed -to give freely, remarked: “I see nothing better to do -than to tie a rope round their necks and pitch them into the river.”</p> - -<p>The poor souls were themselves much of his mind, but a -month or two gave a very different aspect to affairs, work and -the certainty of sympathy bringing new life. Undisciplined -and weak, in the power of appetite both inherited and acquired, -they have fought battles whose terror the untempted -can never know; fought and won, the roll now holding hundreds -of names. Working against perpetual obstacle and disadvantage, -the story of the five years is one of triumph for -managers as well as managed. “We began,” said one of the -workers, “holding in one hand the key to an empty house, for -which the rent was paid for one month, and in the other hand -all our worldly possessions—five dollars—and since that time -we have bought our present home, and furnished it comfortably -for our work. It accommodates thirty-five women, and -three matrons, and we have paid on it $5,000, carrying a mortgage -of $9,000. None of these things are the ultimate of our -work. They are but means to an end, and that end the saving -of the lives and souls of these women.”</p> - -<p>Effort of as extended a nature is possible only for a body of -earnest workers, but this mere hint of its nature and results -may perhaps convince some who have doubted its possibility, -and serve as the clue to companion methods in country towns. -Faith in possibilities, both human and divine, has been the condition -of success for what is already accomplished, and the -village may test these no less than the city. Reports filled -with every practical detail may be had by addressing a note to -“The Wayside Home, 352 Bridge Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.,” -and the writer stands ready, at any time, to answer questions -as to methods, assuring all doubters that, for all patient workers, -success is certain.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p>The finest pleasures of reading come unbidden. In the -twilight alcove of a library, with a time-mellowed chair yielding -luxuriously to your pressure, a June wind floating in at the -windows, and in your hand some rambling old author, good -humored and quaint, one would think the Spirit could scarce -fail to be conjured. Yet often, after spending a morning hour -restlessly there … I have strolled off with a book in my -pocket to the woods; and, as I live, the mood has descended -upon me under some chance tree, with a crooked root under -my head, and I have lain there reading and sleeping by turns -till the letters were blurred in the dimness of twilight.—<i>From -Prose Writings of N. P. Willis.</i></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_570" id="Page_570">[570]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="SUNDAY_READINGS">SUNDAY READINGS.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">SELECTED BY CHANCELLOR J. H. VINCENT, D.D.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3 id="JULY5">[<i>Sunday, July 5.</i>]</h3> - -<p><span class="smcap">The Influence of Jesus.</span>—(I note again, as a characteristic -of the morality of sonship, the way in which it secures humility -by aspiration, and not by depression.) How to secure humility -is the hard problem of all systems of duty. He who does work, -just in proportion to the faithfulness with which he does it, is -always in danger of self-conceit. Very often men seem to have -given up the problem in despair, and they lavish unstinted -praise upon the vigorous, effective worker, without any qualifying -blame of the arrogance with which he flaunts the duty -that he does in the world’s face. “The only way to make him -humble,” they would seem to say, “would be to make him idle. -Let him stop doing duty and then, indeed, he might stop -boasting. His arrogance is only the necessary price that the -world and he pay for his faithfulness.” To such a problem -the Christian morality brings its vast conception of the universe. -Above each man it sets the infinite life. The identity -of nature between that life and his, while it enables him to -emulate that life, compels him, also, to compare himself with -it. The more zealously he aspires to imitate it, the more -clearly he must encounter the comparison. The higher he -climbs the mountain, the more he learns how the high mountain -is past his climbing. It is the oneness of the soul’s life -with God’s life that at once makes us try to be like him, and -brings forth our unlikeness to him. It is the source at once of -aspiration and humility. The more aspiration, the more humility. -Humility comes by aspiration. If, in all Christian -history, it has been the souls which most looked up that were -the humblest souls; if to-day the rescue of a soul from foolish -pride must be not by a depreciation of present attainment, but -by opening more and more the vastness of the future possibility; -if the Christian man keeps his soul full of the sense of -littleness, even in all his hardest work for Christ, not by denying -his own stature, but by standing up at his whole height, -and then looking up in love and awe and seeing God tower -into infinitude above him—certainly all this stamps the morality -which is wrought out within the idea of Jesus with this -singular excellence, that it has solved the problem of faithfulness -and pride, and made possible humility by aspiration.</p> - -<p>And yet, once more, the morality of Jesus involves the only -true secret of courage and of the freedom that comes of courage. -More and more we come to see that courage is a positive -thing. It is not simply the absence of fear. To be brave is -not merely not to be afraid. Courage is that compactness and -clear coherence of all a man’s faculties and powers which -makes his manhood a single operative unit in the world. -That is the reason why narrowness of thought and life often -brings a kind of courage, and why, as men’s range of thought -enlarges and their relations with their fellowmen increase, -there often comes a strange timidity. The bigot is often very -brave. He is held fast unto a unit, and possesses himself -completely in his own selfishness. For such a bravery as that -the man and the world pay very dear. But when the grasp -that holds a man and his powers is not his self-consciousness, -but his obedience to his Father, when loyalty to him surrounds -and aggregates the man’s capacities, so that, held in his hand, -the man feels his distinctiveness, his distinctive duty, his distinctive -privilege, then you have reached the truth of which -the bigot’s courage was the imitation. Then you have secured -courage, not by the limitation, but by the enlargement of the -life. Then the dependence upon God makes the independence -of man in which are liberty and courage. The man’s -own personality is found only in the household of his Father, -and only in the finding of his personality does he come to absolute -freedom and perfect fearlessness.—<i>Phillips Brooks.</i></p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3 id="JULY12">[<i>Sunday, July 12.</i>]</h3> - -<p><span class="smcap">True Christianity.</span>—Lord Jesus Christ, thou eternal and -only Prince of Peace! Thou most blessed and truest rest of -faithful souls! Thou hast said, Come unto me all ye that -labor and are heavy laden, and ye shall find rest to your souls. -In the world ye shall have tribulation, but in me ye shall have -peace.</p> - -<p>Alas! how often have I sought for rest in this world, but have -not found it! For my soul, being immortal, can not rest or be -satisfied with anything but thee alone; O immortal God, thou -and thou alone art the rest of our souls. The world and all -that is in it is hastening to decay; they all wax old as doth a -garment, and as a vesture shalt thou change them, and they -shall be changed; but thou art the same, and thy years shall -not fail. How then shall my soul find rest in such fleeting and -changeable things?… O God, my soul can not be satisfied -but in thee, the supreme good. My soul hungereth and thirsteth -after thee, and can not rest till it possess thee.…</p> - -<p>O thou rock of my salvation! in which my soul trusteth and -is at rest.…</p> - -<p>O Lord Jesus, how ardent is thy charity! how pure, how free -from deceit! how perfect! how spotless! how great! how exalted! -how profound! In a word, how sincere and hearty is -thy love! Suffer, I beseech thee, my soul to rest in this thy -love.… Here let my poor soul rest free from fear of danger -or disquiet. In thee let all my senses rest, that I may hear -thee sweetly speaking, O thou highest love! Let my eyes behold -thee, O thou celestial beauty! Let my ears hear thee, -thou most harmonious music! Let my mouth taste, thou incomparable -sweetness! Let the refreshing odors of life breathe -upon me from thee, thou most noble flower of paradise!… -Let my heart rejoice in thee, my true joy! Let my will desire -thee alone, thou only joy of my heart! Let my understanding -know thee alone, O eternal wisdom! Lastly, let all -my desires, all my affections rest in thee alone, O blessed -Jesus, who art my love, my peace, and my joy!</p> - -<p>Take out of my heart everything that is not thyself. Thou -art my riches in poverty; thou art my honor in contempt; my -praise and glory against reproaches; my strength in infirmity; -and in a word, my life in death. And how, then, should I not -rest in thee, who art my all in all? My righteousness against -sin; my wisdom against folly; redemption from condemnation; -sanctification from my uncleanness.…</p> - -<p>Let me, I beseech thee, surrender my whole heart to thee, -since thou hast given me all thine. Let me go out of myself, -that I may enter into thee. Let me cleanse my heart and -empty it of the world, that thou mayest fill it with thy celestial -gifts, O Jesus, the rest of my heart, the Sabbath of my soul! -Lead me into the rest of a blessed eternity, where there are -pleasures at thy right hand for evermore. Amen.—<i>Arndt, -“A prayer for obtaining true rest and tranquility of soul.”</i></p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3 id="JULY19">[<i>Sunday, July 19.</i>]</h3> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">For Prayer is a</div> -<div class="verse i2">Conversing with God,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Key of Heaven,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Flower of Paradise,</div> -<div class="verse i2">A Free Access to God,</div> -<div class="verse i2">A Familiarity with God,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Searcher of His Secrets,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Opener of His Mysteries,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Purchaser of His Gifts,</div> -<div class="verse i2">A Spiritual Banquet,</div> -<div class="verse i2">A Heavenly Enjoyment,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Honey-comb of the Spirit,</div> -<div class="verse i2">Honey Flowing from the Lips,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Nurse of Virtues,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Conqueror of Vices,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Medicine of the Soul,</div> -<div class="verse i2">A Remedy against Infirmities,</div> -<div class="verse i2">An Antidote against Sin,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Pillar of the World,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Salve of Mankind,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Seed of Blessing,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Garden of Happiness,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Tree of Pleasure,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Increase of Faith,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Support of Hope,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Mother of Charity,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Path of Righteousness,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Preserver of Perseverance,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Mirror of Prudence,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Mistress of Temperance,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Strength of Chastity,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Beauty of Holiness,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Fire of Devotion,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Light of Knowledge,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Repository of Wisdom,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Strength of the Soul,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Remedy against Faint-heartedness,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Foundation of Peace,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Joy of the Heart,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Jubilee of the Mind,</div> -<div class="verse i2">A Faithful Companion in this Earthly Pilgrimage,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Shield of a Christian Soldier,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Rule of Humility,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Forerunner of Honor,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Nurse of Patience,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Guardian of Obedience,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Fountain of Quietness,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Imitator of Angels,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Conquest of Devils,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Comfort of the Sorrowful,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Triumph of the Just,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Joy of the Saints,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Helper of the Oppressed,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Ease of the Afflicted,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Rest of the Weary,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Ornament of the Conscience,</div><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_571" id="Page_571">[571]</a></span> -<div class="verse i2">The Advancement of Graces,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Odor of an Acceptable Sacrifice,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Encourager of Mutual Good-will,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Refreshment of this Miserable Life,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Sweetening of Death,</div> -<div class="verse i2">The Foretaste of the Heavenly Life.—<i>Arndt.</i></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3 id="JULY26">[<i>Sunday, July 26.</i>]</h3> - -<p><span class="smcap">Sermon on Luke</span> iv, 1-13.—The <i>weapons</i> of Jesus?—say we -rather <i>the weapon</i>—for he has but one, it is the <i>Word of God</i>. -Three times tempted, three times he repels the temptation by -a simple quotation from the Scriptures, without explanation -or comment. “<i>It is written</i>”—this one expression tells upon -the tempter like a tremendous discharge upon an assaulting battalion. -“It is written”—the devil withdraws for the first time. -“It is written”—the devil withdraws for the second time. “It is -written”—the devil gives up the contest. God’s word is the -weapon which Satan most dreads—a weapon before which he -has never been able to do aught but succumb. Most justly -does Paul call it the “Sword of the Spirit;”<a name="FNanchor_1" id="FNanchor_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> and John describes -it, in the Revelation, as “a sharp, two-edged sword, -proceeding out of the mouth of the Son of man.” With that -“Sword of the Spirit” in our hands, our cause becomes that of -the Holy Spirit himself, and we shall be as superior in strength -to our adversary, as is the Spirit of God to the spirit of darkness. -Without it, on the contrary, left to ourselves, we shall -be as much below him as is man’s nature below that of angels. -Adam fell, only because he allowed this sword to drop. Jesus -triumphs, because no one can wrest it from his hand. But -why is it that the Son of God, instead of meeting the enemy -with some new sword brought from the heavens whence he -came, took up only our own weapon, from that very earth -where Adam had, with such cowardice, left it? This is for our -example. From what that weapon accomplished in his hand, -we must learn what it can do in ours. Let us, then, take it up -in our turn; or, rather, let us receive it from him, resharpened -as it were, by his victory, and we shall have nothing to fear. -To all the adversary’s attacks let us oppose a simple “<i>It is -written</i>,” and we shall render vain his every endeavor.… -If after having heard him on the theater of temptation, scoffing -at the word of God, we could (allow me the expression) follow -him behind the scenes, and hear him confess to his accomplices -that he is lost if he can not succeed in wresting from our -hands this irresistible weapon! If we did but know all this, -and if, like the valiant Eleazar, “we could keep hold of our -sword till our hand clove unto it”—oh, then we should be invincible, -yea, <i>invincible</i>!—<i>Monod.</i></p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_1" id="Footnote_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1"><span class="label">[A]</span></a> Revelation i:16; ii:16; xix:15-21; Hebrews iv:12, “The word of God is quick -and powerful, and sharper than any two-edged sword, piercing even to the dividing -asunder of soul and spirit, and of the joint and marrow, and is a discerner of the -thoughts and intents of the heart.”</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="WE_SALUTE_THEE_AND_LIVE">“WE SALUTE THEE, AND LIVE.”</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY MARY MATHEWS-SMITH.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse i1">Soldiers brave, in days of old,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Facing dangers manifold,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Looked unto their king to cry—</div> -<div class="verse">“Thee we do salute, and die.”</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse i1">Service for an earthly king</div> -<div class="verse i1">Other ending can not bring;</div> -<div class="verse i1">Whatso’er thy record be,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Death is all it gives to thee.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse i1">Christian brave, where’er thy way,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Thine it is with joy to say—</div> -<div class="verse">“King, to whom our hearts we give,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Thee we do salute, and live.”</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse i1">Service for the heavenly King,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Love and life eternal bring;</div> -<div class="verse i1">He alone true life can give,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Him we may salute, and live.</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_572" id="Page_572">[572]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="A_GROUP_OF_MUMMIES">A GROUP OF MUMMIES.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY OTIS T. MASON.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>Whenever the word mummy is mentioned almost everybody -thinks of Egypt and the ancient embalmers, with their tedious -processes and costly ceremonials. The term does include the -Egyptian prepared bodies, but it does not exclude some found -elsewhere. Indeed, in Washington, there will be seen in close -proximity, in the Smithsonian building, an exceedingly dry -company, made up of individuals from Alaska, Arizona, Mexico, -Kentucky, Peru, and Egypt.</p> - -<p>Whoever has marked the tender solicitude with which the -things around us seem to beckon us in this way or in that will -understand that even the disposal of the dead has been influenced -by such suggestions. Passing through a dense forest -one seems to hear the branches and undergrowth say: “Come -this way, pass along here, we are opening to make way for -you.” Well, it is so in every human art; natural objects supply -the materials, the tools, and suggest the simplest forms. -There can be no potters where there is no clay, no chipped arrow -heads where there is no stone to flake, no wood carving -in the arctic regions where grows no timber. Yet the good -people in all these places have arts, they make excellent baskets -in which they carry water and boil their meat, polished -spearheads and axes of volcanic stone, and most delicate -carvings in ivory or antler.</p> - -<p>As to the disposal of the dead in different regions and ages, -all we have space to say is that the voices of nature around -each people have told them how to perform this sad rite. In -the frozen regions, where the ground is never thawed, no -graves are dug. By the seaside the primitive fisherman -is launched upon the wide expanse in his own canoe. In -rocky regions cairns and cists conceal the wasting form. On -the soft prairie mounds cover the dead out of sight. In those -arid regions where the rainfall does not affect the atmosphere -to any extent the process of desiccation takes place more rapidly -than chemical changes. The water, which forms the -greater part of the human body, soon removes and leaves but -a few pounds of bones, dried flesh and skin. This may be -called natural mummification, the process of which is aided -either by extreme cold, extreme aridity, or preservative elements -in the soil.</p> - -<p>In the National Museum there is the body of a little boy, lying -on his back, his feet drawn up, and all sorts of curious -relics hanging in the case with him. The body was discovered -in one of the cliff ruins of the Cañon de Chelly, Arizona. -The particular ruin referred to is on a benched recess, seventy-five -feet above the cañon, and extends backward about thirty -feet. The ancient Pueblo people, driven by some invading -force, constructed their cliff houses along only a part of this -bench. About fifty feet from the walls Mr. Thomas Kearn -found a little oven-like cist composed of angular bowlders laid -in clay. The rooflet consisted of sticks supporting stones and -clay. At the bottom lay the little child, and the remains of -other burials, together with grave deposits. Here, in this last -resting place, the waters escaped so quickly and so quietly from -the body that even the form of life was not disturbed nor any -chemical changes awakened. So perfectly dried is this little fellow -that even the coatings of the eye remain. This is natural embalmment -by desiccation simply. In the Peabody Museum, -at Cambridge, are dried bodies from Mexico, preserved in the -same manner. Around them were their clothing and utensils, -silent and patient watchers, waiting all these centuries to give -in evidence as to how those dead people dressed, ate, drank, -worked, and warred.</p> - -<p>In the palmy days of our grandparents there was a desiccated -body discovered in Mammoth Cave, Kentucky. This, -also, has had the good fortune, after many peregrinations, to -find its way into the Smithsonian. Now, Mammoth Cave is a -damp place, but the earth accumulated on the floor is in places -full of nitrous and other preservative salts. Indeed, the Kentucky -cave subject may be called a natural pickle.</p> - -<p>To Mr. William H. Dall we are indebted for bringing to -light mummies from the frozen regions. At the time of their -discovery by the Russians, the Aleuts of Unalashka had a -process of mummification peculiar to themselves. Mr. Dall -informs us that they eviscerated the bodies of those held in -honor, removed the fatty matter, placed them for some time in -running water, and then lashed them into as compact a bundle -as possible. A line was placed around the neck and under -the knees, to draw them up to the chin. If any part stuck -out, the bones were broken so as to facilitate the consolidation. -After this the body was thoroughly dried and packed in -a wooden crate, wrapped round and round with seal, sea-otter, -and other precious furs, enough to make a fashionable belle’s -head swim. Over these were wrapped coarser skins, waterproof -cloth of intestines, and fine grass mats. This crate was slung to -upright poles, or hung, like a wall-pocket, to a peg driven into -a crevice in some cave. In 1874 Captain E. Hennig, of the -Alaska Commercial Company’s service, found in a cave on the -island of Kagamil, near Unalashka, a number of these framed -mummies, all but two of which the company presented to the -Smithsonian Institution.</p> - -<p>The Egypt of America for mummies is Peru. Scarcely a -museum in the world is without its dried dogs, guinea pigs, -parrots, and human beings wrapped in costly cloths, and the -last mentioned wearing the greatest profusion of gold and silver -jewelry. Along with these bodies are found corn, beans, -peanuts; pottery, gourds, and silver vases; pillows, haversacks -and masks; knives, war clubs and spearheads; needles, -distaffs, spindles, work-baskets and musical cradles. Thousands -and thousands of the most interesting things turn up, almost -as expressive of ancient Peruvian life as was the library -of Sennacherib, exhumed by Layard at Kouyunjik, of Assyrian -life.</p> - -<p>Beyond the care of the Peruvians and Bolivians in the clothing -and encysting of the dead, it is almost certain that they left -them to the atmosphere to manipulate. The work was done -most effectually. Nothing can be dryer than a Peruvian -mummy. It is perfectly useless to dust the cases containing -them, and those who handle them are in a steady sneeze, as -though invisible spirits, filled with indignation, held impalpable -snuff-boxes to the nose. It is still more wonderful that insects -have not done their destructive work upon these bodies. The -wrappings doubtless were so securely made as to prevent their -inroads, and must have contained some substance to keep -them away.</p> - -<p>In the National Museum, finally, are two Egyptian mummies. -It is hard to tell how they got into such outlandish boxes and -mountings. There they stand, nailed and screwed into narrow, -white boxes, side by side, with mouths open, as if Pompeian -convulsions had seized and embalmed them by instantaneous -mummification just as the curtain was falling on a -grand duet. Now, these two bodies were really embalmed -(embalsamed); all the other mummies were simply dried up.</p> - -<p>The Egyptians, Peruvians, and perhaps the Alaskans preserved -the bodies as integral parts of the individual, that would -be needed again. The others simply dried up, their depositors -cherishing no belief in the resurrection of the body.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_573" id="Page_573">[573]</a></span></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="A_TRIP_TO_MT_SHASTA">A TRIP TO MT. SHASTA.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center smaller">Report of a lecture delivered in the National Museum of Washington, D. C., by -Prof. J. S. Diller, of the U. S. Geological Survey.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>The Great Basin Country is bounded to the westward by the -Cascade Range in Oregon and the Sierra Nevada Mountains -in eastern California. The axes of these two mountain ranges -make an angle of over 140° with each other, and at their point -of intersection in northern California rises Mt. Shasta, one of -the most conspicuous and imposing topographical features of -the Pacific coast, above which it rises 14,440 feet. Early in -the days of western exploration its summit was declared to be -inaccessible, but whether this assertion was made to inspire -greater respect for the abode of the Indian gods, or to excuse -a disinclination to physical exertion, must ever remain a matter -of conjecture. Certain it is that the ascent, frequently made -within the last few years by ladies is not a remarkable feat of -mountaineering. Under the direction of Captain Dutton of the -Geological Survey, a detailed exploration of the mountain has -been accomplished.</p> - -<p>The belt of territory bordering upon the Pacific embraces -two parallel mountain chains, the Sierra Nevada and Cascade -Range on the east, and the illy-defined Coast Range on the -west. Between these lies the valley region of the Willamette -and Sacramento rivers, whose headwaters are among that -complex group of mountains through which the Klamath River, -in a deep cañon, finds its way to the sea.</p> - -<p>Of all the volcanic regions of the world, the one to which Mt. -Shasta belongs is the largest. It extends from Lassen’s Peak, -in California, north through Oregon to Mt. Rainier in Washington -Territory, and eastward far into Idaho, covering an -area larger than that of France and Great Britain combined. -Within this wide expanse are extensive plains, whose broad -surfaces indicate that the basaltic lava beneath at the time of -its eruption possessed such a high degree of fluidity that it -spread out far and wide like the waters of a lake. Upon the -western border the more viscous lavas built up the Cascade -Range, whose mammoth arch is surmounted by numerous -mighty volcanoes, among which Mt. Shasta is one of the most -prominent.</p> - -<p>Seen from all sides Mt. Shasta presents a remarkably regular -outline, and its beautiful conoidal form has excited the admiration -of many observers. Its slopes are exceptional for -the high angle and graceful curves of their inclination. The -upper 3,000 feet of the mountain, where cliffs are most abundant, -dips away toward all points of the compass at an average -angle of 37°. Further down the mountain the slope gradually -decreases in inclination to 20°, then to 15°, 10°, and -finally the long, gentle slope about the base of the mountain -deviates but 5° from a horizontal plane. In all directions from -the summit of Mt. Shasta its flanks increase in length as they -decrease in angle of inclination, presenting a curved mountain -side concave upwards, and has the greatest curvature -near the top. Mr. Gilbert, in his excellent monograph of the -Henry Mountains, shows that such a curve is the natural result -of erosion. In the case of some volcanic mountains, -however, an important coöperative cause may be found in the -fact that at each successive eruption the lava decreased in -quantity and became more viscous. The grandest approach -to Mt. Shasta is from the north, in the broad valley of the same -name, where it is presented to full view, and the deepest impression -of its colossal dimensions is experienced. It stands -at the head of Shasta valley, above which it rises 11,000 feet, -with a volume of over 224 cubic miles, and presents, in strange -contrast with the sterility of the valley, the luxuriant vegetation -of the forest belt. The timbered slopes lie between the -altitudes 4,000 and 7,000 feet above the sea, and belong to the -most magnificent forest regions of the world. Above the forest -belt the mountain rises more than a mile into the heights of -eternal snow, and its brilliant white slopes present an imposing -contrast to the deep green of the pines beneath. Viewed -from the southeast, Mt. Shasta appears to be surmounted by a -single peak, but seen from the north, the upper portion is -found to be double. The smaller of the two cones, broad -topped and crater shaped, has been designated Shastina, to -distinguish it from the other acute cone, which rises 2,000 feet -higher and forms the summit of Shasta proper.</p> - -<p>The influence of temperature upon precipitation, and the -limits which it throws about arboreal vegetation, are here most -forcibly illustrated. In Shasta valley, at an elevation of about -3,000 feet above the sea, where the average temperature is -high as compared with that upon the mountain itself, the precipitation -is always in the form of rain, but not sufficient in -quantity, especially on account of its unequal distribution -throughout the year, to support more than a scanty growth of -stunted trees. In the autumn storm clouds gather about the -summit, and showers become frequent, spreading over the land -in copious rains. Before the spring eight ninths of all the annual -rain has fallen and the country is brilliant with living -green. As summer advances the refreshing showers disappear -and the cloudless sky affords no protection from the -burning sun; the bright green fades away and the earth gradually -assumes that uninviting seared aspect which pervades -all nature in the season of drought. Upon the lower slopes of -the mountain, by its cooling influence upon the atmosphere, -the rainfall is greatly increased, and the vegetation is luxuriant. -The vegetation is almost wholly coniferous. Among -nearly a score of species the sugar-pine is monarch, frequently -attaining a diameter of twelve and a height of over two hundred -feet. Farther up the mountain these gradually give way to the -firs, whose tall, graceful forms are in perfect keeping with the -majestic mountain behind them. Their black and yellow -spotted trunks and branches, draped in long pendant moss, -present a weird, almost dismal aspect, making a fit promenade -for the mythical deities supposed by the aborigines to inhabit -the mountains. To assume that in the timber belt the slopes -of the mountain are everywhere covered with majestic trees, -would certainly be wide of the truth, for within the forests are -large treeless tracts, sometimes hundreds of acres in extent. -From a distance these green, velvety acres appear to be very -inviting pastures, and present the most desirable path of ascent. -A closer examination, however, discovers to the observer -that instead of grass these green fields are clothed in such a -dense shrubbery of manzanita, ceanothus, and other bushy -plants, as to be almost impassable. One attempt to cross a -patch of chaparral, or “Devil’s acre,” as it is sometimes appropriately -called in western vernacular, will convince the -traveler that his best path lies in the forest.</p> - -<p>As the timber gradually dwindles away from the foot of the -mountain to almost nothing in Shasta valley, so also it diminishes -in stature, from an altitude of 7,000 feet upwards to the -snow region, where the precipitation is generally, if not always, -in a solid form of snow in winter and sleet in summer.</p> - -<p>Of the tree-like vegetation, one of the pines reaches farthest -up the slopes. Its stem grows shorter and the top flattens -until, at an elevation of about 9,000 feet, the branches are -spread upon the ground, so that not unfrequently the pedestrian -finds his best path upon the tree-tops. Beyond these, on -the snowless slopes, are found only scattered blades of grass, -and the welcome little hulsea, the edelweiss of our Alpine regions, -with its bright flowers to alleviate the arctic desolation<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_574" id="Page_574">[574]</a></span> -of the place. The red and yellow lichens cling to the rocks -and the tiny prolococcus flourishes in the snow, so that one is -frequently surprised, upon looking back, to see his bloody footsteps.</p> - -<p>In the Alps, between the forests and the snow, are often -found extensive pastures where the herds which furnish milk -for the celebrated Swiss cheese are grazed during the milder -seasons of the year. In northern California similar pastures -do not occur about the snow-capped summits, probably on -account of the unequal distribution of the annual rainfall.</p> - -<p>To those who are fond of novelty, the greatest interest of the -upper portion of Mt. Shasta attaches to its glaciers. They are -five in number, and all are found side by side upon its northern -half, forming an almost continuous covering above 10,000 -feet for that portion of the mountain point. Upon the northern -and western slope of the mountain is the Whitney glacier, with -its prominent terminal moraines. Next to the eastward is the -Bulam glacier, with the large pile of debris at the lower end. -Then comes the broad Hottums glacier and the Wintum. The -Konwakitong, which is the smallest of the group, lies upon the -southeast side of the mountain. Whitney glacier is more like -those of the Alps than any other one of the group. Its snow-field -lies upon the northwestern slope of the mountains, from -whence the icy mass moves down a shallow depression between -Shasta and Shastina. Mr. Ricksecker, who has made a careful -topographical survey of the mountain, has measured the -dimensions of all its glaciers. The limits of the Whitney glacier -are well defined; its width varies from 1,000 to 2,000 feet, -with a length of about two and one-fifth miles, reaching from -the summit of the mountain down to an altitude of 9,500 feet -above the sea. It is but little more than a decade since the -first glaciers were discovered within the United States, and we -should not be disappointed to learn that the largest of them, -about the culminating point of the Cascade Range, would appear -Liliputian beside the great glacier of the Bernese Oberland, -and yet the former are as truly glaciers as the latter. In -the upper portion of its course, passing over prominent irregularities -in its bed, the Whitney glacier becomes deeply fractured, -producing the extremely jagged surface, corresponding -to the surfaces of the Alpine glaciers. Lower down the crevasses -develop, and these, with the great fissure which separates -it from the steep slopes of Shastina, attest the motion of the -icy mass. They frequently open and become yawning chasms, -reaching 100 feet into the clear, green ice beneath. Near its -middle, upon the eastern margin, the Whitney glacier receives -large contributions of sand, gravel and bowlders, from the vertical -cliffs around which it turns to move in a more northerly -direction. In this way a prominent lateral moraine is developed. -From the very steep slopes of Shastina, upon the western -side, the glacier receives additions in the form of avalanches. -Here the snow clings to its rocky bed until the strain -resulting from accumulation is great enough to break it from -its moorings and precipitate it upon the glacier below. The -most striking feature of the Whitney glacier, and that which is -of greatest interest from a geological point of view, is its terminal -moraine, which appears to be fully a mile in length. Its -apparent length is much greater than the real, from the fact -that the glacial ice extends far down beneath the covering of -detritus. It is so huge a pile of light colored debris, just above -the timber line, that it is plainly visible from afar off.</p> - -<p>In comparing the morainal material about Mt. Shasta with -that of Alpine glaciers, a feature that is particularly noticeable -is the smallness of the bowlders. Upon Alpine glaciers they -frequently have a diameter greater than ten feet, but about -the Whitney and other glaciers of Mt. Shasta they are rarely -as much as three feet in diameter. This is readily explained -by the fact that the glaciers of Mt. Shasta do not move in deep -valleys bounded by long, deep slopes, with many high cliffs -which afford an opportunity for the formation of large bowlders. -Although the Whitney glacier has its boundaries more -clearly defined than any of the other glaciers about Mt. Shasta -by the depression in which it moves, the valley is very shallow, -and one looks in vain along its slopes for traces of polished -rocks like those so magnificently displayed on the way -from Meiningen to Grimsel, in the valley of the Aar. Below -the terminal moraine the milky water of Whitney creek wends -its way down the northern slope, plunges over a fall hundreds -of feet high, into a deep cañon, and near the base of the -mountain is swallowed up by the thirsty air and earth. The -presence of marginal crevasses, lateral and terminal moraines, -and the characteristic milky stream which issues from the -lower end, are proofs that the Whitney glacier still moves, but -the rate of motion has not yet been determined. The row of -stakes planted last July were covered with snow before the -party could reach them again in the latter part of October.</p> - -<p>Upon the northwestern slope of the mountain, besides the -Whitney glacier, there is the Bulam, differing chiefly in that it is -contained in a broader, less definite valley, and forming an -intermediate step toward the Hottum glacier, which is one of -the most important and remarkable of the group. Unlike ordinary -glaciers, it has no valley in which it is confined, but -lies upon the convex surface of the mountain. Its upper surface, -instead of being concave anywhere, is convex throughout -from side to side, and its width (123 miles) is almost as great -as its length (162 miles). At several places the surface of the -glacier is made very rough by the inequalities of its bed. This -is especially true of its southern portion, where prominent cliffs -form the only medial moraine discovered upon Mt. Shasta. -Throughout the greater part of its expanse the glacier is deeply -crevassed, exposing the green ice occasionally to the depth of -a hundred feet. The thickness of this glacier has been greatly -overestimated. In reality, instead of being 1,800 to 2,500 feet -thick, it does not appear where greatest to be more than a few -hundred, for at a number of places it is so thin that its bed is -exposed. Its terminal moraine is a huge pile, nearly half a -mile in width, measured in the direction of glacial motion.</p> - -<p>Next south of the Hottum glacier is the Wintum, which attains -a length of over two miles, and ends with an abrupt front -of ice in a cañon. Upon the southeastern slope of Mt. Shasta, -at the head of a large cañon, is the Konwakitong glacier. Notwithstanding -its diminutive size, its crevasses and the muddy -stream it initiates indicate clearly that the ice mass continues -to move. The amount of moraine material upon its borders -is small, and yet, of all the glaciers about Mt. Shasta, it is the -only one which has left a prominent record of important -changes. The country adjacent to the west side of the Konwakitong -cañon has been distinctly glaciated so as to leave no -doubt that the Konwakitong glacier was once very much larger -than it is at the present time. The rocks on which it moved -have been deeply striated, and so abraded as to produce the -smooth, rounded surfaces so common in glaciated regions. -At the time of its greatest extension the glacier was 5.8 miles -in length and occupied an area of at least seven square miles, -being over twenty times its present size. Its limit is marked at -several places by a prominent terminal moraine. The thickness -of the glacier where greatest was not more than 200 feet, -for several hills within the glaciated area were not covered. -The striated surfaces and moraines do not extend up the -slopes of those hills more than 200 feet above their bases. The -thinness of the glacier is completely in harmony with the limited -extent of its erosion, although the rocks are distinctly -planed off, so that the low knobs and edges have regularly -curved outlines. It is evident that a great thickness of rock has -been removed by the ice, and that the period of ice erosion -has been comparatively brief. During the lapse of time, however, -there have been important climatic oscillations, embracing -epochs of glacial advance and recession. None of the glaciers -about Mt. Shasta, excepting the Wintum, terminate in -cañons, but all of them give rise to muddy streams which flow -in cañons to the mountain’s base. The cañons are purely the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_575" id="Page_575">[575]</a></span> -product of aqueous erosion, and contain numerous waterfalls, -whence the streams in descending leap over the ends of old -lava flows 50 to 300 feet in height.</p> - -<p>In strong contrast with the arctic condition of Mt. Shasta to-day, -are the circumstances attending its upbuilding, when it -was an active volcano belching forth streams of fiery lava that -flowed down the slopes now occupied by ice. It is the battlefield -of the elements within the earth against those above it. -In its early days the forces beneath were victorious, and built -up the mountains in the face of wind and weather, but gradually -the volcanic energy died away and the low temperature -called into play those destructive agents which are now reversing -the process and gradually reducing the mountain -toward a general level. A microscopical examination -of the rocks of Mt. Shasta reveals the fact that it is composed -chiefly, if not wholly, of three kinds of lava. Several -small areas of metamorphic rocks occur within its borders, but -there is no evidence to show that they form any considerable -portion of the mountain.</p> - -<p>The range in mineralogical composition of the lavas is not -extensive. There are only four minerals which deserved to -be ranked as essential and characteristic constituents: they are -plagioclase, feldspar, pyroxene, generally in the form of -hypersthene hornblende, and olivine. The kind of lava -which has by far the widest distribution upon the slopes of Mt. -Shasta is composed essentially of plagioclase, feldspar and -hypersthene, with some angite, and belongs to the variety of -volcanic rocks which, on account of composition, and the -place where first discovered, has been designated hypersthene -andesite. Lava of this type has been shown -by Messrs. Cross and Giddings of the Geological Survey to -be widely distributed beyond the Mississippi. Upon -the western slope of the mountain, especially in the vicinity -of the prominent volcanic cone, the form of which suggests its -name sugar loaf, the lava contains prominent crystals of hornblende -instead of so much hypersthene and angite, and closely -resembles the celebrated hornblende andesite lava from among -the extinct volcanoes of central France. The third variety of -lava which enters into the structure of Mt. Shasta is familiar -to every one as basalt. It occurs in relatively small quantities, -and has been extruded low down upon the slopes of the -mountain. From the fact that there are three kinds of lava in -the structure of Mt. Shasta, it must not be concluded that they -all issued from the same volcanic vent, nor that they were effused -from three separate and distinct openings. In reality, -contributions to the upbuilding of Mt. Shasta have been made -by over twenty volcanic orifices, of which two have been principal -and far more prolific than all the parasitic events combined. -This enumeration does not include those large fissures -in the side of the cone, which are evidently attributable to the -hydrostatic pressure of the molten mass within. The small -number of parasitic cones on the slopes of Mt. Shasta is somewhat -remarkable, especially when we compare it with the -largest volcano in Europe. Although it is much higher than -Etna, its base is less expansive, and its size about half that of -the mighty monarch of the Mediterranean. Upon the irregular -slopes of Etna there are 200 prominent subsidiary cones, -beside over 400 of smaller size. On the contrary, Mt. Shasta -has but a score of such accessories, and the remarkable regularity -of its acute form forcibly expresses the highly concentrated -type of volcanic energy which it represents.</p> - -<p>From none of the vents upon its slopes have all three kinds -of lava escaped, but from the summits of Shasta and Shastina, -which are the products of the two largest and most prolific -vents, both hornblende and hypersthene andesite have been -effused. All the other orifices were subordinate, and each furnished -but one kind of lava; from seven of them came hypersthene -andesite; eight, hornblende andesite; and the remaining -five, basalt. The relative age of the cones which -mark the position of the volcanic vents is indicated by the -amount of degradation which each has suffered. Judged by -this criterion, those of hornblende andesite are the oldest and -those of basalt the youngest. The latter are for the most part -made of lapilli, and are not crater-shaped as is usually the case -in other portions of the Cascade Range, but are elliptical in -form, with dome-shaped summits. The presence of considerable -piles of ejectments about the subsidiary vents indicates -that the eruptions from these orifices were often of a violent -character. On the other hand there are some without a trace -of lapilli, or anything else to indicate an interruption in the -quiet flow of lava welling out of the depths.</p> - -<p>Upon the eastern slope of the mountain the cañon, excavated -by Mud creek, brings to light the oldest Shasta lavas now -exposed, and they are seen under such circumstances that -their succession can be readily understood. The oldest lava -known is hornblende andesite, which is now in an advanced -state of disintegration, and it seems probable that in the early -stages of its development a large proportion of the lavas ejected -from Mt. Shasta were of the same mineralogical constitution. -These were succeeded by extensive effusions of hypersthene -andesite. Later in its history, several small streams of -hornblende andesite again burst forth from the northeastern -side of the cone, but the final effort of the volcanic energy was -spent in the ejection of hypersthene andesite. The conditions -which determine the oscillation in mineralogical composition of -the lavas are as yet conjectural, but when discovered, and their -influence demonstrated, an important step forward will have -been made in determining the relations of many volcanic -rocks.</p> - -<p>A striking feature in the structure of Mt. Shasta is the paucity -of volcanic ashes, lapilli, and other ejected matter. Only -one important deposit of the kind has been discovered. It -clings about the summit of the mountain, and is evidently the -product of its last eruption. The summit of Shastina is so -regular in outline, and the shape of its crater so well preserved, -that many have supposed it to be composed chiefly of scoria -and ashes; but this is not the case, for its slopes are of angular -fragments of compact lava.</p> - -<p>Mt. Shasta is almost a pure lava cone, and its remarkably -regular form is a matter of wonder. That it is so regular is a -sequence of several favorable circumstances. Although a -score of parasitic cones spring from the side of the mountain, -and have contributed to its upbuilding, yet their additions -have been so small compared with the vast effusions from the -summit craters Shasta and Shastina, as not to greatly modify -the outline of the mountain. More important circumstances -are to be found in the non-explosive character of the eruptions -and the successive changes in the physical properties of the -erupted lava, as the development of the mountain progressed.</p> - -<p>It is well known that among the volcanoes of the Hawaiian -Islands the eruptions are quiet and effusive. The fiery streams -of liquid lava course down the gentle slopes for many miles.</p> - -<p>Although the mountain is 14,000 feet high, its lavas have -such a high degree of liquidity, and retain their mobility so -long after eruption, that the base of the mountain spread by -them has a diameter of about seventy miles, and an average -slope of 5° 1,800 feet below its summit. Mauna Loa is nearly -twenty miles in diameter. On the contrary, at a corresponding -position its greatest diameter is less than two miles, a very -remarkable difference, which is due chiefly to the unequal -fluency of the two lavas. The very oldest lavas of Mt. Shasta -lie buried within its mass, and we know nothing of their physical -properties, but from an examination of the oldest ones now -visible, it is evident that at the time of their eruption they possessed -a higher degree of fluidity, and were more voluminous -than those of later date. The long, gentle slopes about the -base of the mountain are formed by comparatively old lavas. -Ascending the mountain, one goes up as if upon a giant staircase, -with long, inclined steps rising abruptly over the ends of -successive shorter and newer lava flows.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_576" id="Page_576">[576]</a></span></p> - -<p>It is evident in comparing the older and newer lava flows of -Mt. Shasta that there has been a more or less regular decrease -in the quantity of lava extruded during successive eruptions, -and this is exactly what we should expect when we consider -that as the pipe is lengthened by successive effusions, the hydrostatic -pressure of the columns of lava within is gradually -augmented. The increased compress of the lava flows toward -the summit of the mountain indicates that the lava of successive -extrusions became more and more viscous until at last -the eruptions became explosive, and gave rise to the ejectments -now clinging upon the upper slopes of the mountain to -evidence the character of the final outburst.</p> - -<p>It is not only possible, but very probable that the increased -viscosity of lava toward the closing scenes of the volcano is -correllated to the diminution of temperature. Since the beginning -of the historic period there have been no eruptions -from Mt. Shasta, but the freshness of its lavas indicate that -not many centuries ago, with other volcanoes of the Cascade -Range, it was in a state of vigorous activity, and groups of hot -springs and fumeroles about the summit still attest the presence -of smouldering volcanic energy, which may perhaps some -day break through its confining walls.</p> - -<p>The upbuilding of Mt. Shasta is but a matter of yesterday, -as compared with the lapse of ages, since the birth of some of -its neighbors. The complex group of mountains to the westward, -embracing the Scott, Trinity, Salmon and Siskiyou, are -composed in large part, at least, of ancient crystalline rocks of -both aqueous and igneous origin; through these the rivers have -cut deep cañons, the Klamath, on its way to the Sacramento -southward, from the very base of Mt. Shasta to its broad valley -stretching from the Sierra Nevada to the Coast Range. The -cañon of the Sacramento was cut down to nearly its present -level, and the mountains sculptured into existing forms long -before the eruptions of Mt. Shasta had ceased, for a fiery deluge -escaping from the southern slope of Mt. Shasta entered -the Sacramento cañon, and as a lava stream 200 feet deep followed -its course for over fifty miles.</p> - -<p>Towering more than a mile above its neighbors, perhaps the -youngest of the group, Mt. Shasta is the end of a long series of -volcanoes in the Cascade Range, stretching northwest to Mt. -Tacoma. This range, composed chiefly of volcanic material, -is cut across by the cañons of the Columbia and the Klamath -rivers, in the former of which, beneath a thickness of 3,500 -feet of lava, are found strata containing Tertiary fossils. At -the southern base of Mt. Shasta, in the cañon of the McLoud -River, similar beds of volcanic debris are found, but without -fossils, nevertheless it is evident that the main mass of the -Cascade Range and its volcanoes originated in recent geologic -times, and from the fact that solfataras, fumeroles, and hot -springs are still abundant upon their slopes, they can not be -reckoned among those which are wholly extinct.</p> - -<p>A frontiersman in Washington Territory tells of an outburst -of Mt. St. Helens in the winter of 1841-2.</p> - -<p>Upon somewhat more trustworthy authority it is said that to -the southward of Mt. Shasta, about forty miles, a small cone -which may be considered parasitic to Lassens Peak, has been -in eruption as late as January, 1850, ejecting considerable ashes -and cinders, and pouring forth a mass of lava, which gradually -spread, attaining a circumference of over four miles, and presenting -an abrupt embankment-like termination upon all sides -eighty to ninety feet in height. Trees, blackened by the fiery -stream, are still standing to furnish incontestable evidence of -its recency.</p> - -<p>The country is full of rumors of subterranean rumblings, and -the people are prone to attribute them to the dying throes of -volcanic energy.</p> - -<p>One of the most striking features of the region is the -strongly contrasted types of volcanic action in Mt. Shasta. -Both have approximately the same area. In the valley there -have been many scores of volcanic vents, among which the -energy has been so widely diffused that none of them have furnished -lava sufficient to form a hill more than a few hundred -feet in height.</p> - -<p>On the contrary, the mountain represents a small number of -vents, and the volcanic was nearly all concentrated in one -place, so that the extrusions were all piled up, one upon another, -and resulted in the upbuilding of one majestic elevation.</p> - -<p>Thus it has been from a small beginning, probably in early -Tertiary times, that by successive boilings over, so to speak, -additions have been made to the mountain until it attained a -height beyond its present altitude. The constructive agents -reached their limit, dissipated their energy, and gave way to -destructive ones, which are gradually undoing the work.</p> - -<p>Mt. Shasta must ever be one of the most popular mountains -among tourists of the West. It is easily accessible from a main -line of travel which passes by its base, at Berryvale, where -comfortable quarters and necessary outfit for the ascent can be -obtained.</p> - -<p>The streams are filled with trout, and the forest with game, -so that the region affords many attractions for the sportsman.</p> - -<p>Several hours’ travel by a good trail brings the party to Camp -Ross, at the timber line, from which the ascent can easily be -made in a day without danger.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="REASSUREMENT">REASSUREMENT.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY ADA IDDINGS GALE.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">Fear not, heart—though round thee ply</div> -<div class="verse">Battle’s emblems—far and nigh.</div> -<div class="verse">Though thy comrades round thee fall—</div> -<div class="verse">Ensigns totter on the wall—</div> -<div class="verse">Though the long battalions grim</div> -<div class="verse">Seem to cloud thy future’s rim.</div> -<div class="verse">If amidst the wild affray</div> -<div class="verse">Thou grow sick, and turn away—</div> -<div class="verse">Pause: that would be worst of all,</div> -<div class="verse">If in fleeing, thou should’st fall.</div> -<div class="verse">Stand fast, girt with sword and shield—</div> -<div class="verse">If thou fall, fall in the field.</div> -<div class="verse">What matters it if sad defeat</div> -<div class="verse">Meet thy eager, hurrying feet;</div> -<div class="verse">What, if when the banners wave</div> -<div class="verse">Thou should’st find a shallow grave.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">Foeward, bravely turn thy face,</div> -<div class="verse">Seek no measure small of grace;</div> -<div class="verse">And when loud the trumpets call,</div> -<div class="verse">Bravely stand or bravely fall.</div> -<div class="verse">Whether vict’ry or defeat,</div> -<div class="verse">Laurel wreath or winding sheet</div> -<div class="verse">Be thy meed—’twill differ not,</div> -<div class="verse">Soon or late ’twill be forgot.</div> -<div class="verse">Only thou, heart, e’er shalt know</div> -<div class="verse">Thy deserved praise here below.</div> -<div class="verse">Thou, and One that on his throne</div> -<div class="verse">Ne’er forgets to watch his own,</div> -<div class="verse">One that marks where sparrows flee,</div> -<div class="verse">Thee will guard with equity.</div> -<div class="verse">Then be brave with all thy might—</div> -<div class="verse">This thy guerdon—for the right.</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_577" id="Page_577">[577]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="WILL_IT_PAY">WILL IT PAY?</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY CHARLES BARNARD.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>There are some people who always ask this question. You -may suggest anything, a book to read, a science to be studied, -or some new work to be done, and, though they may not be so -rude as to say so, they will wonder how it will pay. “Better -not go into farming, my boy. It doesn’t pay.” “Better not -do this or do that. It won’t pay you.” After a little more of -this sort of thing you wonder if it pays to be born, or to live, or -to do anything whatever. Now, what do they mean by this -question? By far the larger part of those who ask it mean -that the work, whatever it may be, does not pay a handsome -return in money. A few mean something quite different. They -know all about it, they have seen the world, and it is all a -hollow show, and their favorite dolls are full of sawdust. -These people are dead, but they have forgotten it.</p> - -<p>Let us see about this. If there is any one business in the -world about which the people in it are sure it does not pay, it -is farming. “It does not pay.” So many people have said -this that people who are not farmers have really come to think -it must be so. Is it true? Here is an ear of field corn with -twelve rows of grains, and twenty grains to a row. Fair average -corn, with 240 grains to the ear. We can take off one -grain and plant it in the ground, and within six months have -two ears of the same corn, or 480 grains from one grain. How -big a profit is that? One grain increases to 480 grains. Is -there any manufacturing business, art or profession that pays -such an enormous return? In spite of this they say it does not -pay. Then there must be something the matter with the business. -Nature has provided that the increase of plants shall -be very great. One seed may increase a hundred fold, or five -hundred fold, or a thousand fold. Clearly the work of raising -plants with such advantages in its favor ought to pay, and if it -does not, it is equally clear that something is wrong, some one -to blame.</p> - -<p>The city housekeeper finds at her store on the avenue a head -of lettuce. Rather wilted and damaged by rough handling. -Six cents. You can plant 43,560 heads of lettuce on one acre -of ground. At six cents a head that is $2,613.60 taken out of -one acre of land inside of eight weeks. And yet this person -gravely tells us lettuce raising does not pay. What can the -matter be, and where has all this money gone? A city like -New York will calmly eat 40,000 heads of lettuce in a day or -two, and pay out over $2,000 for it, and be ready to eat and -pay as much more the next week. The money is certainly -paid to somebody, and if the farmer still insists it does not pay -to raise the lettuce, there must be a reason for it.</p> - -<p>Ask the groceryman. He replies that he must live and must -have a good slice out of the money to pay him for buying the -lettuce down town and bringing it up to his store. It isn’t so -evident that he must live as he fancies, because there was a -time when there were no storekeepers and the world got along -beautifully without them. However, he is convenient, and we -will allow him his slice out of the profits. The teamster, the -wholesale dealer, the freight handler, the railroad people all -say that they too must live, and to please them we will admit -that is so, though there is not much to prove it. They must -share in the $2,000 paid for the acre of lettuce. Lastly, the -farmer gets what the others decide he may have after they -have had what they decide is their share. If we ask each one -of this row of men, it is quite possible each one will say it does -not pay, but, somehow, none except the farmer says anything -about it. The last man, the actual producer of the lettuce, is -the only one to complain. His business is the only one concerned -that people say does not pay.</p> - -<p>There was once a young man who started out bravely in life, -resolved to reform the world. After trying for some time he -gave it up and was ever after entirely contented if he paid his -board regularly every week. It is useless to think we can reform -this matter all in a day. The day will come when these -things will be changed and equity and justice will take the -place of the utter selfishness that now marks competition in -business. Our best plan is to see what we can do to become -producers ourselves. We want the lettuce ourselves. We -must pay the retail price for it, and if at this price there is a -big profit in raising it, we would like the entire profit placed in -our hands. The people in these United States are divided into -two great classes—the producers and the consumers—those -who raise things to eat, and those who are in other trades and -eat without producing. The producers are the farmers and -fishermen. The consumers make all the rest of the people. -The producers also eat, but their food costs them very much -less than the food used by the non-producers. Of course we -can see there must be non-producers or the trades and arts -would perish, and the nation would become a mere agricultural -community, content with sleeping and eating. At the -same time, we must observe that a very large proportion of -those who produce nothing live in small towns and villages -and own land. We see everywhere in our smaller cities and -towns hundreds of homes having gardens about the house. A -little discouraged grass, a dyspeptic tree or two, a forlorn -grape vine straggling over the fence, plenty of dusty gravel, -and a mortgage on the house and lot. Within the house bitter -complaints against the high price of food, much fretfulness -and weariness at the scant, monotonous bill of fare. Boys and -girls growing up with white hands and narrow chests (to say -nothing of stomachs that they should be ashamed to own) and -the storekeeper saving money on the next corner.</p> - -<p>This is the reason it does not pay. We want to have white -hands and be genteel and all that. We want to be consumers, -and we unwittingly combine to get all we can out of the selling -and handling of food and leave the producer as little as -we think he can be forced to take. We must get rid of this -imported nonsense about work. (It all came from Europe, -and is wholly un-American.) We must make the land give us -more food. Our boys and girls must go out of doors, must -learn to be producers. They should be shown that it is disgraceful -to live in a mortgaged house, that it is disgraceful to -stand on any part of God’s ground and complain that food is -scarce or high when that food might come out of the very -ground under our ungrateful feet. The Chinese, the Japanese, -the Dutch, the French, the Swiss cultivate every rod of ground -they own. No barren yards about their houses, taxed and yet -paying no return. Why, in England even the strips of waste -land along the railway tracks are cultivated, and the trains -move between rows of cabbages half a hundred miles long.</p> - -<p>This is the way for thousands of families to make it pay. -Produce your own food and sell it to yourselves. A head of -lettuce grown on your own ground and eaten on your own table -saves the retail price of a head of lettuce, and if there is a -profit on it for all the people who touch it, clearly you have the -entire profit for yourself. On reading this about five hundred -people will calmly remark that this is not so. They have tried -it and it cost more to raise their own vegetables than it did to -buy them at the stores. The wages of the gardener come to -more than all the things were worth. So much the worse for -the gardener. You should be your own gardener. Where are -your boys and girls? At the base ball grounds, or the rink,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_578" id="Page_578">[578]</a></span> -or at the foolish piano—doing nothing—earning nothing and -trying to be genteel? Garden work is hard on the back and -hurts the hands. Yes, because your hands are weak and -your back is not strong, and of these things you should be -ashamed.</p> - -<p>The price of land in this country is steadily rising. All the -best farm land is being taken up. The cost of food is advancing. -It will never again be as cheap as it has been in the -past. The time has come when we must economize. We can -not longer afford to carry those neglected garden plots and -waste spaces about our houses. They must produce food for -the people who own them. We must be our own producers. -We must study plants and animals. These represent food and -wealth, and it is simply an untruth to say it will not pay to -raise them. If your garden costs more than the retail price of -food in your neighborhood the fault is your own. There is -something the matter with your soil or your seeds, or your -method of culture. Think of the profit of raising lettuce at -$2,000 an acre, and yet that is the return that an acre will produce -if paid for at the retail price. Moreover, the lettuce would be -removed from the ground in ample time for another crop, -likewise bringing a profit. Of course, if your land is worth five -dollars a foot, the interest on one foot would be more than the -value of the single lettuce plant you could raise upon it. In -such a case you had better sell out and buy cheaper land. -For the majority of homes where there is a garden the land is -cheap enough to produce more or less of the food needed in -the house, and there is no reason whatever why it may not be -raised at a handsome profit.</p> - -<p>The Chautauqua University recognizes the importance of -this matter. Its aim is to help, to guide, and to instruct, and -it is now, through the liberality of its friends, able to help, -guide and instruct all who wish to learn something of the art -of producing food and saving money. It sees hundreds of -boys and girls totally ignorant of these common things. It -sees young people wondering what they shall do, perplexed -and worried over this question of earning a living, and discouraged -at the high cost of living, when a part of their living -is going to waste beneath their feet. The Chautauqua Town -and Country Club was formed to help those who wish to help -themselves. It aims to show by simple lessons how to raise -plants of all kinds, how to care for animals, how to take care -of your garden so that it will be a source of pleasure and profit. -Half a thousand people have already joined the club and are -now at work in good earnest. Should you wish to know more -about it, write to Miss K. F. Kimball, Plainfield, N. J.</p> - -<p>All this is meant for you.</p> - -<p>What are you going to do about it?</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="GEOGRAPHY_OF_THE_HEAVENS_FOR_JULY">GEOGRAPHY OF THE HEAVENS FOR JULY.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY PROF. M. B. GOFF,<br /> -Western University of Pennsylvania.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>THE SUN,</h3> - -<p class="unindent">Of which so much has been said in these pages, continues -to be discussed with increasing interest by astronomers of both -hemispheres, who every day supply their quota of new ideas as -the result of their investigations. In <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> for -March, 1884, the statement was made that “it has already -been demonstrated that the colored prominences may be examined -at any time when the sun can be seen; and it is believed -that Mr. Huggins has accomplished the difficult feat of photographing -the corona, so that it, too, may be scrutinized <i>at leisure</i>.” -In the April number of the <i>Nineteenth Century</i>, we find a -very interesting account by Mr. Huggins himself, of his operations -in this line. As yet the experiments have not been in -all respects satisfactory; but so much has been done as to leave -no doubt of the final result. As Mr. H. tells us, the great obstacle -to overcome is the immense curtain of air, which -“hangs” between us and the sun, and absorbs some forty per -cent. of the sun’s light (and heat). This absorption renders -our atmosphere as light at least as the sun’s corona, and -makes it as difficult of observation as a lesser light placed behind -a greater. The same atmosphere being as bright, or -brighter, than the stars, prevents our seeing the latter in daylight. -During an eclipse of the sun, the shadow of the moon -affords us a long, funnel shaped tube through this great air curtain -(which may be forty, or one hundred, or more miles in -thickness) and we are enabled through it to see the sun’s corona. -But “on an average, once in two years this curtain of -light is lifted for from <i>three</i> to <i>six</i> minutes”—a very contracted -period in which to obtain a knowledge of a phenomenon that -we know is constantly changing. If we had a Joshua, who -could command sun, moon and earth to stand still for the -space of a few hours even, we might discover what we so -much wish to know, what is this corona. Or, if we could go -beyond this atmosphere of ours—place it between us and the -earth, we might do without a Joshua. But we can not get outside. -Then the next best thing is to get as nearly outside as -possible. Dr. Copeland tried this by climbing an elevation -of 12,400 feet. Prof. Langley ascended Mt. Etna, and on Mt. -Whitney ascended to the height of 15,000 feet; but at these -heights the curtain was still too heavy, and no view of the corona -was obtained; or, as Prof. Langley expressed it, he “met with entire -non-success.” From reports in regard to observations made -in Egypt of the total eclipse of 1882, Mr. Huggins conceived -the idea of making a photographic plate so sensitive that it -would distinguish differences imperceptible to the eye, and on -this plate take a picture of the corona, and then examine it as -one would the “photo” of a friend, and mark its peculiarities. -He made his first experiment in 1882, and as a result “there -seemed to be good ground to hope that the corona had really -been obtained upon the plates.” In 1883, a second attempt, -under more favorable circumstances was made, and “images -of the sun exquisitely defined, and free from all sensible trace -of instrumental imperfection were obtained.” On the 6th of -May of the same year (1883) a total eclipse of the sun occurred -at Caroline Islands, and was there photographed by -Messrs. Lawrence and Woods, photographers of the Royal -Society; and on a comparison of these photographs of the -sun’s corona during an eclipse with his own taken both before -and after the time of the eclipse (which was not visible to -Mr. H.), he had the satisfaction of seeing so strong a resemblance -as to convince him that he had photographed the corona -without an eclipse. Although having no doubt of the success -of his experiment, yet, on account of the unfavorable conditions -of the climate, it was determined to try a higher elevation; -and the Riffel, near Zarmatt, Switzerland, was selected -as a suitable place to make further trials. Mr. Ray Wood was -selected as artist, and reached Riffel in July, 1884. But unfortunately, -the “veil of finely divided matter of some sort,” “of -which we have heard so much in the accounts from all parts -of the earth of gorgeous sunsets and after-glows” seriously -interfered with the work; nevertheless, a number of plates -were obtained on which the corona showed itself with more or -less distinctness. Not satisfied with these results, Mr. Woods -was deputed to go to the Cape of Good Hope, where, under the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_579" id="Page_579">[579]</a></span> -direction of Dr. Gill, he is to make, or is, perhaps, now making -daily photographic representations of the corona, and laboring -fully to realize the anticipations of the esteemed Mr. -Huggins.</p> - -<p>Meantime our sun makes his accustomed rounds, bringing -with him the usual accompaniments, hot weather and the -“dog days.” He will on the 1st rise at 4:34 a. m. and set at -7:33 p. m.; on the 16th, rise at 4:43 a. m., set at 7:28 p. m.; -and on the 30th, rise at 4:56 a. m., and set at 7:17 p. m. During -the month the length of the day will decrease from 15 h. -1 m. on the 1st to 14 h. 21 m. on the 30th. The declination -will in the same time decrease four degrees and forty-three -minutes.</p> - -<h3>THE MOON</h3> - -<p class="unindent">Enters upon its last quarter on the 5th, at 7:18 a. m.; new -moon occurs on the 12th, at 12:07 a. m.; first quarter on the -18th, at 7:11 p. m.; full moon on the 26th, at 9:14 p. m. In -perigee, or nearest the earth, on the 11th, at 8:24 p. m.; in -apogee, or farthest from the earth, on 25th, at 4:18 a. m. -Reaches its greatest elevation above the horizon, 66° 55′, on -the 11th; least elevation, 30° 7′, on the 23d. On the 1st, -rises at 10:00 p. m.; on the 16th, sets at 10:26 p. m.; on the -30th, rises 9:05 p. m.</p> - -<h3>MERCURY</h3> - -<p class="unindent">On the 13th, at 6:57 a. m., is 5° 39′ north of the moon; on the -17th, at 9:00 a. m., 11′ south of Venus; and on the 26th, at -2:00 a. m., 11′ south of <i>Alpha</i> in the constellation <i>Leo</i>, a very -interesting conjunction, but not visible to the naked eye. Mercury -has a direct motion during the month of 51° 51′; and his -diameter increases from 5″ to 6.8″. On the 1st, he rises at 4:56 -a. m., and sets at 7:56 p. m.; on the 16th, rises at 6:23 a. m., and -sets at 8:31 p. m.; on the 30th, rises at 7:16 a. m., and sets at -8:22 p. m.</p> - -<h3>VENUS</h3> - -<p class="unindent">Makes but little show this month, being too near the “Source -of Light.” She will be evening star throughout the month, -growing brighter as the days pass by; her diameter increasing -from 10.4″ on the 1st to 11.2″ on the 30th. She has a direct -motion of 38° 8′ 45″. On the 1st, rises at 5:50 a. m., sets -at 8:34 p. m.; on the 16th, rises at 6:25 a. m., sets at 8:33 p. m.; -and on the 30th, rises at 6:57 a. m., sets at 8:23 p. m. On the -13th, at 10:21 p. m., 5° 22′ north of the moon; on 17th, at 9:00 -a. m., 11′ north of Mercury.</p> - -<h3>MARS</h3> - -<p class="unindent">Will be a morning star during this month. On the 1st rising -at 2:30 a. m., and setting at 5:08 p. m.; on the 16th, rising at -2:11 a. m., setting at 5:01 p. m.; and on the 30th, rising at 1:54 -a. m., setting at 4:50 p. m. His diameter increases one tenth -of a second of arc, and he makes a direct motion of 22° 56′. -On the 9th, at 3:44 p. m., he is 5° 1′ north of the moon.</p> - -<h3>JUPITER.</h3> - -<p><i>Et tu, Jupiter</i>, art on the wane. Each day he sets more -nearly with the sun, and his diameter grows smaller, though -monarch still of all the planets. He rises on the 1st, 16th and -30th, at 9:00, 8:14, and 7:33 a. m., respectively, and sets on the -corresponding days at 10:19, 9:28, and 8:39 p. m. He makes a -direct motion of 5° 25′ 42″. On the 15th, at 2:02 a. m., is 3° -7′ north of the moon.</p> - -<h3>SATURN.</h3> - -<p>Those who have not improved the past few months to obtain -a view of the beauties of this planet can not blame the writer. -Their attention has been called to the fact that his rings stand -more widely open now than they will again for fifteen years. -But they need not despair; for in the delightful coolness of a -summer morning they may still improve their opportunities; -for Saturn rises the latter part of this month nearly with the -dawn, and those who care to leave their “downy couch” can -catch him before the rising of the sun. 3:56, 3:05, and 2:18 a. m., -on the 1st, 16th and 30th will find him “at home;” and in -August an earlier hour will suit as well. During the month his -diameter increases two tenths of a second. On the 10th, at -5:48 p. m., he may be found 4° 7′ north of the moon; and on -the 20th, one minute south of the star <i>Eta</i> in the constellation -<i>Gemini</i>.</p> - -<h3>URANUS.</h3> - -<p>This planet, on the 1st, rises at 11:14 a. m., and sets at 11:20 -p. m.; on the 16th, rises at 10:17 a. m., sets at 10:23 p. m.; on -the 30th, rises at 9:25 a. m., sets at 9:29 p. m. No change in -diameter, which remains at 3.6″. On the 16th, at 6:37 p. m., -34′ north of the moon.</p> - -<h3>NEPTUNE.</h3> - -<p>This slow motioned body, of which we know so little, and -which not more than one person out of 10,000 ever saw, makes -a direct motion during the month of 42′ 55″; its diameter is -2.6″; and on the 8th, at 6:59 a. m., its position is 2° 33′ directly -north of the moon. It may be interesting to know that -it will be a morning star which “will <i>not</i> light the traveler on -his way,” during the entire month. Its times of rising are 1:52 -a. m. on the 1st; 12:57 a. m. on the 16th, and at midnight on -the 30th.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="HOW_AIR_HAS_BEEN_LIQUEFIED">HOW AIR HAS BEEN LIQUEFIED.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY J. JAMIN,<br /> -Of the French Academy.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>In the interval between 1602 and 1626 four philosophers were -born who seem to have been divinely appointed to teach men -the mysteries of air. These were a German, Otto von Guericke -(1602); two Frenchmen, Mariotte and Pascal (1620, 1623), and -finally an Englishman, Boyle (1626). Pascal conceived the -idea that air being material must have weight like other materials, -and consequently that the earth must be pressed upon -by its atmospheric envelope, and he proved this by the celebrated -experiment at Puy de Dôme.</p> - -<p>Soon after, Otto von Guericke, having invented the air pump, -succeeded in exhausting the air from a vessel and confirmed -Pascal’s idea that air was really heavy, while Mariotte and -Boyle at the same time, each in his own country, and by almost -identical experiments, proved that air is elastic, that its -volume decreases by pressure, and generally in proportion to -the weight to which it is subjected. Mariotte modestly called -this discovery a rule of nature. We call it a physical law, and -very suitably name it in France “Mariotte’s Law,” and in -England “Boyle’s Law.”</p> - -<p>It seemed necessary for science to collect her thoughts after -this great achievement. She seemed to think there was nothing -more to discover. Boyle and Mariotte would have been -very much astonished if some one had told them that this air, -whose properties they had been demonstrating, could be reduced -to a liquid like water, and even to a solid like snow. Nearly -two centuries passed before the world was prepared for this -new discovery. We ourselves were ignorant of it until the -month of April, 1883, when the Academy of Sciences received -from Cracow these two dispatches:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>“Oxygen completely liquefied; the liquid colorless as carbonic -acid.” (April 9th.)</p> - -<p>“Nitrogen frozen, liquefied by expansion; the liquid colorless.” -(April 16th.)</p> - -<p class="sig"><span class="smcap">Wroblewski.</span></p> - -</div> - -<p>Thus air has been reduced to a volume a thousand or fifteen<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_580" id="Page_580">[580]</a></span> -hundred times less than under ordinary conditions. It ceased -to be a gas and took the appearance of water. This astonishing -result is only the last in a long list of experiments which for -a long time were fruitless; it is the finishing touch to a building -begun long ago, and on which many workmen have labored. -What has been the work of each of them? It is a long story.</p> - -<p>Van Marum, a philosopher and chemist of Harlem, is celebrated -as the constructor of an electric machine, the largest -known, but he is more justly celebrated for having been the -first to liquefy a gas. Wishing to know if ammonia would -obey Mariotte’s law, he compressed it. Under a pressure of -six atmospheres it changed quickly to a transparent liquid. -Van Marum did not foresee the consequences of his experiments, -and is honored only as being the first successful performer -of the experiment. But Lavoisier, whose keener mind -grasped all that these results implied, did not hesitate to declare -the general law that all substances were capable of existing -in three different states, and he illustrated his belief -most forcibly. “Let us consider for a moment what would -happen to the different substances which form the earth, if the -temperature should be quickly changed. Let us suppose that -the earth were suddenly placed in a region where the temperature -would be much above that of boiling water; soon the air, -all liquids which can be vaporized at a temperature near that -of boiling water, and many metallic substances even, would -expand, be transformed into air-like fluids, and form part of -the atmosphere.</p> - -<p>“On the contrary, if the earth should be suddenly placed in -a very cold temperature, for example, that of Jupiter or -Saturn, the water of our rivers and seas, and, probably, the -greatest number of liquids which we know would become -solid.”</p> - -<p>“Air,” according to this supposition, or at least a part of the -air-like substances which compose it, “would doubtless cease -to exist in its present form; it would be changed to a liquid -state, and this change would produce new liquids of which we -know nothing.”</p> - -<p>Lavoisier was mistaken about the temperature of Jupiter and -Saturn, but was right in his supposition that air would become -a liquid; however, as experiment did not prove the theory, -the prediction was forgotten and the question dropped. It -slept a long time, for it was not until 1823 that it was revived -by Faraday. The first experiments of this great philosopher -were on this subject. He was but twenty-two when he made -his first discovery, the liquefaction of chlorine. The details of -this experiment have been told by Tyndall. It is well known -that when chlorine gas and cold water are united, crystals are -formed which contain to every molecule of chlorine ten molecules -of water. Faraday put some of these into a closed tube -and heated them until two separate liquids appeared; one was -water, the other floated on the surface of the water, and a certain -professor of Paris declared that it could be nothing but oil -carelessly left in the vessel. Faraday having opened the tube, -found that this substance began to boil, and then changed -with an explosion into a green gas. It was chlorine. Faraday, -who was quick-tempered, immediately took his revenge -on the professor, to whom he wrote: “You will be pleased to -know, sir, that the oil left by carelessness in my apparatus was -nothing less than liquefied chlorine.”</p> - -<p>This first success decided the career of the young chemist. -He announced that all gases could be reduced to this state if -subjected to a sufficient pressure, and he undertook a series of -experiments, of which the success was doubtful, but the danger -certain. He operated in this way: He took a thick glass -tube in the form of an inverted U; one branch was left empty, -in the other the materials for producing the gas to be studied -were placed and the whole closed. Obliged to gather in the -empty branch, the gas continually increased in pressure, and -there were two possible results to the experiment; either the -gas would not change its state, and the pressure would increase -until the vessel broke, or when a certain limit of pressure -was reached, then the liquid would appear and would -continue to accumulate as long as the gas was disengaged. -A dozen gases were reduced in this way; among them were -the following, which we shall need: Ammonia, sulphurous -acid, carbonic acid, and protoxide of nitrogen, which at a -temperature of ten degrees required a pressure equal to sixty -atmospheres.</p> - -<p>This pressure leaves no doubt about the danger which one runs -in carrying on such researches. If we remember that steam -boilers generally support a pressure of no more than ten atmospheres, -if we recall the number and the horror of their -explosions we can hardly understand how a simple glass tube -could resist a pressure five or six times as great. When a gas -reaches the point of liquefaction, then the pressure ceases to -increase, but if it does not change from that condition the -pressure increases until an explosion necessarily occurs, and -the debris of the vessel is scattered as powder scatters the fragments -of a shell. In the course of Faraday’s researches he -had thirty explosions. They did not stop him, but it is easy -to see that they did not encourage others.</p> - -<p>Happily there is a less dangerous method of reaching the -same result, it is to freeze the gas. In the same way that the -vapor of water is condensed when the temperature is lowered, -so gases, which are really vapors, will yield to sufficient cold. -In 1824, Bussy succeeded in condensing sulphurous acid gas. -The gas was introduced into a balloon, which was plunged -into a freezing mixture of ice and salt. The gas was liquefied -and could be preserved indefinitely, if the balloon were enclosed -in an enamel vessel. In heating, it gave off vapors -which, by their pressure kept the remainder of the fluid, providing -the glass was strong enough. Thus, in two ways, by -cold and by pressure, and still better, by both combined, it is -possible to liquefy a large number of gases.</p> - -<p>When water is heated, it remains immovable up to 100 degrees -Centigrade, but then it is changed into vapor, or boils. -This boiling is characterized by a peculiar feature, the temperature -remains fixed at 100 degrees. It must be concluded, -therefore, that the heat produced by the furnace and absorbed -by the liquid is simply used in transforming the water into -vapor. This fact was first discovered by the English philosopher, -Black, who, not being able to explain the phenomenon, -was content to demonstrate it and to speak of the heat as -<i>latent</i>. He saw that it took five and a half times as long to -change water into vapor as to heat it from zero to 100 degrees, -and that consequently it must require five and a half times as -much heat to work the change. Such is the law of boiling in -the air, but let us see what it is in a vacuum.</p> - -<p>It is clear that the pressure of the atmosphere on water is a -hindrance to its expansion into vapor, and that this hindrance -increases or diminishes with the pressure. In a vacuum, of -course, the liquid is free from the pressure, so that boiling -ought to take place at a lower temperature.</p> - -<p>And experiment teaches that this is the case; water boils at -a temperature of 82° or 65°, as the pressure is reduced to one -half or a quarter of an atmosphere, it boils at zero, and even -below, in a vacuum. And we reach this remarkable result, -that the boiling and freezing points unite, and that ice is -formed while vapor is set free. But, although the boiling is advanced, -although it takes place at zero instead of at 100 degrees, -although the vapor is cold instead of hot, and the change -takes place in a vacuum instead of in the air, it is a general -law that a large quantity of heat is used, becomes latent, and -enters into the formation of vapor.</p> - -<p>Supposing that we fill a bronze vessel of very thick sides -with water, close it with a lid and fit into it a valve loaded with -lead. Place this in a furnace whose temperature has been -raised to, say, 230 degrees. The water will reach this temperature, -and vapor will accumulate until it reaches a pressure -equal to more than twenty-seven atmospheres.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_581" id="Page_581">[581]</a></span></p> - -<p>Let us now open the valve, the vapor will escape, and as it -carries with it the heat necessary for its expansion, the temperature -of the water will gradually fall until it reaches 100 -degrees, after which the boiling will continue slowly and regularly; -thus the water has been cooled and is kept below the -temperature of its surrounding wall because it must absorb the -extra heat which is required to change it to vapor. This apparatus -is called Papin’s digester.</p> - -<p>There is a similar experiment, but performed in a vacuum -at the ordinary temperature. Put some water into a closed -decanter which is connected by a tube with an air pump. As -soon as a vacuum is produced the water begins to boil and to -freeze, for the vapor can only be formed by borrowing heat, -and there is nothing to take it from but the water itself, which -soon reaches zero and is frozen. This apparatus makes a very -simple ice house, as useful as convenient, and it proves, first, -that boiling takes place at the lowest temperatures providing -the pressure is sufficiently diminished; secondly, that it is always -accompanied by a loss of heat; and thirdly, that it lowers -the temperature of the liquid below that of the surrounding -envelope, and the more as the vacuum is more complete.</p> - -<p>Just as opening the valve lets the vapor accumulated above -the water in Papin’s digester escape, and causes a fall in the -temperature, so, by opening the reservoirs in which one has confined -a liquefied gas, one sees it fall back to the boiling point. -For example, take the liquid obtained from the compression of -sulphurous acid gas. As soon as the reservoir containing it -is opened the liquid begins to boil, and a vapor is formed, it -is the gas which re-forms. It absorbs the latent heat necessary, -taking it from exterior objects by radiation from the liquid -itself, from the vessel which holds it, and from the materials -into which it has been placed. It cools these until the point -at which sulphurous acid gas boils is reached, twelve degrees -below zero; then the liquid remains balanced between the radiation -which tends to heat it and vaporization, which cools it. -The final result is that the temperature is lowered and remains -fixed at twelve degrees below zero. This is not all: just -as the boiling point of water is lowered below zero in a vacuum, -in the same way that of sulphurous acid gas falls below -twelve degrees. Bussy brought it down to sixty-eight, where -it remained; not only water, but mercury may be frozen by -this means.</p> - -<p>Finally, the boiling of liquefied gases will freeze all neighboring -substances, and the greatest cold which one could obtain is -produced by their boiling in a vacuum. This property of sulphurous -acid was discovered in a still greater degree in protoxide -of nitrogen, which was changed into a liquid at a temperature -of 0 degrees, and under a pressure of thirty atmospheres. -If allowed to boil in a vacuum, a temperature of one -hundred and ten degrees below zero was obtained. When science -has sown trade reaps the harvest; since by allowing -liquefied gases to boil, a temperature of one hundred and ten -degrees below zero can be obtained, and since the vapors -which they give off carry away an enormous amount of heat -from the surrounding bodies, it is possible by means of this cold -produced to freeze water, make cold drinks, solidify mercury, -cool cellars, prevent food from decay, and to do many other -things of similar nature. A new art became possible, that of -making cold. To-day it is at the height of success. It is -founded on this general principle: to liquefy the gas by means -of pressure, taking care that it does not become heated, to introduce -it into a freezer, where it is allowed to boil, and from -which it absorbs the heat, to carry off the gas and introduce it -again into the vessel, where it will by pressure be liquefied. -The action is constant, the same gas acts indefinitely, and -there is no other expense than that which is caused by running -the pumps. In spite of these fine results and the extraordinary -efforts put forth, the end was not attained. To be sure, -some gases had yielded, but still there was a large number -which resisted every effort. Was it necessary to give up the -idea that the law of liquefaction of gases was general, or was -it true that the exceptions were only the results of insufficient -means? Faraday had never varied in his belief. One easily -returns to the affections of his youth, and he believed that the -time had come for making fresh efforts to prove his theory. -After a rest of twenty-two years he determined to again take -up the liquefaction of the rebellious gases. Means were not -wanting. Thilorier had taught him how to solidify easily -large masses of carbonic acid, and by mixing this solid with -ether make a powerful freezing mixture; protoxide of nitrogen -could be prepared with the same ease and abundance, -and would boil regularly in a vacuum at a temperature of one -hundred and twenty degrees below zero. Thus he was able to -secure a degree of cold before unknown. For compression, he -had a pump formed of two parts; one took the gas at its generation, -and accumulated it in a reservoir under a pressure of -fifteen atmospheres; the second part then received it; here it -was subjected to a much greater pressure in a strong glass -vessel which was plunged into carbonic acid or protoxide of -nitrogen. Cold and pressure were thus combined. At that -time nothing more could be done; fortunately this was enough -to subdue most gases. Faraday had the satisfaction of liquefying -nearly all gases, and of extending the law which he had -announced, but still six, only six, refused to give up; among -them were marsh gas, oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen. Science -is a battle which must be continually renewed; the more -the gases resisted, the greater the efforts made to conquer them. -At first, new and energetic means of pressure were invented. -Aimé, a professor in Algiers, secured a pressure of four hundred -atmospheres, without result. M. Cailletet used a hydraulic -press which exerted a force equal to seven hundred atmospheres, -and afterward increased this to one thousand atmospheres, -but still the gas resisted. At last it was found that -pressure alone, however enormous it might be, could not -liquefy the gases.</p> - -<p>An English philosopher, called Andrews, put a new face on -matters. He took carbonic acid gas at a temperature of about -thirteen degrees and compressed it. The gas began to diminish -in volume, and under a pressure of fifty atmospheres was -suddenly liquefied, taking quickly a very great density, and -falling to the bottom of the vessel, where it remained separated -from its vapor by a surface as plainly marked as that which -marks water and air. Andrews afterward tried the same experiment -at a higher temperature, about twenty-one degrees. -The same results were produced with but one difference: the -liquefaction was less sudden. At a temperature of thirty-two -degrees, instead of a separate and distinct liquid, undulating -striæ appeared as the only signs of a change in condition -which was not completed. Finally, at a temperature of above -thirty-two degrees there was neither striæ nor liquefaction, but -still it seemed as if a trace was preserved, for under certain -pressure the density increased more quickly, and the volume diminished -more rapidly. Thirty-two degrees is then the limit, a -point between the degrees which permit and which prevent liquefaction. -It is the <i>critical point</i> which marks the separation between -two very different conditions of a substance; below, we -have a liquid; above, there is no change in appearance, but -there enters a new condition, whose characteristics I will describe.</p> - -<p>Generally a liquid is more dense than its vapor; for this -reason it falls to the bottom, and the two are separated by a -level surface. But supposing that we heat the vessel which -contains them. The liquid expands little by little, until it -equals, or even surpasses, the expansion of the gas, so that an -equal volume weighs less and less. On the other hand, a continually -increasing quantity of vapor is formed, accumulates -at the top of the vessel, and becomes constantly heavier. -Now, if the density of the vapor increases, or if that of the -liquid diminishes under the right temperature, the two densities -become equal. Then there is no longer a reason for the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_582" id="Page_582">[582]</a></span> -liquid falling, the vapor rising, or for a surface of separation. -The two are mingled. Neither are they any longer distinguished -by their different degrees of heat. When this critical -point is reached, it is impossible to tell whether it is liquid or -gas, since in either state it has the same density, the same heat, -the same appearance, the same properties. This is a new -state, a gaseous liquid state. The discovery of these properties -showed why all the attempts to liquefy air had been useless. -At an ordinary temperature the gas is in a gaseous liquid condition. -Liquefaction can take place only when the liquid is -separated from the vapor by its own greater density. The next -step was therefore to lower the temperature below that of the -critical point. This was understood and carried out about the -same time by MM. Cailletet and Raoul Pictet. On the 2nd -of December, 1877, M. Cailletet subjected oxygen in a glass -tube to a pressure of three hundred atmospheres, and reduced -its temperature to twenty-nine degrees below zero. The gas -did not change in appearance, and was in all probability in the -gaseous liquid condition. Nothing but more cold was wanting -to liquefy it. The valve was turned, the gas escaped, and -the temperature fell two hundred degrees, and the characteristic -whitish mist was seen. Oxygen had been liquefied, perhaps -solidified. The same result was reached with nitrogen, -but nothing was done with hydrogen. While M. Cailletet performed -this decisive experiment at Paris, M. Raoul Pictet -achieved the same at Geneva. He had at his command all -necessary materials, so that he subjected the oxygen to a pressure -of three hundred and twenty atmospheres, and to a temperature -of one hundred and forty degrees below zero. In -this condition the gas was probably below the critical point, -and when the reservoir was opened suddenly it began to boil -and was thrown in every direction. M. Pictet believed that he -liquefied, and even more, had solidified hydrogen, but he was -doubtless mistaken. These results, however, were not satisfactory. -M. Cailletet was preparing a new experiment when -the Academy received the two telegrams given at the beginning -of this article.</p> - -<p>Wroblewski and his colleague, Olszewski, had boiled ethylene, -a gas similar to that used for heating purposes, in a vacuum. -The temperature fell to one hundred and fifty degrees -below zero. It was the greatest degree of cold yet obtained, -and was sufficient. The success was complete. The oxygen, -previously compressed in a glass tube, became a fixed liquid. -It was like the others, in the form of a colorless and transparent -liquid, like water, but of a little less density. Its critical -point was at one hundred and thirteen degrees below zero, -forming itself below, never above, this temperature, and boiling -rapidly at a temperature of one hundred and eighty-six -degrees below zero. A few days after this the two Polish -professors succeeded, in the same way, in liquefying nitrogen.</p> - -<p>But if the question was settled for air was it also for nitrogen? -M. Pictet, in his experiment, had used a weight of three -hundred and twenty atmospheres, and cold of one hundred -and forty degrees below zero. When he opened the reservoir -a jet of gas, mingled with mist of steel gray color, burst forth. -At the beginning of the experiment, solid fragments accompanied -the jet; these fell to the floor with a sound like that of -grains of lead. Naturally, M. Pictet thought that he had not -only liquefied, but even solidified hydrogen, but unfortunately -the experiment was not wholly satisfactory. For perfect success -still more acute cold was needed, and here was oxygen -and nitrogen to get it from. Nitrogen, the most refractory, was -taken, and a degree of cold undreamed of before, attained; -in the open air it reached one hundred and ninety-four degrees -below zero, and in a vacuum two hundred and thirteen -degrees below. These temperatures were so low that it was -necessary to invent new methods for measuring them. A mercury -thermometer was useless, because it froze at forty degrees, -and alcohol because it became a solid at one hundred and -thirty degrees. No liquid is able to resist such temperatures, -so electric, or hydrogen thermometers, were employed.</p> - -<p>Wroblewski and Olszewski have but lately achieved success. -Having compressed the hydrogen in the above named manner, -they froze it by means of nitrogen boiling in a vacuum. -Still it did not liquefy. It was yet in a gaseous liquid state, -but when the tube was opened then there appeared a transparent -and colorless liquid. At last the question of the liquefaction -of gases, which has been discussed so long, has been settled. -When we think of the simplicity of these final experiments, -it seems strange that the problem was so difficult to -solve. The trouble lay in the fact that at the start there was -everything to find out; there was the critical point and the -means of freezing to discover. It was necessary to proceed -by steps, using each gas for the reduction of the one more -stubborn than itself. Really, as Biot says, nothing is so easy -as what was discovered yesterday, nothing so difficult as what -must be discovered to-morrow. It might be asked whether the -result is worth the trouble necessary to collect these liquids. -The answer must be left to the future. The chemist will take -up this new law of gases, and art will adapt it to its purposes. -For the present, all that it amounts to is that the natural philosopher -has proven that all kinds of materials may exist in -three conditions, and obey the same common laws.—<i>Abridged -and Translated from “Révue des Deux Mondes” for “The -Chautauquan.”</i></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="AMERICAN_DECORATIVE_ART">AMERICAN DECORATIVE ART.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY COLEMAN E. BISHOP.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>Among the many so-called “booms” that followed the civil -war, as the result of the wonderful intellectual, moral and material -impulse that it gave the country, one of the most marked -and promising of influence on the national character is the -advancement in decorative art that this generation has seen -and felt. Its presence and influence are observable in the -general demand for more artistic interior finishing and furnishing: -for better form and coloring in wall paper, frescoing, -painting, floor-coverings, upholstery and drapery, and in that -broader study of the harmonious wholes of which these are -related parts.</p> - -<p>It is not an art renaissance, so much as a new birth of popular -art feeling; a creation, rather than a revival. Facts seem -to indicate the beginning of the long-talked-of American -school of art. It is a peculiar, and peculiarly-encouraging -circumstance that this new development is native and popular -instead of imported and select.</p> - -<p>For, we may be very sure that any movement that is to -abide and have much power over our people must be one that -touches the average citizen. To reach him it must be American. -It need not be divergent from, and it should not be antagonistic -to established art principles; but, not the less, in its -sympathies, subjects, and methods it must be national. An -art that is to live with any people must be <i>of</i> that people. -With us this requirement of popularity is doubly strong, because -we are so intensely national; because all institutions -live and move and have their being in the commonalty, and -because the citizen is the only source of living patronage of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_583" id="Page_583">[583]</a></span> -art here, where the state does not foster art as foreign states -do. The artist must eat, and the people must feed him. Before -they will pay for art, they must have sufficient culture to -care for it dollars’ worth, and it must be of a nature to reach -their sympathies. Even in monarchial England, Ruskin perceives -the necessity for beginning at the bottom to upbuild national -taste, and he addresses volumes of letters upon art -“To the Workmen and Laborers of Great Britain” (see -“Fors Clavigera”).</p> - -<p>We have not much to hope for in the way of education of -American taste from imported art, for this can never reach or -touch the people. A few <i>dilettanti</i> in our cities can do very -little toward creating, or even influencing a national taste. -They have no <i>rapport</i> with true American culture; they offend -national sensibilities by unreasoning rejection of everything -undertaken here; and, above all, if they be brought to -the test, it will be found that they generally have no fixed art -principles back of their opinions and—prejudices. If the average -American could not appreciate foreign works, he was -not much helped to a better understanding of them by their -admirers; and he came to think himself at least quite capable -of correctly estimating devotees who could no more give good -reasons for worshiping everything foreign than they could for -scorning everything indigenous.</p> - -<p>The most hopeful augury for this new interest is in the fact -that it relates to that department of art which goes most directly -into the lives and the homes of the people: and that it -has been the first to take on marked American characteristics. -Moreover, its commercial features will be potent influences for -its spread and growth. It is capable of being at once the refiner, -the educator and the almoner of thousands.</p> - -<p>Confidence in the inherent genius of my countrymen, led -me years ago to predict that all that was needed for the establishment -of a school in any art was (1) the foundational training -of mind or hand; (2) a belief that it can be done; (3) a -market for it. The last most important of all, because demand -inspires originality and creates supply, and because -recompense is the great stimulus to inspiration. Genius in -this age is pretty apt to have an eye to the main chance.</p> - -<p>For all these reasons we are prepared for the conclusion -that the impulse given to decorative art by the organizations -known as the “Decorative Art Society,” and the “Associated -Artists,” all of New York City, is the most valuable of anything -that has been done since the nation’s new sense of the beautiful -awoke. These are the parts of one movement possessing -these characteristics:</p> - -<p>It is distinctively American.</p> - -<p>It has compelled recognition at home and abroad as well of -its indigenous originality as of its artistic correctness and -merit.</p> - -<p>It has begun the production of exclusively American materials, -designed and manufactured in this country, which are -unequaled by anything foreign.</p> - -<p>It is commercially successful.</p> - -<p>By virtue of all these achievements, it is doing a missionary -work for American art by encouraging similar efforts in other -cities and other countries; by demonstrating that “good <i>can</i> -come out of Nazareth;” by putting in the way of thousands of -talented women, suffering under repression and lack of opportunity -or for inspiration of hope, the opening for culture and -compensation combined.</p> - -<p>It is to celebrate what has been accomplished, and haply, to -suggest the opportunities open to others, that this narration is -essayed.</p> - -<p>The movement was, indeed, patriotic in its birth. It was -inspired by the Centennial Exposition at Philadelphia. The -specimens of decorative art from the South Kensington -School in the English exhibit impressed Mrs. Thomas M. -Wheeler, of New York, by their lack of originality and freedom, -insomuch that she declared, “We can do better than -that in this country without any school!” and she set about -doing it in genuine American spirit. The first organization, -The Decorative Art Society, which she instituted, was composed -of several hundred ladies of New York. The plan was -national, philanthropic and commercial—to serve art, help -women, beat the British, and make money. Ladies in a large -number of cities were influenced by correspondence and other -efforts to form auxiliary societies. The seed of the new art -interest thus widely sown is still bearing crops.</p> - -<p>From this nucleus there were before long offshoots in two -directions—in a higher and in a more rudimentary line. The -Woman’s Exchange was organized to provide a market for -the large surplus of handiwork of all kinds that was pressed -upon the society; and a less numerous, more compact organization -was originated to attempt a higher development of the -work—this being called the Associated Artists. Thus they -had three efficient agencies occupying ground in this order, -artistically considered—The Woman’s Exchange, The Decorative -Art Society, The Associated Artists. Each of these is -still doing its appointed work, but our present purpose has to -do only with the most advanced—The Associated Artists.</p> - -<p>It should be said, however, of the Woman’s Exchange, that -it has spread the most widely; because it deals with the simple -forms of ornamentation which require but little training, -but it produces articles that are salable. Thus it has become a -bread-and-butter enterprise to a large mass of women. Not -only do all of our leading cities now boast of Exchanges, but -Princess Louise, after her first visit to this country, caused one -to be formed in Canada. This “Yankee notion” has also -been transplanted to Germany and Sweden.</p> - -<p>The Associated Artists, as first organized, was directed by -Mrs. Wheeler and three gentlemen, artists like herself—Mrs. -Wheeler having charge of the needlework department; one -gentleman, of interior wood decoration; another, of glass -painting, and the third, of the color scheme, painting, etc. -They undertook the interior finish of rooms and houses upon -entirely new decorative notions. Among their public undertakings, -also, were the entire interior decoration of the Madison -Square Theater, including the drop curtain; the finish of -the “Veterans’ Room” in the Seventh Regiment Armory, and -parts of the Union League Club House.</p> - -<p>The business success of the Associated Artists grew on the -managers. The educational and philanthropic aims were in -danger of being overshadowed by the commercial consideration, -and New York gave them abundant employment without -their going into all the world and preaching the gospel of -beauty and self-help to all women. Moreover, Mrs. Wheeler’s -department in the work grew so rapidly and opened out possibilities -of development and creation so great, that she decided -to make it a special and separate enterprise. This she -did three years ago, retaining the name, Associated Artists.</p> - -<p>Success has vindicated the wisdom of the segregation, while -the other members of the older organization have not suffered -by the separation. From that time to the present the enterprise -has been managed and worked by women only.</p> - -<p>The gentlemen formerly of the Associated Artists are working -on independent lines. The decoration of the new Lyceum -Theater, New York, is the latest and greatest triumph of one -of them.</p> - -<p>The Associated Artists now have to do with decoration as -using or applied to textile fabrics, including as well all upholstery -as the hangings, draperies, tapestry and applied -decoration of any part of a room. In the building which they -occupy in East Twenty-third Street, there are large exhibition -and salesrooms, the studios or designing rooms, the departments -of embroidery, of tassels, fringes, etc., of tapestry, and -the curtain department—an entire floor. There are about -sixty employes.</p> - -<p>This is an art school as well as a business house. Many -women come to them with no other preparatory training than<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_584" id="Page_584">[584]</a></span> -the drawing lessons of our public schools afford. The best -talent is furnished by the Women’s Art School of Cooper -Union. Aside from such preparation, the Associated Artists -furnish the education of their own designers and workers. -Unendowed, small, modest and young as it is, we shall see in -what respects this American school has outstripped the great -English institution.</p> - -<p>One of the most serious obstacles that the effort to create -American design has had to meet, is the lack of suitable materials -to work with. All imported textiles were found to be, -in color, texture and pattern, unsuited to the new uses and -ideas; and American manufacturers were so much under tutelage -to European tastes, that nothing different was to be had -from them. It is a fact as lamentable as it is astonishing, that -a carpet, wall paper or textile mill in this country rarely has an -American designer of patterns and colors. The schemes of -color made by the Associated Artists were out of harmony -with French, English and American fabrics and embroidery -materials. The colors of these were too sharp, strong and -cardinal for the blending of tones that was sought.</p> - -<p>To meet this case a Massachusetts silk mill was engaged to -manufacture, first embroidery silks of the desired shades; and, -that being accomplished, to undertake the coloring of fabrics. -The greater step to the manufacture of special fabrics was -next taken. Now the Associated Artists use only materials -made for them in this country.</p> - -<p>There are three different mills engaged on their work, one -of which last year supplied them with $30,000 worth. The -work is a great advertisement to a mill—such recognition have -these fabrics gained, here and in Europe, for fineness, design -and beauty. Several European decorators of first rate have -sent for samples of them. Foreign artists and designers visiting -this country regularly have in their note-book memoranda -to see the wonderful new American fabrics at the Associated -Artists. These goods have also been used for garments. -Mrs. Langtry, Mrs. Cornwallis West and Ellen Terry -bought largely of them for their wardrobes. Felix Moschelles, -artist, and son of that Moschelles who was the biographer of -Mendelssohn, declared that there was nothing in Europe to -compare with these joint products of American artists and artisans. -Truly, there is nothing on the shelves of dry goods -men on either continent to match them; they revive the traditions -of the wonderful products of Oriental looms.</p> - -<p>Another <i>chef d’œuvre</i> of these artists is their tapestry work. -It has the definiteness and freedom of drawing, and the delicacy -and feeling of color of an oil painting; nay, deft fingers -with a needle and thread can produce effects in colors that the -painter’s brush can not, because colored threads reflect and -complement each other. This work is done upon the surface -of a canvas, the stitch being similar to that used upon “honey -comb canvas,” all surface work. To make it more effective, a -fabric has been woven with a double warp, the embroidery -being run in under the upper thread, somewhat like darning. -The process and fabrics were invented by Mrs. Wheeler and -are protected by letters-patent in this country and Europe.</p> - -<p>A portrait was woven in this way, thread by thread, so faithful -as to be preferred by the family, to the best work they had -of photographer or painter. A piece of this tapestry has been -under the hands of from one to three embroiderers—or -darners, if you please—every day for nearly a year. It is one -of ten large needle-work pictures of American subjects now in -preparation. One of them is a Zuni Indian girl, by Miss -Rosina Emmett, and another, “Hiawatha,” a typical Indian -girl of the North, by Miss Dora Wheeler. (These two artists -are directors of the Association.) The pictures are life size, -and are very characteristic studies. The remaining eight tapestries -are mainly upon events of American history. Only -close examination would convince any one that they were not oil -paintings. After seeing this work I am inclined to think less -of the famous Bayeux tapestry and all other pictorial needlework. -William the Conqueror was unwise not to have deferred -his exploits until Yankee girls could embroider them. -The best we can now offer William is to invade and conquer -England over again—with American tapestry.</p> - -<p>These high-class works are mentioned simply to show the -height that this line of decorative art has reached, in a short -time, by the efforts of native genius and mechanical skill.</p> - -<p>Nor is the story yet all told of the relation of design to manufactures. -One of the largest manufacturers of paper hangings -in this country not long since offered prizes amounting to -$2,000 for the best four designs for wall paper. The competition -was great, sixty designs being entered by European artists, -and many times more by American. When the awards -were opened the examining committee, as well as the donors, -were astonished to learn that the Associated Artists had taken -all the prizes, the European trained talent none. Now, the -freshest, best-selling patterns for wall paper are of American -design.</p> - -<p>There is more still to tell that is gratifying to patriotism. -These efforts have discovered to the world, as a fact, what was -before the cherished theory of a few, viz.: that an American -school of art already existed, dominant in brains and hands, -waiting to be awakened to activity. There is a distinctive -character in all that has been done in decoration, different -from anything seen in other people’s work. It has a nationality -in choice of subjects and materials, an originality in conception, -a freedom and freshness in treatment, that fairly -mark the beginning of a new school. More than that, when -the work of native designers has come in comparison with -that of the Kensington or other schools, it has justified the -opinion that was expressed at the outset as to the ability of -our women to surpass the latter.</p> - -<p>When the Decorative Society was organized, it sent to Kensington -for a teacher, and employed the one that was the most -highly recommended by the management there. At the close -of the very first lesson that was given by this instructor to the leading -ladies of the society, she was overcome by the reception -her teaching had met. “Why,” she said, ruefully, “these ladies -have got from me, in a single lesson, all that I know. <i>I -have nothing more to teach them.</i>” This incident reveals the -reason for the contrast in work—gives the explanation of the -stereotyped forms and stiff designs of the foreign school. The -difference is in the human material that enters into the work -in either case—the difference of development and general culture -back of special art training. The English girl who is -forced to earn a livelihood by needlework, and qualifies therefor -at Kensington, represents a different order of preparatory -training, general culture, social position and aims, from those -leaders in art who engage in the work <i>con amore</i> in this country. -But there is, also, a race difference that runs through all -society in both countries. The American woman is a thinker—the -English an observer; the American woman is by nature -an innovator, the English conventional; the one an originator, -the other an imitator. The same climatic, dietary, social -and political influences that make the American artisan -the most inventive and free handicraftsman in the world; the -American business man the most daring and rapid, have conspired -to make their sisters, and their cousins, and their aunts -the most original and apt pupils of art in the world. We may -confidently look to them, and the sons that they shall give their -country, to go on and create for it a school of art as free and -as characteristic as are all our institutions.</p> - -<p>The movement is but in the embryo stage. All this is the -result of a single effort, and it is still young. Time is of the essence -of art culture, and the United States offers ample verge -and scope enough for a wonderful work in the future. The -field for invention in decorative art is boundless, because genius -may touch every item and phase of home and carry into -the innermost life of the whole people the refining influence -of Beauty.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_585" id="Page_585">[585]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="SOME_MODERN_LITERARY_MEN_OF_GERMANY">SOME MODERN LITERARY MEN OF GERMANY.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>Professor George Ebers, the distinguished Egyptologist, -strange to say, is known in America more by his novels than -by his scientific attainments. He had a severe attack of rheumatism, -or something similar, which confined him to his bed -for a long time, but did not prevent him from using his mind, -and during this tedious suffering he undertook, as I think he -himself relates, in the preface of his first novel, to put into -story facts and history with which his mind was so richly -stored. The work grew and fascinated him, and now I dare -say it has not only become remunerative but beguiling. Since -the death of Prof. Lepsius, the distinguished scholar of Egyptian -history, George Ebers will doubtless stand in his stead as -the next best informed man in Germany, on Egypt. The deceased -Lepsius thought highly of one of our countrymen, Dr. Joseph -P. Thompson, as a successful student under him, and -here we pay a tribute of respect to this generous man who -never failed to escort party after party of Americans through -the Egyptian department of the Berlin Museum, explaining -the tombs and reading the inscriptions. “The Egyptian -King’s Daughter” is the title of Ebers’s most elaborate -novel, and if one is disposed to read it carefully and observe -all the foot-notes, there is quite a chance for the reader to feel -delighted with himself for all he can acquire in this way about -Egypt, and to have an inexpressible longing for more. And -what a power of enchanting one these Egyptians have, with -their gloomy and mystified learning, and their frequent contemplation -of death. To give the reader an idea of Ebers’s -style, in romance writing and subject matter, we quote what -accurate pictures he gives of all the state of affairs in Egypt. -Speaking of the schools or universities, in his novel entitled -“Uarda,” he says: “The lower school was open to every son -of a free citizen, and was often frequented by several hundred -boys, who also found night quarters there. The parents were, of -course, required either to pay for their maintenance or to send due -supplies of provision for the keep of their children at school. -This university, or school, was connected with the House of -Seti, or one of the sanctuaries of the Necropolis, founded by -Rameses I, and carried on by his son Seti. High festivals -were held there in honor of the god of the gods of the under -world. This extensive building was intended to be equal to -the great original foundations of priestly learning at Heliopolis -and Memphis; they were regulated on the same pattern, -and with the object of raising the royal residence of Upper -Egypt, namely, Thebes, above the capitals of Lower Egypt, in -regard to philosophical distinction.” “Many proficient in the -healing art,” he tells us, “were brought up in the house of -Seti, but few need to remain after passing the examination of -the degree of Scribe. The most gifted were sent to Heliopolis, -where flourished in the great “Hall of the Ancients,” the most -celebrated medical faculty of the whole country, whence they -returned to Thebes, endowed with the highest honors in surgery, -in ocular treatment, or in any other branch of their profession, -and became physicians to the king, or made a living -by imparting their learning, and by being called in to consult -on serious cases.” From this short extract from Ebers any one -can see that he treats his situations, although lying so remote -in history, in the most simple and natural manner. Egypt, -with her enormous architecture, her ponderous institutions, peculiar -beliefs and somber, heated atmosphere, is not to him the -dark “sorceress of the Nile,” but a real, breathing and tangible -thing—he has so seriously studied her that he writes of her -as he would of a familiar friend in whom he is intensely interested.</p> - -<p>Ebers not alone excels in historical pictures and accurate -descriptions, but he has, as a novelist, much feeling, and -makes clear comments on human nature—for example, in -writing of Nebsecht, the learned surgeon, in his novel “Uarda,” -he says: “Nebsecht was of the silent, reserved nature -of the learned man, who, free from all desire of external recognition, -finds a rich satisfaction in the delights of investigation; -and he regarded every demand on him to give proof of -his capacity, as a vexatious but unavoidable intrusion on his -unanswering but laborious and faithful investigations.” Then -he remarks Nebsecht loved Pentaur, who possessed all the -gifts he lacked, manly beauty, child-like lightness of heart, the -frankest openness, artistic power, and the gift of expressing in -word and song every emotion that stirred his soul.</p> - -<p>Again, behold the picture or a glimpse into a feast of the -best Egyptians. In an open court, surrounded by gaily painted -wooden pillars, and lighted by many lamps, sat the feasting -priests in two long rows, on comfortable arm chairs. Before -each stood a little table, and servants were occupied in supplying -them with the dishes and drinks which were laid out on -a splendid table in the middle of the court. Joints of gazelle, -roasted geese and ducks, meat pasties, artichokes, asparagus, -and other vegetables and various cakes and sweet-meats were -carried to the guests, and their beakers well filled with the -choice wines of which there was never a lack in the lofts of -the house of Seti. In the spaces between the guests stood -servants with metal bowls, in which they might wash their -hands, and towels of fine linen.</p> - -<p>“Tante Therese,” a drama in four acts by Paul Lindau, is -a cleverly conceived and brightly written thing, showing that -the writer is full of pathos and wit. The audience cried and -laughed and applauded the first night it was given in Berlin. -In fact, Lindau is so sharp a critic and so talented a writer, -that, as editor of <i>Die Gegenwart</i>, a neat and pungent weekly, -he was a great potentate in Berlin society. His pen spared no -one—musician, artist, soldier—and even royalty fell under its -point if he, Lindau, was not in sympathy with their productions -or actions. He is the life of a dinner party, the most interested -musician and art connoisseur, and among journalists -and in the literary coterie he is the star which lights or exposes -the objects around. His reviews in <i>Die Gegenwart</i> (The -Present) are somewhat after the matter of the reviews in <i>The -Nation</i>—a little pessimistic or hypercritical, but always accomplishing -their object, and whatever comes from his pen is -looked for with eagerness. With a lovely home, and a beautiful -young wife to do its honors, he attracts about him many -brilliant companies. He was once thrown into prison for having -written something which was not prudent in regard to -government matters—the press being not so free in Germany, -as the reader will observe, as in this country.</p> - -<p>Dr. Julius Rodenburg, editor of <i>Die Rundschau</i>, is of Jewish -extraction, resembling Felix Mendelssohn so much that one -must immediately remark it. As Mendelssohn was also a Jew, -the association seems to grow more intimate in one’s mind, as -an acquaintance with this light-hearted, spirited man progresses. -He seems never to be weary—the world and his -friend have a charm for him, and he and his intelligent wife -know well how to attract them to their weekly receptions. -They both speak English well, and have spent some time in -England. He has published a little book entitled “Ferien in -England”—Vacation in England.</p> - -<p>Sometimes he comes out in his review, which corresponds to -our <i>Atlantic Monthly</i>, with learned and elaborate articles, but -his time is, as editor, consumed with other people’s productions. -Editors of papers and presidents of colleges have little time for -anything but reflection upon the merits or demerits of others.</p> - -<p>Ferdinand Gregorovius, half German and half Italian, has<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_586" id="Page_586">[586]</a></span> -published four volumes of the “History of Rome,” also in -1874 a very attractive volume on “Lucrezia Borgia.” In the -back of the book appears a <i>fac-simile</i> letter from Pope Alexander -IV. to Lucrezia, and one of hers to Isabella Gonzogo—most -curious documents.</p> - -<p>Dr. Friedrich Kapp, who came to America when Carl -Schurz did, returned after a short residence and entered -political life in his own country. Beyond his exertion in this -direction he has found time for considerable literary work; -has edited the “Autobiography of Benjamin Franklin,” which -contains a preface by Berthold Auerbach. Dr. Kapp is better -known, perhaps, through the press, than through his books.</p> - -<p>Adolf Stahr, in his book on Goethe’s “Frauengestalten,” or -female characters, gives a close analysis, and if the same -theme has been written and rewritten upon as all Goethe’s -productions have, Stahr maintains a dignified review, as if he -were surveying the subjects for the first time. His wife, who -is a novelist, is equally literary, and the two old people have -grown beautiful in common sympathy in their winter work and -summer resorts. She attracts more attention than he at a -fashionable watering place, but one is the accompaniment of -the other, and both have done honest, good work.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="HISTORIC_NIAGARA">HISTORIC NIAGARA.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY EDITH SESSIONS TUPPER.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>The Chautauquan takes back to his or her busy life in the -school room, the college chair, the pulpit, the sanctum, the -parlor, and the kitchen, many beautiful pictures of memory.</p> - -<p>In fancy does one often see the branches of grand old trees, -fit pillars of one of God’s first temples, cross above one’s head, -making a network for the laughing, blue, summer skies; in -imagination does one again see a green landscape turn golden -in the light of a fast setting sun. Ah! those vistas about the -Hall in the Grove; can not you see those leafy avenues bending -down to the lovely lake, now in the early morning stretching -glassy and waveless, now at noon, tumbling and tossing its -white caps abroad, now in the solemn night lying black and -motionless, and reflecting the light of stars? Can one who has -seen the moon rise over Long Point ever forget the sight? Recall -now that midsummer night, when drifting out in your boat you -idly watched those masses of clouds shift, part and separate to -let the white glory of the moon shine through! How serene and -lofty she hung, poised in mid-heaven. Higher and higher she -climbed, pouring her wealth of light down upon the clouds -heaped beneath her, until they, massed and piled upon each -other, seemed like the glittering domes and towers of a city -not made with hands. In vivid fancy you could almost trace -the shining streets of gold, the gates of pearl, the walls of -precious stones. The summer wind sighed softly around; the -murmuring waters rippled about the keel of your boat; on the -shore the lights danced and flickered like fireflies. Such a -night is never to be forgotten. It is a scene of enchantment, -a mid-summer night’s dream.</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">“In such a night as this,</div> -<div class="verse i1">When the sweet wind did gently kiss the trees</div> -<div class="verse i1">And they did make no noise in such a night,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Troilus methinks mounted the Trojan walls,</div> -<div class="verse i1">And sighed his soul toward the Grecian tents,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Where Cressid’ lay that night.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">“In such a night,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Stood Dido with a willow in her hand,</div> -<div class="verse i1">Upon the wild sea banks, and waved her love</div> -<div class="verse i1">To come again to Carthage.”</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>Ah! these beautiful pictures “that hang on memory’s wall,” -these day dreams, by their potent magic, heal the heart and -brain when life’s fret and worry are hardly to be endured. A -writer has truly said:</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse i13">“’Tis well to dream.”</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">“I dream, and straightway there before me lies</div> -<div class="verse i3">A valley beautifully green and fair;</div> -<div class="verse i1">Bright, sparkling lakes, blue as the summer skies,</div> -<div class="verse i3">And trees and flowers dot it here and there.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">“I wake, and straightway all familiar things</div> -<div class="verse i3">Display new beauty to my wondering gaze.</div> -<div class="verse i1">My soul refreshed by wandering, folds her wings</div> -<div class="verse i3">And finds contentment in life’s common ways.”</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>To all these beautiful pictures of memory many a Chautauquan -adds the remembrance of one indescribable scene—a -look at the great fall.</p> - -<p>A short trip to Niagara is indeed one of the features of a -summer’s sojourn at the city in the woods. Every week a -crowd of excursionists leaves with reluctance the delights of the -fair lake and takes a day’s jaunt to the Falls, which are distant -about eighty miles from Chautauqua. Many of you, my -readers, remember that trip—the magnificent views of Lake -Erie, which you got from time to time, on the way to Buffalo. -Then the run down from that city along Niagara River, past -Fort Erie and Black Rock, historic names. You remember -how your heart beat a little faster when the brakeman called, -“Niagara Falls,” and you realized that you were soon to stand in -sight of one of the wonders of the world. Of course you remember -the clamoring hackmen, once heard not easily forgotten. -Then have you forgotten that short walk or drive down -a shaded street, past many shops filled with feathers and Indian -temptations? Do you recall that dull, booming sound which -suddenly broke upon your ear, and can you not now sense that -delicious, fresh smell of the water as you turned into Prospect -Park, and ah! can you ever forget when you at last stood within -hand reach of that awful presence, when your bewildered and -startled eyes glanced now at the shouting, leaping, laughing, -maddening, scornful rapids; now at that overwhelming mass -which flung itself over that tremendous precipice into a seemingly -bottomless pit? Was it a pleasant day when you were -there? Do you then remember the exquisite coloring of the -water, the dazzling white, the vivid green, the pellucid blue? -How the sun seemed to catch up every drop of that vast volume, -and shine through it, giving a tiny rainbow effect to every -crystalline particle? How the rapids called aloud to each -other in glee, and chased one another in a mad race, as to -which should first make that mighty leap? Or was it a dull, -gloomy day? Then did they not shriek aloud in horror, and -hurl themselves in black and hissing despair to their awful -plunge?</p> - -<p>Did you chance at nightfall to drive or walk about Goat -Island, and hear the chattering and cawing of myriads of -crows, which blackened the tree tops? This is their rendezvous, -and the woods are alive with them, and their weird -sounds at dusk, added to that ever present, sullen roar, produce -an unearthly and fantastic effect. Did not your breath almost -forsake your body when you crossed to the three fair sisters -lying so peacefully far out in the midst of that seething, tumbling, -foaming hell of waters?</p> - -<p>At night you saw the electric lights turned on the American -Fall, playing now with sulphuric effect, now giving a ghastly, -blue appearance, and now turning this white, pure Undine to -a very Scarlet Woman. The day on which you first saw these -pictures will long be marked with a red letter in your calendar.</p> - -<p>But, sublime as is the physical beauty of Niagara, we have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_587" id="Page_587">[587]</a></span> -to deal with quite another phase of her character; one of -which the tourist, limited by time, seldom thinks. It is only -after becoming familiar with every inch of her picturesque surroundings, -after spending days and weeks drinking in her superb -beauty, content to sit, oblivious of time or space, or sun -or sky, that one at last remembers that for many miles around -the ground is covered with the footprints of history. Ground -that has echoed the thundering tread of armies, that has been -drunken with the blood of brave men, that now smiles peacefully, -from which violets spring, and on which children play.</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">“Once this soft turf, this rivulet’s sands</div> -<div class="verse i3">Were trampled by a hurrying crowd,</div> -<div class="verse i1">And fiery hearts and armed hands</div> -<div class="verse i3">Encountered in the battle cloud.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">“Now all is calm and fresh and still,</div> -<div class="verse i3">Alone the chirp of flitting bird</div> -<div class="verse i1">And talk of children on the hill,</div> -<div class="verse i3">And bell of wandering kine is heard.”</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>To say nothing of the French and Indian wars, the country -about Niagara was the scene of many of the fiercest struggles -of the war of 1812, and some of the sorest defeats to the American -side. The battle of Queenston Heights and Lundy’s -Lane, or Bridgewater, were both disastrous to the American -cause, while Fort George, at the mouth of Niagara River, a -hard earned and costly acquisition of the Americans, was -wrested from them by General Drummond, who also laid waste -Lewiston, Youngstown, Tuscarora, and Manchester, then -called, now the village of Niagara Falls. Those were dark -days for the Americans, when they fought not only Englishmen, -but crafty and treacherous Indians.</p> - -<p>The first great battle of the campaign on the Niagara during -the war of 1812, was that of Queenston Heights, on the 13th of -October. This was the second attempted invasion of Canada, the -first having been the humiliating failure of Hull, at Detroit, in -August previous. General Stephen Van Rensselaer determined -to capture Queenston Heights, and for that purpose, early in the -morning, sent two small columns down the river, most of which -succeeded in landing under a brisk fire from the vigilant English. -Captain John E. Wool led the Regulars up the hill, and -was met by the British on the broad plateau, where a sharp engagement -took place, ending in the Americans being forced -back to the beach. Here they were reinforced and ordered to -scale the Heights. This order was obeyed, and for a short -time the Americans had the advantage, when suddenly brave -General Brock, who defeated Hull at Detroit, and who was now -at Fort George, at the mouth of the river, having ridden from -thence at full speed, appeared and took command. A furious -contest followed, in which the Americans, though fighting with -the bravery of despair, were driven to the extreme edge of the -precipice, and in which Brock fell, mortally wounded.</p> - -<p>Then General Winfield Scott crossed the river and assumed -command of the American forces, expecting to be reinforced -by the militia, but through stubbornness and cowardice they -fell back on their prerogative, and refused to be taken out of -the state. Twice was Scott attacked by the British and Indians, -and twice repelled them with the bayonet, but at the -third attack the Americans were obliged to retreat. Back, back, -further yet, over the edge of that awful chasm they went -scrambling from ledge to ledge, leaping from rock to rock, -stumbling, falling, blindly catching at twig, branch, stem, -blade of grass, even, powder blackened, faint, weary, bleeding, -wounded, dying, only to reach the river to find no boats -waiting to succor them, compelled at last to surrender. Ah! -dead heroes! that was indeed a descent into Avernus.</p> - -<p>In this engagement the Americans lost one thousand men.</p> - -<p>Let the visitor to Niagara not leave until he has taken the -drive to Queenston Heights. It is only seven miles below the -cataract, not a long drive for a summer afternoon. A pretty -drive, too, past many beautiful farms and country seats. Once -there one can drive to the top of the broad plateau, on -which the lofty and magnificent monument to General Brock -stands. Now leave your carriage, go to the front of the plateau, -and look. What a view! Directly at your feet lies old -Queenstown; across the river old Lewistown; for seven miles -before you, peacefully and languidly, as if weary from its terrible -work up above, flows the green river, flecked with foam. -Yonder, at its mouth, lies Fort Niagara, on the American side; -the ruins of Forts George and Mississaga, on the Canadian -side, while beyond, far as the eye can reach, stretches Lake -Ontario, flooded with the light of a western sun—a sea of glass, -mingled with fire.</p> - -<p>In the spring of 1813, Isaac Chauncey, an American Commodore, -after a successful expedition against York, now Toronto, -which he held for four days and then abandoned, after -firing the government buildings, captured Fort George. The -Americans held it until the following December, when General -Drummond appeared on the peninsula, between Lakes Ontario -and Erie. On his approach the American garrison abandoned -Fort George and fled across the river to Fort Niagara. -As they went they ruthlessly burned the village of Newark. -One week after, the British captured Fort Niagara, and killed -eighty of the garrison, showing no quarter to the sick in the -hospital. Then followed the triumphant march of the British -up the American side of the river, burning and sacking -Youngstown, Lewistown, Tuscarora, Niagara Falls, even to -Black Rock and Buffalo. All the farms were laid waste, and -desolation stalked relentlessly through the entire region.</p> - -<p>The whole campaign on the Niagara had been a series of -blunders, and was most disastrous to the American cause.</p> - -<p>The old town of Niagara, at the mouth of the river, is to-day -an interesting and picturesque place to visit. Here the tourist -takes the steamer for Toronto, and if he have an hour or two -to wait, let him stroll about through the beautifully shaded -streets, past the elegant hotels and private country seats, for -the old town is a famous summer resort now, and is likely to -be still more attractive, for a little Chautauqua is soon to spring -up within stone-throw of the ruined breastworks of old Fort -George.</p> - -<p>From the round tower of Fort Mississaga, which commanded -the harbor, one gets a superb view of the lake and of Fort Niagara, -just over the border on the American side. Fort and -lighthouse are in capital condition, and the sight of the flutter -of the stars and stripes against the blue sky is very dear to the -American who stands on British soil, and, thinking of all it has -cost to preserve that flag, realizes that it is still there.</p> - -<p>In 1814, the Secretary of War having persisted in his project -to invade Canada, determined, as a first step, to take Kingston. -In order to conceal this movement, and also that there might -be no enemy left in the rear, Major-General Brown, of the -American forces, commenced operations on the peninsula, between -Lakes Erie and Ontario.</p> - -<p>On the 2nd of July he left Buffalo, and captured Fort Erie, -on the opposite side of the river. He then pursued his way -down the river until he reached Chippewa Creek. He then -fell back a little to Street’s Creek, and waited for the main -body of the force, which arrived on the morning of the 5th.</p> - -<p>General Scott’s camp was located on a little plain lying mid-way -between these two creeks. In the afternoon he ordered -out his brigade for a dress parade. Approaching the bridge -he was met by General Brown, who informed him that a battle -was imminent. The head of Scott’s column had scarcely -reached the bridge when the British opened fire from the extensive -forests that surrounded the creek. Riall, the British -General, sneered contemptuously at the “Buffalo militia,” as -he believed them when they first came in sight, but when he -saw them cross the bridge steadily under fire, he discovered -they were Regulars. General Peter B. Porter had command on -Scott’s left, and his men fought well until charged by the bayonet, -when they gave way. Major Jesup, however, covered<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_588" id="Page_588">[588]</a></span> -the exposed flank, and the fighting became hot and furious -along the entire front. After a time the right wing of the British -disengaged from the line and charged against Jesup. Scott -was quick to observe this, and in his turn charged against the -exposed flank. Simultaneously Leavenworth attacked the left -wing of the British, and through the gap between these two -attacking columns, Towson’s battery poured in its canister -with speedy effect, and the British soon retreated in great confusion, -and the Americans had won their only decisive victory -on Niagara.</p> - -<p>Chippewa is to-day a tumbledown, uninteresting spot, attractive -only to the student of history. There are some beautiful -private residences near the town, on the banks of the -river, and just below the village the river breaks into the rapids. -After the well fought battle of Chippewa, the invasion of -Canada seemed more feasible. General Brown was very sanguine -of success, providing he could secure Commodore -Chauncey’s assistance, with his fleet. He wrote urgently to -Chauncey, assuring him that the British force at Kingston was -very light, and that between their two forces they could conquer -Canada in two months, if they were active and vigilant. -But those qualities Chauncey did not possess; besides, he was -ill, and thought he had more important business on hand than -to carry provisions for the troops, and therefore did nothing. -Nearly opposite the American Fall a road runs back over the -hill, past the Clifton House and the Canada Southern Railroad -Depot. The tourist following this road, and turning to the left -after passing the depot, will soon find himself in a beautiful -little village. Cottages of quaint and old fashioned design, -nearly covered with vines and roses, and narrow lanes in lieu -of streets, are its distinguishing features. Up a hill you go -past a brick church, and a graveyard, in which you may find -many curious inscriptions. The top of the hill is reached. -Look back down that pleasant street, where old trees stretch -out their long arms to meet each other. See those comfortable -happy homes on each side. Hear that group of children laugh -at their play; and listen, from that little brick Methodist -church, on a soft summer evening, come the solemn strains -of an old time hymn. No more peaceful, pastoral scene in the -world, and yet the spot on which we stand was the scene of -frightful carnage, terrific struggle, horrible bloodshed; here -was fought the famous battle of Lundy’s Lane. At noon of -July 25, 1814, General Brown received intelligence at Chippewa, -that General Drummond had reached Fort George -the night previous, with reinforcements, with which he intended -to capture the stores of the Americans at Fort Schlosser, -which was located just above the rapids, on the American -side. Scott—now a Brigadier-General—was ordered forward to -divert the enemy from this project. He had advanced about two -miles when he was confronted by the entire British force, drawn -up in Lundy’s Lane. Scott engaged the right wing of the British, -ordering Jesup to look after the left. These movements -were successful, Jesup capturing many prisoners, among whom -was General Riall. After the battle was well under way, General -Brown arrived from Chippewa with reinforcements. The British -held an eminence on which were planted seven guns. General -Brown saw at once that unless this battery could be captured -no impression could be made.</p> - -<p>“Can you take that battery?” he asked Colonel James Miller.</p> - -<p>“I’ll try, sir,” was the memorable answer of Miller—and he -tried. It was now night, and the approach of Miller’s men -was hidden by a high fence. The gunners held their lighted -matches in their hands when Miller’s men thrust their muskets -through the fence, shot down the men at the guns, rushed forward -and captured the battery.</p> - -<p>The British made two valiant attempts to retake the battery, -but were not successful. Generals Brown, Scott, and Major -Jesup were all wounded, and the command devolved upon the -inefficient Ripley, who, after idly waiting half an hour, anticipating -another attack, instead of following up the advantage -already gained, withdrew from the field. The British returned, -took possession of the field and the battery which Miller had -captured. The American forces were obliged to beat a retreat -to Chippewa for food and water, and the British claimed the -victory as the last occupants of the field. The loss of men on -both sides was about equal.</p> - -<p>Drummond followed the Americans to Fort Erie, opposite -Buffalo, and there ensued a regular siege until the 17th of September, -when the Americans made a sudden sortie and destroyed -the works of the enemy. This was accomplished only -by terrific fighting on both sides, in which the Americans lost -five hundred men, and the British nine hundred. Drummond -now abandoned the siege, and in October the Americans destroyed -Fort Erie, and returned to their own side of the river. -Thus ended the campaign on the Niagara. It had been productive -of no results save the digging of thousands of -graves, and proving to the British that the raw Yankee troops -were able to give the trained English soldiers some hard -work.</p> - -<p>Just above Goat Island, where the river breaks into rapids, -on the American side, the tourist notices the ruins of Fort -Schlosser, of which we have spoken before as containing -stores and provisions on which General Drummond had designs. -Later history has something to say of this fort. Here -occurred a circumstance out of which grew results which for -a time threatened a third war between England and the United -States. In 1837, just after the close of the second Seminole -war, a rebellion broke out in Canada. Great sympathy was -felt on the American side, for the insurgents. Despite the fact -that the United States made great efforts to preserve neutrality, -a small American steamer, the “Caroline,” made regular -trips across to Navy Island, carrying supplies to a party of five -hundred insurgents, who were staying there. In December, -one Captain Drew was sent out from Chippewa with a force to -capture this steamer. He did not find her at Navy Island, as -he expected, and so crossed to Grand Island, which was -American territory, boarded her, killed twelve men on board, -towed her out in the stream, set her on fire, and left her to -drift down the river and go over the Falls.</p> - -<p>The United States promptly demanded redress, but could -obtain no satisfaction for three years. In 1840, one McLeod, -who had boasted of his part in this affair, came over to the -American side, where he was under indictment for murder. -He was seized and held for trial.</p> - -<p>The British government demanded his release on the ground -that he had participated in an act of war, and therefore could -not for that act be tried before a civil court. The President -answered that as yet the United States had received no answer -to the question whether the burning of the “Caroline” had -been an authorized act of war. In all events the administration -could not interfere with a state court, and prevent it from -trying any one indicted within its limits. England threatened -war unless McLeod was released; but the trial proceeded. -The two countries would doubtless have been brought into -conflict had not McLeod been acquitted. It was proved that -he was asleep in Chippewa at the time the “Caroline” was -burned, and that a vain desire for notoriety had caused him to -inculpate himself. There was great excitement in 1841, over -this trial, which was augmented by the indifferent attitude of -acting President Tyler. A District Attorney of New York was -allowed to act as McLeod’s counsel, and retain his office, thus -presenting the astonishing spectacle of a government officer -attempting to prove, in such a question as this, which was liable -to result in war, his own government to be in the wrong.</p> - -<p>Nothing now remains of Fort Schlosser but a tall, gaunt chimney, -which has weathered for many long years the terrific -winds which sweep down the river.</p> - -<p>Throughout this fair and smiling region there are but few traces -of these fierce battles.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_589" id="Page_589">[589]</a></span></p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">“No solemn host goes trailing by</div> -<div class="verse i3">The black-mouthed gun and staggering wain;</div> -<div class="verse i1">Men start not at the battle cry,—</div> -<div class="verse i3">O, be it never heard again.”</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>No blackened farms and desolated villages; no rattle of musketry -and roar of cannon; the sword is turned into plow-share -and pruning hook; from the soil watered with the blood -of heroes spring thrifty orchards and sweet flowers; in the -place of fire from the blazing torch of red handed war rises -the smoke of prosperous town and thriving hamlet; Canada -and the United States stretching out friendly hands to each -other; the Union Jack and the Stars and Stripes floating side -by side; peace, plenty, and prosperity on both sides the broad -river. Everything is changed save the great Falls themselves. -Unceasingly they do their awful work; unceasingly their thunders -sound; unceasingly their mists roll heavenward.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="TWO_FASHIONABLE_POISONS">TWO FASHIONABLE POISONS.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY M. P. REGNARD.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>Some one said one day before Fontenelle, that coffee was a -slow poison. “I can bear witness to that,” replied the witty -academician, “for it will soon be fifty years since I began taking -it every day.”</p> - -<p>This, which was on the part of the cultivated scholar, a brilliant -sally of wit, is, alas! the common reasoning of many -people who, simply because danger does not immediately confront -them, allow themselves to be slowly but surely drawn to -the tomb, because, forsooth, the way, for the time being, is -pleasant, or fashionable!</p> - -<p>In the midst of us there are persons poisoning themselves to -death. I refer to those addicted to the use of morphine. In -England they have another class of these unfortunates, for -whom the most adulterated liquors no longer suffice, and who -drink ether; they are a sort of perfected inebriates, who by the -scientific laws of progress succeed simple drunkards just as -habitual morphine users follow the opium smokers of China. -Our fathers in Asia who have already bequeathed to us many -misfortunes, held in check until within recent years, among -themselves, the singular taste which they have for opium. -Let me tell you in a few words of the ancestors of morphine -users of to-day, and you will better understand the history of -the latter.</p> - -<p>The mania for opium eating diminishes rather than increases -among the Mussulmans. Zambaco, who for a long time lived -in the Orient, gives the reason. The Turk seeks in opium only -intoxication—a delicious sort of annihilation—which he finds -to-day more readily in champagne or Bordeaux wine. These -give him, in addition, the pleasures of taste. Then, too, he can -indulge himself freely in them, and still hold to the letter of the -Koran. In the time of Mahomet neither rum nor cognac were -invented; it does not then forbid them. But that which is not -forbidden is permitted, and so the Mussulman, who considers -wine so impure that he will not touch it, even with his hands, -will become beastly intoxicated upon brandy, and think that -by this process he is not compromising his part in Paradise. -But their religionists—and above all their medical men—do not -reason thus. They still cling to the opium.</p> - -<p>Its first effect upon the system is far from causing sleep. It -is rather a sort of intellectual and physical excitant, which -renders the Oriental (in his natural state sad and silent), turbulent, -loquacious, excitable, and quarrelsome.</p> - -<p>These Turks are not contented to take opium themselves, -they give it also to their horses. “I have just,” says Burns, -“traveled all night with a cavalier of this country. After a fatiguing -ride of about thirty miles I was obliged to accept the -proposition he made to rest for a few minutes. He employed -this time in dividing with his exhausted horse a dose of opium -of about two grammes. The effects were very soon evident -upon both; the horse finished with ease a journey of forty -miles, and the cavalier became more animated.”</p> - -<p>In China they do not eat opium, they smoke it. There is an -historical fact connected with them well known to all the world -to which I would not now call attention were it not to show -you to what extent a like calamity may go, and consequently -with what the French people are threatened if the love of morphine -continues to take among us the same intensity.</p> - -<p>Hundreds of years ago opium was, in the Chinese empire, a -great luxury, reserved for the mandarins, who did not keep secret -at all their use of it, but who interdicted it to all persons under -their jurisdiction. All the more did they consider it a great -honor to their invited guests, and especially to strangers, to be -asked to partake of it. Recently it has come into general use, -and since 1840 its abuse has reached the last limits. There is -for all this an economic reason which I shall not fear to call -abominable. The Chinese received in payment for their products -only gold and silver, in money or in ingots; the specie -thus introduced into their country never left it, and it was a -veritable drainage which on this account Europe and America -underwent.</p> - -<p>A neighboring nation of ours, and one whose Indian possessions -furnish prodigious quantities of opium, forced China, -in a celebrated treaty, to allow the entrance of this opium into -her ports and to pay for it in ingots and not in merchandise; -the empire was thus obliged to disgorge a part of its money -held in reserve. You will have an idea of the importance of -this operation when you know that to-day there enters annually -into China 70,000 packing cases of opium from India, worth -at least $558,000. So much poison forced by right of war upon -a whole people!</p> - -<p>The Chinese smoke opium from the age of twenty to twenty-five -years. The immediate effect is a sort of dizzy sensation. -The preoccupations of the mind disappear, as do also all ailments -of the body. Then comes a noisy delirium, a kind of -insanity, in which the subject is deeply agitated; he is apt to -hurl down and break everything around him. Sometimes he -rushes out of the house, attacks the first passer-by, and not -infrequently in his frenzy has committed murder.</p> - -<p>The opium smoker, as well as the eater, is obliged rapidly -to increase the dose of his poison. At the end of six or eight -months he must smoke a dozen pipes a day. His money is -soon all spent; he is ruined in a year. He sells all that he possesses, -and then he gambles. Writers agree in saying that -the maximum of the life of a smoker is then five or six years.</p> - -<p>In the face of such an evil as this the imperial government -has tried to act on the defensive; it placed a heavy duty on -the entrance of opium; but this system was not successful. -And before this attempt it tried penal jurisprudence.</p> - -<p>This is the decree which the Viceroy of Canton published in -1841:</p> - -<p>“It is two years since the Emperor of the Celestial Empire -forbade all his subjects to smoke opium. This delay of -grace expires the twelfth day of the twelfth moon of this year. -Then all those guilty of offense against this law will be put to -death, their heads will be exposed in public, in order to frighten -those who might be tempted to follow their example.” (Then -follows this modification.) “I have reflected, however, that -solitary confinement would be more efficacious than capital<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_590" id="Page_590">[590]</a></span> -punishment, in order to arrest such a dreadful misdemeanor. -I declare then, that I am going to have built a special prison -for opium smokers. There they will all, rich or poor, be shut -in narrow cells, lighted by one window, with two boards serving -as a bed and a seat. They will be given each day a ration -of oil, of rice, and of vegetables. In case of a second -offense they will be put to death.”</p> - -<p>This legislation was not practicable. The punishment was -out of proportion to the crime, and consequently inapplicable.</p> - -<p>Besides, in looking around him the emperor found that his -own wives smoked opium, and I would not guarantee that if -he meant to live up to the letter of his law, he would not have -to begin by committing suicide.</p> - -<p>After this legislation they tried moralization and preaching. -The misfortunes of the opium smoker were depicted in an infinite -number of ways. All this propagandism had about as little -success as societies against intemperance, and this state of -affairs is existing to-day in the East.</p> - -<p>There are not noticeably many opium eaters or smokers -among the French. But every one knows that the people of -the Orient have for their European brothers the morphine -users. There is between the first and second the same difference -that is found in everything pertaining to barbarous and -to cultivated men. Civilization prescribes as to the manner of -the poisoning.</p> - -<p>While the Oriental eats or smokes simply the juice of the -poppy almost as nature furnishes it, the European is more refined, -and wishes only the active principles of opium. So he -uses it prepared in such a way as to have lost almost entirely -its disagreeable properties.</p> - -<p>How does one become a morphine user when he is a Frenchman, -an inhabitant of Paris, and when there is not a temptation -to it from the fact of a general habit, or the existence of -special establishments? This can be accounted for by two -methods. The most common is some painful affliction -from which one is suffering, it may be neuralgia, acute dyspepsia, -or violent headaches. The physician, often at the end of -his resources, prescribes injecting a little morphine under the -skin. The effect is marvelous; the pain ceases instantly, but -temporarily. The next day it returns with new force. The -afflicted patient remembers the success of yesterday, and insists -upon his anodyne. It seems necessary to give it, and so -it goes on for several days. Soon the nature of the drug manifests -itself: no longer will one injection a day answer; there -must be two, then three, later four, and so on, always increasing, -until it reaches formidable quantities. Meantime, the original -trouble may have entirely disappeared, but the patient -does not cease to use the remedy. The first time that the -sick one insists upon having the treatment the doctor is called -to perform the operation. But soon, as it becomes necessary -to repeat the process oftener, making it expensive, it is -entrusted to the nurse or to the family, and from that day the -patient is lost; for how can the supplications of a suffering person -whom one loves be resisted? Then on a day the sick one -practices on himself—and from that on, without any control, -with the avidity of passion, he uses the drug in the quantities of -which I have told you.</p> - -<p>This is one way in which many victims fall into this sad -habit. There is another. The victims of the second method -are those who seek in exciting tonics the sensations which -their weakened nerves and their surfeited imagination can no -longer afford them. These are the proselytes of a veritable -association, and they, in their turn, soon become missionaries -in the same cause. It is a habit which the vicious have of -wishing to make others like themselves. The fable of the fox -which had its tail cut off is not a fable of yesterday. Two -friends meet; one of them complains of slight annoyances; -dullness, <i>ennui</i>; he no longer enjoys anything; the world, the -races, the theater, do not procure for him distraction; he is -<i>bored to death</i>. His friend admits that he also has suffered in -the same way, but that he had recourse to morphine, of which -some one had told him, and that he found in it a perfect cure. -And thus by such conversations there is formed, as it were, a -new class; they are the volunteers in this unhappy army.</p> - -<p>One can but remark, that luxury, which tends to introduce -itself everywhere, has already invaded the domain of morphine. -The little syringe of Pravas, which permits of the injection -of the poison under the skin, and the consequent avoidance -of the bitter taste and the nausea which would be occasioned -by eating morphine, has received ingenious and -artistic modifications. It was necessary to render it easy to -carry, and at the same time to make it deceptive to the eye. I -visited a surgical instrument maker at Paris, and he placed at -my disposal for inspection his whole line of morphine instruments, -those which the taste, the luxury, or the imagination of -his clients had caused him to fabricate.</p> - -<p>There was first the syringe, containing a centigram of morphine, -such as the physicians employ. It was not delicate -enough, was difficult to handle and difficult to conceal; it is -used now only by those who no longer care to conceal their -vice—who feel no shame in regard to it. Then there was one -adroitly concealed in a match box. At one side was a little -bottle containing a dose of powder necessary for a half day. -There was, too, a false cigar holder, containing all that was -necessary for injecting the poison. But most remarkable of -all was a long, sheath-like instrument. It is somewhat inconvenient -in the midst of company to put the morphine into the -syringe before making a puncture. This sheath, filled beforehand, -can be carried in the pocket; the puncture can be made, -and to inject the drug it is only necessary to move the piston -in a certain direction; in the evening the sheath will be found -empty. There were little gold syringes contained in smelling -bottles; a little silver sheath which one would take for an embroidery -stiletto; open it; it contains an adorable little syringe -of gold and a bottle of the poison.</p> - -<p>Among morphine users in fashionable life they make gifts -according to their taste, and there are manufactured syringes -and bottles enameled, engraved, and emblematic—in every -conceivable device.</p> - -<p>Do men more often become subject to this vice than -women? According to the printed statistics, yes. Out of every -one hundred who used the drug there are counted only twenty-five -women. But practicing physicians say that the women -are the more numerous victims. They are more artful, and try -to keep the habit concealed; they do not consult the physicians -regarding it, and so are not counted in the statistical returns.</p> - -<p>Is it then so very agreeable to live under the influence of -this poison, since so many people expose themselves, for its -sake, to such grave perils? To this I reply, no, not at the beginning. -It is with this vice as with others, the beginning is -hard. The first injections are not enjoyable—the puncture is -painful, and sometimes nausea follows. But the habit is -easily and quickly formed, and the disagreeable effects disappear. -The introduction of the morphine produces almost immediately -a sort of general vagueness, an annihilation of being -which causes to disappear all external realities and replaces -them by a sort of happy reverie; and at the same time the -mind seems more alert, more active. Physical and moral -grievances disappear, all troubles are forgotten for the time -being. “You know,” says Mr. Ball, “the famous soliloquy of -Hamlet, and the passage where the Prince cries out that without -the fear of the unknown, no one would hesitate to escape -by means of a sharp point from the evils of life which he suffers, -in order to enter into repose. Ah well! this sharp point -of which Shakspere speaks—this liberating needle—we possess; -it is the syringe of Pravas. By one plunge a person can -efface all sufferings of mind and of body; the injustice of men -and of fortune; and understand from this time on, the irresistible -empire of this marvelous poison.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_591" id="Page_591">[591]</a></span></p> - -<p>The habit of taking ether is induced by the same causes -that lead to the use of morphine. The danger, however, is -not so great, and the habit can more easily be broken up. At -the end of the inhalation one experiences a little dizziness that -is not at all disagreeable; the sight becomes a little blurred, -and the ears ring; the mental conceptions become gay, charming; -hallucinations are developed, generally very pleasing. It -is not necessary to increase the dose, for one would then reach -a state of excitement, or be thrown into a sound sleep, such as -physicians produce. Those who use it know this well, and -moderate the dose, in order to make the pleasure of long duration. -After the inhalation the subject returns almost immediately -to his natural state. There is a little heaviness in the -head and a dullness of the mind. Morphine users can secretly -indulge in their habit, but ether emits a penetrating odor. In -London, where it is more frequently practiced, the keepers of -public squares and large parks often find in the more retired -places empty bottles labeled “Sulphuric Ether.” These have -been thrown down by those who have left their homes in order -to give themselves up in the open air to their favorite passion.</p> - -<p>These victims commence by breathing ether. Then they -drink a few drops—and after a while larger quantities. This -burning liquid soon becomes a necessity; and some even go -so far as to drink chloroform—a veritable caustic.</p> - -<p>Can anything be done for these unfortunate people? Yes, -certainly—but only on one condition—that they wish to be -cured. The best method is to separate, instantly, entirely, the -patient from his family; to place him in an establishment -where his movements can be watched, where he can be debarred, -suddenly or gradually, as shall be judged best, from -the poison.</p> - -<p>The Americans—a practical people—have already built asylums -for the treatment of morphine users. The Germans have -recently finished two, one at Marienberg, the other at Schönberg.</p> - -<p>But unfortunately, the French law does not permit us to do -this. We can place in hospitals only those poison users who -have become maniacs or idiots.</p> - -<p>If the French are to be saved from this rapidly increasing -evil, it is evidently necessary to prevent its beginnings. In order -to do this, the sick must be kept from procuring it. Its sale -must be regulated so that it will be impossible to get it in any -quantity, or to use the same prescription twice. The emperor -of Germany, upon the proposition of Prince Bismarck, has issued -a decree to this effect. Under such a regulation the law -for the physician would be never to prescribe the use of these -drugs save in cases of absolute necessity.</p> - -<p>The reading of medical books by the people is generally -pernicious. I would, however, permit them to read the recent -accounts of the effects of these drugs. If they are of comparatively -late origin, these two fashionable poisons have already -destroyed more victims than in a whole century has all the -poison used by assassins.—<i>An Abridged Translation for “The -Chautauquan” from the “Révue Scientifique.”</i></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="OUR_C_L_S_C_COLUMN">OUR C. L. S. C. COLUMN.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY CHANCELLOR J. H. VINCENT, D.D.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>For the past year I have given in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> a series -of articles on the interior significance and higher aims -of the Chautauqua movement, instead of the answers to questions -which filled the C. L. S. C. column in former years. The -closing article of this year must be made up of answers to -questions which are of general interest.</p> - -<p>1. A correspondent inquires “whether Alfred Ayres, author -of the ‘Orthoepist,’ and editor of the English Grammar of -William Corbett, is a recognized standard authority in pronunciation, -and whether he should be preferred to Webster or -Worcester.” To this I can only reply that I do not so understand -Mr. Ayres’s claim or position in the field of letters. He -certainly is not accepted as are Webster and Worcester; and -the chief advantage of his little volumes is in showing what -one man who has given much attention to the subject of pronunciation -thinks on the subject. That is all.</p> - -<p>2. “How can a knowledge of Greek, Roman, or any other -history be of any benefit to me? I prefer to study the works -of God, and in chemistry and other departments of science to -trace the signs of his wisdom.”</p> - -<p><i>Answer</i>: It is important to study God’s great gifts to the race -in the great characters of history and literature. The genius -of Homer is as much a wonder as is any fact in physical -science. Acquaintance with the vivacity, enterprise and energy -of the Greek character is as valuable to people who now -live in the world as is a knowledge of the physical constitution, -shape, habits of life, and movements of the colossal creatures -reported by geology as having occupied this planet ages -on ages ago. No education is complete that has not to some -extent been influenced by the spirit of the old Greek culture. -The whole history of that people shows the impotence of mere -culture without moral character, and we may trace through the -ages of Greek history the evidences of divine wisdom and justice. -By all means let us study natural science, but let us not -abandon history. Whatever pertains to man in any age of -the world should possess peculiar interest to us.</p> - -<p>3. “People in our neighborhood often say to me: ‘Why -study those books? You will not live to finish the course; and -if you do, what good will it do you or your children?’”</p> - -<p><i>Answer</i>: Ignorant people often ask the question, “Of what -use is education, beyond a small amount of reading, writing -and arithmetic? Why should people who have to work in -kitchens and fields study the stars? Why should men who -neither care to act on the stage, or to write for the press, give -much attention to William Shakspere?” Whatever our business -may be, we need to read general literature because we -are members of society, and owe something as rational beings -to society. Parents should keep in sympathy with their children, -whose world of knowledge must of necessity in this age -grow wider and richer all the time. We are, moreover, members -of this universe, and God is our Father. We have a -right as his children to know something about his works and -ways and wisdom. Life is a wearisome thing to people who -are ignorant. There is sustaining power in the large thoughts -which a true culture brings. If one expects to live forever with -God, he should cultivate noble and worthy character on this side -the grave, and such nobility is increased and such holiness promoted -by a wide range of reading and study with worthy motive.</p> - -<p>4. I am happy to announce that the “Chautauqua Press” -has been fully organized. Under its direction some of the -books of the C. L. S. C. will be published, and a series of -standard books will be issued at once for the formation of -home libraries; books adapted to the special courses and -bearing also upon the Required Readings.</p> - -<p>The first series of three or four volumes will be ready by -August 1st, and will supplement the regular work of the coming -C. L. S. C. year. While all the classes are reading Roman -History, Latin Literature, Italian Biography, and Italian Art, -our “Chautauqua Library, … Garnet Series,” will -provide for those who wish to read more than the required -books, and for those who, as graduates, wish to win seals, the -following admirable volumes:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_592" id="Page_592">[592]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Readings from Macaulay. Italy. With an Introduction by Donald -G. Mitchell (Ik Marvel).”</p> - -<p>“Readings from Ruskin. Italy. With an Introduction by H. A. -Beers, Professor of English Literature in Yale College.”</p> - -<p>“Art and the Cultivation of Taste, by Lucy Crane, with an Introduction -by Charles S. Whiting, of the Springfield (Mass.) <i>Republican</i>.”</p> - -<p>[The fourth volume of the first series will soon be announced.]</p> - -<p>This series of four volumes will constitute a special course, for -the reading of which the Garnet Seal (a new one) will be given -to all graduates, and may be won by those undergraduates who -are able to do more than the Required Reading for each year.</p> - -<p>The Chautauqua Press will soon have on hand a rich library -of cheap but handsomely printed and bound volumes with -which every Chautauquan will desire to decorate and enrich -“The Chautauqua Corner.”</p> - -<p>Now we are on the eve of another summer of rest, of convocation, -of Assembly reunions. From these retreats comes -much of inspiration which keeps the Chautauqua movement -in operation during the remainder of the year. Let me urge -all members who can possibly do so to attend the nearest Assembly. -Go to the Round-Table. Record your name on the -list kept by the local secretary. Show your colors, and thus -lend your influence to the Circle.</p> - -<p>In behalf of the administration, the president, the counselors, -the secretaries, I extend to all members of the Circle a -hearty salutation; and to all of you who read these lines who -have for any reason grown remiss or apathetic in C. L. S. C. -service, I give an earnest invitation to come back, resume -your readings, join the class of ’89, and make sure of a successful -four years’ course.</p> - -<p>You will join me, I am sure, in one universal Chautauqua -salute to the honored editor of <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> and his -competent associates and contributors as our tribute to the -ability with which our monthly has been conducted.</p> - -<p>And now, as we “study the word and the works of God,” -may our Heavenly Father be “in the midst,” and “may we -never be discouraged” in pursuing the high and beautiful -ideal of the C. L. S. C.: The attainment of symmetrical and -practical culture which will fit us the better to serve our fellows -upon the earth, and to enjoy the blessings promised by our -Father in the heavens!</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">Plainfield, N. J.</span>, May 21, 1885.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="GLIMPSES_OF_THE_CHAUTAUQUA_PROGRAM">GLIMPSES OF THE CHAUTAUQUA PROGRAM.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>A part of our creed of late has come to be that we need -change in summer. If our homes are in cities, we need it because -we can not have there the requisites of good health—fresh -air, pure water, quiet; if we live in the country, we want -and need a change which will give us social advantages; if -we are teachers or students, we want opportunities to see, to get -new ideas, to observe new people and their customs. This -theory of summer living makes the demand for summer resorts. -It is rare, however, that any place offers with any degree -of completeness health, society and opportunities. It is -claimed for Chautauqua that all three may be found there; -that it is, in short, an ideal summer resort, open to all classes -of people. The outlook for Chautauqua in 1885 confirms this -claim, and gives to its admirers most satisfactory glimpses of -what is in store for them during the coming season.</p> - -<p>Chautauqua is fortunate in having had candid, disinterested -men examine its condition and management, and pronounce -their verdict as to its healthfulness. One of the most critical -examiners of public places in America, Hon. B. G. Northrup, -made his visit to Chautauqua last summer a kind of inspection -tour. He pried into every corner and cranny, and publicly -denounced every abuse he found. With “courage indomitable,” -the Chautauqua “powers that be” attacked the -enemy, and “they are ours.” This summer there is no pestilential -spot, not one vault nor cess-pool nor wet spot to poison -the water and breed disease. The determination of the management -to have perfect sanitary arrangement at any cost—even -if all other improvements are abandoned—is producing -a condition unparalleled. This result, and the means taken -for its accomplishment, are worthy of close study by every -visitor at Chautauqua, particularly by those who are property -owners, or are interested in the government of towns.</p> - -<p>Chautauqua is a <i>safe</i> resting place. But it is more. It is -preëminently a social place. Its social life is as pure and -wholesome and natural as the air and water. Simple, unaffected -manners, free, kindly intercourse, characterize the daily -life of the people. “How very democratic you are here,” said -a visitor last year, “and I don’t see a particle of snobbishness.” -And it is true. The simple reason, perhaps, is that -Chautauqua brings out of every one the best in them. People -literally live too high there for snobbishness. They can run -out in the morning for their milk or bread or steak; they can -carry their bundles or do their own washing, and the high, -clear, mental atmosphere of the place forbids them minding who -sees them at their duties, forbids any one who sees them feeling -that the work is menial. This mental and social air is indeed -one of the most exhilarating things about the place. You -do live socially above your ordinary level—live so because it -is “in the air.” You can not help it.</p> - -<p>How wonderfully good health and good company contribute -to making a good <i>working place</i>. Above all things else Chautauqua -is that. Its pure air stirs your blood until you feel like -working; its social life stimulates you; its opportunities are a -constant temptation. Of course Chautauqua temptations begin -with the platform. There are at least two features of the -program for the platform of 1885 which deserve special attention. -Of these the first is—it is timely. The questions -which are interesting society are the questions it discusses. -Note what a prominent place “Mormonism” holds. Miss -Kate Field makes it the subject of two lectures: “The Mormon -Creed” and the “Political and Social Crimes of Utah,” and -Mr. W. L. Marshall takes up “Utah and the Mormon Question” -in a third lecture. Temperance, our knottiest social -problem, is elucidated by Miss Frances Willard in the “Evolution -in the Temperance Reform,” by Mrs. Ellen Foster, by -Hon. G. W. Bain, by a National Temperance Society Day, by -temperance bands, by conventions, and by every attraction -which Chancellor Vincent can devise and valiant Chautauqua -temperance workers carry out. Missions, too, have a brave -array of talent to plead their claim. The first four days of -August are mission days, on which are discussed means of -increasing interest and improving methods of evangelizing -both foreign and home heathens, of raising funds, and of securing -workers. One of the leading mission workers of 1885 -will be the Rev. Wm. F. Johnson, of Allahabad, India. Mr. -Johnson has been in the field nearly twenty years. He will -fill the place this summer that Ram Chandra Bose and the -Rev. Mr. Osborne filled in the missionary conferences of last -year.</p> - -<p>A second characteristic is—the program is practical. Every -day is full of hints; every exercise is suggestive. As an illustration, -no profession is attracting so much attention to-day as -is journalism; a successful journalist is to discuss it. Such a -subject will be of practical benefit to numbers of young men -and women who will be listeners to Mr. Carroll. Practical -Christian ethics and Christian work form prominent subjects; -as, for example, the three days’ examination of “Parish Work -in Cities,” by Edward Everett Hale, and the interesting meetings<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_593" id="Page_593">[593]</a></span> -of the Society of Christian Ethics. The tours abroad, -while they are so bright and entertaining, are brimful of suggestions. -This summer is to be unusually rich, the time being -given largely to Italy. One pleasing variety will be a tour -around the world with Philip Phillips.</p> - -<p>The special features of the summer will be strong. The -Teachers’ Retreat, which begins its sessions in July, is arranged -to do for teachers one peculiarly necessary work, to -show them how to use the best methods, to lessen the friction -which is incident to all school work. It is ably manned to -produce this result, Prof. J. W. Dickinson, of the State Board -of Education of Massachusetts, being at the head of the department -of Pedagogy, and nearly a score of successful specialists -assisting in expositions of their peculiar methods. The -terms for the C. T. R. are very low.</p> - -<p>Persons holding the $5 ticket of the Chautauqua Teachers’ -Retreat will be entitled to the following privileges: All general -exercises in the Amphitheater, including lectures, concerts, -recitals, and entertainments, during the sessions of -the Retreat; fourteen lessons in Pedagogy; fourteen lessons -in Practical Application of Pedagogical Science; four Tourists’ -Conferences; two Expositions of Method in Chemistry; one -Exposition of Method in Penmanship; two Expositions of -Method in Elocution; one Exposition of Method in Phonography; -one Exposition of Method in Stenographic Reporting; -two admissions to each of the several classes in the Schools -of Language; two lectures on School Methods by Prof. Edw. -E. Smith, Superintendent of Schools, Syracuse, N. Y.; ten -Half-hour Drills in School Calisthenics. Special classes are -arranged as well for those who can find time to take in more -than the full program, or who desire special instructions.</p> - -<p>Each summer, since the idea of a summer school was conceived, -there has been a steady growth in the opportunities -given to students. The coming season keeps up the record -for improvement. The C. S. L. stands preëminent among -Chautauqua institutions. In its departments of Greek, Latin, -Hebrew, English, French, German and Spanish, the practical -benefit to be derived in six weeks is altogether inconceivable -to those persons who are unacquainted with the teachers -directing the studies, and with the methods used. To two -or three features we would call particular attention—features -which serve merely as samples of work being done daily in -all classes. In the Anglo-Saxon room there is a class which -studies “Hamlet” for four weeks, a series of lessons rich in illustrations -and full of facts. A particular beauty of this class -is the free discussion and analysis of character which Professor -M’Clintock encourages.</p> - -<p>Professors Worman and Lalande have many novel devices -for fascinating their students. As interesting study as there -was at Chautauqua last summer was the children’s hour -in German, conducted by Professor Worman; as a lesson to -teachers it was unsurpassed, as a drill for children it would -teach them German if anything would. As for the French, -the weekly lectures, the French receptions, and now this year, -the “French table” which Professor Lalande has arranged -for, are prominent features.</p> - -<p>Not content with reading Latin, Professor Shumway proposes -that his students talk it. For many students at Chautauqua -last summer a tree became <i>arbor</i>, the forest <i>silva</i>, the -shade <i>umbra</i>, the dead alive—a result, by the way, that very -often is accomplished at Chautauqua. The successful introduction -of a School of Microscopy was accomplished in 1884; -1885 will see the work enlarged. This department is under -the direction of an able teacher, Professor Hall. His outfit -for observation, and for preparing and mounting objects is -most complete.</p> - -<p>It is said that when the Egyptians moved the huge rocks -which form the pyramids, musicians were stationed among the -workmen, and every motion was made in time to music. -Chancellor Vincent seems to have profited by this suggestion -in preparing the Chautauqua program for 1885, for it is all set -to music of the rarest kind. To begin with, the great organ is -handled by a skillful master, Mr. I. V. Flagler. His series of -recitals contain selections from the greatest masters. The -chorus will be led by our old favorites, Professors Case and -Sherwin. The Fisk Jubilees, the Meigs-Underhill Combination, -a new quartette—the Schubert, of Chicago, vocalists with -rare voices, and with a splendid <i>repertoire</i>—and Miss Dora -Henninges, of Louisville, a superb mezzo-soprano, will complete -the musical program for 1885.</p> - -<p>These are but hints of what the six weeks’ session holds in -store for visitors to Chautauqua this season. The entire program, -with all its specialties, has been prepared with consummate -care and with close regard for popular needs. The management -has striven honestly to make Chautauqua a perfectly -healthy place, with abundant social life, and with opportunities -suited to the needs of all classes of people. The verdict -of its thousands of visitors is that in the past they have succeeded. -The outlook for 1885 declares that this year will be -still more abundantly successful.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="LOCAL_CIRCLES">LOCAL CIRCLES.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>C. L. S. C. MOTTOES.</h3> - -<p>“<i>We Study the Word and the Works of God.</i>”—“<i>Let us keep our Heavenly Father in the Midst.</i>”—“<i>Never be Discouraged.</i>”</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>C. L. S. C. MEMORIAL DAYS.</h3> - -<p>1. <span class="smcap">Opening Day</span>—October 1.</p> - -<p>2. <span class="smcap">Bryant Day</span>—November 3.</p> - -<p>3. <span class="smcap">Special Sunday</span>—November, second Sunday.</p> - -<p>4. <span class="smcap">Milton Day</span>—December 9.</p> - -<p>5. <span class="smcap">College Day</span>—January, last Thursday.</p> - -<p>6. <span class="smcap">Special Sunday</span>—February, second Sunday.</p> - -<p>7. <span class="smcap">Founder’s Day</span>—February 23.</p> - -<p>8. <span class="smcap">Longfellow Day</span>—February 27.</p> - -<p>9. <span class="smcap">Shakspere Day</span>—April 23.</p> - -<p>10. <span class="smcap">Addison Day</span>—May 1.</p> - -<p>11. <span class="smcap">Special Sunday</span>—May, second Sunday.</p> - -<p>12. <span class="smcap">Special Sunday</span>—July, second Sunday.</p> - -<p>13. <span class="smcap">Inauguration Day</span>—August, first Saturday after first -Tuesday; anniversary of C. L. S. C. at Chautauqua.</p> - -<p>14. <span class="smcap">St. Paul’s Day</span>—August, second Saturday after first -Tuesday; anniversary of the dedication of St. Paul’s -Grove at Chautauqua.</p> - -<p>15. <span class="smcap">Commencement Day</span>—August, third Tuesday.</p> - -<p>16. <span class="smcap">Garfield Day</span>—September 19.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The present number closes Volume V. of <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> -and interrupts for a time the pleasant monthly visits with -Local Circles. A review of the year’s work must be satisfactory -to all. It has been a progressive year for the circles; few -have fallen out of line; numbers of new organizations have -been formed; almost all have increased their membership; -the circle work has been done more thoroughly than ever before; -new methods have sparkled on every page of reports; -the social life has been quickened and intensified; the circle -evening has become the most important evening of the week; -it has been made the occasion of practical discussions and of -intelligent conversation; a stronger feeling of union exists;<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_594" id="Page_594">[594]</a></span> -the local circle has become a permanent institution. There is -much encouragement in the review, but there is much for each -circle to learn in a study of the reports of the past year.</p> - -<p>The present issue of <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> will contain all the -reports received up to the date of going to press; those received -after that date will necessarily be held over for the -October issue.</p> - -<p>Very interesting and encouraging reports have been received -from <span class="smcap">Halifax, Nova Scotia</span>, where the local circles are prospering, -and much earnest work has been done. While their -routine work and the required course of reading and study are -pursued by the several circles separately, their occasional reunions -are found profitable, and furnish much real enjoyment -for the members. One such was held on Longfellow day -at Dartmouth, across the harbor, which proved intensely interesting -to an expectant audience. Thorough preparation -was made for this meeting, and the whole arrangement was -admirable. On Shakspere day an equally excellent program -celebrated the day. The programs for both were highly -original. The annual <i>conversazione</i> of the “Central” circle, -<span class="smcap">Toronto</span>, was held on May 19th. The novel little arrangement -for a program—three ribbon-tied circles—looks most inviting. -A half hour of orchestra music preceded the address -and concert, after which were stereopticon views and a promenade. -The guests were entertained at the Normal School -building, where the museum and picture galleries were thrown -open to them.</p> - -<p>Among the <span class="smcap">Maine</span> circles is a goodly one at <span class="smcap">Rockport</span>, -composed at its beginning in 1882 of twenty-one ladies. They -have clung together through separation in a way quite remarkable. -One of their number spent last year at sea, but took her -books along, and had her <span class="smcap">Chautauquan</span> sent to meet her at -various points. Another friend who has been around the -world during the past year missed her books at Antwerp, but -writes from San Francisco that she is ready to make up the -year’s work. The Rockport circle has the peculiar honor of -having for its president a lady over seventy years of age.——“Mountain -Echoes” have reached us from <span class="smcap">Bridgeton</span>—nineteen -of them. This circle was formed in 1883, and for a year -met monthly; the success was so great that they have doubled -their number of meetings. A sufficient proof of their statement -that “good work is being done.”——Fifteen members of a -circle at <span class="smcap">Bangor</span> write us that they have enthusiasm quite -sufficient for a class much larger. It is the steady variety, -too, we fancy, for since 1881 they have met, with few exceptions, -every Monday night from October to July. The studying -is done on this evening, and time has been faithfully used, -for they have succeeded in reviewing several books. A talented -young physician in their midst has favored them this winter -with lectures on Animal and Vegetable Biology, with microscopic -illustrations.——A spirited circle, the “Whittier,” of -twenty-five members, is working at <span class="smcap">North Berwick</span>. Debates -are frequent features of their programs, and they have adopted -the sensible habit of choosing timely questions. Shakspere -day was observed by a reading of the “Merchant of Venice,” -the characters being assigned by a committee. At North Berwick -the circle is fortunate in having members of different denominations -who mingle in perfect cordiality. The result of -their work together has been, they write, “an improvement of -mind and broadening of ideas.”</p> - -<p>A pleasant gathering of C. L. S. C. folks has been carrying -on local circle work since October last at <span class="smcap">Meredith Village, -New Hampshire</span>. Some fifteen members are in the company. -A gentleman interested in the work kindly furnishes them a -room, lighted, warmed, and furnished. The memorial days -are held in honor, and recently they have had “an extra” in -a talk on chemistry from a teacher of the town.</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">Vermont</span> is represented this month in a lively letter from -<span class="smcap">Montpelier</span>: “Our circle is not dumb, as might be inferred -from our silence, neither are we deaf to the appeals for reports -from local circles. The trouble is this: Though an organization -of about twenty members since October last, we -have until this month been nameless. One name after another -was suggested until ‘The Idea Hunters’ was proposed, -and met with general favor. I think our motto should be, -‘Hunt until you find,’ for we are constantly hunting in reference -books for settlements to the many questions proposed. -We are learning, of course, and getting no little amusement -out of our researches as well.”</p> - -<p>From the “Chautauqua Quintette,” of <span class="smcap">Chelsea, Mass.</span>, we -have this cheery report: “We are a little company of five -ladies, all intensely interested in the C. L. S. C. work. We derive -great benefit from our work, and some of our programs -would be creditable to a larger organization.”——A slightly -discouraged circle, finding it “hard to exist,” is the “Thaxter,” -of <span class="smcap">Attleboro</span>. The small membership troubles them. -It should not, it seems to us, especially since they have five -members who write “fine essays.” We surmise that if the -“Thaxter” has five good essay writers it is better off than -many a large circle, and from the program of their Longfellow -entertainment it is evident that some one of their number -knows how to manage such things. Cheer up, friends.——A -really joyous letter comes from <span class="smcap">Melrose</span>, where the secretary -of the “Alpha” has been delaying her report because the -new members would not cease coming in, and she wanted to -get them all. She writes: “Every member is enthusiastic, -and I believe that excellent work is being done. This is my -last year—that is to say the last of my <i>first</i> four years’ course. -Please accept the most cordial greetings of our circle; we hope -to send annual greetings for many years to come.”——A -dainty hand-painted souvenir of the Shakspere evening of -the “Alpha,” at <span class="smcap">Uxbridge</span>, accompanies their report of good, -strong work. The circle is small, but, says one of their number, -“Chautauqua means a good deal with us.” The “Alphas” -are to be congratulated on the success of the memorial exercises -they have held this year.——Twenty-eight “Pilgrims,” -of <span class="smcap">Dorchester</span>, with their pastor as leader, are pursuing their -course up the hill of knowledge courageously. Their meetings -are well attended and interesting. Their verdict is: “We -certainly feel that our circle has been a great benefit to us all -the year, though it has been our first attempt at such work. -We have no reason to regret starting, and look to next year for -greater results.”——At <span class="smcap">Lynn</span> the “Raymond” circle carried -out a very taking list of exercises in celebration of April 23d. It -was the first entertainment of the kind the circle has ever -given, and certainly they ought to be pleased with their success. -Their program has that unusual merit, originality.——The -“Vincent” circle, of <span class="smcap">Needham</span>, was organized early -in the fall, and has been flourishing since. Nearly forty -members are in the class, and next year additions are expected. -The “Vincent” is going to do what we wish every -circle in existence would do, have a representative at their -nearest Assembly—if you can not go to Chautauqua. The -ideas and stimulus gained would be worth many times the cost -and fatigue.——A suggestion comes from “Clark” circle, -of <span class="smcap">Jamaica Plain</span>, that deserves a comment. It is that <span class="smcap">The -Chautauquan</span> print more of the programs which it reports. -Did we not furnish at least four programs each month for the -use of circles we should certainly do this. As it is, we prefer -to take the many good suggestions which we get from the programs -sent us, and use them in our monthly programs. We do -this because the programs sent us can not be printed until so long -after the performance has taken place that they are of no practical -use to circles; by readapting them we can give them to circles -in a way in which they will be of use. The “Clark” itself -has sent us a program that deserves reprinting, only of what practical -good would be a March program in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> -for July?——“Although but a very small part of the great -Chautauqua army, we have caught something of its spirit, and -wish it ever increasing success.” So writes the secretary of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_595" id="Page_595">[595]</a></span> -the correspondence circle of “Earnest Workers,” of which -Alice C. Jennings, of Auburndale, is president. The circle has -a thorough and systematic plan of work. Frequent letters -from the president offer counsel and hints. At each monthly -meeting memoranda from the students are read. These memoranda -contain answers to a list of printed questions, such as: -“What books have you read in connection with the C. L. S. -C.? What three subjects in them have most interested you? -Have you met with any difficulties, and if so, what?” etc. The -whole plan of their work is admirable——The “Acadia” -circle of <span class="smcap">Franklin, Mass.</span>, was organized in 1882. It has -now sixty members. The president, although pastor of a -large church, has been absent but five times since the -circle’s organization. One of their great helps has been the -pronouncing matches on Greek names and common English -words. On Shakspere day the circle had the pleasure of listening -to a lecture from Dr. R. R. Meredith, on “Leisure -Hours.”</p> - -<p>From <span class="smcap">Woodbury, Conn.</span>, comes a plea: “Pray receive -into your host of local circles the ‘Lone Star,’ for we are -alone. There were others with us who are not faded, but -gone.” Marriage and going west has robbed the circle of its -members, until but one is left to keep the fire burning on the -shrine. We are glad to find a corner for that one here—certainly -in these columns there is plenty of company and no -need to grow lonely.——The “Newfield” circle of <span class="smcap">West -Stratford</span> is still “marching on.” On Shakspere day the -circle read “Merchant of Venice” and “Julius Cæsar” with -hearty appreciation, closing their celebration with a C. L. S. C. -experience meeting. Many were the stories told of what -Chautauqua had done for them.——<span class="smcap">Mansfield Center</span>, a -rural village in a dear old fashioned Connecticut street, is the -home of a circle of eleven members. It was not begun until -January last, but has shown its colors by having quite caught -up. Two of the professors of the neighboring Agricultural College -have given them very interesting lectures, and on Longfellow -and Shakspere days recitations and music furnished -pleasing entertainments.</p> - -<p>A report of a successful first year comes from <span class="smcap">Auburn, -Rhode Island</span>, where the “Clio,” of fourteen members, was -formed in October last. The new circles are all, like the -“Clio,” promising to start next fall with fresh vigor.——Our -thanks are due the “Esmeralda Bachelor” circle for the program -of the first memorial services under the auspices of the -Rhode Island Chautauqua Union. Great credit is due to Prof. -John H. Appleton, the president of the Union, for his efforts to -make the occasion a success.——The <i>Sentinel Advertiser</i>, of -<span class="smcap">Hope Valley</span>, devoted almost a column to a Shakspere evening, -at which the “Aryans” of that town entertained the -“Pawcatuck” circle of <span class="smcap">Carolina</span>. Some twenty-six of the -guest circle were present and were greeted with elegant hospitality -by the home circle.</p> - -<p>They are always doing something new at <span class="smcap">Ocean Grove, New -York</span>. The last has been a Tree Planting Day. On April 15 -the C. L. S. C. planted a beautiful maple for each class respectively -of ’85, ’86, ’87, and ’88. Representatives of each class -were present, the largest number, of course, being for 1888. -There was a short address by Dr. Stokes, prayer by the Rev. -A. E. Ballard, and an appropriate song for each tree set out in -Bishops’ Grove. In the evening a “service extraordinary” -was held; trees and tree planting were the topics of talks, of -songs, reading and reminiscences.——The <span class="smcap">Palmyra</span> C. L. S. -C. has enjoyed two evenings in chemistry recently, Prof. J. C. -Norris, of Walworth Academy, kindly explaining dark points -to them, and performing many fine experiments. The circle -is very warm in its praise of the lecture and lecturer.——A -Chautauqua circle consisting of fifteen members was organized -at <span class="smcap">Union Springs</span> in January of this year. The members make -their lessons interesting and profitable with music, questions, -and readings.——The “Philomathean,” of <span class="smcap">Lancaster</span>, has -a capital way of working in its inexperienced members. “Questions, -criticisms, and commendations are interspersed through -the whole evening. We aim to draw out the silent ones, to -make all interested and feel themselves responsible; try to -have every one feel that he <i>must</i> take every appointment, -and allow no one to escape his turn at getting up question -lists and easy work, and so seek to train them for the more -difficult work.” This circle is not yet a year old, and numbers -fifteen members.——We are happy to introduce the first C. -L. S. C. inventors. The “Unique” circle, of <span class="smcap">Lockport</span>, claim -that honor. Their invention is a game made up from the -questions and answers in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>, and is intended -to form a comprehensive review of the year’s work. “The -Unique” is the title of it. Would it not be generous in the -Lockport circle to share their discovery with the rest of us?——The -“Argonaut” circle, of Buffalo, entertained a large -number of invited friends at a special meeting held in April. -The affair was a decided success. The “Argonauts” deserve -special credit for the efforts that they are making to awaken -interest in the affairs of the C. L. S. C. by extra meetings.——At -<span class="smcap">Yonkers</span> there is a circle now in its third year which has -never reported to <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> before. In all it numbers -twenty. Their work during the past three years of their -existence has been in regular programs of essays, readings, -and questions and answers, with an occasional variation to -suit necessity. This year they held a very successful memorial -service in honor of Longfellow’s day, and more recently -have had a valuable lecture, with experiments, on chemistry.——Fourteen -persons are reading the Bryant course in connection -with <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>, at <span class="smcap">Munnsville</span>. The circle -did not undertake work until January, so adopted a short -course for the rest of this year rather than try the regular -course. We hope to find them at work on the regular course -next fall, with their hopes of a larger membership gratified.</p> - -<p>“Our Junto” is a circle within a circle. Five young men of -the “Broadway” circle, of <span class="smcap">Camden, New Jersey</span>, form it. -Their program for the spring (of which they ought to be very -proud) is a little book rather than a single page, containing -the work laid out for the “Juntonians.” The plan is admirable. -Each member has something to do at every meeting, and -he knows what it is to be so long beforehand that he has ample -opportunity to gather material. All circles will find it to -their advantage to give attention to “Our Junto’s” plan.——Last -October a few of the many students in the C. L. S. C. in -<span class="smcap">Newark</span>, organized a local circle. By the perseverance of -these few others have been persuaded to join until the circle -numbers about twenty. They have taken the name “Arcadia.” -Memorial days in particular find pleasant observance. -The last celebration, Longfellow day, was especially interesting. -The chemistry is furnishing an excellent opportunity for -experiments, which the “Arcadia” is fortunate enough to have -a chance to carry on in an academy laboratory.——For the -sake of northern New Jersey, which they are sorry not to see -often reported in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>, the members of the -“Hawthorne,” of <span class="smcap">Hackettstown</span>, a circle of five members, -formed in April last, has sent us thus promptly its report. -The “Hawthorne” plunged <i>in medias res</i> and celebrated the -Shakspere memorial almost as soon as its organization was -complete. Such a vigorous start promises well for their progress -next year.——The “Round Table” circle of <span class="smcap">Jersey -City</span> is a band of twenty enthusiastic workers. A great deal -of genuine hard work has been done by them the past year. -The memorial days are celebrated, and every incentive used -to foster the true Chautauqua spirit. Experiments have recently -been given the class at the high school under the direction -of the teacher of science.——The “Ionic,” organized -in <span class="smcap">Dover</span>, in January last, grows in interest with each -meeting. There are nine members, whose happy experience -thus far has been never to be discouraged. But why should -they be? “Each member does his part.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_596" id="Page_596">[596]</a></span></p> - -<p>The “Kensington,” of <span class="smcap">Philadelphia</span>, is a circle of eleven -members who are much in love with their readings. Such a -success has their circle become that the members are willing -to sacrifice other things to be present, and the president writes -that he has received great benefit in going over again the -fields of study that he harvested years ago.——A letter from -the secretary of the “Pleiades,” of <span class="smcap">Philadelphia</span>, says: -“‘Pleiades’ is now nearly two years old. We began the present -school year by increasing our membership from nine to -eighteen. We took the advice given in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> -on simplicity of government, adopting such rules only as would -systematize matters, and having as little formality as possible. -It is a success. The meetings are so profitable that we think -of continuing them all summer. Two of our members have -taken college courses in chemistry, and they have been giving -us some practical experiments in this delightful study. Greetings -to our sister circles, and praises to our <i>alma mater</i>.”——The -“Emanon” circle, of <span class="smcap">West Philadelphia</span>, has sustained -a sad loss in the death of Mr. John S. Rodgers, to whom the -circle ascribes its success. He had been the instructor of the -class for a long enough time for its members to appreciate his -worth and sincerely mourn his death.——A similar sorrow -has come to the circle of <span class="smcap">West Bellevue</span>, where Mrs. Dr. W. -G. Humber, a loyal member of the C. L. S. C., died on the -morning of May 3d.——The Chautauquans of <span class="smcap">Pittsburgh</span> -make more of Special Sunday than any other circles that we -know of. Our last reminder of this is a tiny vest-pocket program -of the exercises carried out by the “Duquesne” and -“Mount Washington” circles on the second Sabbath in May.——The -circle at <span class="smcap">Uniondale</span> writes us that it has chosen for -its name “Meredith,” in honor of Samuel Meredith, first -Treasurer of the United States, and for their motto they -have selected “Spare minutes are the gold dust of time.”——What -better proof of the efficiency of the course than this testimony -from the “Tennyson” circle of thirty members, at -<span class="smcap">Rochester, Pa.</span>: “We think generally that our most pleasant -evenings are spent at our circle. One thing that deserves -to be especially noted is that light reading among us is being -superseded by solid study and the reading of standard authors.”——A -circle of ’88s, at <span class="smcap">Allegheny City</span>, bears the popular -name of “Wallace Bruce.” Starting with eighteen members -they have grown to twenty-eight, a sign, we hope, that next -year they will increase with the same rapidity. Their program -of Shaksperean exercises is before us, and it bears some excellent -numbers.——The “Carbondale” circle reports a -prosperous year. The interest and enthusiasm of the members -is increasing. The memorial days are all observed, and -by devoting ten to fifteen minutes of each session to singing -the circle is becoming familiar with Chautauqua songs. Mr. -and Mrs. G. R. Alden gave the circle some very happy talks -on their return from their recent trip to the Florida Chautauqua -and New Orleans Exposition. The circle closed its first -year with a trip to England; this year it closed with a “Greek -night.” Going direct to France they propose to visit Paris, -Switzerland, Italy and Greece. Arrived in Hellas, the manners, -customs, home life and amusements of the Greeks are to -be described in short essays. Each member intends to constitute -“thonself” a committee of one to secure a new member -for next year’s circle.——An appreciative letter reaches us -from <span class="smcap">Springboro</span>, where a circle now numbering fifteen has -been in existence since 1881. The president writes: “While -we are nearing the goal of graduation we look back with gratitude -at our rich feast with kings and princes, with masters of -art, of science, and of literature. Best of all, we find that we -have been made to more clearly understand the wonderful -power of the Infinite in all things. With our motto ‘Invincible’ -still before us we hope not only to finish the course, but -keep climbing with the Chautauqua brotherhood while life -lasts.”——Let all good Chautauquans congratulate the fraternity -at <span class="smcap">Montrose</span>. Thus the secretary writes: “It has long -been a wish that we might have a branch of the C. L. S. C. in -our ‘City on the Hill.’ Four attempts were made, but to no -avail; finally a few who were especially enthusiastic endeavored -to push ahead once more. The result has been more -successful than we anticipated. We organized in January -with nine members, and now have grown to sixteen. We trust -that July will find us with the desired amount of work fully -and well accomplished. There is a most encouraging prospect -of doubling the membership another year.”</p> - -<p>Twenty-seven enrolled members make up the circle at <span class="smcap">Erie, -Pa.</span> The circle meets in the Y. M. C. A. parlors, and the -informal, pleasant meetings have proved a great attraction to -the members. The Shakspere memorial was observed very -successfully, by a parlor session. The literary part of the -program consisted of a discussion on the authorship of Shakspere, -followed by readings, then came refreshments and the -evening was closed by a half hour of Chautauqua songs. Not -many evenings ago an address was delivered by the president -on Emerson, followed by an hour of practical observation -through the telescope. The Erie circle claims that they have -interesting meetings, and as a proof say that a non-member, -a blind man, is in almost constant attendance.——About 100 -members of the C. L. S. C. Alumni Association of <span class="smcap">Pittsburgh</span> -met in a social way at the parlors of the Seventh Avenue Hotel -on April 20th, to enjoy the pleasures attendant upon the third -annual reunion of the society. Arrangements had been partially -made for the reception of Dr. Vincent, who had been expected, -but the following letter was received instead:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p class="unindent">To the Annual Reunion of the Pittsburgh C. L. S. C. Alumni Association, Pittsburgh, Pa.:</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">My Dear Fellow-Students</span>—I sincerely regret the engagement -which had been made prior to the invitation to meet you this evening. -The original engagement it was impossible to break. I am therefore -denied the privilege of your feast of reason and flow of soul. The Chautauqua -work increases in expansion and power. The later classes -are steadily growing. I have the good hope that the classes of ’89, already -forming, will be the largest and most flourishing of all. I am -more and more convinced that there are multitudes of people who would -hail with joy the provisions of the “C. L. S. C.” if they were simply -informed concerning them. Are you doing all you can toward the enlightenment -of the great public with regard to the C. L. S. C. and other -branches of the Chautauqua work? Let me urge you to renewed zeal -in this direction. Bidding you “a hearty God speed,” I remain your -servant in this goodly work.</p> - -<p class="sig"><span class="smcap">J. H. Vincent.</span></p> - -</div> - -<p>The banquet passed off most pleasantly.</p> - -<p>At a recent meeting of the “Evergreen” circle, of -<span class="smcap">Greenville, S. C.</span>, the circle expressed in a series of fitting -resolutions the sorrow of the members at the death of Mr. Richard -Grant White, and their appreciation of the value of his recent -work for <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>.</p> - -<p>A letter from <span class="smcap">Petersburg, Virginia</span>: “We organized -our circle last October, but it was almost January before -we got fairly started. We follow closely the work laid -out in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>, occasionally having a public meeting. -Our observance of the Longfellow and Shakspere days -was as creditable as any literary exercises ever presented in -our vicinity. Our desire for books has been so much increased -by the C. L. S. C. that we have resolved to establish a library -for the reading element of our city, and we have begun by the -purchase of a few works as a nucleus.”</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">Orange City, Florida</span>, has the beginning of, we hope, a -large circle, in six readers who are taking the C. L. S. C. with -their general reading. They use the questions and answers -and make the general news of the week a feature of every program. -The “Orange City” circle is looking forward to an assembly -some day at Mount Dora.</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">Ohio</span> comes in with a letter too good to lose: “I discover -in your May number that a Kansas member of -the C. L. S. C. class of ’85 says he is the oldest of -that class and was born (1815) in the year of the great<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_597" id="Page_597">[597]</a></span> -battle of Waterloo. I hope he will persevere and enjoy -the exercises until he reaches the age of at least three of -the ‘Irrepressibles of ’84,’ two of whom are 75 years of age -and one 84. The last is still reading for another seal and -hopes to be at Chautauqua in August. Hope the member from -Kansas will press on in the work he has begun, for there are -great possibilities before him which can only be attained by -perseverance. He will retain his mental faculties fresh and -vigorous as in youth. Press on, good brother, and you will -reap your reward here and hereafter.”——The C. L. S. C. of -<span class="smcap">Cincinnati</span> and vicinity held their <i>Sixth Annual Reunion</i> on -May 5th in the parlors of the First Presbyterian Church. A -goodly number were present from “Alpha” circle, “Cumminsville,” -“Christie,” “Mt. Auburn,” “Cheviot,” “Grace -M. P.,” “Third Presbyterian,” “Emanuel,” “Covington,” -“Newport,” “Madisonville” and “Walnut Hills.” The program -consisted of an address of welcome by J. G. O’Connell, -Esq.; prayer by Rev. S. N. Spahr, followed by music, -readings, and recitations. The room was brilliantly decorated -with mottoes and class emblems, and a profusion of choice -and fragrant flowers. From the chandeliers were suspended -the class dates, ’85, ’86, ’87, and ’88, and the letters S. H. G. -and under these were grouped merry companies, who took -part in the collation, which was not the least enjoyable feature -of the program. The quarterly vesper service was held -on Special Sunday, May 9th, at Grace M. P. Church. It was -ably conducted by Mr. E. F. Layman, President of “Grace” -circle. Rev. S. N. Spahr gave a very excellent address to the -members upon knowledge rightly directed.——The “Young -Men’s” circle of <span class="smcap">Cincinnati</span> has been doing good work this -year. The circle is composed of companion workers in church -and Sabbath school, and the bounds of union have been -strengthened by the united study of the “Word and Works of -God.” The Chautauqua studies were taken up by them with -an earnest desire to better fit themselves for successful work. -Their faith and courage has been severely tried by the death -of one of their active, earnest members, Mr. George E. Wilcox—a -sorrow which they are struggling to make a blessing.——The -class of ’88 has a live section at <span class="smcap">Morrow</span>, the -“Irving.” There are over thirty regular attendants in the band -and their fortnightly meetings are conducted like college recitations, -a pastor being the instructor. May the “Irvings” prosper -and multiply.</p> - -<p>A friend writes from <span class="smcap">Norway, Michigan</span>: “We wish to be -recognized by our fellow-workers as a prosperous circle, although -a small one, and we are very glad we have joined -them.” The “Norway” has made a splendid record in its -year’s existence, having met every week since last October. -It need not fear a lack of cordial welcome here.——“Thornapple” -circle, of <span class="smcap">Nashville</span>, boasts a history very similar to -that of the “Norway.” It was first organized a year ago, and -its membership is ten. The members are all workers, and -kindly report themselves highly pleased with the Chautauqua -Idea.——A letter full of the Chautauqua characteristics -comes from <span class="smcap">Decatur</span>: “Our ‘Pansy’ circle of twenty-five -members have held regular meetings since October. We are -enthusiastic, and have done genuine work. But it has not all -been work. We have had a ‘question match’ upon Greek -History and Mythology, the winner of the contest receiving as -a prize an original poem. On Founder’s day the question box -was on ‘What has Chautauqua done for me?’ On Longfellow’s -memorial the circle visited a neighboring class, spending a -merry evening. But the red-letter day of the year was April -23d, when a dinner party was tendered the members and their -husbands by one of the circle. It was generally pronounced -the most enjoyable affair the town had had in many a day and -served as a good advertisement of what the C. L. S. C. does -for its members. Few of our guests knew how much we had -done or could do.”——An unusually good joint meeting took -place at <span class="smcap">Flint</span> in honor of Shakspere. Two circles of the C. -L. S. C. and one of the Spare Minute Course united. We like -one thing on the program particularly. After taking up in essays -Shakspere’s Character, Home Life and Contemporaries, -the essays were all studies of one play—“Macbeth;” thus -the plot of “Macbeth” was outlined, then followed “Macbeth’s -Character,” “Lady Macbeth,” “Who was Duncan?” -“Witches and Ghosts,” and “Moral of Macbeth.” This is a -much more satisfactory method than several disjointed readings -or studies. The evening was closed by conversation and -readings, conducted by an able Shaksperean scholar, Hon. E. -H. Thompson.</p> - -<p>Shakspere himself would, we wager, have been nothing loath -to have taken part in the celebration given in his memory at -<span class="smcap">Goshen, Indiana</span>; for “Kitchen Science” illustrated took up -the first part of the evening, and the supper, we are told, was -not confined to the articles on which <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> has -tried to instruct its readers this past year. In the evening, -after these gastronomic exercises were finished, a literary program -was carried out.——Here is a circle “of the first magnitude.” -Read its record. “The <span class="smcap">Franklin</span> C. L. S. C. of -<span class="smcap">Indiana</span> has increased during the past three years from a -membership of twelve to forty-five. We have never failed in -having our regular meetings every two weeks since we first -organized. During the past winter the circle managed the -lecture course of our city, and as one of the results cleared -nearly $100. Chancellor Vincent was one of the lecturers, and -the members of our circle were delighted to meet him after -hearing ‘That Boy.’”——The C. L. S. C. at <span class="smcap">Lima</span>, representing -classes ’85, ’86, ’87 and ’88, is one of the brightest and -most wide-awake circles in the State. The circle was organized -three years ago, and now has a pleasantly furnished room -with piano, library, etc.; meets every Friday evening, and observes -all memorial days.——<span class="smcap">Shawnee Mound</span> has a Chautauqua -class of twenty-three members. We are pleased to -notice that the circle passed, at a recent meeting, a resolution -of respect in memory of Richard Grant White, expressing -their sorrow at the loss which American scholarship, and in -particular the C. L. S. C. have sustained.——We are pained -to record the death of Mr. Hermon St. John, at <span class="smcap">Salem</span>, on -May 1st. The Chautauqua work loses in him a faithful -friend.</p> - -<p>It has been remarked in these columns already that “Alpha” -of <span class="smcap">Quincy, Illinois</span>, is famous for its novelties. Their latest -sensation was the very practical illustration of a subject given -before the circle by the secretary. This gentleman is a native -of Hibernia, and so was chosen for a paper on dynamite. -When called upon to perform he produced a package of the -explosive, much to the consternation of the members.——There -died at <span class="smcap">Rushville</span>, on April 18th, the oldest member, -without doubt, of the C. L. S. C. in the world, Mr. Van Rensalaer -Wells. Three years ago his daughter began reading to -him the books of the course. He took a lively interest in these -readings, and finally joined the class of ’86. Had he lived it -was his intention to have visited Chautauqua at the graduation -of his class.——A good woman from <span class="smcap">Chicago</span> writes: “I -went about from house to house among my friends, and finally -succeeded in inducing three young persons, all earning their -own living, to begin the readings with me.… We sit -around a table socially, and discuss freely our literary repast.… -I forgot to say that I am a very busy woman, the -mother of three boys. My best reading is often done after -nine at night, when the little eyes are closed in sleep.”——The -announcement of a new C. L. S. C. arrival is made from -<span class="smcap">Oregon</span>, where the “Ganymede” of twenty members appeared -in October last. Busy people, but they feel that they -can not afford to miss the Saturday evening meeting. -The meetings are to be continued through the summer -for the purpose of review.——Another Illinois addition made -to the C. L. S. C. last fall was at <span class="smcap">Savoy</span>, where a club of eighteen -was gathered. Notwithstanding the very severe weather<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_598" id="Page_598">[598]</a></span> -and deep snow, and the fact that the circle members are -farmers, living far apart, the sessions are full and wide-awake. -A very good plan has been tried by the circle in chemistry, -the blackboard being used for exercises. Every circle ought -to have a blackboard.——The history of the class at <span class="smcap">Buckley</span> -began in 1882, when six members met in informal meetings -for discussion. In 1884 it was thought wise to organize -formally. Since that time the circle has been making a decided -impression upon the community. Two public meetings -have been given, which have attracted general attention. At -the last, the closing session of the year, thoughtful remembrance -was made of the president by the gift of a beautiful -chair.——A band of nine join the ranks from <span class="smcap">Warren</span>. It -is only of late the class has found a name. It is “Meridian,” -from the fact that the town is situated on one of the meridians. -The circle has been following <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> in its plan -of work, using the published programs, with slight variation.——“It -takes three to make a circle,” writes a lady from -<span class="smcap">Farina</span>, “and we are three; one ‘Invincible,’ one ‘Pansy,’ -and one ‘Plymouth Rock.’ We are scattered as to time, but -are united in interest, in enthusiasm, and in determination. -Our circle was organized in November, 1881, only a dot—myself—but -though alone, and unsuccessful in securing readers, -and hindered in every way from doing the best of work, there -was a satisfaction in doing the readings that nothing had ever -brought into my life. What we shall accomplish as a circle, -the future will reveal, but there is no ‘giving up’ to any of us.”——A -Chautauqua circle of <span class="smcap">Moline</span>, not yet a year old, and -a Shaksperean circle, under the same direction as the former, -have been coöperating the past season in a series of parlor -meetings of great interest. In January it was a dinner party; -on Founder’s day a literary performance with brief essays on -Chautauqua subjects; and on Shakspere day a decidedly new -thing—a Shaksperean quotation contest. No one was allowed -to give a quotation that had been given by another, and the -successful competitor took the prize on his ninety-fifth quotation.——We -are in receipt of the Longfellow program of the -“Oakland” circle, of <span class="smcap">Chicago</span>; an excellent and varied list of -numbers it is. The “Oakland” is a wide-awake circle.</p> - -<p>From <span class="smcap">Markesan, Wisconsin</span>, the secretary of “Climax” -circle writes: “We are still in a flourishing condition. Although -some who were with us last year have gone to new -homes, we have new members to make up those we have lost. -There are no very young students in the class, but one has to -wear two pairs of spectacles to see. We have observed most -of the memorial days, and found the programs in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> -very useful.”——What one zealous reader did is -told in a note from <span class="smcap">Darlington</span>: “Last year myself and -daughter read the course alone. Before the beginning of the -present year I put a short article explaining the C. L. S. C. -scheme into our local paper, and called a meeting of all those -who would like to take the course. The result is that we now -have a circle of thirteen. There will probably be an increase -next year.”</p> - -<p>A beautiful souvenir of the Longfellow celebration of the -“Vincent” circle at <span class="smcap">Milwaukee, Minn.</span>, has reached our table. -The memorial was a perfect success, and with justice the -members felt very proud of it. The “Vincent” is another -circle sprung from the faithfulness of a single reader, a lady -who in 1883 began the course, and in 1884 had gathered a -circle of twenty-two about her, each one of whom responds -promptly and faithfully to all calls for class work.——The -“Quintette” of “Plymouth Rocks” at <span class="smcap">Duluth</span> have been doing -the regular work since October, in informal meetings led -by the different members in turn. They expect soon to change -their name to suit an enlarged membership.——The “Gleaners,” -of <span class="smcap">Zumbrota</span>, with a goodly number of their friends -were treated to an interesting program of exercises on Shakspere -day. The “Gleaners” are a power in their community, -and have, they say, “enough enthusiasm to fill up an -evening without refreshments.”——At <span class="smcap">Hastings</span> a circle -began life in October with sixteen regular members, besides -several local members. The class has had a sad break in its -ranks by the death of Miss Kate Stebbins, a bright young -woman who had undertaken the C. L. S. C. studies.——<span class="smcap">St. -Paul</span> bids fair to become exactly what its Chautauquans -are aiming to make it, a great C. L. S. C. center. To this -end a “Central” circle has been formed in the city, composed -of six circles, the “Wakouta,” “Itasca,” “Dayton’s -Bluff,” “Plymouth,” “Canadian American,” and “Pioneer,” -and numbering in all over an hundred members. The “Central” -circle celebrated Longfellow’s day by a very enjoyable program, -and is trying to make arrangements for other joint entertainments. -The St. Paul friends are proud of having two of -their number prominent at Lake de Funiak, Mrs. Emily Huntington -Miller, one of the founders of the “Pioneer” circle, -and Dr. L. G. Smith, pastor of the First M. E. Church.——The -home of the Minnesota Summer Assembly, <span class="smcap">Waseca</span>, is -the center of a stirring circle of twenty members. The increase -in the circle is largely due to the efforts of the Rev. A. H. Gillet -and his colaborers at the Assembly, which met at this lake -for the first time last year. The “North Star,” of Waseca, -offers a very attractive plan of work.</p> - -<p>The <span class="smcap">Iowa</span> friends come in as strong as ever. <span class="smcap">Winterset</span> -reports a new circle of twenty-five members, with a weekly -program published in the local paper, and growing zeal.——<span class="smcap">Dunlap</span> -reports another which is in its second year, and which -numbers twenty-three. An especially good program was arranged -by these friends recently. A number of their members -visited New Orleans the past winter, and an evening of -sketches of Exposition sights was arranged.——“Sunny Side -Straight Line,” of <span class="smcap">Hamburg</span>, is composed of two school -ma’ams. They meet whenever and wherever it is convenient; -after five p. m., before eight a. m., at the gate or in the -kitchen. Pleased with the course, they are looking forward to -joining the “Pansies” at Chautauqua in 1887.——The <span class="smcap">Afton</span> -circle had the pleasure of celebrating its first memorial -day on April 23d. They succeeded so admirably that Addison -day was observed as well. The Afton circle pays a kind -tribute to the work: “We are glad the Chautauqua Idea struck -us, but sorry it failed to reach us sooner. It has been of untold -benefit to us, opening to our view new fields of thought, -and arousing new resolutions for the future.”——At <span class="smcap">Blanchard</span> -the “Pansy” class gave an entertainment not long ago -for the benefit of their work. An elocutionist was secured and -after the performance the C. L. S. C. and its aims were presented -to the audience. The circle realized a nice little sum -from their venture, which they propose to turn into maps, -charts and the like for their room. An excellent idea.——Kindly -mention we must make, also, of the <span class="smcap">Decorah</span> circle. -Like all Iowa circles, it “grows.” The secretary writes: “We -began last year with quite a small number, but have kept adding -to our numbers until there are eighteen now who are reading -the course. Our circle is composed entirely of ladies, the -most of whom have work that takes up the greater part of their -time. We have very pleasant meetings and derive much -pleasure and profit from them.”——<span class="smcap">Washington, Iowa</span>, has -a circle of thirty members. It has been holding weekly meetings -for over two years. At the close of last year this circle -held a picnic with the Fairfield circle, and this year they -have distinguished themselves by an elaborate Longfellow entertainment. -“Miles Standish” was read and illustrated by tableaux. -The Washingtonians certainly displayed extraordinary -artistic ability in arranging one, at least, of these tableaux. -They wanted “Priscilla” led in on her “Snow-white Bull,” but -how to manage the “palfrey” was a question. Here is how -they did it: A long narrow table was padded, the legs wrapped, -a head with suitable horns constructed, and the whole thing -finally wrapped with white cotton-flannel. “Necessity is the -mother of invention.”——A beautiful memorial comes from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_599" id="Page_599">[599]</a></span> -one of the members of the circle at <span class="smcap">Humboldt</span>. “My mother, -aged eighty-one years, died March 4th. She was the first one -in this county to become interested in the C. L. S. C. She -made her eldest grandson a member, bought the books for the -first year’s course, and read them first, marking whatever she -wished him to notice. At our class meetings she always selected -from the Bible the chapter to be read at the opening exercises.… -A grand helper has left us.”——At <span class="smcap">Keosauqua</span> -a circle was organized as long ago as ’82. Of the original -eight members only three are left, but the circle has more than -held its own, now numbering twelve or more members. They -are fortunate in having as a leader a teacher of unusual ability.——At -<span class="smcap">Tabor</span> a circle was organized last September, which, -with a goodly membership of interested members, is doing excellent -work. A Professor from Tabor College has helped this -circle much by performing for them chemical experiments.</p> - -<p>The Chautauqua work has lost one of its strongest members -in <span class="smcap">Cooperstown, Dakota</span>, this year, in the sad death of Mrs. -H. G. Pickett, who accidentally shot herself in her husband’s -bank in that town. She was an ardent admirer of the Chautauqua -work, and her life a true exposition of the truths that the C. L. -S. C. is striving to bring into the practical every-day life of its -members.——A spirited Shakspere anniversary was celebrated -at <span class="smcap">Faulkton</span>. The parlors where the circle met were -filled to overflowing with delighted guests, and full exercises -of tragedy, song and jest were carried out.</p> - -<p>The “Kate F. Kimball” circle, of <span class="smcap">Minneapolis, Kansas</span>, -started on its career in October last with a membership of -thirteen. Their plan is simple and practical—a sure way of introducing -conversation. Each member is required to prepare -five questions on the readings, which are given to the circle, -and which are then discussed. This method would serve a -good purpose in the <i>conversazione</i>.——The <i>Kansas City -Journal</i> suggests that Tuesday night in that city ought to -be called Chautauqua night, as nearly a dozen circles meet -there on that evening.——The “Clytie,” of <span class="smcap">Arkansas -City</span> has had a severe trial of its loyalty this year. Malarial -fever has broken their ranks so that they have been able to -hold but a few meetings. It does not dampen their ardor -though, and they express all honor and gratitude to Superintendent -and Counselors for their wise help. The “Clytie” -joins another Kansas circle in protesting against the name -“Plymouth Rocks.” This is the “Greenwood,” of <span class="smcap">Eureka</span>, -which declares, “We can not become reconciled to it.” The -“Greenwood” does not, however, allow its pleasure in the -reading to be spoiled by the class name, for it writes: “Chautauqua -gives us a broad departure from our daily cares and ruts -which is very refreshing, and we trust it will be of benefit to us.”——Here -is a five-year-old Kansas town, <span class="smcap">Everest</span>, of five -hundred inhabitants, with a circle of sixteen members. Here is -certainly a chance, with such a start, to grow up with the country.——Greetings -to the class of ’86, and to all Chautauquans, -come from the circle at <span class="smcap">Leavenworth</span>. This circle has ten -members. Its chief circle interest is the question box, which -frequently leads to a lively discussion. They are favored in -having secured an excellent leader, the Rev. J. A. Monteith. -Several of this class are reading the White Seal course.</p> - -<p>There are in <span class="smcap">Nebraska</span> nineteen circles of the C. L. S. C. -A strong effort is being made to secure at the Assembly at -<span class="smcap">Crete</span>, in July, a full attendance of representatives from all -these organizations. Accept a word of advice from <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>. -Go to Crete if you can get there. It will pay you -in more than double measure to take part in the exercises of -C. L. S. C. day. Of the nineteen circles of Nebraska, the one -at <span class="smcap">Lincoln</span> takes the lead, we believe, in numbers. It has -reached forty-seven, with an average attendance of about -forty. In recognition of the literary character of the circle the -Superintendent of Public Instruction in Lincoln has kindly -opened a room in the new State House to the circle. The Lincoln -circle, as befits its location at the capital of the State, is -taking active measures to make the C. L. S. C. day at Crete a -success. Already they have attracted public attention by a -unique Shaksperean festival, at which a number of guests were -entertained.——Another of the nineteen is at <span class="smcap">Falls City</span>, -an ’88 offspring. The circle has seventeen members. An -executive committee of three appoints instructors for the review -of each meeting, following the plan in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>. -The class observed Longfellow day with appropriate exercises. -Our Falls City friends have chosen a name with a -meaning—“Misselts”—“I will surmount all difficulties.” Not -an easy name to take, by any means, but the “Misselts” is -made up of school teachers mainly, and what can they not -do?——An addition to the Nebraska circles is made at -<span class="smcap">Holdrege</span>. It came about in this way, writes a friend: “I -left my home circle in Indiana in December last and started -out to ‘try my fortune in the far West.’ I first stopped at -Odell, Nebraska, and tried to introduce the ‘Chautauqua Idea’ -there. I found it was already being talked of, and by the efficient -efforts of a gentleman interested in the movement, a -grand, earnest circle was organized. In February I came to -Holdrege, the ‘Magic City,’ as it is called, naturally expecting -every one to be interested in the C. L. S. C. I had almost -decided to give up the course, because I was so busy, when I -met a teacher of the town—a ‘Pansy.’ We have formed a -circle, and next year instead of having the smallest number -possible, expect to compare favorably with any in the -State.”——<span class="smcap">Blair</span> has a circle of twenty-two members this -year. A small circle has been at work in the town for two -years, but this year its membership has increased in remarkable -proportions. Blair is situated within sight of the Missouri -River, and from this noble stream the circle calls itself the -“‘Souri.” Occasional parlor meetings for invited friends are -enlarging the work rapidly in Blair.</p> - -<p>Already we have given our readers hints of the noble way -in which Professor Spring has been representing Chautauqua -at <span class="smcap">New Orleans</span>. His last public exploit was the Shaksperean -Anniversary. From a local paper we learn of the success of -the undertaking: “The thirty-first birthday of the Stratford-on-Avon -bard was celebrated last evening at the Exposition. The -ceremonies were gotten up almost entirely by Prof. Edward -A. Spring, director of the Chautauqua classes in sculpture. It -was hoped that Judge Braughn and other local gentlemen -learned in Shaksperean lore would have been present, but a -heavy storm prevented. The ceremonies, however, were very -successful, though briefer than had been intended. They were -presided over by ex-Governor Hoyt, from far-away Wyoming, -chief of the jury on education, who made a brief but eloquent -oration in commencing the proceedings. He dwelt on the incomparable -greatness of Shakspere and the immense influence -his writings have had on the many millions of people speaking -the English tongue, and showed how, as the centuries roll -on and as the English speaking peoples grow and multiply, -the luster that attaches to his name must grow brighter and -brighter. Following Governor Hoyt, Professor Spring made a -neat little speech, setting forth the benefits accruing to those -connected with the great educational institutions with which -he was connected, and how appropriate it was for the Chautauquans -to include in the fifteen great events they commemorate, -the birth of Shakspere. Mr. Spring then introduced Mrs. -Florence Anderson Clark, of Bonham, Texas, a member of -the C. L. S. C., who closed the evening by reading an original -poem on Shakspere.”</p> - -<p>From the far western frontier of <span class="smcap">Texas</span>, at <span class="smcap">Albany</span>, comes -this letter: “Three of us associated ourselves together the first -of October to read the Required Readings of the C. L. S. C. -In January we were joined by two more. Our method of study -has been to have each member originate twenty questions, to -present at each weekly meeting to the members, who on the -following week take them up to answer and discuss. The circle -has been quietly but seriously working. The benefit of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_600" id="Page_600">[600]</a></span> -having a certain course of reading has already been felt, and -we believe that many others will be influenced to join us the -next year.”</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">Colorado</span> is represented by a circle of seventeen at <span class="smcap">Delta</span>, -a growing young town blessed with many people of culture -and refinement. The circle belongs to the ranks of the ’88s, -and is proceeding with the vigor characteristic of the class. -They luckily can introduce good music as a part of each evening’s -program. By the secretary of the Delta circle a word of -experience is added: “After pursuing the course of study -nearly four years, I can add my testimony as to its great inspiration -to all who are systematically keeping it up.”</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">Carson, Nevada</span>, has the “Sierra Nevada” circle of twenty-five -’88s, a vigorous young life that, in spite of delays in -getting books, and the discouragements in starting, is getting -along famously. The spread of the C. L. S. C. in the West -depends very largely upon the organized circle. The “Sierra -Nevadas” have a summer work of bringing in recruits, as -well as of making up back lessons.</p> - -<p>The flags are flying from the “Green” circle, of <span class="smcap">Portland, -Oregon</span>, and “we are getting along splendidly,” is their -watchword. They write that they are growing more and more -enthusiastic, and that the circle is becoming “a joy and a -feast of good things” to them all. “Green” circle had a -brilliant Longfellow celebration last winter. The feature of it -was a Longfellow picture gallery, representing the principal -heroes and heroines. A good idea to remember when we -come around to February 27, 1886.</p> - -<p>The remarkable Floral Festival held in <span class="smcap">Sacramento, California</span>, -on May 5th, in honor of Mrs. M. E. Crocker, to whom -that city owes so much for her munificent charities and endowments, -was participated in by two of the local circles of -that city. The “Sacramento” circle sent an elegant tribute -to the festival. On a bust about three feet high, decorated -with flowers and bearing the letters C. L. S. C., was erected a -gateway with gates ajar; within was an open book. The -“Vincent” circle sent one equally unique—a pyramid of -flowers surmounted with a flower-wreathed pole, from which -was suspended a banner of flowers.</p> - -<p>The “Alma” circle of <span class="smcap">San Diego, California</span>, consists of -seventeen members of the class of ’87. Longfellow’s day was -a very pleasant occasion with them. The president tells us: -“The good effects of the reading are already to be seen among -our numbers; a desire for good and profitable reading being -manifested more and more as we pursue the course.”——The -Chautauquans of <span class="smcap">San José</span> had a very interesting meeting -in celebration of the “Bard of Avon.” A most excellent -program was rendered. One of the leading features was a -very able critical review of “As You Like It,” read by a lady -of the circle.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="THE_C_L_S_C_CLASSES">THE C. L. S. C. CLASSES.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>CLASS OF 1885.—“THE INVINCIBLES.”</h3> - -<p class="center">“<i>Press on, reaching after those things which are before.</i>”</p> - -<h4>OFFICERS.</h4> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p><i>President</i>—J. B. Underwood, Meriden, Conn.</p> - -<p><i>Vice President</i>—C. M. Nichols, Springfield, Ohio.</p> - -<p><i>Treasurer</i>—Miss Carrie Hart, Aurora, Ind.</p> - -<p><i>Secretary</i>—Miss M. M. Canfield, Washington, D. C.</p> - -<p><i>Executive Committee</i>—Officers of the class.</p> - -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>There will be excursions from Chautauqua to Niagara Falls -every few days during the season, and there will be no difficulty -in securing ample and satisfactory accommodations for -the class of 1885, or any portion of it.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The challenge of our classmate in Kansas brings forth the -following from Maryland: “I see in the May <span class="smcap">Chautauquan</span> -a chivalric old gentleman hailing from Kansas, claiming to -be the oldest member of the class—being born in the year the -battle of Waterloo was fought. Now, I have entered on my -seventy-fifth summer, and remember distinctly the battle of -Waterloo. But, he claims also to be the <i>youngest</i>. Now, if I -shall have the pleasure of meeting him at Chautauqua, and he -is so disposed, we will run a foot race. But, really, this is the -time for ‘grave and reverend seigniors’ to speak out. Who -comes next?”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p><span class="smcap">Nebraska.</span>—I trust that I shall be numbered with those who -shall “pass under the Arches” at dear Chautauqua this summer, -thereby proving that I am one who is earnestly striving -to “Press on, reaching after those things which are before.” -The C. L. S. C. means a great deal to me. These magic letters -are the key which unlocks all the enthusiasm of my being. -These four years have been a new revelation to me, and have -been of deep, abiding interest, and a well-spring of joy. Last -year my dearest friend, a devoted Chautauquan, a member of -the class of ’85, a thorough “Invincible,” in every sense where -right was involved, went on before. Since that time I have -read alone, but hope to be one of the successful many who -shall pass under the Arches and “begin” again, instead of -ending on Commencement day.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>An earnest society lady writes: “The whole bent of my life -is changed by the C. L. S. C. Next to being a Christian, it is -the greatest blessing of my life. I read and listen to sermons -and lectures more intelligently, and have been led into a -spiritual life.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p><span class="smcap">Ontario.</span>—I have often felt it my duty to express my thankfulness -to the C. L. S. C. for the information I have received -from their well chosen books. Words are inadequate to express -my gratefulness to Chancellor Vincent and his coadjutors for the -great and lasting benefit I have received from this course, although -being unable to do the work as thoroughly as I would if -time permitted. I complete my four years this summer, and I -am more anxious than ever to explore other books which I -have not read. This circle of reading has created a desire for -some branches that hitherto was dormant, and revived the desire -for others. From the first I have been anticipating a trip -to Chautauqua, but will be unable to gratify my desire this -summer. I hope to be able to receive my diploma at home. -I think our class motto is excellent, and hope we will all prove -worthy of our name—“Invincible.”</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>CLASS OF 1886.—“THE PROGRESSIVES.”</h3> - -<p class="center">“<i>We study for light, to bless with light.</i>”</p> - -<h4>CLASS ORGANIZATION.</h4> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p><i>President</i>—The Rev. B. P. Snow, Biddeford, Maine.</p> - -<p><i>Vice Presidents</i>—The Rev. J. T. Whitley, Salisbury, Maryland; Mr. L. -F. Houghton, Peoria, Illinois; Mr. Walter Y. Morgan, Cleveland, -Ohio; Mrs. Delia Browne, Louisville, Kentucky; Miss Florence Finch, -Palestine, Texas.</p> - -<p><i>Secretary</i>—The Rev. W. L. Austin, New Albany, Ind.</p> - -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>From all quarters there comes up the assurance from members -of ’86 that they mean to be at Chautauqua or Framingham -this summer. Attendance at an Assembly, with its enthusiastic -“Round-Tables,” conferences upon literature, art -and science, new lights upon past reading, and new outlooks -for the future, well nigh doubles the value of the course. -Come, earnest readers of ’86, and see.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_601" id="Page_601">[601]</a></span></p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Plans are already being formed for the graduation exercises -at Chautauqua next year, and the hardly less interesting observances -at the New England Assembly. Any suggestions -bearing upon this important matter may be freely made by -letter to the president or secretary, by those who can not be -present at the Assemblies. The class of ’86 is the first <i>large</i> -class to graduate; it has done grand work in the course, and -it means to honor Chautauqua and itself by suitable exercises -and observances, when its thousands shall come up to receive -from the University their diploma in August, 1886.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>We shall hear, personally or by letter, at the Assemblies, -from our honorary members, of whom the class of ’86 is justly -so proud.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Will members of ’86, in New England, remember the new -Hall of Philosophy at Framingham, now under way, and to -be completed by July 1st? Send your subscription, if you have -not done so; subscribe and send at once if you have not yet -taken a share in this grand enterprise, and induce your friends -to lend assistance, that the few hundred dollars needed to finish -and furnish the building may be at once forthcoming. -Remit to N. B. Fisk, Woburn, Mass.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>It is hoped that there will be a large number of the New -England members at the Framingham Assembly in July.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Let your light shine! hold the torch on high! let every one -see that the class of ’86 is true to its name—“Progressives.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Miss Alice C. Jennings, ’86, whose poems from time to time -have appeared in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>, writes as follows: “A -severe sickness in childhood deprived me entirely of the sense -of hearing. This has been more effectual than bolts and bars -in excluding me from all institutions of learning. You can -easily imagine how precious to a person so situated must be -the opportunities of the C. L. S. C., and of the ‘Society to Encourage -Studies at Home.’ At least four of my deaf friends -have joined the C. L. S. C. on my own solicitation. We have -tried to have a circle among ourselves. We live in five different -places, but our headquarters are at Boston Highlands, and -we send reports there every month.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">“We study for the light,” we would not be</div> -<div class="verse i1">Like the black hue, absorbing every ray,</div> -<div class="verse i1">But like the white, gladly reflecting all,</div> -<div class="verse i1">That we may be true children of the day.</div> -<div class="verse">“Blessing with light,” as we have each been blessed,</div> -<div class="verse i1">For wisdom makes the weary earthway bright,</div> -<div class="verse i1">And walking in its ways we soon shall rest</div> -<div class="verse i1">With <i>Him</i> in realms of everlasting light.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse right">—<i>Mrs. E. J. Richmond.</i></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>To the New England Branch a suggestion is made in the -interest of the class, and in behalf of the excellent Secretary -of the New England Branch. Will not <i>every</i> member not able -to attend at Framingham this summer send (July 15-28) to -Miss Mary R. Hinckley, South Framingham, Mass., a postal -card with postoffice address, and bearing, if nothing more, -“Yours for ’86”? To ascertain those who and how many are -affiliated with “the good class of ’86” in New England, is most -desirable for weighty senior and graduation interests.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Reports from various quarters lead to the conclusion that, -compared with the whole number at any time enrolled in the class -of ’86, the number entering upon the Senior year will be exceptionally -large. It ought to be large—larger than any class -preceding, more thorough, more enthusiastic. We have the -advantage of the experience of all who have gone before. Let -us rise to our privileges.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>CLASS OF 1887.—“THE PANSIES.”</h3> - -<p class="center">“<i>Neglect not the gift that is in thee.</i>”</p> - -<h4>OFFICERS.</h4> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p><i>President</i>—The Rev. Frank Russell, Mansfield, Ohio.</p> - -<p><i>Western Secretary</i>—K. A. Burnell, Esq., 150 Madison Street, Chicago, -Ill.</p> - -<p><i>Eastern Secretary</i>—J. A. Steven, M.D., 164 High Street, Hartford, -Conn.</p> - -<p><i>Treasurer</i>—Either Secretary, from either of whom badges may be -obtained.</p> - -<p><i>Executive Committee</i>—The officers of the class.</p> - -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>At a great camp meeting near Indianapolis, in the first week -of August, the Rev. Frank Russell, President of the class of -’87, is to set forth in an address, the nature of the C. L. S. C. -as an educational and moral force.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The wake of a C. L. S. C. class is found to kindle a bright -way for the next. Much correspondence of the officers of the -class of ’87 has been toward the interest of the class of ’88, -and is now extending even toward that of ’89. Each succeeding -class seems to promise increasing numbers and power.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>A member of ’87 has succeeded in forming a circle at Jefferson, -Ohio, of ten members. She writes: “I can not tell you -all the good our circle is doing for us individually. We have -enjoyed our chemistry very much. We were very pleasantly -entertained and instructed by experiments given by Professor -Perry in April.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>From St. Johns, N. B., Mr. G. A. Henderson sends the following -account of the C. L. S. C.: “We organized with five -‘Pansies,’ and were joined this year by seventeen ‘Plymouth -Rocks.’ We were the means also of influencing the formation -of another circle of ’88, over twenty in number. At present -there are about sixty reading the course in our city. We -look forward with deep interest to the publication of the book -by our chief ‘Pansy,’ and although we have not contributed -to it, we hope to meet and march with you through the Gates -in ’87.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Hannah Percival Hamer, a member of the “Pansy” class, -died at her home in Taunton, Mass., April 24, 1885. She was -a most faithful worker and firm advocate of the Chautauqua -course.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>On the 9th of April Miss Maggie B. McKnight, of Chambersburg, -Pa., a member of the “Pansy” class, died. She was a -devoted and enthusiastic Chautauquan, and looked with great -pleasure toward the time when she could visit Chautauqua. -She was reading with another member of the class, who intends, -however, to keep on, saying that she “could not do without -it now.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse i10">“Pansy—a tender thought!”</div> -<div class="verse">A happy prophecy was that, to send</div> -<div class="verse">That one bright flower of our class to hide</div> -<div class="verse">Behind this modest emblem, while she penned</div> -<div class="verse">Her strong, sweet thought. A prophecy fulfilled;</div> -<div class="verse">For pansies—tender thoughts of her—are found</div> -<div class="verse">Within the garden of our hearts in bloom</div> -<div class="verse">The whole year round.—<i>J. B. Stuart.</i></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Westfield, N. J., is the home of a “Pansy” circle, calling -itself by the cheerful name of “Hope.” It began with three -sisters reading the course together. It was very fitting that -they should receive their first inspiration from reading “Four -Girls at Chautauqua.” The “Hope” is working hard to increase -its membership.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_602" id="Page_602">[602]</a></span></p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>CLASS OF 1888.—“THE PLYMOUTH ROCKS.”</h3> - -<p class="center">“<i>Let us be seen by our deeds</i>.”</p> - -<h4>CLASS ORGANIZATION.</h4> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p><i>President</i>—The Rev. A. E. Dunning, D.D., Boston, Mass.</p> - -<p><i>Vice Presidents</i>—Prof. W. N. Ellis, 108 Gates Avenue, Brooklyn, N. -Y.; the Rev. Wm. G. Roberts, Bellevue, Ohio.</p> - -<p><i>Secretary</i>—Miss M. E. Taylor, Cleveland, Ohio.</p> - -<p><i>Treasurer</i>—Miss M. E. Taylor, Cleveland, Ohio.</p> - -<p>All items for this column should be sent, in condensed form, to the -Rev. C. C. McLean, St. Augustine, Florida.</p> - -<p>Class badges may be procured of either President or Treasurer.</p> - -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The following are among the circles not yet reported in our -column. I first give name of circle, then place and number -of members: “Gradatim,” Kennebunk, Me., four; Bloomfield, -Ind, seven; Niobrara, Neb., eight; “Master” (motto, “Labor -is the price of mastery”), Ionia, Mich., eleven; “Peripatetics,” -Chicago, Ill., twelve; “Magnolia,” Marianna, Fla., fourteen; -“Philomathean,” Lancaster, N. Y., eighteen. The last named -has by quotations, recitations, readings and essays celebrated -the “memorial days.” For six months none but ladies composed -the circle. They, however, so charmed three gentlemen -that they sought admission and became enthusiastic students. -The members of this circle so dislike the class name that they -have refused to adopt it. They are among the others who express -their enjoyment of the class reports in our ’88 column.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The circle at Hastings, Minnesota, twenty-three members, -has instructed its secretary to write their objection to our name. -Among other things is the following: “In <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> -we read of one class talking of establishing a ‘Heliotrope Bed’ -at Chautauqua, and another a ‘Pansy Bed.’ We might send -a coop of ‘Plymouth Rocks,’ but we fear they might demolish -the beds of flowers.” We have received encomiums of praise -of the name. One from Mount Carmel, Connecticut, says: -“Our name, like every other worthy thing, in spite of its ‘fowl’ -associations, needs no defenders.” One from Toronto, Canada, -writes: “I am satisfied with our name, for although it represents -a speckled bird it will ‘crow’ a good deal when four -years old.” Another from Marine, Ill., after thanking Chancellor -Vincent for “How to Read Alone,” protests against a -change of name or motto.—A member of our class, a boarder -in a Young Women’s Christian Association of New Haven, Connecticut, -writes: “I think as one takes up Chautauqua books -he loses the relish for stories, e’en though written by good authors. -What an opportunity for gaining knowledge of the highest -order!”—“Angle” circle, North Groton, N. H., is bereaved in the -loss of one of their earnest workers, Mrs. E. E. Merrill, a lady -who read much and well, and yet in the five short months had -become so fascinated with the C. L. S. C. that almost her last -words were those of appreciation of the same.—The East Norwich, -L. I., circle is likewise bereaved in the death of a devoted -member, Miss Lizzie Franklin.—A class of unmarried -ladies complains that they have not been noticed. If -they will send us another letter, writing the name of their circle -so we can decipher it, and also give the town, or city, and -state in which they live, we will gracefully and gladly bow our -recognition.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>“Among the Indians: Osage Agency, Indian Territory.—Our -circle consists of six members—five teachers and one -bookkeeper. Although each lives a busy life, we have had -weekly meetings, kept up with the required reading, and celebrated -two authors’ days, Bryant’s and Longfellow’s. Surrounded -as we are by Indians, who still wear blankets instead -of citizen’s dress, and who are not far advanced in the arts of -civilized life, we feel doubly thankful for the benefits arising -from such a course of reading.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>In Bingham Cañon, Utah, a mining camp situated about -twenty-eight miles southwest of Salt Lake City, the New West -Education Commission has a school established. One of the -teachers proposed taking the Chautauqua course alone, but, -mentioning it to several, organized a circle of six. Of the -name she writes: “I like it so much. My home is in Plymouth, -Mass.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Half of the members of “Carleton” circle, Hudson, Mich., -live out of town from two to six miles, yet they are numbered -among the most enthusiastic and faithful. They have had full -programs at every meeting, and have observed all memorial -days. They number thirty-seven, twelve being of our class. -The ’88s wear on their hats a symbolical badge (a <i>fac-simile</i>, -in brass, of the pedal extremity of a Plymouth Rock). They -like the <i>motto</i>, but not the <i>name</i>.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>One from Gilbert’s Mills, N. Y., writes: “I can not longer -refrain from expressing how much I enjoy the reading of the -course, although I am pursuing it alone, occasionally meeting -with the circle at Fulton, five miles from here, which I much -enjoy. The more I read and learn, the more anxious I am to -go on, that I may be no disgrace to our grand class name, -that takes me back to dear New England, and home. I would -prove myself worthy of it and of our motto.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The “Chippewas” is the name of a circle of twenty-two -members, formed at the city of Eau Claire, Wis., October of -1884. Four of the members belong to the class of ’86, the -others to that of ’88. The society has met once a week, and -has observed the memorial days. In addition to the prescribed -course, the class is reading the two volumes of -Timayenis’s History of Greece.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>“Mountain City” circle, Frederick, Md., very appropriately -and enthusiastically celebrated “Shakspere Day.” The program -consisted of a “Sketch of his Life,” and the reading of -“The Merchant of Venice,” the members taking the different -characters.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Mrs. F. B. Edwards, who with her daughter joined the class -of ’88 last fall, and was a faithful and diligent member, died -at her home in Hartford, Conn., March 14, 1885. She was a -lady of excellent education, and had also the culture of much -foreign travel and residence in Europe. She was delighted -with the C. L. S. C. plan, and especially with the opportunities -it offers for mental and moral growth.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>One of the most earnest and beloved members of the -“Pierian” circle, of Brooklyn, N. Y., Morgan Morgans, has -lately died. Mr. Morgans was a young man of but twenty -years of age—a member of the class of ’88, and a zealous -Christian.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>So much having been written <i>pro</i> and <i>con</i>, respecting our -class name, it is proposed to have the entire class vote for or -against the name. The circles will send their vote, giving the -number in favor and against present name. Those who are -not in circles can send their votes as individuals. The vote -should be sent to the Rev. C. C. McLean, St. Augustine, Fla., -at as early a date as possible.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">Thoughts are but the seeds of truth ready for the ground,</div> -<div class="verse">Promises of future good that will within be found;</div> -<div class="verse">Yet, with purer, truer thoughts the words have purer sound.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">Words are slender saplings, growing in the earth,</div> -<div class="verse">Starting from the very spot where the thoughts had birth,</div> -<div class="verse">But the noblest words can never tell the deed’s great worth.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">Deeds are mighty forests, towering and grand,</div> -<div class="verse">Not results of thoughts that were planted in the sand,</div> -<div class="verse">But deeply rooted, broad-leaved trees that will forever stand.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">Thoughts are truly noble, yet their work lasts but a day,</div> -<div class="verse">Words are often mighty, still their power may not stay,</div> -<div class="verse">But the influence of noble deeds can never pass away.</div> -</div> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse right">—<i>Emily G. Weegar.</i></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_603" id="Page_603">[603]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="THE_SUMMER_ASSEMBLIES">THE SUMMER ASSEMBLIES.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>FRAMINGHAM, MASSACHUSETTS.</h3> - -<p>The writer of this article has visited, in different years, most -of the Sunday-school Assemblies, and he has found none, not -even Chautauqua itself, where the wave of C. L. S. C. enthusiasm -runs higher than at the New England Assembly, -South Framingham, Mass. Every class has its headquarters, -trimmed with greens and flowers, with the class-motto wrought -upon its walls; and every class has its anniversary, with toasts -and cream. The Round-Table is crowded at every session -with intelligent students, who can both ask and answer questions. -If a reporter could have taken down and printed all -the replies given one afternoon last summer to the inquiry, -“What good is the C. L. S. C. doing?” it would have furnished -a valuable document for the use of workers in the -cause. The camp-fire is always crowded; last year the ranks, -arranged by classes, counted over five hundred members; and -this year it will be greater.</p> - -<p>The traveler on the railway sees already a white columned -building gleaming among the trees on the summit of the hill. -If he be a Chautauquan, he needs no one to tell him “The -Hall of Philosophy,” for he recognizes it at once as the copy -in every detail of the building at Chautauqua. This Hall will -be dedicated by the Chancellor during the coming session of -the Assembly, when from all New England the faithful will -rally to participate in the great occasion. Its dedication will -take place on Wednesday, July 22d, and the address will be -delivered by the Rev. Edward Everett Hale, D.D., one of the -Counselors of the C. L. S. C.</p> - -<p>The Recognition day services will be held on Thursday, -July 25th, when an address will be given by the Rev. Luther -T. Townsend, D.D., of the Boston University.</p> - -<p>Among the leading lecturers (and lecturesses) of the Assembly -during the present season will be the Rev. F. E. Clark, D.D., -Prof. W. N. Rice, Dr. E. C. Bolles, Dr. R. R. Meredith, Dr. -Geo. C. Lorimer, Robert J. Burdette, Miss Kate Field, and -Mrs. Mary A. Livermore.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>MONTEAGLE, TENNESSEE.</h3> - -<p>Monteagle is in the State of Tennessee, upon the Cumberland -Mountains, 2,200 feet above the sea-level. We have here -the most invigorating, health-giving atmosphere, the purest -water, the most beautiful wild flowers, the grandest mountain -scenery, the most picturesque views of the valley lying hundreds -of feet below, the loveliest vales, the most magnificent -forests of native trees—indeed, a combination of all the desirable -natural conditions for a pleasant summer resort.</p> - -<p>This is the place which has been selected by the Christian -people of the South, of broad views, of liberal hearts and generous -impulses, of intellectual culture and refinement, for the location -of the Monteagle Sunday-school Assembly. This Assembly -is permanently established by a charter granted by the State -of Tennessee. For two years they have been very successful.</p> - -<p>If there is virtue in faithful and capable teachers and honest -work, no one in 1885 will go away from Monteagle dissatisfied.</p> - -<p>These schools offer to teachers and intellectual people a -place where they can spend the heated term of each year, -combining study with rest and recreation, in a delightful and -inexpensive mountain resort, free from all social dissipation. -It is proposed to furnish in the summer schools of Monteagle -the best instruction in every department open. All who seek -absolute rest on these mountain heights will be free to take it; -those who shall seek only lighter courses will find entertainment; -and those who wish thorough instruction will not be -disappointed.</p> - -<p>The summer schools open June 30th. The Assembly opens -August 4th, and closes August 28th. Among the lecturers will -be Dr. B. M. Palmer, President Chas. Louis Loos, Dr. D. M. -Harris, Bishop Walden, Sau Ah-Brah, the Rev. Sam Jones, -Dr. Lansing Burrows, Wallace Bruce, and Hon. G. W. Bain.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>ISLAND PARK, INDIANA.</h3> - -<p>The Island Park Assembly will hold its seventh annual session -on the beautiful grounds of the association near Rome -City, Indiana. The Assembly will open July 14th, and remain -in session until July 30th. The Tabernacle Lecture Course -will be unusually brilliant and attractive. Among the speakers -will be Bishop Foster, Bishop Bowman, Prof. C. E. Bolten, -Wallace Bruce, Dr. Geo. C. Lorimer, Dr. H. H. Willets, Dr. -John Alabaster, the Rev. John DeWitt Miller, and Miss Lydia -Von Finkelstein.</p> - -<p>The music will be under the general management of Prof. -C. C. Case. The Goshen full band and orchestra, and the -Hayden Quartette will be in attendance. The Sunday-school -Normal Class will be under the personal instruction of the -Superintendent of Instruction, and will be one of the most important -features of the coming Assembly. The course will be -identical with the Chautauqua course, and graduates will be -entitled to the Chautauqua diploma.</p> - -<p>The visitor finds the Island, some twenty acres in extent, a -few minutes’ walk over a bridge and through a shady avenue -from the railroad station, Rome City, with the village at an -equal distance westward. The Island is naturally beautiful, always -fanned by cool breezes, with hills and miniature valleys, -romantic nooks, a beautiful beach, and a drive partially surrounding -it, many fountains and wells, and a plaza surrounded -by hotels and offices. Beyond the rustic bridges of the canal are -a Tabernacle seating 3,000, a building containing the Model of -Palestine, and the Art Hall with its large lecture rooms.</p> - -<p>From the north is to be seen, a mile across the Lake, -“Spring Beach,” a well appointed hotel in an elaborately -improved park, containing mineral springs and the famous -trout ponds.</p> - -<p>South of the Island, across a bridge, are the Assembly lands, -containing the Amphitheater, and laid out in lots and avenues, -with a high bluff to the Lake. Here are opportunities -to tent in perfect quiet or in the liveliest streets of the Assembly -City.</p> - -<p>Two steamers ply on Sylvan Lake, between the Island, the -head of the Lake and Spring Beach. Two hundred row boats -are kept.</p> - -<p>Postoffice, telegraph, bathing and laundry facilities on the -ground. Ample hotel and boarding arrangements in the -village.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA.</h3> - -<p>The sixth summer Assembly of the Chautauqua Literary and -Scientific Circle will be held at Pacific Grove, near Monterey, -California, opening with an address Monday evening, June -29th, and closing Friday, July 10th.</p> - -<p>This Assembly, in spirit and purpose, resembles the famous -Assembly held each summer at Chautauqua Lake, New York. -The course of lectures during the coming session will include -in its subjects not only scientific themes, but those of art, history, -and general literature.</p> - -<p>Microscopes, stereoscopes and other apparatus will abundantly -illustrate the lectures. The managers also intend to -add to each evening’s lecture the attraction of beautiful music, -illustrative tableaux, recitations, etc.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_604" id="Page_604">[604]</a></span></p> - -<p>The Assembly will open on the evening of June 29th, with -an address by Dr. C. C. Stratton, of San José, President of the -Pacific Branch.</p> - -<p>A few of the speakers and subjects will be as follows: The -Rev. Dr. Wythe, Oakland, “Scenes in Great Britain and the -Continent;” Prof. H. B. Norton, San José, “The Knights of -the Temple;” F. B. Perkins, San Francisco, “Wit and Humor;” -Dr. C. L. Anderson, Santa Cruz, “Diatoms;” Edward -Berwick, Carmel Valley, “World Federation;” Adley Cummins, -Esq., San Francisco, “The Sanscrit Language and Literature;” -the Rev. Dr. E. G. Beckwith, San Francisco, “School -and Skill.”</p> - -<p>Sunday-school Normal Work will receive its due share of -attention.</p> - -<p>The music of the Assembly will be in the very competent -hands of Mrs. Helen M. Cushman, of San Francisco, and will -be artistic and delightful.</p> - -<p>The morning of Friday, July 10th, will be occupied with the -interesting exercises of the Third Graduating Class of the -Pacific Branch C. L. S. C.</p> - -<p>Pacific Grove is situated on the beautiful Bay of Monterey, -and connected with the ancient capital of the State by a pleasant -drive of one and a half miles, over a macadamized road -lately constructed. In beauty of location it can not be excelled—its -graceful pines, extending to the water’s edge, affording a -delightful refuge from the heat of the sun. As a healthful -place of resort, it is not surpassed by any locality in the State. -The value of the Assembly held here has been fully assured -by the delightful sessions of the past five years.</p> - -<p>The well known facilities for studying Natural History at -Pacific Grove have made that one of the important topics of -study, and much enthusiasm has been aroused on the coast -by the work of the C. L. S. C. in this department.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>LAKESIDE, OHIO.</h3> - -<p>The prospects for the work of 1885 in this beautiful and -healthful summer resort are commensurate with the energy -displayed by the zealous management. The grounds are -charmingly located on the northern shore of the Peninsula, -opposite Sandusky, Ohio; accessible by an hour’s delightful -steamer ride from this city, and will probably be connected -with the Danbury station of the Lake Shore Railroad by rail -this season. The Encampment sessions begin on Tuesday -evening, July 21st, the brief enthusiastic “Reunion” to be followed -by one of the spicy and wise lectures of the Rev. P. S. -Henson, D.D., of Chicago. There will then follow for nearly -two weeks a rare program under the superintendency of the -Rev. B. T. Vincent, of Philadelphia, Pa., assisted by the Revs. -F. Russell and E. Persons. Mrs. B. T. Vincent will have -charge of the Primary Teachers’ Department, and also the -Boys’ and Girls’ Meeting, assisted by the Rev. J. S. Reager, of -Ohio. The Models of the Tabernacle, Jerusalem, etc., will be -explained daily by the Rev. Dr. Hartupee and Mr. Tannyhill. -Miss Ross, of Chicago, will give daily instruction in Kindergarten -work, and Professor Trueblood, of Delaware, Ohio, in -Elocution. Daily devotional meetings will be conducted by -the Rev. W. H. Pearce, of Erie, Pa. Lectures and sermons -are announced from Bishop R. S. Foster, Drs. Henson, Alabaster, -Nelson, Bayless, Parsons, Rev. Messrs. Young, -Pearce, Russell, Reager; Colonel Bain, of Kentucky, Wallace -Bruce and Leon H. Vincent. Brilliant stereopticon exhibitions, -with lectures by the Rev. Mr. Young and Professor Bolton. -Oriental exhibitions by Miss and Mr. Von Finkelstein, -with their gorgeous collection of Oriental costumes, etc. The -Meigs Sisters and Professor Underhill will give concerts and -elocutionary readings; Professor Trueblood will also give popular -readings. Mr. French, of Chicago, a racy and instructive -Chalk-talker, will “draw.” The music will be under the able -direction of Professor Brierly, of Erie, Pa., and Miss McClintock -will delight the crowds who gather at Lakeside. The C. -L. S. C. will, of course, have a large place in the attention of -the people, as Lakeside is a center of a large field of workers -in this line. There will be “Round Tables,” etc., and a public -Recognition service for the class of ’85, all of whom who desire -it may secure this privilege there, and receive their diplomas, -which will be there for distribution, if they inform the -Rev. B. T. Vincent in time to see that the diplomas are sent to -him for them. A Soldiers’ day, with war songs and a lecture -on “Echoes from Round Top,” by the Rev. J. B. Young, of -Harrisburg, Pa., will form one of the enthusiastic features. -The promises of Lakeside, one of the finest of Chautauqua’s -daughters, were never so good, nor so sure of rich fulfillment.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>CRETE, NEBRASKA.</h3> - -<p>The Nebraska Sunday-school Assembly Grounds consist of -one hundred and nine acres on the banks of the Blue River, -at Crete, Nebraska. Its first session was held in that town in -July, 1882, under the direction of the Rev. J. D. Stewart. Last -year, at its third session, a splendid tract of land was donated -to the Assembly. It extends along the river bank, with admirable -opportunities for boating, contains a beautiful grove and -ample grounds for buildings, walks, drives, and other purposes. -Two lecture halls and a dining hall have already been -erected, and some hundreds of tents provided; while a Normal -Hall, several cottages, and other buildings are proposed.</p> - -<p>The Normal Department will be in charge of Prof. R. S. -Holmes, who has been for many years a teacher of this department -at Chautauqua.</p> - -<p>The Primary Normal Department will be in charge of Miss -Lucy J. Rider, who will also conduct a children’s class daily.</p> - -<p>Dr. J. H. Vincent, President of the Circle since its commencement, -and Chancellor of the Chautauqua University, will be -present and give two lectures. Others who have had wide -experience in literary pursuits will give their counsels on the -ways of spending time most profitably in reading and study -for the people.</p> - -<p>Among the lecturers engaged are: The Rev. R. R. Meredith, -D.D., of Boston; the Rev. O. H. Tiffany, D.D., of New -York City; the Rev. Robert Nourse, of Washington, D. C., -and the Rev. H. M. Ladd, D.D., of Cleveland, O.</p> - -<p>A course of musical instruction will be given by Prof. J. E. -Platt. Prof. W. F. Sherwin will give a lecture and conduct -concerts.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>OTTAWA, KANSAS.</h3> - -<p>By the time that this reaches the readers of <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> -the Inter-State Assembly of Kansas and Missouri will be -in session at its home in Forest Park, in the city of Ottawa, -Kansas. No other assembly is entertained with such hospitality, -for the people of Ottawa throw open to it their public park, -in the limits of their city, on the banks of the historic Marais -du Cygne, “The Swamp of the Swan,” celebrated by Whittier’s -pen in the border days of Kansas. Among the orators -whom they expect to hear are many whose names are well -known to all Chautauquans, as Wallace Bruce, Dr. Henson, -Robert Nourse, Dr. Tiffany, Sau Ah-brah, and our own Chancellor, -Dr. Vincent. Indeed, it will be quite a transplanting of -the Chautauqua Idea to the western prairie, for as at “the Mecca -of us all,” we shall hold daily a Round-Table; the Commencement -service will be fulfilled, the Chancellor will deliver the -address to the graduating class and confer the diplomas of the -C. L. S. C.; Prof. Sherwin will wave the baton before the chorus -on the platform; Prof. Holmes will teach the Normal class; -Sculptor Spring will instruct the class in clay modeling; and -the general Superintendent of Instruction will be Dr. J. L. -Hurlbut.</p> - -<p>Last year, the C. L. S. C. interest showed a great increase. -In 1883, the number of C. L. S. C. members who clasped hands -around the camp-fire was twenty. In 1884, it was nearly -ninety, and if we could count those who joined before the close<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_605" id="Page_605">[605]</a></span> -of the Assembly it would reach a hundred. We look for twice -as many on Tuesday evening, June 30, when we expect to be -entertained with stereopticon pictures of “Sights and Insights -at Chautauqua” by the Rev. O. S. Baketel, of New Hampshire, -and at the close of the lecture, march in procession to the camp-fire, -and sing and talk together. We expect also a great day -on July 1st, which is given to the “Grand Army of the Republic.” -Perhaps no other State went into the war with quite the -enthusiasm of Kansas; certainly no other has as large a proportion -of veterans settled within its borders. Every year the -Assembly recognizes these old heroes, and “Old Soldiers’ Day” -always draws a multitude. We shall have a concert of war -songs in the morning, and a lecture by General O. O. Howard, -U. S. A., in the afternoon, when the Governor of Kansas is expected -to preside.</p> - -<p>No gathering in Kansas is complete without a Temperance -meeting, for Kansas is the banner State in constitutional prohibition. -Let it be said, all stories to the contrary notwithstanding, -that there is no defection in the ranks of the prohibition -army, and no retreat. The cause is as strong as ever, -and no one thinks of rescinding or re-submitting the Amendment. -We hold “Temperance Day” on July 2, when Dr. -Philip Krohn and Col. Geo. W. Bain will speak, and various -conferences on different aspects of the work will be held.</p> - -<p>The Ottawa Assembly extends a welcome to all Chautauquans -who may enter its gates, and gives its assurance that -they will find themselves at home.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>MOUNTAIN LAKE PARK, MARYLAND.</h3> - -<p>This delightful summer resort is situated on the Baltimore -& Ohio Railroad, in Garrett County, Maryland. It is 2,800 -feet above sea level, in the midst of sublime scenery. The -place itself is enough to attract all lovers of the true, the beautiful, -and the good, but besides the feast for the eyes and lungs, -there is a feast of reason and a flow of soul prepared to profit, -entertain, and inspire the hosts who gather to the Assembly.</p> - -<p>The principal lecturers are Prof. H. L. Baugher, D.D., of -Pennsylvania College; the Rev. G. W. Miller, D.D., of Philadelphia; -the Rev. C. P. Marsden, D.D., of St. Louis; the Rev. Z. -Warner, D.D., of Parkersburg, West Virginia; the Rev. N. L. -Reynolds, of Mt. Pleasant, Pa.; the Rev. J. B. Van Meter, D.D., -of Baltimore; J. B. Phipps, Esq., Secretary of Maryland -Sunday-school Union and author of pictorial designs for the -Berean Lesson Periodicals.</p> - -<p>“Thorough Normal Work” is the motto of Mountain Lake -Park Assemblies. The Assembly Normal Union course of -study will be pursued during the session, and diplomas awarded -on Normal Union day, August 19th.</p> - -<p>The C. L. S. C. Department was organized two years ago, -and Monday, August 17th, has been set apart to this interest. A -lecture on “Self-help” will be delivered by the Rev. J. T. Judd, -A.M., of Lewisburg, Pa., president of the circle, with special C. -L. S. C. exercises. Round-tables, vesper services, class unions, -and camp-fires will be enjoyed during the Assembly session.</p> - -<p>New Testament Greek will be made a specialty. The Rev. -C. E. Young, of Baltimore, instructor.</p> - -<p>Geology will receive the attention of the Rev. N. L. Reynolds, -who inspires enthusiasm in this noble study.</p> - -<p>Elocution classes will be formed as last year, and Amateur -Photography will be the pleasant recreation of lovers of the art.</p> - -<p>The Assembly meets August 6th and closes August 19th. -For further information address the Rev. W. Maslin Frysinger, -D.D., Baltimore, Md., or the Rev. Jesse B. Young, Harrisburg, -Pa.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>ROUND LAKE, NEW YORK.</h3> - -<p>The management of the Round Lake, N. Y., Sunday-school -Assembly sends greetings to its hosts of old friends and to -many others whom it hopes to make warm friends in the near -future. The last year was one of the best in its history. Numbers, -meetings, speakers, work and workers, influence and the -divine blessing, all combined, made it a power for good, wide-felt -and lasting. It is the aim to make the coming Assembly -better than ever. They have planned on the same generous -breadth and scope of the last season, and are confident their -work will merit approval.</p> - -<p>The program already completed is full and rich and varied. -On July 9th and 10th there will be a reunion of chaplains and -soldiers. The meeting is most vigorously planned for. There -will be a large gathering of the old soldiers; Col. G. A. Cantine -will act as Grand Marshal. Gen. John A. Logan has been -secured as speaker. The Sunday-school Assembly will hold -a longer session this season than ever. Beginning July 14th, -it will continue fourteen days, and each day will be packed -with varied and most profitable exercises. They have a larger -variety of specialties than formerly, viz.: French, German, -Painting, Drawing, Clay Modeling, Oratory, Vocal Music, Kindergarten, -Calisthenics, Phonography, etc., etc.</p> - -<p>On C. L. S. C. day, Tuesday, July 21st, Dr. John H. Vincent, -the originator of the Idea and developer of its plans and inspirer -of its growing work, will be present and address the -graduating class, who will pass the “golden gate” and from -his hand receive their well-earned diplomas.</p> - -<p>The following is a partial list of the lecturers: The Rev. J. -H. Vincent, D.D., the Rev. John P. Newman, D.D., the Rev. -H. A. Buttz, D.D., the Rev. S. W. Dike, A.M., the Rev. A. -D. Vail, D.D., the Rev. Geo. L. Taylor, D.D., the Rev. I. J. -Lansing, A.M., Prof. J. L. Corning, the Rev. D. H. Snowden, -the Rev. C. C. McCabe, D.D., Senator James Arkell.</p> - -<p>The Trustees, with great care and cost, have given special attention -to every part of the grounds, draining, cleansing and -beautifying, rendering the grounds, if possible, more healthful -than ever.</p> - -<p>Never was this “charming spot of nature and art” more -beautiful and health-inspiring than to-day! Never was it more -sought for as a <span class="smcap">Family Summer Home</span> than this spring.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>MONONA LAKE, WISCONSIN.</h3> - -<p>The Sunday-school Assembly at Monona Lake, Madison, -Wisconsin for 1885, will hold its session from July 28th -to August 7th. The specialties are: Music, Prof. Sherwin; -Grand Chorus of 300 voices; Goshen Band and Orchestra; -Sunday School Normal; Children’s Class. Some of the speakers -are: Bishop R. S. Foster, Wallace Bruce, Miss L. M. Von -Finkelstein, the Rev. George C. Lorimer, D.D., Prof. William I. -Marshall, Prof. W. C. Richards, Ph.D., the Rev. O. C. McCulloch, -D.D., the Rev. D. Read, D.D., the Rev. G. H. Ide, D.D., -Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, C. F. Underhill reader.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>WASECA, MINNESOTA.</h3> - -<p>The Assembly at Maplewood Park, Waseca, Minnesota, -opens June 30th, and continues in session until July 10th.</p> - -<p>Thursday, July 9th, will be Chautauqua day, and on that day -a public recognition service of the graduating class will be -held. There will be an address suitable to the occasion, and -the recognition service as used at Chautauqua will be used here. -In the evening there will be a camp-fire.</p> - -<p>The names of Prof. H. B. Ridgeway, D.D., the Rev. Frank -Bristol, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein, the Rev. C. A. Van Huda, -D.D., and the Rev. J. F. Chaffee, D.D., are found in the list of -lecturers. No one has visited Maplewood Park without feeling -that Nature has done her part in providing here a delightful -retiring place for tired people and for those who are in danger -of becoming so.</p> - -<p>A dense grove rises forty or fifty feet above the lake. The -lake itself is a beautiful sheet of water, around which is a magnificent -carriage drive. All so quiet that the busy world -seems shut out, while all Nature seems to say, “Come and rest.”</p> - -<p>Besides, there are the attractions of the Assembly, calling the -mind into new channels and awakening new thoughts and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_606" id="Page_606">[606]</a></span> -kindling new and noble desires for intellectual and moral improvement.</p> - -<p>The time at which the meetings are to be held this year has -been selected, with special reference to the convenience of the -people.</p> - -<p>Bro. Gillet, superintendent of the Assembly, never needs an -introduction to the Northwest. He will make the occasion one -of lasting good to the interests he represents.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>MAINE CHAUTAUQUA UNION.</h3> - -<p>Arrangements are being made by the officers of the Maine -Chautauqua Union for a grand meeting at Fryeburg, to begin -July 27th, 1885, and to continue one week. The grounds at -Martha’s Grove are being put in order and beautified by Mrs. -Nutter, the prime mover in this matter, and everything will be -done for the comfort and enjoyment of all Chautauquans who -visit this lovely spot. There is soon to be erected on the -grounds a “Hall in the Grove,” after the style of the one at -Chautauqua.</p> - -<p>The program for this season is an attractive one and will -consist of illustrated lectures, vocal and instrumental music, -essays and readings. Some part of each day is to be devoted -to the Round-Table, question box, discussions and reports of -circles. As a result of our meeting last year, circles have sprung -up all over the State. In Portland alone, there are <i>three hundred</i> -Chautauquans where there were only <i>nine</i> last year.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="EDITORS_OUTLOOK">EDITOR’S OUTLOOK.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>VICTOR HUGO.</h3> - -<p>The greatest of the French writers of this century has passed -away from earth, after eighty-three years of a life which was, -like Carlyle’s, full of work to the very end. Victor Hugo’s -greatness is difficult to measure at this hour; we are too near -to know whether this is an Alp or only a hill. That it has attracted -the attention, the admiration, the homage of mankind -for half a century would seem to mean that this was one of -the three or four great lives of the nineteenth century. Victor -Hugo came of a union of aristocratic and plebeian blood. His -father’s tribe had been of the nobles since 1531; his mother -was the daughter of a seafaring race. The current sketches -of his father omit the most dramatic incident of Colonel Hugo’s -career. We refer to his long chase and final capture of Fra -Diavalo—the brigand hero of the opera which bears his name. -In the whole history of brigandage in South Italy, there is no -more exciting and romantic story than that of his hunt and -capture of the “Friar-Devil” by the father of Victor Hugo. In -the blood of the poet the plebeian mother triumphed at length -over the Monarchist father, and Victor Hugo’s pen has rendered -the Republicanism of France more valuable service -than his father’s sword gave to the Napoleonic crown.</p> - -<p>His genius was fortunate in the poverty which compelled -him to work for bread, and the banishment which in 1853 -threw him into exile, and again forced him to take up the -severe literary labor which brought forth “Les Miserables” in -1862. This son of the aristocracy might have lived a life with -out fruit if he had not abandoned the ideals of his father for -those popular sympathies which made him the most dangerous -enemy of Napoleon III. The change in his views came -slowly. He was a Royalist under Louis Phillippe, and that -king created him a peer of France in 1845. It was not until -1849 that he changed his political attitude, and he was then -forty-seven years of age—so that he divided his life pretty -evenly between the aristocratic and popular causes. His -works show the influence of his political thoughts, and the differences -between the earlier and later are very marked. The -earlier works gave him the ears of the great world; the later -won him the hearts of the people. Whether in prose or in -verse, all that he ever wrote was poetry. His later prose is -a collection of poems of human aspirations. It is idle to seek -in them any system, they are emotion rather than thought; -but the emotion is the throbbing of the universal human heart. -He believed in God and in man. He rejected the religion of -his people less under the stress of conviction than through the -force of his hostility to the organized human world in which -he saw men suffering. It was not his office to resolve the riddles -of human pain; it was his to gather men’s tears into God’s -bottle. It may be called a one-sided life; but it was on that -side where great lives are too seldom found. It may be said -that emotion is blind, passionate, dangerous, as Frenchmen -have abundantly proved; but it is still true that the emotion -which rouses men from lethargy is necessary to beneficent -change, and that even though the wail of human misery must -go up forever, we must honor the great souls who seek solutions -of the mystery of evil in a happier ordering of human -society. We need not become socialists to reverence Victor -Hugo’s socialistic philanthropy. Its aim was high, and it has -its great uses. Though only God’s bottle be large enough -to hold the tears of his children, it is a noble poetry -which considers the sorrows of the earth and seeks to -pour the sunshine or hope into the low valleys of humanity. -Hugo’s way may be the wrong way—probably it is—but it is -good for men to hold fast the hope that there is <i>some</i> way -through the sea to the promised land. There is a desert beyond -the sea; but somehow we shall cross the desert into the -Canaan of humanity.</p> - -<p>It is, therefore, as a poet of the sorrows and aspirations of -our race that we shall most profitably think of Victor Hugo. -He was somewhat too French in spirit to be a poet of mankind; -he was too egotistic to be on the heights of his human -song; he would have been greater if his knowledge of Jesus of -Nazareth had been deeper, and his imitation of him perfect in -the measure of his great capacity; he would have left something -unsaid which wounded men whose purpose was as high -as his own, if he had been more Christian and less Hugoist. -But why do we ask all things of all men? Victor Hugo did -a great work in his own great way. A dangerous socialism -has temporarily profited by his denunciations of society, but -in the end of the account it will probably appear that he has -advanced Christian socialism by the uplift he has given to human -aspirations. Men are not so willing to go back to the -fleshpots of Egypt, not so much in danger of leaving the bones -of the whole race in the desert, more anxious to move on to -their promised land.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>THE REVISED OLD TESTAMENT.</h3> - -<p>It required fifty years of the Elizabethan age to introduce -that revision of the English Bible which has so long been the -standard edition of the Holy Scriptures in our tongue. It -would be strange if the revision of that standard Bible which -has just been completed were to come into immediate and general -use. The New Testament revision met with a harsh reception -from the critics of conservative temper; and it certainly -has some defects, though the <i>sense</i> of the original is more obvious, -to use the mildest term, in the new than in the older revision. -The revised Old Testament has consumed fourteen -years of the labor of the English and American committees, -and the most obvious fact is that it is a more conservative -piece of work than the revised New Testament. The committees -probably profited by the buffetings of their New Testament -revision brethren; but they had a simpler task, since they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_607" id="Page_607">[607]</a></span> -had not to settle the text of the original Hebrew, whereas the -Greek text of the New Testament is still a battle ground of -criticism. After all, however, the two revisions constitute one -“revised Bible,” and must stand or fall together. The general -judgment may probably run to the effect that the New -Testament is revised too much and the Old too little. There -is a special defect, however, in the New Testament English—it -is not idiomatic, and it is not always intelligible. There is -a rumor that it will be re-revised into harmony with the conservatism -which characterizes the new Old Testament. It is not -to be overlooked that there are various demands made upon a -revision. Those who most earnestly desire one have in view -a more plain and understandable text for popular use. Wycliffe’s -great thought, “a Bible understonden of the people,” is their -desire. But the literary demands upon the revisers exclude -intelligibility by the people as a governing rule. This group -of demands defies the skill of any revision committee. They -ask for improvements; but they object to any changes. The -Bible as an Elizabethan classic is their admiration and they seem -not to be willing that the people should have any other Bible. -There would seem to be ample room for both revisions; let -the literary people have their English of 1611, while the people -have English of this century. We are not yet, however, sufficiently -advanced in the thinking which revision requires to qualify -even the critics among us to distinguish between a classic text -for scholars and a plain text for the millions. A modern English -Bible will come by and by; we can afford to wait, and meanwhile -to study the fruits of the labors of a Revision Committee -loaded down with a great weight of conservative environments. -For it is not the classicist alone who stands guard over the old -English text; conservative theologians regard that old text as -too sacred to be modernized, and distrust modernizing as involving -changes in the moral and religious influence of the -Bible upon mankind. The intelligibility of the Bible is not, to -such thinkers, a leading requisite; reverence for its mysteries -ranks all other considerations. We are probably outgrowing -this view of Holy Scripture; but it is an opinion strong enough -yet to keep utterly dead English locutions in the revised Old -Testament of 1885. This conservatism is much stronger in England -than in this country; the American Committee desired to -substitute modern for obsolete words.</p> - -<p>That any changes have been made under such respectable -and imposing auspices is a great gain to Christian knowledge. -The thing is done; the grand old text has been subjected to a -revision. It is quite possible that we are entering an age of -biblical revision; and it should be remembered that the Bible -of 1611 closed an age of revision. It was the last in a series -of revisions, each of which contributed to the perfection of the -English text. We can not be content with an English Bible -which employs <i>which</i> for <i>who</i>, <i>wist</i> for <i>knew</i>, <i>earing</i> for <i>plowing</i> -and <i>ouches</i> for <i>settings</i>. The American Committee was -thoroughly right in desiring to use modern words in these and -other cases. If any revision is to stand, it must contain such -modifications of the old text. A satisfactory English text can -not be attained so long as the English Christians insist upon -retaining archaic forms of such insignificance as the foregoing; -there must be an agreement to make an English text on -Wycliffe’s principle of popular intelligibleness, before a revision -can be of very high utility. The present revision breaks the -ice; we have begun; some time or other we shall go on to the -logical conclusion of the movement—a modern English Bible -for all who use our mighty speech. The assent of the conservative -to a single change concedes the principle of revision; his -assent to many changes prepares the way for all that are necessary -to the modernizing of the Book of Books.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>SUMMER HEALTH AND PLEASURE.</h3> - -<p>The summer is looked forward to with eager desire and it is -dismissed without regret by the residents of the temperate zone. -The explanation lies partly, if not mainly, in our defective -adaptation of ourselves to the hot season. Charles Lamb once -wrote, “The summer has set in with its usual severity.” The wit -covers a truth; we adjust ourselves so imperfectly to the heated -term that we suffer from the high temperature. The art of -living must include devices and cautions through which we -get the good and shun the evil of each season. Men are -slowly learning that to “enjoy life” on this planet one must -pay the same price as for liberty—“eternal vigilance.” The -summer of the North ought to be our golden time of health and -enjoyment. We have the whole of the atmosphere to breathe -from—not bits of it let into artificially heated spaces. There -is shade for the noonday heats, and the evenings and mornings -for exercise and refreshment of muscular energy. But -the hot hours are often dangerous and the atmosphere may be -poisoned by our own neglect of decaying vegetables or animal -matter. We must aim to keep clean and keep all things about -us clean; food should be lighter than in winter (less heat-producing); -exercise should avoid the hours of fervent heat; the -occupations should take a more leisurely pace; the scene of -life should, if possible, be shifted for some week or weeks so as -to diversify our mental interests and break the dreary monotony -of long days spent in one environment of body and soul. The -word which describes the art of summer life is <i>moderation</i>; -but moderation is not indolence, though there is a natural -tendency to drop into the laziness which characterizes barbarian -humanity in hot lands. To be healthy and happy one -should resist the disposition to be idle. Neither health nor -happiness come to lazy people in any desirable measure. The -best forms of both depend on activity; but in summer it must -be moderate and regular. If, then, one has constant occupation, -he should cultivate moderation of interest and exertion, -shun the blazing noontide, and take his food as well as his exercise -in reduced doses. Too much food, care, exercitation, -these are our northern summer dangers. Our civilization is yet -very imperfect in this region of art. We have attained to food, -clothing, shelter. We do not quite understand how to use -them all wisely; but beyond these lie the adjustment of exertion, -rest, air, water, electrical and chemical instruments of vitality, -and the inner forces of our own being. Happiness is the -result of a complex mass of conditions and instruments of life -acting upon the spirit and reacted against by the spirit. Our -knowledge grows; but while it is growing we have to take for -our text moderation, and elaborate the sermon each man for -himself.</p> - -<p>The great opportunities of the year come to us in summer. -Nature is all alive to please and instruct us—to give us the delights -of the eye and the inspiration of study. The world has -been dressed with infinite art, to afford us a holiday which shall -be full of instruction. We need travel to widen our vision of -God’s modern Edens dressed by human art. We need an active -intelligence, to see and understand the Eden world of summer. -But all depends upon our care of our bodies. Health is -the condition of all summer pleasures. Is it not strange that -we will spend months and years learning how to use lifeless -tools, and yet will not spend needed time to learn the management -of this vital tool by use of which all happiness comes to -us? Let us all try this time to keep the instrument of life in -tune for the music of the summer; to make of the season of -highest opportunity all there is in it for ourselves. Starting -with that selfish purpose, we shall soon find that we need social -food, and that here also, “it is more blessed to give than to receive.” -Helping others to enjoyment is the healthiest of -“health movements;” for no tonic is so spiritually exhilarating -as the sight of other people’s happiness which we have made. -The man who sends a child out of the city suffocation of summer -time has a poor imagination if he can not enjoy the gambols -of that child in the country meadows and groves as he -never enjoyed a banquet in his own house. Doing as many -generous actions as possible is one way to get both health -and pleasure out of the summer.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_608" id="Page_608">[608]</a></span></p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>SCIENCE AND PRACTICAL LIFE.</h3> - -<p>It is somewhat remarkable that at a time when science is indubitably -failing to justify the exalted hopes of those who -looked to it for a solution of the deepest questions of being, it -is enlarging our sense of its value to practical every-day life. -The mystery of the molecule is insoluble, but the usefulness of -chemistry is rapidly increasing. Professor W. Mattieu Williams -proposes to use maltose as a cooking agent to produce -foods which are both more palatable and more easily digested. -Those who attend the cooking school at Chautauqua this summer -will probably learn how this work is to be done, and what -results will follow. The theory sprang out of attempts to feed -cattle on malted grain. It was found to be too expensive for -cattle, and also hardly necessary, because cows have good digestive -apparatus. Human beings have impaired digestion, -and can afford more expensive food than the beasts have need -of. The maltose cooking carries graniverous foods up into an -advanced stage of nutritive condition, lessens the labor of -weak stomachs, and tickles dull palates with new flavors. -There is no near limit to the possible fruits of this thought. -The chemist may render us incalculable services along this -line. We have suffered something from the chemistry of men -who adulterate our food; it is a comfort to know that the good -uses of chemistry are coming forward to render us most valuable -compensations.</p> - -<p>It is a matter of course that in this field we shall often be disappointed; -but so many solid gains are secured that we shall -readily excuse some fanciful experiments. In lighting public -streets and buildings, electricity has made it possible to turn -night into day; chemical studies have perfected the grinding of -flour; a hundred more of small and great practical advances in -scientific living are secure. We shall go on. It is very noticeable -that the conveniences of modern life have triumphed in unexpected -ways over natural difficulties. The zone of comfort for -human life has been widened toward the pole and toward the -equator. The gains are more slowly harvested southward; -any reader who feels the languor of this season will know why -we do not march so triumphantly toward the equator as we do -toward the north pole. Moral energy is in larger demand, as -we go south, to resist the tendency to idleness. The north -wind puts spurs into us and whips us into action. We shall -therefore find the northward limit of vigorous life before we -find the south boundary of it. And naturally our science, invention -and discovery bear upon cold rather than heat. We -have the means now of living in higher latitudes, in full moral -and mental activity, than were good for body or brain a hundred -years ago. We know how to build for warmth in zero -weather, and we have cheap fuel and cheap light for the frosts -and the dark of the North.</p> - -<p>An enthusiastic writer says that natural gas is to be the fuel -of the immediate future—the next fuel. We have as yet found -it only here and there on the earth; but we are not done searching -for it. Imagine, then, that we have found this gas all -round the shores of Hudson’s Bay, and calculate the consequences. -A new Mediterranean is opened in a region which -has always been reckoned uninhabitable. Poets and philosophers -flourish far up toward Doctor Warren’s original Eden! -For what but a cheap and abundant fuel and light is needed -to make possible a large and flourishing empire around Hudson’s -Bay? Migration, which is said to move on parallel lines, -has been trending northward for twenty-five years. The wheat -fields of America are a hundred and fifty miles nearer the -pole than they were fifty years ago. The Dakota and British -Northwest which we were willing to leave to the Indians fifty -years ago, are eagerly coveted for the plow of the wheat farmer. -We are undeniably moving north; the limit of that movement -will be fixed for us by devices, discoveries, sciences, which will -enlarge our fields toward the eternal ice—on principles similar -to those which have already extended our domain in that -direction. For several generations the silk grown in Lombardy -has been packed on the backs of horses or in carts and -transported across the Alps to be spun and woven in Switzerland. -Why should not our cotton travel by sea to the shores -of Hudson’s Bay to be spun and woven? Give them power, -heat and light in one natural agent, and the people of the -American Mediterranean might excel in any industry. And -in default of natural gas, who will now dare to say that the -chemist may not solve the problem in a more intellectual way -than by the use of the drill? We write here only of a <i>possible</i> -expansion of the human domain by the services of science.</p> - -<p>A more practicable matter is that the age of steam, out of -which, into something better, we are probably to pass at a day -not distant, has been a very prodigal one. Waste is its great -fault. It wastes three fourths of the coal it consumes; it therefore -wastes infinite sums of human energy. It wastes everything, -nature and man, the streams, the forests, the vitality -and the hopes of men. Its motto is <i>concentration</i>. It herds -human beings in towns; it makes transit laborious and long. -The age of economies has begun, and new agents, such as electricity -and gas, have for their mottoes <i>disperse</i> and <i>distribute</i>. -It is probably not extravagant to say that mankind are wasting -every week enough of natural bounties to sustain them for a -month, perhaps for a year. If science, then, shall only barely -help us to the economic use of all natural bounties, it will -have enriched human life (for the mass of mankind) at least -four-fold. It will probably be well for us if this enrichment -comes gradually and is preceded by a moral preparation for -the use of abundance. We have never, as a race, been good -enough to be safely rich. We have no poets from the equatorial -regions. It may be many generations before we are -good enough to grow philosophy and high bred cattle in the -torrid zone. Perhaps we do not any where keep up in moral -training with the march of science.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>THE COURSE OF READING FOR 1885-86.</h3> - -<p>The student about to enter college has scarcely a pleasanter -task than that of examining the course he is about to begin. -The prospect of future achievements, how fascinating it is! -That Livy which he has heard discussed by learned seniors and -professors will soon be his property, too. The problems that are -historical among his big brothers and cousins, and sisters as -well, sometimes, he will soon grapple with. Whole fields of unknown -literature and science and art open to him in his brief -glance. He enjoys familiarizing himself with the names of -the authors of the text-books, in marking among the elective -studies his choice, in looking up the old text-books in the -library, in preparing note-books for the next year, in picking -up random bits of information. Getting ready for his college -course often becomes quite as engrossing as the actual work. -The C. L. S. C. student will experience this same interest -in looking over what he is going to do another year. The -course is now ready, and he will have the entire summer -for contemplating his coming conquests. Enjoy the prospect -to the full; it is certainly a goodly one. The bone and sinew -of next year’s course is to be Roman History and Literature. -The place Greece and its men filled in the course of 1884-85 -will be taken by Rome. While the subject is equally interesting, -the course of the coming year has one great advantage. -Greece has no modern history of particular importance, its -heroes died with Corinth’s destruction, its literature and art -and philosophy faded with its loss of patriotism. Where Rome -stood, now Italy stands. The history of the decadence of Roman -rule and the growth of Italian freedom is one of the most -thrilling chapters in the world’s history. A literature, an art, and -a science belong to this new growth. In studying Rome’s life -we have a modern chapter that keeps up our interest. The -course happily provides for us papers on “Modern Italy” and -“Italian Biography,” in addition to the works on the History -of Rome, the “Preparatory Latin Course in English,” the -“College Latin Course in English,” and “A Day in Ancient<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_609" id="Page_609">[609]</a></span> -Rome.” A practical turn is given to the work by a study of -the relations of Rome to modern history.</p> - -<p>The more general work of the course is selected from the -wide fields of philosophy, science, art and religion. Dr. Geo. -M. Steele has prepared a work on “Political Economy,” which -will furnish some of the liveliest reading for the year. This -subject will be supplemented by two series of papers on -“Parliamentary Practice” and “International Law,” to be -published in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>.</p> - -<p>Robert Browning in “Pomegranates from an English Garden” -will be the representative of English poetry. It will be -seen that, as in the case of Robert Browning’s poems, several -studies are introduced to brighten the more solid work; for -this purpose we have “In His Name,” by Edward Everett -Hale, read in connection with a book by Dr. Townsend on -“The Bible and the XIXth Century,” and a series of studies, to -appear in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>, on “God in History.”</p> - -<p>One work which will be a real treat to everybody is “Studies -in Human Nature,” by Dr. Lyman Abbott. The additional -readings in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> are: “Wars and Rumors of -Wars To-day,” “The Age we Live In,” “Religion in Art,” -“Art Outlines,” “Studies in Mathematics,” “Moral Philosophy,” -studies on “How to Live,” by Edward Everett Hale, -papers on the past, present and future of electricity, and “Home -Studies in Physical Geography.” A better course has never -been presented to the members of the C. L. S. C.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="EDITORS_NOTE-BOOK">EDITOR’S NOTE-BOOK.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>The July issue of <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> closes the fifth volume -of the magazine. In October the sixth volume will begin. -The outlook for <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> for 1885-86 is much -brighter than ever before. We shall offer our friends a much -improved magazine. The place of <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> will -be taken in the summer by the <i>Assembly Herald</i>. The <i>Herald</i> -for 1885 will contain full reports of the work of the -Assembly for the summer. A glance at the elaborate program -printed in this impression will convince the reader -of the value of a paper containing such a course of lectures -as that of the Chautauqua platform. Besides the lectures -many suggestive and useful reports will be printed, which -members of the C. L. S. C. in particular will find helpful. -Those who may wish to subscribe for both <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> -and <i>Herald</i> will find it profitable to take advantage -of our <span class="smcapuc">COMBINATION OFFER</span>, found in another column of this -impression.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The war rumors of a month ago have subsided almost as -quickly as they were aroused. The cries of “On to Khartoum” -and “Smash the Mahdi” have died out. Instead of running -the frontier below the Soudan, the English have been content -to fix it at Wady Halfa. After all the excitement over Afghanistan, -peace has been established between Russia and England. -The Americans, most of them, have come home from Panama. -Riel has been captured. The comparatively easy settlement of -misunderstandings between nations is our best hope for the -future. Each new victory of arbitration over “bad blood,” -even if it be at the sacrifice of a little of our pride and possessions, -is so much of a stride toward the millennium.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>For the third time Mr. James Russell Lowell has been called -upon to speak in Westminster Abbey. This time at the unveiling -of the bust of the poet Coleridge. In summing up his -remarks he said: “Whatever may have been his faults and -weaknesses, he was the man of all his generation to whom we -should most unhesitatingly allow the distinction of genius, that -is, of one authentically possessed from time to time by some -influence that made him better and greater than himself. If -he lost himself too much in what Mr. Pater has admirably -called ‘impassioned contemplation,’ he has at least left us -such a legacy as only genius, and genius not always, can -leave. It is for this that we pay him this homage of memory.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>A series of statistics most suggestive to those interested in -the temperance question have of late been published. According -to this table there was drunk in the United States -twenty-five years ago over 86,000,000 gallons of spirituous liquor, -while now, with a population almost doubled, the consumption -is decreased by about 15 per cent. To balance this comes in -the enormous consumption of light liquors, nearly six times as -great as in 1860. But it must be remembered that a large proportion -of the latter is consumed by the foreign element introduced -since 1860.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The tragic fate of the town of Plymouth, Pennsylvania, is -one more melancholy example of the result of breaking Nature’s -laws. There is no doubt but that an epidemic of typhoid -fever is a crime traceable to somebody’s neglect. In Plymouth -the refuse from a house situated at the head of the -stream which supplied the village with drinking water was allowed -to poison the water. This outrageous state of affairs is -to be seen in many other towns, and in parts of our cities. If -after Plymouth’s suffering a repetition occurs in any part of -the country, public sentiment ought to be strong enough to -hunt down and punish the guilty authorities that will hold human -life and God’s law so lightly.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>There is one sure way of securing sanitary reform in every -city or town with dilatory health board or indifferent council. -Arouse the women. The Ladies’ Health Protection Society, of -New York City, has done work in that community during -the past six months, before which its large Board of Health -seemed perfectly helpless. If cleanliness and purity are not -to be secured by the civil authorities, there is no more suitable -public work for women than to constitute themselves the -guardians of the health of their home towns.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>At the recent commencement of the Union Theological -Seminary, of New York, the alumni association elected as -president an Indian of pure Choctaw blood, now a pastor in -the Indian Territory. His son was a member of the graduating -class of this year. We are growing broader.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The position that Mr. Phelps will take at the Court of St. -James has been agitating the English correspondent of one of -our great dailies. He finds that being a minister merely, Mr. -Phelps must come in among the ministers, after all the seven -ambassadors; and that, alas! he will be literally at the foot of -this class of twenty-three. Ministers take social rank according -to the length of time they have held their positions, so Mr. -Phelps and the stars and stripes trot along after Guatemala -and Columbia and Siam and Hayti.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The teachers who tried Chautauqua last summer for their -vacations, found the spot so suitable for their uses, so delightful -for recreation, that they have spread abroad the rumor of -her beauty, and in July of the coming summer two State -Teachers’ Associations—that of Ohio and that of New York—will -meet there.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>There are very few people unfamiliar with law and its -phrases, who have not been bewildered over the complicated -expressions and seemingly useless repetitions found in almost -all documents. This “iteration in law” has lately been made -the subject of some interesting computations by David Dudley<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_610" id="Page_610">[610]</a></span> -Field. By his counting every deed contains 860 superfluous -words, and every mortgage 1,240. The people of New York -State, he calculates, pay every year $100,000 for the recording -of useless words. The next reform in law should be rhetorical.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Mr. John Ruskin, of Oxford, and Prof. J. Rendel Harris, of -Johns Hopkins, have resigned their professorships in their respective -universities because, it is stated, vivisection is practiced -in the institutions. There is no reason in such hyper-sympathy. -The abuse of vivisection is quite probable, but -that does not lessen the force of the fact that vivisection has -done much to alleviate human misery, and will in the future -undoubtedly do more. The question is, if man or beast must -suffer, which life is the more precious.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Houghton Farm, the headquarters of the Chautauqua Town -and Country Club, has an interesting history. Several -years ago 1,000 acres of land lying about nine miles from Newburgh, -N. Y., were purchased by a Mr. Valentine as an experimental -farm. About thirty buildings, adapted to every kind -of farm work, were erected; the best of stock, the -most skillful laborers were secured. The farm soon became -a kind of educational institution. Farmers were -invited to inspect its work, and to listen to lectures from the -learned managers; children had days set apart for their -enjoyment. Orange county has been educated by the Houghton -Farm. Now its generous hearted proprietor has extended the -work by opening its advantages to all those who will join the -Chautauqua Town and Country Club.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The strange fascination lurking in dangerous feats which so -powerfully affects some minds, was never more forcibly manifested -than in the case of Robert E. Odlum, who jumped from -the Brooklyn bridge not long ago. For some time the -thought had been a passion with him, and although the -police were watching to prevent the attempt, he escaped their -vigilance and took the fatal leap. His body was three and -one-fourth seconds in making the descent of 140 feet, thus -corroborating almost exactly the law of falling bodies. He -breathed only a few times after he was picked up, being inwardly -literally “mangled to death.” His is only one more -name added to the list of those who, by their folly, may teach -others lessons of wisdom, and so, perhaps, have not died utterly -in vain.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Although war-like preparations have ceased in the Soudan, -and no more troops are to be transported thither to help -“smash the Mahdi,” the railroad across the desert is progressing -slowly but surely. The correspondent of the <i>Times</i> telegraphs -the following: “The construction of the railway is a -curious and interesting sight. In advance is a picket of -cavalry, while far off on either side the videttes scout in the -bush. At the immediate head of the line is a battalion of infantry -echeloned, and advancing as the rails are laid. Streams -of coolies carry the sleepers from the trucks, and teams of four -artillery horses drag up the rails, two at a time, to the navvies, -who lay them in a twinkling, and drive the spikes. In the rear -are gangs who complete the line, and further back the ballasting -parties.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Visitors to Niagara Falls this summer will enjoy their trip as -never before. Everything that tends to mar the beauty of the -natural scenery is to be removed, and after July 15th, access to -all points of interest is to be free of charge. To bring about -this happy consummation which during so many long years -past has been devoutly wished by all right-thinking men, required -a long and hard-fought battle against willful ignorance -and greed of gain.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>General Gordon’s “Life and Letters,” recently published, -prove him to have one accomplishment of rare beauty and -usefulness, but too often nowadays neglected. He was a -good letter writer, and that under circumstances the most trying. -Here is the picture his biographer draws of the surroundings -under which many of his letters were written: “The -temperature is over 100°; the ink dries on the pen before three -words are written; books curl, as to their backs; mosquitoes -are busy at the ankles under the table, and the hands and -wrists above; prickly heat comes and goes. How one realizes, -for instance, the whole scene in the over-wakeful traveller’s -night: ‘I am writing in the open air by a candle-lamp, in -a savage gorge; not a sound to be heard. The baboons are in -bed in the rocks.’” The letters which the most of us write -under the most favorable circumstances are limited to the -narrowest space possible. What we would do in Gordon’s -place it is difficult to say.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The most beautiful celebration of the month of June is -Children’s day. With every season Protestant churches give -more time and money to their preparations for it, and it bids -fair to take rank in importance with Christmas and Easter. -Certainly no day comes at a season when it is more easy to -decorate, it being the very heyday of the flower season, and no -cause is more worthy our efforts than the children’s.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>An important discussion has been going on for a few weeks -in the New York papers, concerning the advisability of closing -the dry goods stores on Saturday afternoons. Clerks have no -day for recreation or for improvement except Sabbath. The -same is true of nearly all classes of laboring people. The result -is that the Sabbath, instead of being a day of religious rest, -is turned into one of pleasure, and often of extra work. A half -holiday would enable busy workers to prepare for Sabbath. -It is a reform in the arrangement of time that is worthy the attention -of Christian people particularly.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>There is a capital hint in the following story, told by a lady -prominent in mission school work in one of our large cities: -“We had some of our Chinese pupils at a church sociable a -few nights ago, and we had at supper some candies which -are rolled up in paper with printed couplets inclosed—some of -them extremely silly. The Chinese boys read them and looked -surprised, but were too polite to say anything. Soon afterward -they gave an entertainment, and the same sort of candies -were provided; but when we unrolled the papers we found they -had taken out the foolish verses and had substituted texts of -Scripture printed on little slips of paper.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Here are a few of M. Bartholdi’s interesting figures about his -great Statue of Liberty: “The forefinger is 96½ inches in -length, and 56½ inches in circumference at the second -joint. The nail measures 17¾ inches by 10½ inches. The -head 13¾ feet in height. The eye is 25½ inches in width. -The nose is 44 inches in length. About forty persons were accommodated -in the head at the Universal Exposition of 1878. -It is possible to ascend into the torch above the hand. It will -easily hold twelve persons.” Compared with other colossi it -far outstrips them all, being about three times the height of -both the statue of Bavaria and of the Virgin of Puy, and about -58 feet higher than the Arminius in Westphalia.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The French Republic would not allow the remains of Victor -Hugo to be placed in the Pantheon until that celebrated -structure was again secularized. The priests were allowed -just forty-eight hours to vacate the sacred precincts which, as -a church, they had held uninterruptedly since 1877. This -action plainly shows the position of the Republic toward the -Church. “French skeptics,” says <i>The Nation</i>, “are not content, -like English or German skeptics, with ceasing to go to -church.… They insist on proclaiming in every possible -way their hostility to the clergy.” The fact that the Pantheon -is again restored to its primitive design as “a last resting -place for distinguished public men” can but be pleasing -to all.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_611" id="Page_611">[611]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="TALK_ABOUT_BOOKS">TALK ABOUT BOOKS.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>Among the books belonging to the “Famous Women Series,” the biography -of Harriet Martineau<a name="FNanchor_2" id="FNanchor_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_2" class="fnanchor">[B]</a> takes a leading place. The life of this -remarkable woman is written by one whose clear insight into human -character, and keen appreciation of that which tends to make it noble -and strong, render her eminently qualified for such an undertaking. -The style of the book is simple, unadorned, direct. No step has been -neglected which could add to the author’s information, or, as she -quaintly expresses it, could help her “get touch” with her subject. -That Mrs. Miller is something of a hero worshiper is evident from the -fact that, with but one or two slight exceptions, she justifies all the facts -of the life she relates. The rigor of Harriet Martineau’s early home; -the longings of the young girl for freedom from a needless restraint, and -the desire to read and study, which led her to steal the time for it in -the early morning and late at night, might convey a lesson to many a -mother who now insists upon having her daughters follow the conventional -methods of living. One can but rejoice in the advanced position -women have attained as he reads of Harriet Martineau, the statesman, -and sees that she is as thoroughly understood and appreciated in this -aspect of her life by her biographer as in the more womanly elements -and instincts of her nature, which were never in the least violated by -her study of political interests. Excepting the skepticism which marked -all the mature years of Harriet Martineau’s life, one finds in her a good -type of strong, noble womanhood. Christian readers can but deprecate -this fact, and also that it is justified by Mrs. Miller.</p> - -<p>A volume of the prose writings of N. P. Willis<a name="FNanchor_3" id="FNanchor_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_3" class="fnanchor">[C]</a> will be received by -the reading public in much the same manner as the work of a new -author, so little are they known. His reputation rests almost entirely -upon his poems and a few Scriptural sketches, which it seems natural -to think of as belonging to the early periods of American literature. It -will probably strike most people with a feeling of surprise to recall that -his death occurred so recently as 1867, and that he was therefore contemporary -with Bryant and Longfellow. Just why this recent oblivion -has fallen upon his writings is hard to tell, for the collection in this volume -shows that they deserve a better fate. The character sketches are -fairly drawn; and the bits of description indicate powers of a high order -in this particular. The personality of the author is manifest in all -the articles; the reader is conscious of constantly looking through the -writer’s eyes. The wild, unchecked bent of his imagination is shown -in such pieces as “The Lunatic’s Skate,” and “The Ghost-Ball at Congress -Hall,” somewhat resembling the more intense works of Poe. Aptness -in illustration, implying a delicate perception of resemblances, and -a happy faculty of associating ideas is a marked characteristic. He fails -to touch the deeper emotions of one’s nature, and there is a lack of both -strength and plot in all he writes. Whether Mr. Beers succeeds in making -Willis’s works live or not, he has by his selections and editing, and -by his introductory memoir, given to the public a very interesting work.</p> - -<p>Perhaps no one ever more perfectly caught the spirit of all things -Egyptian than Professor Ebers. The <i>genius</i> of the country which -brings under its sway all that comes within its domain, affecting them -to such a degree that one can but fancy even the sphynx would be less -gloomily impressive in any other land, gained such an influence over -him, and so makes itself felt in his books, that it is almost impossible -to imagine him otherwise than as a man wrapped round with that somber, -mysterious air which constantly hints of the power to reveal things -more and more wonderful. From the beginning to the end of Serapis<a name="FNanchor_4" id="FNanchor_4"></a><a href="#Footnote_4" class="fnanchor">[D]</a> -one is conscious of being under some spell that fascinates and charms. -The little party introduced at the beginning gives rise to a sense of the -vast possibilities hidden away in each life—even that of little Dada, the -merry-hearted, seemingly thoughtless, young girl—and the sequel reveals -in each one these possibilities realized. The story is laid in the -times of the Roman emperor, Theodosius I., and its interest centers in -the destruction of the Serapeum, the Alexandrian temple containing the -statue of Serapis, the great Egyptian divinity, which was also mutilated -and torn down. A description of the races is given in such a way as -to render readers virtually eye-witnesses of the scene, and it is with an -effort that one keeps himself from rising with the crowd as the decisive -moment nears, and shouting in the general frenzy of excitement. The -author lacks the power of putting his readers into nearer relation with -his characters than that of mere acquaintances, in whose welfare a general -sympathetic interest is taken. One prizes the book for its impressive -historical facts and beautiful descriptions.</p> - -<p>“Troubled Waters”<a name="FNanchor_5" id="FNanchor_5"></a><a href="#Footnote_5" class="fnanchor">[E]</a> is a novel with a purpose. The question of -capital and labor is discussed, and the plan of coöperation is upheld -as the key which is to unlock the difficulties thickening fast and -threateningly around the business interests of to-day. The dangers -lurking in the fact of poorly compensated labor, as it watches the fast -increasing gains of capital amassed at its expense, are vividly set forth. -In the strike of the Tradelawn mill hands, will be seen a faithful picture -of what transpires in many a similar town. The style of the book is vigorous, -independent, and clear. The number of persons introduced, and the -characterization of some of them, particularly Mr. Thomas Street, reminds -one of Dickens. In the web of adverse circumstances enmeshing and ever -tightening about the really noble Robert Croft, until he is driven to the -very verge of desperation and crime, the greatest power of the author -is shown. Of course all ends well, and as one leaves all the hands in -the new mills, in which every worker is a stockholder, contented and -happy, there remains with him a conviction that coöperation is the right -principle.</p> - -<p>One of the most attractive of all the books of its kind is “The Chautauqua -Birthday Book”<a name="FNanchor_6" id="FNanchor_6"></a><a href="#Footnote_6" class="fnanchor">[F]</a> just issued. Daintily bound, and containing -illustrations of the places so familiar and endeared to all Chautauquans, -it can not fail to receive a warm welcome at their hands. The “Prefatory -Note” is written by Chancellor J. H. Vincent. The selections made -of the best things said by the best authors. As one turns the pages -bearing the dates, the eye lights upon the names of many familiar -friends, and the pleasing memories that instantly arise make one glad -for the happy thought that originated so genial a souvenir.</p> - -<p>No undertaking more deserves the thoughtful consideration and hearty -support of every community than that of the introduction of a line -of classics for children into the public schools. Mr. Ginn has already -edited for the use of scholars of from nine to fourteen years of age, a -number of very attractive books, among which are “Tales from Shakspere,” -by Charles and Mary Lamb, and Scott’s “Tales of a Grandfather.”<a name="FNanchor_7" id="FNanchor_7"></a><a href="#Footnote_7" class="fnanchor">[G]</a> -The original works have been changed very little. A few -verbal alterations were required, and the parts beyond the comprehension -of a child were omitted. A young boy or girl after reading these -editions will have practically the same knowledge that the older acquire -from the unabridged works, and they certainly will be equally as much -interested in them.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_2" id="Footnote_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_2"><span class="label">[B]</span></a> Harriet Martineau. By Mrs. F. Fenwick Miller. Boston: Roberts Brothers. -1885. Price, $1.00.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_3" id="Footnote_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_3"><span class="label">[C]</span></a> Prose Writings of Nathaniel Parker Willis. Selected by Henry A. Beers. New -York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_4" id="Footnote_4"></a><a href="#FNanchor_4"><span class="label">[D]</span></a> Serapis. By George Ebers. New York: William S. Gottsberger, 11 Murray -Street. 1885. Price, paper cover, 50 cents.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_5" id="Footnote_5"></a><a href="#FNanchor_5"><span class="label">[E]</span></a> Troubled Waters. A Problem of To-day. By Beverly Ellison Warner. Philadelphia: -J. B. Lippincott. 1885. Price, $1.25.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_6" id="Footnote_6"></a><a href="#FNanchor_6"><span class="label">[F]</span></a> The Chautauqua Birthday Book. Arranged by Annie M. Cummings. Buffalo, -N. Y.: H. H. Otis. Price, $1.00.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_7" id="Footnote_7"></a><a href="#FNanchor_7"><span class="label">[G]</span></a> Tales from Shakspere. By Charles and Mary Lamb. Tales of a Grandfather, -Vol. I. Being the History of Scotland. By Walter Scott. Abridged and edited by -Edwin Ginn. Boston: Ginn, Heath & Co. 1885.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3>BOOKS RECEIVED.</h3> - -<p>Valeria. By the Rev. W. H. Withrow. New York: Phillips & -Hunt. Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe. 1885. Price, $1.00.</p> - -<p>The Sentence and Word Book. By James Johonnot. New York: -D. Appleton & Co. 1885.</p> - -<p>Vain Forebodings. By E. Oswald. Translated from the German -by Mrs. A. L. Wister. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. 1885. -Price, $1.25.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_612" id="Page_612">[612]</a></span></p> - -<p>Pestalozzi’s Leonard and Gertrude. Translated and Abridged. By -Eva Channing. Boston: Ginn, Heath & Co. 1885.</p> - -<p>Dante. A Rare Collection of Texts, Commentaries, etc., of Dante’s -Divina Commedia. Cincinnati: Anton Bicker.</p> - -<p>The Meisterschaft System for the Italian Language. By Dr. Richard -S. Rosenthal. Part I. Boston: Meisterschaft Publishing Company.</p> - -<p>General Gordon: The Christian Hero. By the author of “Our -Queen,” “New World Heroes,” etc. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell -& Co.</p> - -<p>Pulpit and Easel. By Mary B. Sleight. New York: Thomas Y. -Crowell & Co.</p> - -<p>Hearing and How to Keep It. By Charles H. Burnett, M.D. -Philadelphia: P. Blakiston, Son & Co. 1885.</p> - -<p>Dogma No Antidote for Doubt. By a member of the New York -Bar. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. 1885.</p> - -<p>Catechism on Alcohol. (In German.) By Julia Colman. New -York: National Temperance Society. 1885.</p> - -<p>Circulars of Information of the Bureau of Education. No. I.—1885. -Washington: Government Printing Office.</p> - -<p>Planting Trees in School Grounds and the Celebration of Arbor Day. -Washington: Government Printing Office. 1885.</p> - -<p>The Russian Revolt. By Edmund Noble. Boston: Houghton, -Mifflin & Co. 1885. Price, $1.00.</p> - -<p>From the Golden Gate to the Golden Horn. By Henry Frederick -Reddall. New York: Phillips & Hunt. Cincinnati: Cranston & -Stowe. 1885. Price, $1.25.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="CHAUTAUQUA_IN_JAPAN">CHAUTAUQUA IN JAPAN.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p class="center">BY WM. D. BRIDGE.</p> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>Japan moves to the front, for <i>Chautauqua</i> has taken firm -root in Japan. The Chautauqua Idea is an ecumenical idea, -and it is the province of this article to show the workings of -this idea in Japan during the past six months.</p> - -<p>Late in the summer of 1884 Mrs. A. M. Drennan (C. L. S. -C. class of ’82), a resident missionary in Japan, at Osaka, entered -into correspondence with Chancellor Vincent as to the -possibility of translating valuable English materials in the line -of the “C. L. S. C.” into the Japanese vernacular. Among the -material tracts, papers, etc., sent, was one which she put into -the hands of an educated native, well versed also in English, -who said on reading it: “If that book can be put into the -hands of the young men, Tom Paine and other infidels must -leave Japan.”</p> - -<p>Chancellor Vincent, on reviewing the necessities of the -field, and marking the wondrous developments of that newborn -nation, arranged with Mrs. Drennan for the translation -of the “Required Reading” in <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> into Japanese, -guaranteeing a prescribed sum per month for expenses -of translating for one year.</p> - -<p>March 30, 1885, Mrs. Drennan writes: “I wish I could convey -to you something of an idea of the enthusiasm in reference -to our Chautauqua Society here. In much less than a -week after the first advertisement in the papers, our secretary -had received nearly three hundred letters of inquiry, and, on -application, had given out every one of the first five hundred -copies of the ‘Hand-Book.’ A second edition of five hundred -was made, and now, in less than a week, only two hundred -copies remain.”</p> - -<p>The “Hand-Book” referred to is the first number of a magazine, -in book form, containing articles from <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>, -viz.: “Mosaics of History,” “Africa,” “Alexander the -Great,” “One Hundred Questions,” “World of Science,” and -“The Results of the Discovery of America.”</p> - -<p>Mr. C. S. Hongma, of Osaka, a native Japanese, President -of the “Japanese Literary and Scientific Circle,” writes to -Chancellor Vincent, in good English, a letter full of hope, and -expressing his delight in aiding to organize the circle, and -asking help and prayers for its success.</p> - -<p>The laws of Japan require six months’ notice to be given of -intention to publish a magazine, and but one month’s notice -for publishing a book. The quotations from <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> -are therefore given the book form.</p> - -<p>Mrs. Drennan says the natives will pay the expense of advertising -the movement in Japanese papers, and will, ere long, -pay the cost of translation.</p> - -<p>April 13, 1885, Mrs. Drennan writes: “It would take a long -letter to tell you the good things about our J. L. S. C. We -have just received to-day from the press our third edition of -the ‘Hand-Book;’ this makes twenty-five hundred printed. -Our secretary is preparing to-night a list of the paid-up members. -There have been over three hundred applicants for -membership, but only one hundred and fifty have as yet paid -all dues. You know there is the house rent (for place of meeting -of the local circles), and the fixing up, lights, etc., to give -us a comfortable place of meeting. These, with most of the -advertising and other expenses, have been met by the members; -and with your kind aid for a little while we will have an -influence that will spread over this entire land, doing great -things for this people. Our secretary has answered over <i>seven -hundred letters of inquiry</i>. Applications have come from several -cities for the privilege of organizing branch societies.</p> - -<p>“The first article in our ‘Hand-Book’ is an editorial by the -editor of the largest paper in this part of Japan. He is a very -fine writer and highly educated. He is perfectly enthusiastic -over the work. It is an argument for this plan, giving his -views as to the good it will accomplish in Japan. The second -article explains the object and aim of the Society.</p> - -<p>“My heart has been thrilled with delight on receiving letters -and applications for membership from some soldiers in a distant -city. It has been a punishable offense for any teacher of -Christianity, or Bible reader, to go into the army or among -the soldiers. I thought, if this course of reading spread -among them, who can compute its influence, who can tell the -result of this silent teacher for Christ!”</p> - -<p>The new members are not satisfied with Japanese cards of -membership, but are anxious for enrollment at the Central Office -of the C. L. S. C., Plainfield, N. J., and for cards of membership -from America.</p> - -<p>Mrs. Drennan, under date of April 14th, says: “One hundred -and seventy-five names of members have just been given -me, fifty new names being added last evening. [She sends -for three hundred membership cards.] I never saw such an interest -created by anything in any country. Oh that God may -bless it to the good of this people, and make it a permanent -organization for all time! Pray for us.”</p> - -<p>That our readers may know of what “stuff” this earnest C. -L. S. C. worker is made, I will say that she has charge of a Girls’ -School at Osaka, teaches young men three hours per day, -teaches a Bible class of young men (twenty-five in number) on -Sabbath evenings, and for a year and a half has kept up a -Chautauqua circle among the English speaking people and -others. In order to secure government permission to publish -the Chautauqua literature, permanent resident officers must be -chosen; therefore the existing local circle suspended, and was -reorganized with such officers as the government will recognize.</p> - -<p>One of the members is now translating “Outline Study of -Man,” another “Cyrus and Alexander,” and two others are at -work on <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>.</p> - -<p>Mrs. Drennan sends an itemized financial statement, showing -three eighths of the expenses (total, $66.25) paid by the -Japanese to date and five eighths by the Central Office, with -the assurance that hereafter the heaviest part will be borne by -the enthusiastic natives. God bless a work like this in young -Japan, and God bless Mrs. Drennan and her associates!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_613" id="Page_613">[613]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="PROGRAM_OF_POPULAR_EXERCISES">PROGRAM OF POPULAR EXERCISES.<br /> -<span class="smaller">TWELFTH SUMMER ASSEMBLY AT CHAUTAUQUA.</span></h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<h3><i>Saturday, July 11.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Organ Prelude, Mr. I. V. Flagler, of Auburn, N.Y.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Opening Address before the “Chautauqua Teachers’ Retreat” and “Chautauqua Schools of Language,” by Chancellor C. N. Sims, of Syracuse University.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Parlor Reception, C. T. R. and C. S. L.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Night Songs—Flotilla on the Lake.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Sunday, July 12.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school and Assembly.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Opening Sermon, by Chancellor C. N. Sims.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Platform Meeting—Addresses by Dr. C. N. Sims and Dr. J. H. Vincent.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Society of Christian Ethics.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Vesper Service of the C. L. S. C.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Evening Song, conducted by W. A. Duncan, Esq., assisted by the Fisk Jubilee Singers.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Monday, July 13.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Adjustment of Classes, and Beginning of C. T. R. and C. S. L. Work.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Venice, the Faded Queen of the Adriatic.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Tuesday, July 14.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>First Organ Recital, Mr. I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">1:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>First Tourists’ Conference.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Florence, the Athens of Italy.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Wednesday, July 15.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture: John Alabaster, D.D., “Michel Angelo.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Fisk Jubilees.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. John Alabaster: “Leonardo Da Vinci.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Thursday, July 16.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. John Alabaster: “Naples, Pompeii and Vesuvius.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Second Tourists’ Conference.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Rome;” first lecture.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Friday, July 17.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Second Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture: “From Chautauqua to Casamicciola,” by Prof. J. C. Freeman.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>A Popular Lesson in Music, Prof. A. T. Schauffler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Rome;” second lecture.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Saturday, July 18.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">Excursion to Niagara Falls, at Reduced Rates, for Members -of the C. T. R. and C. S. L.</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture: “Around Vesuvius,” Prof. J. C. Freeman.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Readings, Prof. A. Lalande.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Sunday, July 19.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school and Assembly.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon by ——</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon by Dr. B. G. Northrop: “The Bible as an Educator.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Society of Christian Ethics.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Song Service, Fisk Jubilees.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Monday, July 20.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. B. G. Northrop: “Memory, and How to Train It.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Latin Symposium.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Spelling Match.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Tuesday, July 21.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Third Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, and Chas. F. Underhill, Elocutionist, all of New York.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Third Tourists’ Conference.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Leon H. Vincent: “A Trip through Italy.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Wednesday, July 22.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. G. C. Lorimer, of Chicago: “Philanthropy of Humor.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, and Chas. F. Underhill.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Parlor Soirée.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Thursday, July 23.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p m.—</td> - <td>Fourth Organ Concert, I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Fourth Tourists’ Conference.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. D. H. Wheeler: “Memories of Life in Italy.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Friday, July 24.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Miss Kate Field: “The Mormon Creed.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>The Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, Lecture: “The Homes and Habits of Ants.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture on “The Oil Regions.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Pronouncing Match.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Saturday, July 25.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">Excursion to Oil City, Pa.</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Conference on “Visible Speech” and “Phonetics,” Dr. J. W. Dickinson.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Miss Kate Field: “Political and Social Crimes of Utah.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Mr. A. T. Schauffler, of New York, conductor.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td></td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Sunday, July 26.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school and Assembly.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon by the Rev. Dr. George Dana Boardman, of Philadelphia.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon by the Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, of Philadelphia.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Society of Christian Ethics.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon by the Rev. George W. Miller, D.D., of Philadelphia.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_614" id="Page_614">[614]</a></span></p> - -<h3><i>Monday, July 27.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Geo. W. Miller, D.D.: “Martin Luther.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. G. D. Boardman: “The Graphic Art.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">3:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Public Exposition Chautauqua School of Modern Languages and Methods.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. J. T. Edwards: “The Telephone and Edison’s Inventions.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Tuesday, July 28.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Fifth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Public Readings, Prof. R. L. Cumnock.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Public Chautauqua Teachers’ Retreat Question Drawer.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Fisk Jubilees.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Wednesday, July 29.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. George Sexton, of England.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, the Rev. Robert Nourse: “Blighted Women.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>First Lecture on “Khartoum and the Soudan,” by the Rev. Dr. Henry M. Ladd, with Stereopticon.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Thursday, July 30.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sixth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon by Dr. J. M. King: “The Dignity of Small Duties.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert—Fisk Jubilees.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Second Lecture on “Khartoum and the Soudan,” by Dr. H. M. Ladd, with Stereopticon.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Friday, July 31.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, A. T. Schauffler, conductor.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon by Dr. J. M. King: “Paris, and a Chapter on Cæsarism.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Closing Exercises C. T. R.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Philip Phillips: “Around the World,” with Stereopticon.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Saturday, August 1.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“Mid-Season Celebration.” Excursion to Panama Rocks.</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>First Woman’s Missionary Conference: 1. “Best means of creating an interest in missions.” 2. “How can we increase the zeal and efficiency of present methods of work?”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture: “Wm. Carey,” by the Rev. J. W. A. Stewart, of Hamilton, Ont.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Fisk Jubilees.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>First General Missionary Conference: “How can the work for Missions, being done in every church by a minority of its members, be presented for the consideration of the church <i>en masse</i>?”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Philip Phillips: “Around the World.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Sunday, August 2.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school and Assembly.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon by the Rev. J. W. A. Stewart.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Second General Missionary Conference: Addresses by Dr. George Sexton, the Rev. C. C. Creegan, and Dr. William Butler. Topic: “The Ability and Responsibility of the Church to Evangelize the World.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Second Woman’s Missionary Conference: Mrs. D. R. James, of Washington, D. C.: “The Future of Our Country.”<br /> - Society of Christian Ethics.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Service of Song, Philip Phillips.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Monday, August 3.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Third Woman’s Missionary Conference: “The Immediate and Pressing Necessity for Home Mission Work.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>General Missionary Meeting: Address by the Rev. Dr. Wm. F. Johnson, of Allahabad, India.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Songs of the South, Fisk Jubilees.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Third General Missionary Conference: “The Present and Pressing Emergency for Increased Activity in Home Missionary Work, how can we meet it?”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Missionary Prayer Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Anniversary “Chautauqua Missionary Institute:” Addresses by the Rev. William Kincaid and Dr. William Butler.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Tuesday, August 4.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“OPENING DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Fourth Woman’s Missionary Conference: 1. “The Importance of Missionary Training, especially for the young.” 2. “The Relation of Missionary Literature to successful Missionary Work.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Mr. H. K. Carroll, editor New York <i>Independent</i>: “A Lost Doctrine.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Fourth General Missionary Conference: 1. “Active Service,” Dr. William Butler. 2. “Systematic Giving,” the Rev. C. C. Creegan.<br /> - <hr class="shorter" /></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Chautauqua Bells.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Chautauqua Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Chautauqua Reunion: Addresses; Music by Fisk Jubilees, Miss Dora Henninges, Mr. Hutchins, of Chicago, cornetist, etc.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Fireworks.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Wednesday, August 5.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.<br /> - Bible Reading, Dr. John Williamson.<br /> - Normal Class, Dr. J. L. Hurlbut, the Rev. R. S. Holmes.<br /> - Children’s Class, the Rev. B. T. Vincent.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Devotional Hour, Dr. B. N. Adams.<br /> - Intermediate Class, the Rev. B. T. Vincent.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Primary Teachers’ Class, Mrs. B. T. Vincent.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague, of Boston: “Shakspere’s Youth.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, H. K. Carroll, Editor N.Y. <i>Independent</i>, “Journalism.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>First W. C. T. U. Conference.<br /> - C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Denominational Prayer Meetings.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture (illustrated), Miss Von Finkelstein and Brother: “The Bedouins of Arabia.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Thursday, August 6.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Eighth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Shakspere as an Author.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Henninges-Hutchins.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Second W. C. T. U. Conference.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>S. S. Normal Question Drawer—Dr. J. H. Vincents.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein and Brother: “The Fellaheen of Palestine.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Friday, August 7.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“LOOK-UP LEGION DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>First Session “American Church-School of Church-Work.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Milton as an Educator.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Miss Frances E. Willard: “Evolution in the Temperance Reform.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Third W. C. T. U. Conference.<br /> - “Look-Up Legion Anniversary.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8.00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein and Brother: “City Life in Jerusalem.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_615" id="Page_615">[615]</a></span></p> - -<h3><i>Saturday, August 8.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“C. L. S. C. INAUGURATION DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Milton’s Paradise Lost.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Prof. C. C. Case, conductor.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Fourth W. C. T. U. Conference.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>“C. L. S. C. Inauguration Day.” Address, the Rev. R. S. Holmes.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-School Teachers’ Meeting.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Sunday, August 9.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school and Assembly.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon, Bishop R. S. Foster.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>“Memorial Service:” Bishop I. W. Wiley, Mrs. Victor Cornuelle, the Rev. Joseph Leslie, Hon. Schuyler Colfax.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Society of Christian Ethics.<br /> - Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon, J. A. Worden, D.D.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Monday, August 10.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture: “The Story of Two Brothers,” the Rev. H. M. Bacon.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Bishop R. S. Foster: “India and its People.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Normal Council.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, the Rev. S. R. Frazier: “A Yankee in Japan.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Tuesday, August 11.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Ninth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Mrs. Mary A. Livermore: “Wendell Phillips.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Schubert Quartette.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>A Question Drawer, Dr. J. M. Buckley.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, W. M. R. French: “The Wit and Wisdom of the Crayon.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Music on the Lake.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Wednesday, August 12.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“DENOMINATIONAL DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. J. M. Buckley: “The Peculiarities of Great Orators.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Denominational Sunday-school Congresses.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Denominational Prayer Meetings.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Mr. W. M. R. French: “A Knack of Drawing.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Thursday, August 13.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“ALUMNI DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Mrs. Mary A. Livermore: “A Dream of To-morrow.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Dedication of Normal Hall: Addresses by B. F. Jacobs, Esq., the Rev. A. E. Dunning, and Dr. J. L. Hurlbut.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Conference, Chautauqua Alumni.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Alumni Reunion, Annual Address: Dr. J. M. Freeman, of New York.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Illuminated Fleet.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Friday, August 14.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“INTERNATIONAL SUNDAY-SCHOOL DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Tenth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Concert by the Choir of the Lafayette Street Presbyterian Church, Buffalo, N. Y.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>International Sunday-school Meeting, B. F. Jacobs, Esq., presiding.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Conference, “Chautauqua Baptist Circle.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Prof. C. C. Case, conductor.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Saturday, August 15.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Anniversary “Chautauqua Baptist Circle,” B. F. Jacobs, Esq., presiding. Address of Salutation by Dr. J. H. Vincent.<br /> - Oration: The Rev. Dr. O. P. Gifford.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Mr. W. M. R. French: “A Chalk Talk.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">3:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, “Schubert Quartette.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table: “St. Paul’s Day.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.<br /> - Lecture: “Sunday-schools in New England,” W. F. Sherwin.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Sunday, August 16.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school and Assembly.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Baccalaureate Sermon, Dr. J. H. Vincent.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon, Dr. Charles F. Deems, of the “Church of the Strangers,” New York City.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Society of Christian Ethics.<br /> - Y. M. C. A. Conference, B. F. Jacobs, Esq.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Even-Song.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Address, B. F. Jacobs, Esq.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Monday, August 17.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Early Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish Work in Cities.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. Charles F. Deems: “A Scotch Verdict.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Public Exposition Chautauqua School of Modern Languages, Methods.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>“Look-up-Legion” Reception to the Rev. Edward Everett Hale.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. A. I. Hobbs, of Louisville, Ky.: “Poverty Amidst Plenty.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Tuesday, August 18.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Early Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish Work in Cities.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Opening “Chautauqua Society of Fine Arts.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Dr. O. P. Fitzgerald, of Nashville, Tenn.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Class Reunions.<br /> - Meeting C. L. S. C. Counselors.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Prof. W. F. Sherwin, conductor.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Camp-Fire.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Wednesday, August 19.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“C. L. S. C. RECOGNITION DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Guards of “Gate” and “Grove;” Misses with Floral Offerings; “Society of S. H. G.;” Glee Club and Choir; Members of ’85.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Chautauqua Procession; Passage of the “Arches.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>“Recognition” in the Hall.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>“Public Recognition” and Commencement Oration, Counselor Edward Everett Hale.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Addresses, Counselor Lyman Abbott and others.<br /> - Presentation of Diplomas.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Prayer Meetings.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Athenian Watch-Fires and “Reception.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Thursday, August 20.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“NATIONAL TEMPERANCE SOCIETY DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish Work in Cities.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Temperance Address, Hon. George W. Bain, of Kentucky.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Temperance Address, Mrs. J. Ellen Foster, of Iowa.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Temperance Address, Prof. J. C. Price, President of Zion Wesley Institute, North Carolina.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, W. I. Marshall—“An Evening in Wonderland, or the Yellowstone,” with Stereopticon Illustrations.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_616" id="Page_616">[616]</a></span></p> - -<h3><i>Friday, August 21.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“ROMAN DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>A Conference on the Study of Latin—Prof. Edgar S. Shumway.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, Francis Murphy.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Readings, Prof. R. L. Cumnock.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Closing Exercises C. S. L.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Round-Table.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Normal Sunday-school Council, Prof. W. F. Sherwin.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Lecture, W. I. Marshall: “Sierra’s Enchanted Valley, or the Yosemite Valley and the Big Trees.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Songs by the Schubert Quartette.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Saturday, August 22.</i></h3> - -<p class="center">“HARVEST AND C. T. C. C. DAY.”</p> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Harvest Service, the Rev. R. S. Holmes, conductor.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>First Rally C. T. C. C. Addresses by Mr. Charles Barnard, of New York, Major Henry E. Alvord, of “Houghton Farm,” and Dr. J. H. Vincent.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Grand Army of the Republic Reunion.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">3:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Concert, Prof. W. F. Sherwin.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Meeting “Chautauqua Society of Fine Arts.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>W. I. Marshall: “Utah and the Mormon Question.”</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 p.m.—</td> - <td>Illuminated Cottages.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Sunday, August 23.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:30 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sunday-school and Assembly.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon, Bishop Cyrus D. Foss, D.D., LL.D., of Minnesota.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon, the Rev. R. B. Welch, D.D., LL.D., of Auburn Theological Seminary.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Society of Christian Ethics.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>Sermon, Dr. B. M. Adams.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9:00 p.m.—</td> - <td>“Vigil,” Class of 1886.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h3><i>Monday, August 24.</i></h3> - -<table class="program" summary="The program on this date"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8:00 a.m.—</td> - <td>“The Farewell.”</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<h2 id="SPECIAL_NOTES">SPECIAL NOTES.</h2> - -<hr class="shorter" /> - -<p>Readers of <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>, particularly if they do not -expect to visit Chautauqua this summer, will find a very useful -and interesting paper in the <i>Assembly Daily Herald</i>. The -<i>Herald</i> is the daily chronicler of the proceedings at Chautauqua -during the session of the Assembly. Its most important -work is to furnish to its readers stenographic reports of all the -leading lectures delivered on the platform. More than seventy -lectures appear in its columns during the nineteen daily issues -of the <i>Herald</i>. Among the lectures of the present season are -to be several on Italy. The Tourists Ideal Foreign Tour will -be mainly located in Italy. Now, for those who expect to read -the C. L. S. C. course of 1885-86 this will be particularly interesting -and profitable, as a portion of the course is to be on Italy -and its life. A feature to which we would particularly call -the attention of readers of the C. L. S. C. is the reports of -special meetings and special classes, together with the daily reports -of C. L. S. C. news. Much of the best of the C. L. S. C. -work and planning is done at the Assembly, so that no one -thoroughly interested in the C. L. S. C. can keep abreast of -the news of this institution without the <i>Herald</i>. The first issue -of Volume X. of the <i>Assembly Herald</i> will be on August 1st, and -it will appear daily, Sundays excepted, in nineteen numbers. -Its price is $1.00 for the season, or in clubs of five or more, 90 -cents. Subscribers to <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> will find it to their -advantage to accept our combination offer until August 1st of -<span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> and <i>Assembly Daily Herald</i> for $2.25.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Through the help of the C. L. S. C. Loan Library, a number -of students who would otherwise have been obliged to give up -their C. L. S. C. studies entirely, have been enabled to continue -the course during the past year. These books (about half a -dozen sets) will be for sale at reduced rates, at the Plainfield -office after July 1st.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Another Chautauqua Idea of great practical importance is -out. It has been devised to meet the demand for competent -training in phonography. Within the last ten years shorthand -writers of ability have become necessary to business offices, -courts and editorial rooms. For those young men and women -who would fit themselves for the numerous positions open to -expert phonographers, the “Chautauqua University” has -opened a “College of Phonography.” It is under the direction -of W. D. Bridge, A.M., a reporter of nearly thirty years’ -experience, who has associated with him F. G. Morris, A.M., -one of the most successful and accomplished phonographic -teachers in the country. For circulars of the College of Phonography, -address the registrar, R. S. Holmes, A.M., Plainfield, -New Jersey.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>We are in receipt of the finely illustrated catalogues of the -church furnishers, Messrs. J. & R. Lamb, of New York City. -The designs which they are offering in Metal Work, Stained -Glass, Church Upholstery and Church Embroideries are all of -them beautiful, many of them unique and original. Churches -that are contemplating refurnishing, or are building, can not do -better than to send for the Messrs. Lamb’s catalogue. They -will get good ideas, if nothing else.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>The Chautauquans of Minnesota and the Northwest propose -to hold this summer a Chautauqua Assembly of the Northwest. -The first step in furtherance of this plan has been taken by -the circles of St. Paul and Minneapolis, best situated as they -are for united action, and strong in the presence of sixteen circles. -On the 15th day of May, an association was formed by -representatives from ten of the sixteen circles, to be known as -the Central Chautauqua Committee.</p> - -<p>The first Assembly will be held at the “Enchanted Island,” -a beautiful place in Lake Minnetonka, Hennepin County, -Minn., on June 26th. Reduced rates have been obtained on -all railroads leading into Minneapolis and St. Paul. Circulars -containing programs and full particulars will be sent to all applicants. -Let all Chautauquans of the Northwest be present at -the “Enchanted Island.” Address E. T. Brandeburg, Secretary, -Room 14, Webb Block, Minneapolis, Minn.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Reports from the following local circles have been received -at this office too late for the July issue of <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span>: -Osceola, Iowa; “Thornapple,” Vermontville, Michigan; -“Beta,” Milwaukee, Wis.; “Aryan,” Hope Valley, R. I.; -“Vincent,” Needham, Mass.; Jewett City, Conn.; “Springhill,” -Morris Cross Roads, Pa.; “King Philip,” Medfield, -Mass.; West Winsted, Conn.; Prattsburgh, N. Y.; “The -Athenian,” Lanark, Ill.; “Longfellow,” Cambridge, Mass.; -“Pansy Quartette,” Oshtemo, Mich.; Brantford, Ontario, Canada. -Reports from local circles in the following towns have been -forwarded to <span class="smcap">The Chautauquan</span> from Plainfield, but too late -for the July issue: Hope, R. I.; Luverne, Minn.; Rushville, Ill.; -Wellington, South Africa; Monroe, Iowa; Jonesville, Mich.; -Jacksonville, Ill.; Billerica, Mass.; Charlestown, Mass.; Wabash, -Ind.; Amherst, N. H.; Brookville, Ind.; Madison, Conn.; -Minneapolis, Minn., from “Highland Park,” “Alden” and -“Vincent” circles.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="tnote"> - -<p class="center"><b>Transcriber’s Notes:</b></p> - -<p>Obvious punctuation errors repaired.</p> - -<p>Page 566, “differents” changed to “different” (These facts from different states)</p> - -<p>Page 572, “Onalashka” changed to “Unalashka” (the island of Kagamil, near Unalashka)</p> - -<p>Page 576, “Helena” changed to “Helens” (an outburst of Mt. St. Helens)</p> - -<p>Page 581, duplicate word “by” removed (mercury may be frozen by this means)</p> - -<p>Page 584, “in honor of the god of the gods of the under world” <i>may</i> be a misprint -for “in honor of the god of the under world” or “in honor of the gods of the under world”, -but has been left as printed: it’s not obvious which alternative might be correct, or indeed -whether it’s an error at all.</p> - -<p>Page 594, “Shakespere” changed to “Shakspere” (souvenir of the Shakspere evening)</p> - -<p>Page 599, “eighteen” changed to “nineteen” (There are in <span class="smcap">Nebraska</span> nineteen circles of the C. L. S. C.)</p> - -<p>Page 605, “Monoan” changed to “Monona” (Assembly at Monona Lake, Madison, Wisconsin)</p> - -<p>Page 609, “Gautemala” changed to “Guatemala” (the stars and stripes trot along after Guatemala)</p> - -</div> - - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, -No. 10, by The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1885 *** - -***** This file should be named 55444-h.htm or 55444-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/4/4/55444/ - -Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/55444-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/55444-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4c805de..0000000 --- a/old/55444-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null |
